Voice Sense QWERTY User Manual

Voice Sense QWERTY User Manual
Voice Sense
QWERTY
User Manual
ENGLISH MANUAL
For Software Version 8.1
(April, 2014)
When there are any manual updates,
the readme files or appendices
will be added to the manual CD
and website.
HIMS International 139-­‐9, Gajung-­‐dong, Yuseong-­‐gu, Daejeon, Korea 305-­‐350 Phone: +82-­‐42-­‐864-­‐4460 Fax: +82-­‐42-­‐864-­‐4462 Email: [email protected] Website: www.himsintl.com 1
Safety Precautions
For your safety and protection of the Voice Sense QWERTY, please read
and abide by the following safety precautions.
1. The input voltage of the AC adapter is 100V - 240V, and the output
is DC 5V / 2A.
2. When the Voice Sense QWERTY is shipped, the battery may be
packaged separate from the unit to avoid damage. When you use
the Voice Sense for the first time, you may need to open the
package, remove the battery, and insert it into the battery slot On
the underside of the unit. (see section 1, introduction, for more
details on inserting the battery.) It is possible that the dealer or
distributor from whom you purchased the Voice Sense QWERTY
has already done this for you. The battery may not be fully charged
when it is shipped. Before you use the Voice Sense QWERTY, you
should ensure the battery is fully charged.
3. When you use the Voice Sense QWERTY with the battery for the
first time, the battery status may not be displayed accurately. To
avoid this, leave the Voice Sense QWERTY connected to the AC
adapter for about six hours with the unit turned on. If you want to
use the Voice Sense QWERTY immediately, you may use it while it
is charging.
4. If you want or need to remove the battery from the unit, power the
unit off, and then remove the battery. If the unit is connected to AC
power, before re-inserting the battery in to the unit, make certain
that the power is off.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect
type. Please make certain to use only battery packs produced
specifically for the Voice Sense QWERTY by HIMS. Please dispose
of used batteries according to the instructions.
2
5. When you are using the Voice Sense QWERTY on battery power,
the status of the remaining battery power is announced when the
battery charge is low. When the battery’s charge falls below 15
percent, connect the AC adapter to the unit for recharging. If the
remaining battery charge drops to five percent, and the unit is not
connected to the AC adapter, the Voice Sense QWERTY shuts
down one minute after the announcement of the battery’s status.
The amount of battery life per charge varies depending on the
options you have set and the number and type of tasks you are
running.
6. Your Voice Sense QWERTY needs to be handled with care. The
Voice Sense QWERTY is a very delicate machine. Please handle
the unit in a proper, careful manner. The Voice Sense QWERTY is
very sensitive to dust. Make sure to keep the Voice Sense
QWERTY away from dusty environments.
7. You should register your Voice Sense QWERTY in order to ensure
further maintenance, service, and upgrade information. Please visit
www.hims-inc.com, to register your information. If you have any
trouble when registering your information, please contact the dealer
from whom you purchased your Voice Sense QWERTY for help.
8. Do not take apart the Voice Sense QWERTY yourself. Do not have
anyone else who is not authorized by HIMS take apart the Voice
Sense QWERTY. If an unqualified person disassembles the unit,
serious damage may occur to the Voice Sense QWERTY. If an
unauthorized person disassembles the Voice Sense QWERTY, the
unit is excluded from any free maintenance, and the warranty
becomes void. If any liquid or external force damages the unit, it
may also be excluded from free maintenance, even if the damage
occurs during the warranty period.
3
9. Do not leave your Voice Sense QWERTY in closed or high
temperature environments such as inside a car on a hot summer
day, as the battery attached to the Voice Sense QWERTY may be
damaged or catch fire. Please do not let your Voice Sense
QWERTY remain in such environments for long periods of time.
10.Thank you for using the Voice Sense QWERTY. We value any
comments or suggestions you have for our product. If you have any
complaints or suggestions, please provide us with your comments
on our website. We will improve our product based on your
comments and suggestions.
11.To prevent possible damage to your hearing, do not listen to audio
at high volume levels for long periods.
12.This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions.
1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment can generate, use and radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
4
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set
forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be
installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between
the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
5
Congratulations on the purchase of your Voice Sense QWERTY! The Voice
Sense QWERTY is capable of doing everything that an ordinary PDA can
do, and more – all without the need for a screen!
I. Your Voice Sense QWERTY packing box should contain the
following items:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Voice Sense QWERTY
Battery
Carrying Case
AC adapter
USB Cable
Earbuds
Documentation CD
Braille Commands Summary
II. How to use this manual
Before using the Voice Sense QWERTY, you should read the entire
manual to familiarize yourself with the functions of the Voice Sense
QWERTY. The Voice Sense QWERTY contains many programs with a
variety of functions, thus, reading the entire manual will allow you to
operate the unit to its fullest potential.
In this manual you will see references to hot keys and shortcut keys. These
keys refer to ways to access menus and functions quickly by using a
combination of keystrokes. Please note that not all hot keys and shortcut
keys will work from every location on the Voice Sense QWERTY. Some hot
keys and shortcut keys are program specific, thus, they require that you be
within a specific program for them to work.
This user manual notes how to press hot keys and shortcut keys in the
following manner: Keys that are to be pressed at the same time are
6
separated by a – (dash). When you see “FN-b”, this means that you should
press Function and the letter b simultaneously.
If you are unable to find a solution to a problem within the manual, or if you
need assistance with the Voice Sense QWERTY, please email us at
[email protected] You may also visit us on the web at www.himsinc.com; or, you can call us at 512-837-2000.
7
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 30 1.1 What is the Voice Sense QWERTY? ............................................................................ 30 1.2 Hardware ........................................................................................................................ 31 1.2.1 The Top Panel .................................................................................................................. 31 1.2.2 The Right Panel ............................................................................................................... 32 1.2.3 The Left Panel ................................................................................................................. 33 1.2.4 The Rear Panel ................................................................................................................ 33 1.2.5 The Front Panel ............................................................................................................... 34 1.3 Hardware Specifications .................................................................................................. 35 1.4 Memory on the Voice Sense QWERTY ............................................................................. 35 2. BASIC FUNCTIONS OF THE VOICE SENSE QWERTY ............................................................. 36 2.1 How to Enter Commands ................................................................................................ 36 2.1.1 Basic Alerts and Messages ............................................................................................... 36 2.2 Menu Concepts ........................................................................................................... 37 2.2.1 Control Symbols ........................................................................................................ 40 2.3 Using Function ........................................................................................................... 43 2.4 The AC Power Supply and the Battery Pack .......................................................... 44 2.5 Basic Explanation of Disks, folders, and files ....................................................... 46 2.6 Controlling the Volume, Speed, and Pitch of the TTS .......................................... 46 2.7 Using Speech and Braille .......................................................................................... 47 2.8 Entering Text ............................................................................................................... 47 8
2.8.1 Inputting/searching for Control characters ........................................................ 48 2.9 Multi Tasking ............................................................................................................... 49 2.10 Switching Media Modes .......................................................................................... 50 2.11 Switching Key lock .................................................................................................. 51 2.12 Print Spool ................................................................................................................. 51 2.13 One-Handed Mode ................................................................................................... 52 2.14 Using Typing Mode .................................................................................................. 53 2.15 Common Hotkeys ..................................................................................................... 53 2.16 Quick Launch Commands ...................................................................................... 55 3. CUSTOMIZING YOUR NOTETAKER ........................................................................................... 57 3.1 Set Time and Date ...................................................................................................... 57 3.2 Setup Internet ............................................................................................................. 59 3.2.1 LAN Setup .................................................................................................................... 59 3.2.2 Setup Wireless LAN .................................................................................................. 60 3.2.3 Bluetooth DUN setup ................................................................................................ 63 3.2.4 ADSL Setup ................................................................................................................. 64 3.3 Bluetooth Manager ......................................................................................................... 65 3.3.1 Bluetooth Device List ....................................................................................................... 66 3.3.2 Bluetooth Service List ...................................................................................................... 68 3.3.3 Hot keys in Bluetooth Manager ....................................................................................... 84 3.4 Pronunciation Dictionary .......................................................................................... 84 3.5 Menu manager ............................................................................................................ 86 3.6 Backup/Restore Personalized settings ................................................................... 87 9
3.7 Change device Name ....................................................................................................... 89 3.8 Global Options ................................................................................................................ 89 3.8.1 Global Options Overview ................................................................................................. 90 3.8.2 Global Options in Detail ................................................................................................... 92 4. FILE MANAGER ......................................................................................................................... 108 4.1 Overview .................................................................................................................... 108 4.1.1 Navigating the File List ........................................................................................... 109 4.1.2 Selecting folders and files ..................................................................................... 109 4.1.3 Cancel / Exit .............................................................................................................. 110 4.2 Working with Files and Folders ............................................................................. 110 4.2.1 Selecting drives ....................................................................................................... 110 4.2.2 Entering and Exiting Folders ................................................................................ 111 4.2.3 Opening a File ........................................................................................................... 111 4.2.4 Send To ...................................................................................................................... 113 4.2.5 Copy / Move ............................................................................................................... 113 4.2.6 Delete Files or Folders ........................................................................................... 114 4.2.7 Rename ...................................................................................................................... 114 4.2.8 New Document ......................................................................................................... 115 4.2.9 New Folder ................................................................................................................. 115 4.2.10 File Conversion ...................................................................................................... 115 4.2.11 Select All .................................................................................................................. 116 4.2.12 Search for File ........................................................................................................ 117 4.2.13 Sort Files .................................................................................................................. 118 10
4.2.14 Set File Info ............................................................................................................. 118 4.2.15 Display only Files of Type ................................................................................... 119 4.2.16 Zip .............................................................................................................................. 119 4.2.17 Unzip ......................................................................................................................... 120 4.2.18 Information .............................................................................................................. 120 4.2.19 Share Folder On Network .................................................................................... 121 4.2.20 Set Local Security ................................................................................................. 122 4.2.21 EML Viewer ............................................................................................................. 122 4.3 Using the Address Window .................................................................................... 123 4.3.1 Editing ........................................................................................................................ 124 4.3.2 Typing a Path / File Name ...................................................................................... 124 4.3.3 Opening the History List ........................................................................................ 124 4.4 Network and sharing ................................................................................................ 125 4.4.1 Search for shared computers and add to the network list. .......................... 125 4.4.2 Remove Remote folder ........................................................................................... 127 4.5 Hot Keys in the "File Manager" .............................................................................. 128 5. WORD PROCESSOR ................................................................................................................ 129 5.1 File Menu ................................................................................................................... 129 5.1.1 New .............................................................................................................................. 130 5.1.2 Open ............................................................................................................................ 130 5.1.3 Save ............................................................................................................................. 132 5.1.4 Save As ...................................................................................................................... 132 5.1.5 Saving password Protected Files ........................................................................ 133 11
5.1.6 Close Current Document ....................................................................................... 134 5.1.7 Print ............................................................................................................................. 135 5.1.8 Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 5.1.9 Exit ............................................................................................................................... 140 5.2 Edit Menu ................................................................................................................... 141 5.2.1 Start Selection .......................................................................................................... 141 5.2.2 Copy ............................................................................................................................ 141 5.2.3 Cut ............................................................................................................................... 142 5.2.4 Paste ........................................................................................................................... 142 5.2.5 Delete .......................................................................................................................... 142 5.2.6 Delete Blank Lines ................................................................................................... 143 5.2.7 Add to Clipboard ...................................................................................................... 143 5.2.8 Clear Clipboard ........................................................................................................ 143 5.2.9 Select All .................................................................................................................... 143 5.2.10 Insert from File ....................................................................................................... 144 5.2.11 Insert Date ............................................................................................................... 144 5.2.12 Insert Time ............................................................................................................... 144 5.2.13 Toggling Insert and Overwrite Modes .............................................................. 145 5.2.14 Check Spelling ....................................................................................................... 145 5.2.15 Edit Language attribute ....................................................................................... 149 5.2.16 Font Setting ............................................................................................................. 149 5.3 Go to Menu ................................................................................................................ 150 5.3.1 Find .............................................................................................................................. 150 12
5.3.2 Find Again ................................................................................................................. 152 5.3.3 Replace ....................................................................................................................... 152 5.3.4 Go to Location .......................................................................................................... 153 5.3.5 Go to Previous Page ............................................................................................... 154 5.3.6 Go to Next Page ....................................................................................................... 155 5.3.7 Set Mark ..................................................................................................................... 155 5.3.8 Go to Mark ................................................................................................................. 156 5.3.9 Go to Previous Document ..................................................................................... 156 5.3.10 Go to Next Document ........................................................................................... 156 5.4 Read Menu ................................................................................................................. 156 5.4.1 Read Selected Text .................................................................................................. 157 5.4.2 Read Beginning of Selected Text ........................................................................ 157 5.4.3 Read from beginning to cursor ............................................................................ 157 5.4.4 Read from Cursor to End ....................................................................................... 158 5.4.5 Auto Scroll ................................................................................................................. 158 5.4.6 Read Current Sentence .......................................................................................... 159 5.4.7 Read Current Line .................................................................................................... 159 5.4.8 Read Current Word .................................................................................................. 159 5.4.9 Read Current Character ......................................................................................... 159 5.4.10 Read Status ............................................................................................................. 159 5.4.11 Read Selected Text in Current Language ........................................................ 160 5.5 Layout ........................................................................................................................ 160 5.5.1 Braille Document Layout ....................................................................................... 160 13
5.5.2 Print Document Layout .......................................................................................... 162 5.5.3 Braille Paragraph Layout ....................................................................................... 163 5.5.4 Print Paragraph Layout .......................................................................................... 164 5.6 Nemeth Code Entry .................................................................................................. 166 5.7 Reading PowerPoint Files ....................................................................................... 172 5.8 Keys for Text Scrolling and Deleting .................................................................... 173 5.9 Cursor Location ........................................................................................................ 174 5.10 Hot keys in the Word Processor: ......................................................................... 174 6. E-MAIL ........................................................................................................................................... 177 6.1 Executing E-mail and E-mail Account management .......................................... 178 6.1.1 Executing e-mail ...................................................................................................... 179 6.1.2 Managing e-mail account information ................................................................ 180 6.2 Receiving and Sending E-mail ............................................................................... 187 6.2.1 Receiving E-mail ...................................................................................................... 187 6.2.2 Move to account or mail box ........................................................................................ 189 6.2.2 Reading Received E-mail Messages ................................................................... 189 6.2.3 Writing e-mail ............................................................................................................ 194 6.3 Advanced E-mail features ....................................................................................... 200 6.3.1 Deleting E-mail ......................................................................................................... 200 6.3.2 Reply And Reply All to a Received E-Mail. ........................................................ 201 6.3.3 Forwarding a Received E-Mail Message ............................................................ 203 6.3.4 Saving a Received E-mail as Document. ........................................................... 204 6.3.5 Printing E-Mail Messages ...................................................................................... 205 14
6.4 Additional features of E-mail .................................................................................. 205 6.4.1 Find .............................................................................................................................. 206 6.4.2 Find Again ................................................................................................................. 207 6.4.3 Move to Next Unread Message ............................................................................. 207 6.4.4 Copy or Move to Mailbox ....................................................................................... 208 6.5 Using the Tools Menu .............................................................................................. 211 6.5.1 Set Path ...................................................................................................................... 211 6.5.2 Set Options ................................................................................................................ 214 6.5.3 Spam Settings .......................................................................................................... 215 6.6. Hot Keys for E-Mail ................................................................................................. 219 6.6.1 Hot Keys That Are Used in the Inbox ................................................................. 219 6.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-­‐Mail Including Reply, Forward, and Saving to Outbox ............. 220 6.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading/writing E-Mail Messages ............................................... 220 7. MEDIA ............................................................................................................................................ 222 7.1 Media Player ................................................................................................................. 222 7.1.1 Using the media buttons ............................................................................................... 222 7.1.2 Keyboard and Extended Keys ........................................................................................ 225 7.1.3 How to Use the Media Player Menu ............................................................................. 229 7.1.4 Hot Keys in the Media Player ......................................................................................... 249 7.2 FM Radio ....................................................................................................................... 251 7.2.1 Listening to FM Radio via the internal speakers ............................................................ 252 7.2.2 Frequency control .......................................................................................................... 253 7.2.3 Adding and navigating presets ...................................................................................... 254 15
7.2.4 Recording from the FM Radio ........................................................................................ 255 7.2.5 Additional features ........................................................................................................ 257 7.2.6 Hot Keys in the FM Radio .............................................................................................. 258 7.3 DAISY Player ................................................................................................................. 259 7.3.1 Registering with Digital Book service providers ............................................................ 259 7.3.2 Executing the DAISY Player ............................................................................................ 263 7.3.3 Components of the DAISY Player ................................................................................... 264 7.3.4 File ................................................................................................................................. 265 7.3.5 Document Navigation .................................................................................................... 269 7.3.6 Mark .............................................................................................................................. 272 7.3.7 Heading .......................................................................................................................... 274 7.3.8 Hot Keys in the DAISY Player ......................................................................................... 277 8. ORGANIZER ................................................................................................................................... 280 8.1 Address Manager .......................................................................................................... 280 8.1.1 What is the "Address Manager"? .................................................................................. 280 8.1.2 Starting the "Address Manager" .................................................................................... 281 8.1.3 Using "Add Address" ...................................................................................................... 281 8.1.4 Searching For an Address .............................................................................................. 283 8.1.5 Backing up and restoring the address list ...................................................................... 285 8.1.6 Importing and Exporting CSV ......................................................................................... 287 8.1.7 Commands in the Records Found List ........................................................................... 292 8.1.8 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook ......................................................................... 295 8.1.9 Hot Keys in the "Address Manager" .............................................................................. 295 16
8.2 Schedule Manager ........................................................................................................ 296 8.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 296 8.2.2 Starting "Schedule Manager" ........................................................................................ 297 8.2.3 Setting time and date .................................................................................................... 297 8.2.4 Adding a Schedule ......................................................................................................... 299 8.2.5 Search Schedule ............................................................................................................. 305 8.2.6 Modify Schedule ............................................................................................................ 306 8.2.7 Deleting a Schedule ....................................................................................................... 307 8.2.8 Printing a Schedule ........................................................................................................ 308 8.2.9 Saving Appointments as a File ....................................................................................... 308 8.2.10 Backing Up and Restoring Your Appointments ............................................................ 308 8.2.11 Setting Alarm Options ................................................................................................. 310 8.2.12 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook ....................................................................... 312 8.2.13 Hot Keys for the Schedule Manager ............................................................................ 312 8.3 Database Manager ........................................................................................................ 314 8.3.1 Table Manager ............................................................................................................... 316 8.3.2 Add Record .................................................................................................................... 320 8.3.3 Search Records .............................................................................................................. 321 8.3.4 List of Records Found .................................................................................................... 323 8.3.5 Setting Backup Options ................................................................................................. 323 8.3.6 Backup Database ........................................................................................................... 324 8.3.7 Restore Database .......................................................................................................... 324 8.3.8 Hot Keys for "Database Manager" ................................................................................. 325 17
9. WEB TOOLS ................................................................................................................................ 327 9.1 Web Browser ................................................................................................................ 327 9.1.1 File ................................................................................................................................. 327 9.1.2 Read ............................................................................................................................... 330 9.1.3 Edit ................................................................................................................................. 331 9.1.4 Go To ............................................................................................................................. 333 9.1.5 Favorites ........................................................................................................................ 339 9.1.6 Options .......................................................................................................................... 341 9.1.7 Read Page ...................................................................................................................... 344 9.1.8 Hot keys in the "Web Browser" ..................................................................................... 349 9.1.9 What the "Web Browser" Does Not Support ................................................................ 352 9.2 Quick Browser ............................................................................................................... 352 9.2.1 File menu ....................................................................................................................... 353 9.2.2 Read menu ..................................................................................................................... 354 9.2.3 Edit ................................................................................................................................. 355 9.2.4 Go To ............................................................................................................................. 357 9.2.5 Favorites ........................................................................................................................ 362 9.2.6 Page Navigation ............................................................................................................. 365 9.2.7 Hot keys in the "Quick Browser" ................................................................................... 368 9.2.8 What the "Quick Browser" Does Not Support ............................................................... 370 9.3 Google Search .......................................................................................................... 370 9.3.1 The Search Dialog ................................................................................................... 371 9.3.2 The Results Dialog .................................................................................................. 371 18
9.4 RSS Reader .................................................................................................................... 372 9.4.1 RSS Main Window ................................................................................................... 372 9.4.2 The File Menu ........................................................................................................... 373 9.4.3 The Category Menu ................................................................................................. 376 9.4.4 The Feed Menu ......................................................................................................... 378 9.4.5 Options ....................................................................................................................... 381 9.4.6 Hot Keys in RSS ....................................................................................................... 382 10. SOCIAL NETWORKING ........................................................................................................ 383 10.1 Available Social Networking services ................................................................. 383 10.2 Twitter ...................................................................................................................... 384 10.2.1 Twitter Terminology .............................................................................................. 384 10.2.2 Accessing "Twitter" .............................................................................................. 385 10.2.3 Main "Twitter" dialog ............................................................................................ 387 10.2.4 Timeline .................................................................................................................... 388 10.2.5. Managing "Tweets" .............................................................................................. 390 10.2.6. Managing Followers and following .................................................................. 394 10.2.7. Using Direct Messages ....................................................................................... 396 10.2.8. Using Search functions ...................................................................................... 398 10.2.9. Additional Functions ........................................................................................... 402 10.2.10 Managing Lists ..................................................................................................... 404 10.3 Google talk .............................................................................................................. 408 10.3.1 Before you launch Google Talk ......................................................................... 408 10.3.2 Managing Contacts ............................................................................................... 410 19
10.3.3 Start Chat ................................................................................................................. 414 10.3.4 Start Voice Chat ..................................................................................................... 415 10.3.5 Sending/Receiveing a file .................................................................................... 416 10.3.6 Other functions ...................................................................................................... 417 10.3.7 Setup Options ......................................................................................................... 420 10.4 Sense Chat .............................................................................................................. 424 10.4.1 Connecting the Notetakers ................................................................................. 425 10.4.2 Using the Chat Window ....................................................................................... 426 10.4.3 The Sense Chat File Menu ................................................................................... 426 10.4.4 Sense Chat Options .............................................................................................. 427 10.5 Hot Keys in Social Networking ............................................................................ 428 10.5.1 Twitter ....................................................................................................................... 428 10.5.2 Google talk .............................................................................................................. 429 10.5.3 Sense Chat .............................................................................................................. 431 11. EXTRAS ...................................................................................................................................... 433 11.1 Sense Dictionary .................................................................................................... 433 11.2 BookShare Download ............................................................................................ 433 11.2.1 What is BookShare? ............................................................................................. 433 11.2.2 Executing BookShare Download ....................................................................... 434 11.2.3 The main BookShare download Dialog ........................................................... 435 11.2.4 Searching for Books ............................................................................................. 436 11.2.5 Searching for periodicals .................................................................................... 438 11.2.6 Searching History .................................................................................................. 439 20
11.2.7 Option Settings ...................................................................................................... 439 11.3 Google Maps ........................................................................................................... 441 11.3.1. What is “Google Maps”? .................................................................................... 441 11.3.2. Pairing a GPS Receiver ....................................................................................... 442 11.3.3. Executing “Google Maps” .................................................................................. 442 11.4 Dropbox ...................................................................................................................... 457 11.4.1 The File Menu ......................................................................................................... 458 11.4.2 The Edit Menu ......................................................................................................... 459 11.4.3 Options ..................................................................................................................... 464 11.4.4 Hot Keys in Dropbox ............................................................................................ 464 11.5 Online DAISY ............................................................................................................... 465 12. GAMES .......................................................................................................................................... 467 12.1 Sense Dice game ......................................................................................................... 467 12.1.1 Executing the Dice Game ............................................................................................. 467 12.1.2 How it works ................................................................................................................ 467 12.2 Sense Brain Game ....................................................................................................... 468 12.2.1 Executing the Sense Brain Game ................................................................................. 468 12.2.2 Game menu ................................................................................................................. 468 12.2.3 Playing a Game ............................................................................................................ 469 12.2.4 Memory game ............................................................................................................. 469 12.2.5 Reverse game .............................................................................................................. 469 12.2.6 Chase a criminal ........................................................................................................... 470 12.2.7 Multiplication table ..................................................................................................... 470 21
12.2.8 View ranking ................................................................................................................ 471 13. UTILITIES ................................................................................................................................... 473 13.1 Calculator ................................................................................................................ 473 13.1.1 General Functions ................................................................................................. 474 13.1.2 Fractional arithmetic .................................................................................................. 475 13.1.4 Sine Functions ....................................................................................................... 479 13.1.5 Cosine Functions .................................................................................................. 479 13.1.6 Tangent Functions ................................................................................................ 479 13.1.7 Logarithm Functions ............................................................................................ 480 13.1.8 Convert Unit ............................................................................................................ 480 13.1.9 Nemeth Braille code ................................................................................................... 481 13.1.10 Copy to Clipboard ............................................................................................... 482 13.1.11 Return formula .......................................................................................................... 483 13.1.12 Option Settings .................................................................................................... 483 13.1.13 Exit .......................................................................................................................... 484 13.1.14 Sample Math Calculations ................................................................................ 484 13.2 Display Compass Heading .................................................................................... 487 13.2.1 Options of gyrocompass ..................................................................................... 488 13.3 Display Time and Date ........................................................................................... 488 13.4 Wake up alarm ........................................................................................................ 489 13.4.1 Set Time ................................................................................................................... 489 13.4.2 Alarm Sound ........................................................................................................... 489 13.4.3 Term .......................................................................................................................... 490 22
13.4.4 Ringing Duration .................................................................................................... 490 13.4.5 Repeat Interval ....................................................................................................... 490 13.4.6 Wake up Call Times .............................................................................................. 490 13.4.7 Confirm/Cancel ...................................................................................................... 491 13.5 Calendar ................................................................................................................... 491 13.5.1 Using the Calendar ................................................................................................ 491 13.6 Stopwatch ................................................................................................................ 492 13.7 Terminal for Screen reader ................................................................................... 493 13.7.1 Connecting to a Screen reader .......................................................................... 494 13.7.2 Terminal Clipboard ................................................................................................ 502 13.8 Display Network Status ......................................................................................... 504 13.9 Display Power Status ............................................................................................ 504 13.10 Format .................................................................................................................... 505 13.10.1 Formatting the disk ............................................................................................. 505 13.11 Set Sleep Timer .................................................................................................... 506 13.12 Upgrade Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware ....................................................... 506 13.12.1 Upgrading the Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware Using the Internet ...... 507 13.12.2 Upgrading the Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware from a Disk .................. 508 13.13 Hot keys for Utilities ............................................................................................ 509 14. USING THE HELP MENU ...................................................................................................... 512 15. USING ACTIVESYNC ............................................................................................................. 514 15.1 What is ActiveSync? .............................................................................................. 514 15.2 Connecting the Voice Sense QWERTY to a PC ................................................. 514 23
15.3 Setting up the Voice Sense QWERTY in the ActiveSync Program ................ 515 15.4 Transferring Files to the Voice Sense QWERTY Via ActiveSync ................... 516 16. COMMAND SUMMARY ......................................................................................................... 517 16.1 Common Combination Keys ................................................................................ 517 16.2 Quick Launch Commands .................................................................................... 519 16.3 File Manager ............................................................................................................ 520 16.3.1 Navigation keys for the file list and menu list ................................................ 520 16.3.2 Navigation Keys for the File List ....................................................................... 520 16.3.3 Keys for Selecting Files and Folders ............................................................... 521 16.3.4 Hot Keys for Menu Commands .......................................................................... 521 16.3.5 EML Viewer ............................................................................................................. 522 16.4 Word Processor ...................................................................................................... 522 16.4.1 Hot Keys for Menu Commands .......................................................................... 522 16.4.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys ...................................................................................... 524 16.5 E-mail ....................................................................................................................... 525 16.5.1 Hot keys that are used in the inbox .................................................................. 525 16.5.2 Hot keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward, and Save in the
Mail Outbox ......................................................................................................................... 526 16.5.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mails or Writing an E-Mail Message .................... 526 16.6 Media ........................................................................................................................ 527 16.6.1 Media Player ........................................................................................................... 527 16.6.2 FM radio ................................................................................................................... 530 16.6.3 Daisy Player ............................................................................................................ 530 24
16.7 Organizer ................................................................................................................. 532 16.7.1 Address Manager .................................................................................................. 532 16.7.2 Schedule Manager ................................................................................................. 533 16.7.3 Database Manager ................................................................................................. 534 16.8 Web tools ................................................................................................................. 535 16.8.1 Web Browser .......................................................................................................... 535 16.8.2 Quick browser ........................................................................................................ 537 16.8.3 Google Search ........................................................................................................ 538 16.8.4 RSS reader .............................................................................................................. 539 16.9 Social Networking .................................................................................................. 539 16.9.1 Twitter ....................................................................................................................... 539 16.9.2 Google talk .............................................................................................................. 541 16.9.3 Sense Chat .............................................................................................................. 543 16.10 Extras ..................................................................................................................... 543 16.10.1 BookShare Download ......................................................................................... 543 16.10.2 Google Maps ......................................................................................................... 544 16.10.3 Drop box ................................................................................................................ 544 16.11 Games .................................................................................................................... 545 16.11.1 Sense Dice Game ................................................................................................ 545 16.11.2 Sense Brain Game .............................................................................................. 545 16.12 Utilities ................................................................................................................... 545 16.12.1 Calculator .............................................................................................................. 545 16.12.2 Checking Date and Time ................................................................................... 547 25
16.12.3 Calendar ................................................................................................................. 547 16.12.4 Stopwatch ............................................................................................................. 547 16.12.5 Display network status ...................................................................................... 548 16.12.6 Terminal for Screen reader ............................................................................... 548 16.12.7 Display power status .......................................................................................... 548 16.12.8 Format .................................................................................................................... 548 16.12.9 Sleep Timer ........................................................................................................... 548 16.12.10 Upgrading the Voice Sense Firmware ......................................................... 548 16.13 Settings .................................................................................................................. 548 16.13.1 Setting time and date ......................................................................................... 549 16.13.2 Bluetooth Manager .............................................................................................. 549 16.13.3 Pronunciation dictionary ................................................................................... 550 16.13.4 Backup/Restore personalized settings .......................................................... 550 17. COMMAND SUMMARY FOR USB KEYBOARDS ........................................................ 551 17.1 Common Combination Keys ................................................................................ 551 17.2 Quick Launch Commands .................................................................................... 553 17.3 File Manager ............................................................................................................ 554 17.3.1 Navigation keys for the file list and menu list ................................................ 554 17.3.2 Navigation Keys for the File List ....................................................................... 554 17.3.3 Keys for Selecting Files and Folders ............................................................... 555 17.3.4 Hot Keys for Menu Commands .......................................................................... 555 17.3.5 EML Viewer ............................................................................................................. 556 17.4 Word Processor ...................................................................................................... 556 26
17.4.1 Hot Keys for Menu Commands .......................................................................... 556 17.4.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys ...................................................................................... 558 17.5 E-mail ....................................................................................................................... 559 17.5.1 Hot keys that are used in the inbox .................................................................. 559 17.5.2 Hot keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward, and Save in the
Mail Outbox ......................................................................................................................... 560 17.5.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mails or Writing an E-Mail Message .................... 560 17.6 Media ........................................................................................................................ 561 17.6.1 Media Player ........................................................................................................... 561 17.6.2 FM radio ................................................................................................................... 564 17.6.3 Daisy Player ............................................................................................................ 564 17.7 Organizer ................................................................................................................. 566 17.7.1 Address Manager .................................................................................................. 566 17.7.2 Schedule Manager ................................................................................................. 567 17.7.3 Database Manager ................................................................................................. 568 17.8 Web tools ................................................................................................................. 569 17.8.1 Web Browser .......................................................................................................... 569 17.8.2 Quick browser ........................................................................................................ 571 17.8.3 Google Search ........................................................................................................ 572 17.8.4 RSS reader .............................................................................................................. 573 17.9 Social Networking .................................................................................................. 573 17.9.1 Twitter ....................................................................................................................... 573 17.9.2 Google talk .............................................................................................................. 575 27
17.9.3 Sense Chat .............................................................................................................. 577 17.10 Extras ..................................................................................................................... 577 17.10.1 BookShare Download ......................................................................................... 577 17.10.2 Google Maps ......................................................................................................... 578 17.10.3 Drop box ................................................................................................................ 578 17.11 Games .................................................................................................................... 579 17.11.1 Sense Dice Game ................................................................................................ 579 17.11.2 Sense Brain Game .............................................................................................. 579 17.12 Utilities ................................................................................................................... 579 17.12.1 Calculator .............................................................................................................. 579 17.12.2 Checking Date and Time ................................................................................... 581 17.12.3 Calendar ................................................................................................................. 581 17.12.4 Stopwatch ............................................................................................................. 581 17.12.5 Display network status ...................................................................................... 582 17.12.6 Terminal for Screen reader ............................................................................... 582 17.12.7 Display power status .......................................................................................... 582 17.12.8 Format .................................................................................................................... 582 17.12.9 Sleep Timer ........................................................................................................... 582 17.12.10 Upgrading the Voice Sense Firmware ......................................................... 582 17.13 Settings .................................................................................................................. 582 17.13.1 Setting time and date ......................................................................................... 583 17.13.2 Bluetooth Manager .............................................................................................. 583 17.13.3 Pronunciation dictionary ................................................................................... 584 28
17.13.4 Backup/Restore personalized settings .......................................................... 584 18. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ............................................................................................. 585 18.1 The Voice Sense QWERTY Will Not Turn On ..................................................... 585 18.2 The Voice Cannot Be Heard ................................................................................. 585 18.3 The Voice is Too Fast to Understand .................................................................. 585 18.4 The Voice Pitch Is Too Low or Too High to Understand .................................. 585 18.5 You Don't Know Where You Are .......................................................................... 585 18.6 No Internet Connection ......................................................................................... 586 18.7 Email ......................................................................................................................... 586 18.8 The Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille) Does Not Display Braille
........................................................................................................................................... 586 18.9 The Voice Sense QWERTY Does Not Respond ................................................. 587 19. ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................................ 588 20. OBTAINING SUPPORT ......................................................................................................... 589 29
1. Introduction
1.1 What is the Voice Sense QWERTY? The Voice Sense QWERTY is a voice note taker developed and
manufactured by HIMS, for people who are blind and visually impaired. The
Voice Sense QWERTY has a variety of powerful capabilities, including the
following.
1. Use the Word Processor, and the QWERTY keyboard, to create
Braille or text documents in multiple languages.
2. Print your text documents using any compatible Bluetooth or USB ink
printer.
3. Create hard copy Braille documents by connecting the unit to a Braille
embosser.
4. Open Microsoft Word documents, and read them with speech.
5. Send email messages to sighted colleagues and friends while reading
incoming email messages on the go.
6. Create a schedule of important appointments with the Schedule
Manager and set alarms to alert you to these appointments.
7. Input contact information for colleagues, friends, and family into the
Address Manager.
8. Surf the Internet with the Voice Sense QWERTY's Web Browser.
9. Listen to music, audio books, your own personal recordings, or even
videos with the Voice Sense QWERTY's integrated media player.
10. Listen to and record FM radio content.
11. Calculate algebraic equations, trigonometric functions, and other
scientific calculations with the built-in calculator.
12. View the flashdisk of the Voice Sense QWERTY as a USB drive on
your computer and transfer files.
13. Copy, move, and delete files on the Voice Sense QWERTY with its
intuitive, Windows-like File Manager.
30
14. Adjust the volume, speed, pitch and language of the speech on the
fly.
15. Use the Database Manager to create your own Database for storing
important information.
16. Use MSN messenger, Google Talk, and Twitter to keep up with
what's happening and stay in touch with friends, family, and
colleagues.
17. Use the Internal GPS and compass along with the included Google
Maps application to plan and save routes and navigate on the go.
18. Share files with other people and other devices using Dropbox.
19. Download news and podcasts with the included RSS reader.
1.2 Hardware To get the most from your Voice Sense QWERTY, it is important to
become oriented to the buttons and ports on your Voice Sense QWERTY
as well as learning their functions.
This section explains the hardware configuration of the Voice Sense
QWERTY. The Voice Sense QWERTY is 10 inches long by 6.1 inches
wide by 1.9 inches high. The bottom of the unit contains rubber feet in
order to prevent slipping while you are using it. Place the Voice Sense
QWERTY on a desk or table top with the Braille display nearest you. Its
shape resembles a thin, flat, rectangular box. This section of the manual
describes each side of the Voice Sense QWERTY and the basic function(s)
of each button and port. We will discuss the panels in the following order:
top panel, right panel, left panel, rear panel, and front panel.
1.2.1 The Top Panel 31
The majority of the top face of the unit is taken up with the QWERTY
keyboard. This keyboard is somewhat similar to a laptop keyboard, with the
top row containing Escape and F1-F11 as well as the left and right
brackets, insert, and Delete. The bottom row contains Function, control,
Windows, Alt, Brauve, Space, Alt, Apostrophe, and Equals, as well as the
arrows. The remainder of the keyboard contains letters, numbers, and
punctuation similar to standard keyboard conventions. Use “FN-Up arrow”
for “Page Up”, and “Fn-Down arrow” for “Page Down”. “Fn-Left arrow” and
“Fn-right arrow” function as “Home” and “End”.
If you are unsure of the function of any of the QWERTY keyboard keys,
when the unit is powered on, you can enter a “Key Help mode” by pressing
“Control-Escape”. Press any key or key combination to learn its function.
Press “Control-Escape” once more to exit “Key Help Mode”.
There are tactile dot markings on the keys in each row where your index
fingers should be placed for ease of orientation. There are also tactile
markings on the casing of the Voice Sense QWERTY surrounding the
keyboard to help you more easily locate important keys. These markings
are placed above “F1”, “F5”, and “F9”; and also to the left of “Tab” and to
the right of “Backspace”.
Near the top center of the unit's top panel, is a liquid crystal display (LCD).
The LCD displays the output of the unit visually so that a sighted person
can see what is shown on the Voice Sense QWERTY. STEREO speakers
are located one on each side of the LCD for audio output.
1.2.2 The Right Panel 32
On the right panel, there are 3 ports. The port nearest the front of the unit is
the USB OTG port. You can connect your Voice Sense QWERTY to a
personal computer via this USB port, and transfer files to and from the
computer, or synchronize your calendar and contacts with Outlook.
Behind the USB OTG port is a full-sized USB host port. Use this port to
connect
a
USB
thumb
drive
for
auxiliary
storage.
The port closest to the rear of the right panel is the AC adapter jack. To
charge the unit's battery or use the Voice Sense QWERTY on AC power,
plug the small, round end of the AC adapter in to this jack, and plug the
larger box-like end in to a standard AC electrical outlet.
1.2.3 The Left Panel The left panel of the Voice Sense QWERTY contains a single slot near the
front of the unit. This is the "SD" slot, used for housing an SD (secure
digital) card in the unit for additional storage.
1.2.4 The Rear Panel Near the left of the rear panel, is the local area network (LAN) port. If you
connect the Voice Sense QWERTY to an Ethernet interface, you can
connect to the Internet, allowing you to browse websites as well as send
and
receive
e-mail.
Near the right of the rear panel is a small, round recess, with a dot-like
button inside it. This is the "RESET" button. If your unit is not responding
properly, you can press this button to force a soft reboot of the unit. NOTE:
do NOT press the "RESET" button for more than 5 seconds. It takes about
fifteen seconds for your unit to complete the reboot process.
33
If you hold down “F5” with the "RESET" button, while the power is on, the
Voice Sense QWERTY reboots without speech.
1.2.5 The Front Panel On the far left of the front panel, is a 3-position slide switch. This is the key
"Lock" switch. This switch is explained in more detail in the next chapter.
To the right of the key lock switch is the stereo microphone jack, used for
connecting an external microphone or line level recording source. To the
right of the microphone jack is the stereo headphone jack. To the right of
the headphone jack is another 3-position slide switch. This is the "Media
Mode" switch, and determines which type of media the media buttons
control. This switch is explained in more detail in the next section.
To the right of the "Media Mode" switch, are five buttons of varying shapes.
These buttons control media playback. As explained above, the type of
content controlled by these buttons depends on the position of the "Media
Mode" switch. These buttons can control media playback, DAISY playback,
or the FM radio. These five buttons are explained further in the FM Radio,
Daisy and Media chapters of this manual.
To the right of the media buttons is the on/off switch. To turn on the unit,
push the switch to the right. To turn off the unit,repeat this action.
Congratulations! You are now familiar with the basic functions of the
buttons and ports of the Voice Sense QWERTY. The rest of this manual
discusses each function in greater detail to help you maximize the potential
of your Voice Sense QWERTY.
34
1.3 Hardware Specifications 1) Operating system: Windows CE 5.0.
2) Flash memory: 4GB.
3) RAM: 128MB.
4) Auxiliary storage: SD memory or USB flash drive.
5) CPU: Intel PXA270.
6) Battery: Lithium Ion (detachable), backup battery and clock-battery
installed.
7) Keyboard: QWERTY keyboard.
8) Additional buttons and switches: key lock switch, audio mode switch,
reset button, 5 audio buttons.
9) Video output: Built-in LCD.
10) Network: 10/100 based Ethernet.
11) Wireless: WLAN (IEEE802.11 b/g), Bluetooth
12) Interface: USB OTG, USB master, SD slot
13) Sound: Internal stereo speakers, stereo headphone jack.
14) Voice recording: Internal microphone, external stereo microphone
jack.
15) Sensors: Internal GPS and digital compass.
1.4 Memory on the Voice Sense QWERTY The Voice Sense QWERTY has 128MB of RAM (random access memory)
and 4GB of flash memory. The flash memory is where permanently-saved
data is stored. The RAM is memory reserved for running programs. RAM is
a temporary storage area for any program files that are running or any
currently open documents. The data in the RAM area disappears if your
battery depletes, and the AC adapter is not connected. The RAM data also
disappears when Voice Sense QWERTY reboots for any reason. This
means, if you have an open document which you have not saved, the
unsaved data disappears.
35
2. Basic Functions of the Voice Sense QWERTY
2.1 How to Enter Commands
The commands used to operate the Voice Sense QWERTY are comprised
of various combinations of the input and modifier keys. In this user manual,
the “-“(dash) is used to indicate that keys should be pressed
simultaneously. For example, "Alt-F4" indicates that the user should press
"Alt" and "F4" at the same time. This manual also contains expressions like
"Ctrl-c". This means that the Ctrl button with letter ‘c’ should be pressed
and released simultaneously.
If you are in a menu or dialog, and your cursor is placed on the command
you want to execute, you can execute most commands by pressing "Enter".
If you want to cancel the execution of a command, and return to your
previous location, press "Alt-F4”. "Alt-F4" is a very important command to
remember, as it allows you to abort programs and menus if you have
pressed keys accidentally.
2.1.1 Basic Alerts and Messages
There are instances where the Voice Sense QWERTY alerts you to events
for which you have asked it to notify you. For example, by default, the
Voice Sense QWERTY checks the Schedule Manager when you power on,
and notifies you of any appointments scheduled for that day. When you
are notified of an appointment, you can interact with the Schedule Manager
as you normally would. To exit the Schedule Manager, press "Alt-F4" or
"Esc," and you are returned to your previous location.
If you do not want to be alerted of "today's schedule" when you turn on the
Voice Sense QWERTY, you can turn off the "Check today's schedule"
option in the "Global Options" dialog. (See chapter 3)
When you turn on the Voice Sense QWERTY, you are returned to the
same location at which you turned the unit off. The Voice Sense QWERTY
announces the name of the running program and your current position or
status. If you turn off the Voice Sense QWERTY while using the Word
36
Processor, when you power on, it announces the program name, file name,
input mode and file protection status.
When you connect the AC adapter to the Voice Sense QWERTY, the Voice
Sense QWERTY speaks the message "AC adapter connected”. When you
disconnect it, the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "AC adaptor disconnected”.
2.2 Menu Concepts
menus on the Voice Sense QWERTY provide you with a list of programs,
actions, or options from which you can select. If a menu item has a
submenu, selecting it brings up another list of choices.
Moving among the menu items is very simple.
When using a program on the Voice Sense QWERTY, press “Alt” to bring
up its menu. Press the "Up" scroll key or “Up arrow” to move to the
previous item, and press the "Down" scroll key or “Down arrow” to move to
the next item.
To move to the first item in the menu, press “Ctrl-Fn-Left arrow”. To move
to the last item in the menu, press “Ctrl-Fn-Right arrow”. The corresponding
menu name is displayed on the Braille display (When connected to
SyncBraille), and the menu name is spoken through the TTS (text to
speech) engine. To repeat the name of the menu item, press "Fn-r".
You can also quickly jump to and execute a menu item by pressing the
menu item's shortcut key, usually the first letter of the item name. Often
menu items can also be executed instantly, directly from your current
position in the program, with a hotkey, enabling you to perform the desired
action without accessing the menus.
Shortcut keys are displayed in parentheses following the menu names.
Hotkeys generally consist of a modifier such as “Alt”, “Control”, or “fn”
pressed simultaneously with a letter or function key. These are displayed
following the shortcut keys.
37
For example, if you are in the Word Processor, and press “Alt”, then press
"Enter" on "File," you hear "New (n) pull down Control-n". The word "New"
is the menu option. You would press the letter "n" to jump to "New" from
within the "File" menu. Press "Control-n" to access the "New" document
command from anywhere in the Word Processor. The n is the shortcut key
and "Control-n" is the hotkey. It is important to note that some hotkey
commands are global, thus will work from anywhere on the unit, and some
are program specific. For example, if you want to activate the "new
document" option in the Word Processor. You cannot press "Control-n"
from the "Program" menu to activate this option. You must be in the Word
Processor for "Control-n" to activate the "new document" command.
When you are placed on an item you want to execute, press "Enter". If the
item you chose has a submenu or dialog, pressing "Enter" opens the
submenu or dialog. If the item you chose is a command, pressing "Enter
activates the command. This is referred to as "selection”.
When a menu item activates a submenu, the right direction arrow sign (->)
is displayed after the name of the corresponding menu on the Braille
display (When connected to SyncBraille) and the Voice Sense QWERTY
announces "pull down" after the menu item name. If the menu item is a
dialog box, the ellipsis sign (...) is displayed after the menu item name on
the Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille). The Voice Sense
QWERTY also speaks the message, "common dialog”.
Let's begin going through the various menus. First, turn the unit on by
pushing the power switch to the right. Now, bring up the "Program" menu
by pressing the “Windows” key. The "Program" menu is the main menu of
the Voice Sense QWERTY. You can access all of the programming, option
settings, utilities, and help from this menu.
The "Program" menu consists of 3 programs: File Manager, Word
Processor, and E-mail; and 9 sub menus: Media, Organizer, Web Tools,
Social networking, Extras, Games, Utilities, Settings, and Help. If you
choose to install add-ons such as our free Bible program or programs
developed by third party developers for the Sense notetakers, the
“Programs” menu appears between “Games” and “Utilities”.
38
The first item in the "Program" menu is "File Manager". If “Down arrow” is
pressed, the next menu item is displayed and spoken. Pressing “down
arrow” repeatedly, continues your navigational progress down the list of
items in the "Program" menu. When you reach the bottom of the list, the
"Help" menu item is displayed as it is the last item in the "Program" menu.
You could also jump quickly to the "Help" menu item by pressing “Ctrl-FnRight arrow” when "File Manager" is displayed. Press “Ctrl-Fn-Left arrow”,
and the Voice Sense QWERTY jumps back to the top item in the "Program"
menu and again speaks and displays "File Manager". As explained above,
to execute a submenu or program from the "Program" menu, press "Enter".
If you are in a submenu, and wish to return to the main "Program" menu,
press "Esc”.
The “Media” menu contains the “Media Player”, “FM Radio”, and “DAISY
Player”.
The “Orgamizer” menu contains the “Address Manager”, “Schedule
Manager”, and “Database Manager”.
The “Web Tools” menu contains the “Web Browser”, “Quick Browser”,
“Google Search”, and “RSS Reader”.
The “Social Networking” menu contains “Twitter”, “Google Talk”, and
“Sense Chat”.
The “Extras” menu contains the optional “Sense Dictionary”, “BookShare
Download”, “Google Maps”, “Sense Navigation” (optional), and “Dropbox”.
The “Games” menu contains the “Sense Dice Game” and the “Sense Brain
Game”.
The “Utilities” menu contains the “Calculator”, “Display time and Date”,
“Display Compass Heading”, “Wake Up Alarm”, “Calendar”, “Stopwatch”,
“Terminal For Screen reader”, “Display Network Status”, “Display Power
status”, “Format”, “Sleep Timer”, and “Upgrade Voice Sense Firmware”.
The “Settings” menu contains “Set Time and Date”, “Setup Internet”,
“Bluetooth Manager”, “Pronunciation Dictionary”, “Menu Manager”,
“Backup/Restore Personalized Settings”, “Change device Name”, and
“Global Options”.
39
Finally, the “Help” menu contains the various sections of the User Manual
as well as an “Information” section containing general information about
your Voice Sense, such as firmware version, Mac address, and the key
number used for authorizing playback of content from digital talking book
libraries.
For more information on a specific program, please see the section of this
user manual related to that program.
The “Windows” key command for accessing the "Program" menu is an
example of a global hotkey. This means that pressing the “Windows” key
key takes you to the "Program" menu immediately from anywhere on the
Voice Sense QWERTY, whether you are in a submenu, a file, a dialog or
an application. When you press “Windows” key, you are always placed at
the top of the "Program" menu; and File Manager, is displayed and spoken.
There are also global quick launch commands for every program on the
unit, mostly comprised of either the Windows or Caps Lock key and a letter.
These quick launch commands will immediately launch their associated
application from anywhere on the Voice Sense QWERTY. See section 2.16
for a complete list of the quick launch commands.
2.2.1 Control Symbols
The Voice Sense QWERTY uses several control symbols to note the type
of information being displayed: examples are list items, menus, and edit
boxes. These symbols can appear "Before" or "After" the text, or the
appearance of this information may be set to "off". The way this information
is displayed is determined by the "Control information" setting in the "Global
Options" dialog. The default value is set to "Before”. Note: In the Web
Browser, the control symbols are displayed even if the "Control information"
is set to "off".
AS explained above, the control symbol appears before or after the text of
the control. For example, if "Control information" is set to "before", and you
bring up the Word Processor's program menu, The Voice Sense displays,
"MN File (f) pull down".
40
The following table shows the types of controls and the symbols that are
used to indicate them.
Name
Menu
Symbol
MN
Menu item
MI
List item
LI
Edit box
EB
Multi edit box
MEB
Computer
edit CE
Comments
It means the menu that has
submenus.
It means the menu that does not
have a submenu.
The item name after this symbol
represents the name of the item
in any list.
(Ex: “LI database” or “LI
sample.txt” in the “file list” of the
file manager)
The item name after this symbol
represents the edit box name.
You can find the edit box after
the edit box name. In the web
browser, the symbol “EB” may
be followed by an edit box
without an edit box name. Edit
boxes that begin with the symbol
“EB” are one line.
(Ex: “EB Last name: (cursor)” in
the address manager program or
“EB (cursor)”
This also represents the edit
box. But you can type in more
than one line in the edit box.
(Ex: “MEB Subject: (cursor)” in
the e-mail program)
It means there is an edit box in
which you must input ASCII
41
box
Combo box
CB
Edit combo box
ECB
Prompt button
PB
Static box
ST
Link
Anchor
LN
ANC
Braille.
The edit box after this symbol
only allows ASCII Braille to be
entered.
(Ex: “CE To: (cursor) “ in the
email program)
It represents the combo box in
which you can choose an item
by pressing the up scroll button
or the down scroll button.
(Ex: “CB Type: *.*” in the “Open
dialog box” of the word
processor program)
You can choose the desired item
by pressing the up or down scroll
button, or by directly typing in the
item name.
(Ex: “ECB File name: (cursor) “
in the “Open dialog box” of the
word processor program)
PB follows any question in which
you have to choose “Yes” or
“No”. You can toggle between
“Yes” and “No” by pressing the
“Space” or the “Backspace” key.
(Ex: When you exit from the
word processor, “PB Save: Yes”)
ST is followed by the current
status.
(Ex:
“ST
noname.hbl/insert
mode/write”
in
the
word
processor program)
It notes a link on a web page.
It notes an anchor on a web
42
Radio button
RB
Radio
button SRB
select
Radio
button URB
unselect
Check box check SCHB
Check
uncheck
box UCHB
page.
It represents a radio button,
which allows you to choose an
item by pressing the up scroll
button, down scroll button,
space, or Backspace. Also it
cycles between items when
pressing this key.
(Ex: “RB Attribute: Write” in the
“Information dialog box” of the
file manager)
It means that the radio button is
selected in the web browser
It means that the radio button is
not selected in the web browser.
It means that the check box is
selected.
It means that the check box is
not selected.
Note: Links, anchors, and radio buttons are controls that are only used in
the Web Browser.
The symbols enable you to understand what type of input control or menu
you are working with. For example, if "MN," "MI," or "LI" are displayed, you
know you can move from one item to the previous and next items by
pressing the "Up" and “Down" scroll keys or the “Up arrow” or “Down arrow”.
If "ECB," "EB," "CB," or "MEB" are displayed, you know you are in an input
area where you must type the desired text. If "BT" is displayed, you can
press "Enter" to activate the "button".
2.3 Using Function
As described previously, the “Function key" is on the bottom left of the
43
keyboard, just to the right of “Control”. The "Function key" is often
abbreviated as "Fn". The “Function” key is often used in conjunction with
other keyboard keys for additional navigation. For example, press “Fn” and
“Up arrow”, for “Page up” and press “Fn” and “Down arrow”, for “Page
down”. Press “Fn” with “Right arrow”, for “Fn-Right arrow” and “Fn” with
“Left arrow”, for “Fn-Left arrow”.
Press “Fn” and “Insert”, “to turn Num lock on/off. When Num Lock is on, the
following keys are used to type the associated numbers/symbols below:
M: 0
J: 1
K: 2
L: 3
U: 4
I: 5
O: 6
7: 7
8: 8
9: 9
0: *
;: +
.: .
/: /
2.4 The AC Power Supply and the Battery Pack
It is often useful to know the remaining battery power on the Voice Sense
QWERTY so you can determine how much time you have before you must
change the battery or connect to AC power. If the remaining battery power
falls below 15 percent, the Voice Sense QWERTY indicates the battery
power is low.
To check the battery power status, press "Fn-b". The unit displays the
following 2 items:
44
1. Battery power level
2. Power source (battery, AC power or USB cable)
The battery power level represents the percentage of the remaining battery
power. The power source indicates whether the unit is being operated
using the battery or the AC power supply, or is being charged via the USB
cable. If the battery power level drops below 15 percent, the Voice Sense
QWERTY displays the battery status on the Braille display (When
connected to SyncBraille), and it announces that the battery has less than
15 percent of its power remaining. If the battery power level falls below five
percent, the Voice Sense QWERTY gives you a warning indicating that
your battery power level is under five percent, and the Voice Sense
QWERTY will be automatically turned off in one minute, unless you
connect it to an AC power supply.
Let's explore the detachable battery pack. When the Voice Sense
QWERTY is shipped, the battery pack is not installed. This is done to
prevent damage during shipping. When you insert the battery in to the
Voice Sense QWERTY for the first time, the unit may display an inaccurate
battery power level. Before using the Voice Sense QWERTY for the first
time, please charge the battery for at least two and a half hours. You may
use the unit during the initial charge, however, it is recommended if you do,
that the unit remain connected to AC power for at least three hours to fully
charge the battery.
When you remove the battery from the Voice Sense QWERTY, make sure
your unit is turned off; especially when the AC power adapter is not
connected. If you remove the battery while the unit is on and AC power is
not connected, you will lose all data stored in RAM, including open
documents, emails, and contacts or appointments that have not been
backed up. If you remove the battery, and do not have the Voice Sense
QWERTY connected to AC power, the data stored in RAM remains for
about 1 hour. To save your RAM data the Voice Sense QWERTY must be
connected to an AC power adapter or battery pack within an hour; or this
data is lost.
45
2.5 Basic Explanation of Disks, folders, and files
Think of the flash memory on the Voice Sense QWERTY as being like a big
bookshelf in a library. You can create partitions on a bookshelf to organize
books into categories. Think of the "folders" on the Voice Sense QWERTY
as being similar to these categorical partitions. The books in each section
can be compared to the "files" on the Voice Sense QWERTY. You can
save files into any folder at your discretion. If you create meaningful folder
names and properly organize your files into them, it will make for easier
retrieval of files when you need to access them later.
When the Voice Sense QWERTY is shipped from the factory, the name
given to the flash memory in the Voice Sense QWERTY is "flashdisk". You
can create folders on this "flashdisk" in any way that you prefer.
You can also expand your available storage by adding additional storage
devices, such as a Secure Digital card or USB flash drive. The Secure
Digital card is named, "sd". A USB flash drive appears as "USB”. If you
decide to add either of these storage devices, you can create folders, and
save files on them just as you can the flashdisk.
2.6 Controlling the Volume, Speed, and Pitch of the
TTS
You can change the volume, speed, and pitch of the voice used on the
Voice Sense QWERTY. Press "F6" to increase the volume. Press "ShiftF6" to decrease the volume. Press "F7" to increase the speech rate. Press
"Shift-F7" to decrease the speech rate. Press "F8" to raise the pitch and
"Shift-F8" to lower it.
When you press any of the above key combinations, the Voice Sense
QWERTY announces the status of its volume, rate, or pitch. The changes
in the characteristics of the voice remain in effect until you change them
again, or a hard reset is performed either manually or due to lack of power
to the unit for an extended period of time.
Note: the volume of the voice is controlled independent of the master
46
volume on the unit, thus, you can adjust it above or below the volume of the
system sounds, media playback, etc using the Voice volume control
described above. You can control the master volume or “Main Volume” of
the unit using “Windows-Shift-F6” to lower it and “Windows-F6” to raise it.
You can also control the rate of the foreign language TTS voice
independent of the main speech rate. You can adjust the TTS for other
languages, the “Sub Voice rate”, in the “Global Options” dialog.
2.7 Using Speech and Braille
When using the Voice Sense QWERTY, you can choose to read using
Braille only or speech only. You can also use both Braille and speech
simultaneously. However, you cannot turn off both Braille and speech as
you would have no method of receiving information from the Voice Sense
QWERTY. Use "F5" to toggle the speech on and off. Press "F4" to toggle
the Braille on and off. Note: Braille and speech can only be toggled in this
manner when the unit is connected to the SyncBraille. Please refer to
section 3.8.2.1 in this user manual for more information.
2.8 Entering Text
When you use the word processor on the Voice Sense QWERTY,
In addition to entering normal US English letters, you can also use your
QWERTY keyboard to enter foreign language text and Braille.
While European alphabets contain many of the same letters as does US
English, there are a few exceptions, most notably, the use of accented
vowels. When entering foreign language text, you can create the accented
vowels by pressing “` (grave accent)” in conjunction with the vowel you
want to accent. For example to create an é, type “`-e”.
When you choose Braille as your document type when creating a
document, the Voice Sense QWERTY automatically changes to a keyboard
47
layout that allows you to use QWERTY letters to input Braille dots. “F”
corresponds to dot 1 and “D” corresponds to dot 2, “S” corresponds to dot 3,
“J” corresponds to dot 4, “K” corresponds to dot 5, “L” corresponds to dot 6
in the Voice Sense QWERTY Keyboard. To type a capital letter, type dot 6L in front of the character.
For example, when you input ‘sea’ in the Braille Document, press “D-S-J” to
create “s” (dot 2-3-4). Then, press “F-K” to create “e” (dot 1-5) and press “F”
to create “a” (dot 1).
2.8.1 Inputting/searching for Control characters
Control characters are codes in a character set, which do not in themselves
represent written symbols in computing. For example, all entries in the
ASCII table below code 32 such as Form Feed (FF), TAB, and Carriage
Return (CR). You can input and search for control characters in Braille
documents.
2.8.1.1 Inputting Control characters
Control characters can only be entered in Braille documents. To enter
control characters in Braille documents, follow these steps.
(1) From within a Braille document, press "Ctrl-Space". "Control character"
is announced to alert you to the fact that the next character you enter
should be a control character.
(2) Enter the control character. For example: "l" for Form Feed (FF) or "i"
for TAB in alphabetical order.
(3) The control character is entered into the Braille document.
2.8.1.2 Searching for a Control character
You can also search for control characters in Braille documents. To search
for a control character, follow these steps.
(1) From within a Braille document, press "Ctrl-f".
48
(2) "Text to find" is displayed.
(3) Press "Fn-Space” and "control character" is announced.
(4) Enter the control character for which you want to search.
(5) Press "Enter" to search for the control character.
2.9 Multi Tasking
Unique to the Sense notetakers is their ability to run up to seven tasks at
once. The ability to run multiple applications simultaneously is referred to
as multi-tasking. For example, you can work with the Word Processor while
listening to music, and place calculations into a document at the same time.
To use the example of the Word Processor and Media Player, open the
Media Player and play a music file. While the audio is playing, press the
"win " key to bring up the "Program" menu and launch the Word Processor.
You cannot run more than seven applications at the same time. If you try to
run a program that is currently running, The Voice Sense QWERTY does
not open a new instance of the program, but rather, returns you to the
instance of the program that is already running. For example, while working
with a document called "Notes" you decide to execute the "File Manager”.
Next, you navigate to a document called "journal" in the file list and press
"Enter”. The Word Processor does not load a second time, but rather,
"journal" is opened in the same instance of the Word Processor in which
"notes" is already loaded. You can switch among multiple open documents
in a single instance of the Word Processor. Use "Tab" or "shift-tab" to cycle
forward or backward through the currently open documents. Switching
documents is explained in more detail in section 5, which covers the Word
Processor.
To switch between currently running programs press "Fn-F10" to open the
Task List. The Task List shows all the currently running programs in list
form. To return to any application, simply navigate to it and press "Enter".
49
You can use "Alt-tab" to immediately cycle among all running programs
without opening the Task List. If you are running three programs and are in
the second program, pressing "Alt" and "Tab" moves you to the third
program. If you press "Alt-Tab" again, you are placed in the first program.
In the above case, if you were to press "Alt-F4" to close the currently open
program, you are then placed in the previous program. However, if there is
only one program running, pressing "Alt-F4" closes the program and places
you in the "Program" menu.
If you have pressed “Windows” key to bring up the "Program" menu, or "FnF10" to open the Task List and you decide not to access a different
application, you can press "Esc” to return to your previous location on the
unit.
2.10 Switching Media Modes
The media buttons on the front panel perform different functions according
to the location of the "Media Mode" switch.
If you slide the "Media Mode" switch to the left-most position, the Voice
Sense QWERTY announces, "radio mode" and the media buttons control
operation of the FM Radio. If you place the "Media Mode" switch in the
center position, the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "DAISY mode" and the
media buttons control playback of Daisy content. If you slide the "Media
Mode" switch to the right-most position, the Voice Sense QWERTY
announces, "media mode" and the media buttons control media playback.
It is very important to pay attention to the position of the "Media Mode"
switch to achieve desired operation of the media buttons. For example, if
you are using the Media Player, if the "Media Mode" switch is placed in the
left-most position, the media buttons on the front panel control operation of
the FM Radio even though your focus is in the Media Player. More detailed
explanations of the functions of the Media buttons is given in the FM Radio,
Daisy Player, and Media Player sections in this manual.
50
2.11 Switching Key lock
You can disable the keys on the Voice Sense QWERTY to prevent the
accidental pressing of keys using the key "Lock" switch on the front panel.
When the key "Lock" switch is placed in the left-most position, Voice Sense
QWERTY announces, "all keys locked". This means all keys on the unit are
disabled including the on/off switch. If the key "Lock" switch is placed in the
center position, Voice Sense QWERTY says, "top panel locked". This
means you can continue to use the buttons and switches on the front panel
(media mode switch, media buttons and on/off switch), however, you
cannot use any of the keys on the top face of the unit. If the key "Lock"
switch is placed in the right-most position, Voice Sense QWERTY
announces, "unlocked". This indicates all keys are operational (QWERTY
keyboard, media buttons, scroll keys, function keys, Media Mode switch
and On/Off switch).
Note: the "RESET" button is always operational, regardless of location of
the key "Lock" switch.
If you want to lock and unlock only the keys on the front media panel, you
can do this by pressing the “Back” and “Forward” media buttons
simultaneously. If you press “Back-Forward” the unit announces “Media
keys locked”, and the media panel does not respond to key presses. If you
press the keys again, the unit announces “Media keys unlocked”, and the
media buttons are again operational.
2.12 Print Spool
The Voice Sense QWERTY has a print spool function. This function
enables the Voice Sense QWERTY to do other tasks while printing to an
ink-printer or Braille embosser. For example, if you send data to your
printer or embosser, you are immediately returned to where you were
before the print command was executed. If you want to check the Print
Spool dialog box after you have given the print command, press "Fn-Ctrl-p"
or “Alt-shift-p”. A dialog box appears with three controls: a list containing
51
information about files that are being printed, a "Cancel" button, and a
"Close" button. You can cycle through the three controls by pressing “Tab”
or "shift-tab”. In the information list, you can move among the items by
pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”. If you open the dialog box when
nothing is printing, "no items" appears in the list and only the "Close" button
is available.
While printing, the information list contains the following: "running program
name," "printing file name," "printer type," "the number of copies," and
either "printing" or "ready”. For example, let's assume that we are printing
one copy of "sample.txt" from the Word Processor. The info list displays,
"program: Word Processor, file: sample.txt, printer, copy: 1, printing”. If you
are using a Braille embosser, "embosser" appears instead of "printer”. If
nothing is printing but, (the printer is waiting), "ready" is displayed instead
of "printing”. If you print something from the E-mail program,
"emailtemp.txt," is displayed instead of the file name. If you are printing
from the Address Manager, or the Schedule Manager, the message,
"prn_ggtimegg.txt" is shown.
If you focus on a file in the info list, pressing "Enter" on "Cancel" cancels
the printing of that file. If you tab to "Close," and press "Enter" the Print
Spool dialog box is closed. Pressing "Alt-F4" also closes the Print Spool
dialog.
2.13 One-Handed Mode
Voice Sense QWERTY provides a One-handed mode for users restricted
to the use of one hand for Braille input. To turn on/off one-handed mode,
Press “Fn-h”. You can also turn One-handed mode on or off in the "Global
Options" dialog.
When One-handed mode is on, use the following methods to input text:
To select all the contents of a file:
1) Press “Ctrl”. The unit acts as though “Control” is being held down.
2) And press “a”. Then, all text is selected.
3) “When you press “a”, it deactivates the holding of “Control”.
52
Display power status
1) Press “FN”. The unit acts as though “Fn” is held down.
2) And press “b”. Then, power status is checked.
3) “Fn” is no longer modifying future key presses.
In other words, in “One-handed Mode”, modifier keys, when pressed by the
user, are added to the next key press as though they are being held down.
When the hot key is entered, all modifiers are canceled.
The operation of the scroll keys, function keys, and media buttons remains
the same as in normal mode.
If One-handed mode is on, the Voice Sense QWERTY announces this
each time it is powered on, as well as how to return to normal operation.
2.14 Using Typing Mode
While you are typing in a document, you may wish to turn off the navigation
keys, especially if you type very fast as you may accidentally navigate
when you intend to enter text. To turn on "Typing Mode", follow these steps:
(1) Press "Fn-Ctrl-t", from within a document.
(2) "Start typing mode" is announced and displayed.
If you press “Ctrl-ESC” while executing the “Typing Mode”, it will be entered
as “Ctrl” and “ESC” instead of executing the “Key help mode”.
To cancel "Typing Mode", follow these steps:
1) Press “Fn-Ctrl-t” while using “Typing Mode”.
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays and announces, “End typing mode”.
After canceling “Typing Mode”, “Key help mode” is executed when you
press “Ctrl-ESC”.
2.15 Common Hotkeys
1. Open the program menu: Win key
53
2. Execute a program in the program menu Win key-"shortcut key" (varies
for each program)
3. Bring up the Task list: Fn-F10
4. Switch to previous program: Alt-shift-tab
5. Switch to next program: Alt-Tab
6. Open program specific menu: Alt
7. Exit: Alt-F4
8. Escape: ESC
9. Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab
10. Move to the previous control in a dialog box: Shift-tab
11. Move to the previous character: Left arrow
12. Move to the next character: Right arrow
13. Move to the previous line/item: Up arrow
14. Move to the next line/item: Down arrow
15. Move to the beginning of line/item: Home
16. Move to the end of line/item: End
17. Move to the top of a document or list: Ctrl-Home
18. Move to the bottom of a document or list: Ctrl-End
19. Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 32-item
group: Fn-Up arrow
20. Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 32-item group: FnDown arrow
21. Scroll left: Up scroll button
22. Scroll right: Down scroll button
23. Move the cursor to each cell or move to an item: The corresponding
cursor routing key
24. Read the current item again: Fn-r
25. Say current time: Fn-t
26. Display power status: Fn-b
27. Open the "Global Options": F10
28. Online help: F1
29. Check software version: Fn-v only from the Voice Sense QWERTY
"Program" menu”.
30. Display Network Status: Fn-n from the Voice Sense QWERTY
"Program" menu
54
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
Increase the voice volume: F6
Decrease the voice volume: Shift-F6
Increase the voice rate: F7
Decrease the voice rate: Shift-F7
Increase the voice pitch: F8
Decrease the voice pitch: Shift-F8
Bluetooth on/off: F9
Wireless LAN on/off: F11
Ethernet port on/off: Fn-F11
2.16 Quick Launch Commands
Use the following commands to launch their associated applications from
anywhere on the Voice Sense QWERTY.
Use the Windows key in combination with each letter to launch the
following applications:
Address Manager: A.
Web Browser: B.
sense Chat: C.
DAISY Player: D.
Email: E.
File Manager: F.
Google Talk: G.
Help: H.
Twitter: I.
BookShare Download: K.
Media Player: M.
RSS reader : N.
DropBox: O.
google Maps: P.
Quick Browser: Q.
FM Radio: R.
Schedule Manager: S.
55
Database Manager: T.
Google search: U.
Sense Navigation: V.
Word Processor: W.
Use Caps Lock in combination with each letter to launch the applications
below:
Wake up alarm: A.
Bluetooth Manager: B.
Calculator: C.
Sense Dice game: D.
Format: F.
Sense Brain Game: G.
setup Internet: I.
Backup/Restore Personalized Settings: K.
Calendar: L.
Menu manager: M.
Pronunciation Dictionary: P.
terminal for Screen Reader: S.
Set Time & Date: T.
Upgrade BrailleSense: U.
Stopwatch: W.
Other Quick Commands:
Display Time and Date: Fn-T.
Display Network Status: Fn-N.
Display Power Status: FN-B.
Change device Name: Control-Win-E.
Open sleep Timer: Fn-J.
Open Global options: F10.
Open Sense Dictionary: Control-Windows-D.
56
3. C USTOMIZING
YOUR
N OTETAKER
When you receive your notetaker, one of the first things you will want to do is
to configure it to act the way you want it to. The “Settings” menu on the
Voice Sense QWERTY allows you to configure and customize your
notetaker to meet your specific needs and preferences. This menu allows
you to set your time and date, establish Internet and Bluetooth connections,
customize the rate and volume of your TTS, adjust how things are
announced and displayed, and many other options and settings on the unit.
To open the “Settings” menu, press “Windows” to bring up the main menu.
Press the DOWN arrow until you reach “Settings” and press “Enter”. Or, just
press “s” from the main menu to quickly jump to and open the “Settings”
menu.
The “Settings” menu contains 8 items: “Set Time and Date”, “Setup Internet”,
“Bluetooth Manager”, “Pronunciation Dictionary”, “Menu Manager”,
“Backup/Restore Personalized Settings”, “Change Device Name”, and
“Global Options”. The following sections will discuss each of these items in
detail.
3.1 Set Time and Date
To set the Voice Sense QWERTY's internal clock, press "Enter" on "Set
Time and Date" in the "Settings" menu. You can find it by navigating the
"Settings" menu with “up arrow” or “down arrow” Or press "t" to open the "set
time and date" dialog from the menu. You can launch the “Set Time and
Date” dialog from anywhere on the unit by pressing “Caps Lock-T”.
The set time and date is a dialog, consisting of the following: "Time zone",
"Use Daylight Savings", "Time format", "Time", "Date", "Synchronize with
time server", a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move
among these items by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
When you activate "Set Time and Date" for the first time, you will likely see
"Time zone? Pacific Time (US & Canada); Tijuana (GMPT-08:00)" as this is
57
the default. You can review the "time zone" list by pressing “down arrow” or
“up arrow”, or by typing the first letter of time zones or represented cities.
Select your time zone, and move to the next item by pressing “Tab”.
The "Use Daylight Savings" check box displays according to "Time zone". If
daylight savings time is used in the selected time zone, this item is displayed.
If it is not used, this item is not displayed. You can check and uncheck this
item using "Space".
The next item is "Time format", the options for which are 12 hour and 24
hour time. You can toggle between the two using “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
Move to "Time" by pressing “Tab”. Use this option to set the clock's time. If
you select 12 hour clock in the "Time format", A.M. or P.M. is displayed after
the hour and minute. In the 12 hour clock, you can toggle A.M. it P.M. by
pressing "Fn-x". In the 24 hour clock setting, you can type a 24-hour time
regardless of A.M. or P.M. When typing the time, separate the hour and
minute using a space or a colon.
Move to "Date" by pressing “Tab”. Type the "Date" month, date, and year as
mm/dd/yyyy. Use 2 digits for the month, 2 digits for the day, and 4 digits for
the year, separating them by a space or a slash.
The next item is "Synchronize with time server", used to synchronize time
and date with a time server on the Internet. This function is extremely useful
when the date and time of Voice Sense QWERTY is faster or slower than
the current time. To execute this function, your Voice Sense QWERTY must
be connected to the Internet. When connected, press "Enter" on the
"Synchronize with time server" button. After synchronization, it displays the
synchronized time in the "Time" edit combo box. The synchronized date is
also displayed in the "Date" edit combo box.
To save your settings, press “Tab”, to the "confirm" button and press "Enter"
you are returned to "Set Time and Date" in the "Settings" menu. Or, when
you have completed entering all of the information simply press "Enter".
58
3.2 Setup Internet
The "Setup internet" function is used to configure your Voice Sense
QWERTY to use various connection types to access the Internet. The "Setup
internet" utility contains the following connection options: "LAN", "Wireless
LAN", "Bluetooth DUN", "and ADSL". You can move among the four items by
pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”. The "LAN" setup should be used if you
are connecting to the Internet via a Ethernet network or router. If you wish to
connect to a mobile network via a cell phone or other Bluetooth modem,
choose the “Bluetooth DUN” connection. The "ADSL" setup should be used if
you are connecting to the Internet via a DSL modem. To connect to the
Internet via a wireless network, use the "Wireless LAN" option.
To activate "Setup internet", press "Enter" on "Setup internet" in the
"Settings" menu, or press "I" from the menu. You can launch the “setup
Internet” menu from anywhere on the unit by pressing “Caps Lock-I”.
Or, if the PC on which the Active Sync program is installed is connected to
the Internet, and the Voice Sense QWERTY is connected to that PC, you
can also connect the Voice Sense QWERTY to the Internet via that
connection.
The various connection types are explained in greater detail in the following
sections.
3.2.1 LAN Setup
Before attempting to set up a LAN connection, connect one end of a LAN
cable to the Voice Sense QWERTY and the other to a router or direct LAN
connection to the Internet. ALSO, be sure the Ethernet port is turned on in
the "Global Options" dialog. You can toggle the Ethernet port on and off from
anywhere on Voice Sense QWERTY using "Fn-F11". From the list of
connection options in "Set up Internet", navigate to "LAN" and press "Enter".
"Setup IP: Automatic" is displayed. If your service provider does not require
you to use a static IP address, simply press "Enter" on this option for
59
automatic setup. For the automatic setup, your host server should provide
DHCP service (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
To set up your IP configuration manually, move to "Manual" by pressing “up
arrow”, and press "Enter". The following settings are displayed: "IP", "Subnet
mask", "Gateway", and "Primary DNS". These settings require specific
numeric addresses. Please contact your Internet service provider for the
correct addresses. Use “up arrow” and “down arrow” to move among the
settings. When you have entered the information for each item, press "Enter"
to save the settings. The unit announces, "Setting completed". And you are
returned to "Setup internet". Your Internet connection should be active, thus
allowing you to use E-mail, the Social Networking programs, or the Web
browser.
3.2.2 Setup Wireless LAN
Before setting up a Wireless LAN connection, be sure wireless is turned on
in the "Global Options" dialog. You can toggle wireless on and off from
anywhere on the Voice Sense QWERTY using "F11". To connect to a
wireless network, navigate to the "Wireless LAN" option in the connection
types list under "Setup Internet" and press "Enter".
The "Wireless LAN" dialog consists of the "access points" list, "Advanced"
button and "Close" button. You can move among these controls by pressing
“Tab” or "shift-tab". If wireless is not turned on, the "access points" list
displays "no items".
When wireless is on, this list shows the wireless "access points" (networks)
in range of your notetaker. The "Access points" list displays the "access
point name", "encryption", and "sensitivity" of each item. (Ex: linksys,
encryption: WEP, sensitivity: good.) If there is more than one access point in
the list, you can move among them by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
Move to the "access point" to which you want to connect, and press "Enter".
If the access point has no encryption, the Voice Sense QWERTY announces,
"Connecting to (access point name)". If connection is successful, the
60
connected sound is heard. If the network is encrypted and requires a
network key, when you press "Enter" on the access point, the "Network key"
edit box is displayed. Type the network key in the edit box and press "Enter".
If your settings are correct, the unit says, "Completed setting profile" and the
connected sound is heard.
The "Advanced" common dialog is used to modify an existing profile,
manually add a new profile, or check the settings of an existing profile. If you
press "Enter" on the "Advanced" button while wireless LAN is turned off, "no
items" is displayed. Pressing "Enter" on the "advanced" button, while
wireless LAN is turned on, displays a list of the wireless profiles saved on the
Voice Sense QWERTY.
The "Advanced" dialog has 5 controls. You can navigate among these
controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". The "Advanced" common dialog
contains the "profile list", "Connect" button, "Add" common dialog button,
"Remove" button, "Properties" common dialog button, and "Close" button.
1. "Profile list": The list of profiles you have added. You can move through
the list by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”.
2. "Connect" button: Used to connect to the selected wireless profile.
3. "Add" common dialog button: Used to manually add a profile, specifically
where an SSID is hidden, and thus does not appear in the "access points"
list. "Add common dialog" contains 10 controls.
1) "Setup IP: Automatic" combo box: You can switch between automatic and
manual by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”. If you select "Manual", you
must enter your IP address, subnet mask, gateway IP address, and DNS IP
address. You can move among these computer edit boxes by pressing
“down arrow” or “up arrow”. Press “Tab” to move to the next control.
2) "Network name (SSID)" computer edit box: Type the network ID in the
computer edit box.
3) "Network mode" combo box: You can select among "Infrastructure", and
"802.11 ad-hoc" mode by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
61
4) "Network authentication mode" combo box: Select among "Open",
"Shared", "WPA-PSK", and "WPA2-PSK" by pressing “up arrow” or “down
arrow”.
5) "Data encryption" combo box: Select the data encryption method by
pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. If you select "Open" or "Shared" in
network authentication mode, you can choose among "Disable" and "WEP".
And if you select "WPA-PSK" or "WPA2-PSK" in network authentication
mode, either "AES" or "TKIP" can be selected in the "Data encryption"
combo box.
6) "The key is provided automatically" check box: If the "access point" does
not provide a key for users automatically, uncheck this check box by
pressing "Space". The default is checked.
7) "Network key" computer edit box: This is a computer edit box to type the
network key if the key is not provided automatically.
8) "Key index" edit box: This is an edit box to type the key number of the
wireless access point that matches the network key input.
9) "Confirm" button: Pressing this button applies the changes.
10) "Cancel" button: You can press this button to cancel the setup.
Note:
1) If "Data encryption" has been set as "disabled", press "Tab" and you are
taken directly to the "Confirm" button.
2) "Network key" and "Key index" is displayed only if you uncheck "The key
is provided automatically".
4. "Remove" button: To delete a profile item in the profile list, select the
profile item you wish to delete, and press "r" or navigate to the "Remove"
button by pressing “Tab”, and press "Enter" on the "Remove" button.
5. "Properties" common dialog button: To get information about a selected
profile item in the profile list, press "Enter" on the "Properties" common
dialog button after focusing on a profile item. By using “Tab”. You can
reconfirm the information for each profile. You can also modify the
information in the "Properties".
To exit the "Advance" dialog, press "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
62
3.2.3 Bluetooth DUN setup
From the list of connection types under the "Setup internet" option in the
"Utilities" menu, move to “Bluetooth DUN” by pressing “up arrow” or "down
arrow," and press "Enter”.
The Bluetooth DUN setup dialog contains the following: "connect list",
"Default", "Add", "Modify", "Delete", and "Close". You can move among
these controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". You can move among the
items in each control by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”.
The "connect list" contains previously added connection configurations. You
can move among these by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”.
The "Default" is to set the default connection to use when connecting
viaBluetooth DUN. To set a connection as the default, move to the "connect
list", and navigate to "Default" by pressing “Tab”", and press "Enter".
"Add" is a dialog for creating a Bluetooth DUN connection configuration. It
contains "connection settings list", a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button.
You can move among these by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". The "connection
settings list" contains "Connect name", “Bluetooth device”, "Connect number",
"ID", "Password", and "Modem speed". In the "Connect name" edit box, type
the host name or something that clearly identifies this connection to you. In
the "Connect number" edit box, type the number of the host. Choose the
appropriate Bluetooth device from the “Bluetooth Device” combo box. If the
connection requires an ID and password, enter these in the appropriate edit
boxes. If the connection does not require an ID and password, leave these
blank. In the "Modem speed", combo box, select one from the list by
pressing "Backspace" or "Space". When you have entered all of the
necessary information, press "Enter" to save the connection configuration. If
you do not want to save, you can cancel by moving to "Cancel" using “Tab”,
and press "Enter" on it.
"Modify" is used to change the information in a given connection
configuration. You can do this by moving to the connection you want to
modify and pressing "Enter". You can also press “Tab” to navigate to
63
"Modify" and press "Enter". Or, you can press "Control -m" on the "Connect
name" in the "connect list". "Modify" contains the same items as the "Add"
dialog, and you navigate and set the values in the same way.
To delete an item, move to the connection you want to delete, and press
"Enter" on the "delete" button. Or, you can delete an item by pressing "Del"
on the connection you wish to delete.
To exit the “Bluetooth DUN setup", press "Alt-F4", or press “Tab” to move to
the "Close" button and press "Enter".
3.2.4 ADSL Setup
To connect the Voice Sense QWERTY to the Internet via a DSL connection,
use the ADSL connection option in "Set up Internet". Before configuring the
connection, connect one end of a LAN cable to the Voice Sense QWERTY's
LAN port and the other end to a DSL modem. Be sure the Ethernet port is
turned on in the "Global Options" dialog. From the connection types list
under "Setup Internet", navigate to "ADSL" and press "Enter".
The ADSL configuration dialog contains the following controls: connect list,
default, add, modify, delete, and close. You can move among the controls by
pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". Within each control, you can move among the
items by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”.
The "connect list" contains the names of previously added connection
configurations. Select one by pressing "Enter" on it. Use the "Default" button ,
to set one of the configurations as the default ADSL connection.
Use the "Add" button to create a new ADSL connection configuration. The
"Add" dialog has three controls: a settings list, a "Confirm" button, and a
"Cancel" button. You can move among the three controls by pressing “Tab”
or "shift-tab".
The settings list contains the following: Connect name, ID, and Password.
You can move among the settings by pressing '“down arrow” or “up arrow”.
In the "Connect name" edit box, type the server host name or something that
identifies this connection to you. In the "ID" and "Password" edit boxes, type
64
the information. After entering the necessary information, press "Enter" to
save the connection settings, or tab to the "Confirm" button and press
"Enter". To cancel creation of the connection configuration, tab to the
"Cancel" button and press "Enter", or press "Alt-F4".
Use the "Modify" button to change the information in a given connection
configuration. To modify a connection, select the connect name you want to
modify from the list, and press "Enter" on the "Modify" button. Or, press "Ctrlm" on the connection you wish to modify. The "Modify" dialog contains the
same items as "Add", and you navigate and enter information the same way.
To delete a connection configuration from the list, select the connect name
you want to delete from the list, and press "Enter" on the "delete" button. Or,
press "Delete" on the connection name you want to delete.
To exit the ADSL setup, press "Alt-F4", or press "Enter" on the "Close"
button.
3.3 Bluetooth Manager
The Voice Sense QWERTY is Bluetooth capable, or rather, you can connect
the Voice Sense QWERTY to various devices such as keyboards, printers,
audio devices, and other computers without the need for cables. . Bluetooth
is the latest in wireless technology and enables wireless connectivity via a
Personal Area Network (PAN). Unlike a traditional Wireless Local Area
Network (WLAN), these networks are limited to approximately 30 feet or
less. Bluetooth enables users to exchange various types of information over
this wireless connection.
To use Bluetooth with the Voice Sense QWERTY, you must first turn the
Bluetooth option "On" in the "Global Options" dialog. You can also toggle
Bluetooth on/off from anywhere on the unit using "F9".
You can use Bluetooth to transfer files from the Voice Sense QWERTY to a
computer, use your computer's Internet connection, or use the Voice Sense
QWERTY as a wireless Braille display for a computer or smart phone. Note:
65
to use the Voice Sense QWERTY as a wireless Braille display, you must be
running a screen readers such as Window-Eyes, Supernova, or VoiceOver.
Please note that Bluetooth is an evolving standard, and the functionality may
vary, depending on the operating system that you are using.
The Voice Sense QWERTY uses the built-in Bluetooth Manager program to
manage Bluetooth functionality. You can access the Bluetooth Manager in
several ways. To access Bluetooth Manager from the program menu, press
“up arrow” or “down arrow” to navigate toSettings, then press “Enter”. In the
“Settings” menu, navigate to “Bluetooth Manager”, and Press “Enter” to
activate it. You can also press "Caps Lock-B" to open the Bluetooth Manager
from anywhere on the unit.
3.3.1 Bluetooth Device List
When the Bluetooth Manager is activated, it begins scanning for other
Bluetooth devices that are in range, and the services available from the other
Bluetooth devices. For example, if you have a computer with Bluetooth
enabled nearby, the Voice Sense QWERTY attempts to find it. It may take
30 to 40 seconds to discover all of the Bluetooth devices in range. The Voice
Sense QWERTY announces and displays, "Scanning for devices. Please
wait..”.. Progress beeps are heard during the scanning process, and full cells
are filled in on the Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille) to indicate
scanning progress.
When a Bluetooth device is detected, the Voice Sense QWERTY announces
"found (Bluetooth device name)". Note: while the Voice Sense QWERTY is
scanning for Bluetooth devices, it cannot respond to key presses. In addition,
you may not cancel the scan once it has begun, but must wait for its
completion before the Voice Sense QWERTY returns to normal operation.
If Bluetooth is turned "Off", or if the Voice Sense QWERTY does not
recognize the Bluetooth radio, the Voice Sense QWERTY announces,
"Bluetooth not activated", and exits the Bluetooth Manager.
When the scanning process completes, you are placed in the Bluetooth
Device List. If the Voice Sense QWERTY has found other Bluetooth devices
66
in range, they are displayed as "device name (untrusted (or trusted)) xx/yy"
where xx is the number at which the device appears in the list, and yy is the
total number of devices. "Trusted" indicates that the service has been
authenticated, "untrusted" indicates the service has not been authenticated.
If there are no other Bluetooth devices in range, the Voice Sense QWERTY
announces, "no items". You can press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to move
through the list. To select a device from the list, press "Enter" on the device
name.
If the Bluetooth device is trusted, settings for connecting the device are
automatically saved in the Voice Sense QWERTY. If you want to delete this
information, press "Del" on the Bluetooth device name in the Bluetooth
Device List. The Voice Sense QWERTY announces, "Device settings
removed". Removal of the settings applies only to the current device.
From the Bluetooth Device List, you can access the menu by pressing “Alt”
or by pressing "F2". The "Bluetooth Device List menu" contains "Rescan For
Devices", "Device Name", "Delete Pair Information", and "Exit". You can
navigate among the menu items using “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
The first menu item is "Rescan For Devices". This option initiates a new scan
for other Bluetooth devices. To activate this item, press “Alt” and press
"Enter" on "Rescan For Devices". You can also access this option by
pressing "r" from within the Bluetooth Device List menu, or you can activate it
directly by pressing "Ctrl-r".
You can access the next item in the menu by pressing “Alt” and “up arrow” or
“down arrow” until you reach "Device Name", and press "Enter". You can
also press "n" from within the menu to activate the "Device Name" option.
You can access it directly by pressing "Ctrl-n".
This item allows you to specify the device name given to the Voice Sense
QWERTY. The default name for the Bluetooth device name is
"VoiceSenseQwerty". When you activate this option, you are placed in a
computer edit box that contains your current device name. To modify the
name, type the new name and press "Enter". After entering the new name,
you should close all programs and reset the Voice Sense QWERTY by
pressing the "Reset" button on the rear panel of the unit. To cancel your
changes, press "Esc". You are returned to the Bluetooth Device List.
67
The next menu item is "Delete Pair Information". This item allows you to
remove the connection settings for the current device. To activate this item,
press “Alt” and press "Enter" on "Delete Pair Information". You can also
access this option by pressing "d" from within the menu, or you can activate
it directly by pressing "Del".
The next item in the Bluetooth Device List menu is the “Exit” item. This item
will exit the Bluetooth manager program. To activate this item, press “Alt”
and then press “Up arrow” or “Down arrow” to navigate to “Exit”. Then, press
“Enter” on “Exit”. You can also access the item while in the menu by
pressing “z” while you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu or at any time
without opening the menu by pressing “Alt-F4”.
3.3.2 Bluetooth Service List
When you locate a Bluetooth device to which you'd like to connect, press “up
arrow” or “down arrow” to navigate to the device in the Bluetooth Device List,
and press "Enter" on the device name. The unit announces, "Scanning for
services. Please wait…". Please note The Voice Sense QWERTY does not
respond to key presses during the scanning process.
The Voice Sense QWERTY supports the following Bluetooth services: LAN,
FTP, ActiveSync, Serial port, USB port, headset, and Bluetooth DUN. To
access any of these functions, be sure that the remote Bluetooth device is in
Discoverable mode, and that the service you wish to access is enabled on
that device. It is possible to have certain services enabled on your remote
Bluetooth device, while disabling others. For example, you could have LAN
and FTP enabled, while having ActiveSync and Serial Port disabled. The
Voice Sense QWERTY only sees and displays services which are enabled
on your remote device, even if others are available.
When the Voice Sense QWERTY has found all of the available services, the
services are displayed in a list in the following format: "service name xx/yy"
where xx is the number at which the service appears in the list, and yy is the
total number of available services. You can move through the available
services by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. Press "Backspace" to
return to the Bluetooth Device List.
68
From the Bluetooth Service List, you can access the menu by pressing “Alt”
or by pressing "F2". The "Bluetooth Service List menu" contains "Device
Name", "Open FTP", "Disconnect" and "Exit". You can navigate the menu
items using “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
The "Device Name" and "Exit" options in the "Bluetooth Service List" menu
are the same as those in the "Bluetooth Device List" menu.
The "Open FTP" menu item allows you to quickly open a direct FTP
connection with a remote Bluetooth device without accessing the Device and
Service lists. However, you must have connected the FTP service previously
for the Voice Sense QWERTY to allow you to transfer files. If you have not
connected the FTP service, and you activate this function, the unit
announces, "FTP service disconnected".
You can access "Open FTP" by pressing “Alt” then use “up arrow” or “down
arrow” to navigate to "Open FTP" and press "Enter". The Voice Sense
QWERTY says, "Connecting service". You can also activate it by pressing "t"
from within the menu, or by pressing "Ctrl-t" directly from the Bluetooth
Service List. Connecting various Bluetooth services is covered in more detail
later in this chapter.
The "Disconnect" menu item allows you to disconnect services with other
Bluetooth devices. You can access this item by pressing “Alt” and “up arrow”
or “down arrow” to navigate to "disconnect". Press "Enter" to activate it. You
can also activate this item from within the menu by pressing "d". Or you can
activate it directly from the Bluetooth Service List by pressing "Ctrl-d".
To disconnect a service, press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to navigate to the
service in the Bluetooth Service List and execute the "Disconnect"
command.
If there are no services connected and you activate this function, the unit
says, "There is no service connected".
3.3.2.1 Connecting a Service
To authenticate a service and connect to it, press "Enter" on the service. The
Voice Sense QWERTY announces, "Connecting service". You are then
prompted for a "PIN code:" This edit box only appears when you have not
69
previously connected to a service, and a pin code is required by the device.
You can exit the edit box or delete text you have typed by pressing "Alt-F4",
and you are returned to the Bluetooth Service List.
When you finish typing the pin code, press "Enter". The unit announces,
"Please wait for authentication". If the remote device is setup correctly, and
has not been set up to allow this device to always connect, the remote
device also asks for a pin code. Please be sure to enter the same pin code
on both devices. If the remote Bluetooth device pin code matches the pin
code on the Voice Sense QWERTY, the service should authenticate. If
connection is successful, the unit announces, "PIN code authentication
accepted".
You are then prompted, "Please wait. Access permission". If the remote
Bluetooth device does not give access permission, the unit says,
"Connection failed", and you are returned to the Bluetooth Services List. If
the remote Bluetooth device gives you access permission, the Voice Sense
QWERTY says "Connection succeeded". If the connection succeeds,
"Connected" is displayed after the service in the Bluetooth Service List.
Some services may be connected without inputting a pin code depending on
the Remote Bluetooth device settings.
When you are connected to a service, you can press "Ctrl-d" to disconnect
the service. The Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Service disconnected", and
you are returned to the Bluetooth Service List.
If you connect to the FTP service, a list of files and folders on the remote
Bluetooth device is displayed. The rest of this chapter discusses each
service in detail.
3.3.2.2 LAN Service
You can use the LAN service to access the Internet via your computer's
Internet connection. If you connect this service, you can use the Web
browser and email program, as if you were connected to the Internet via
Ethernet or wireless LAN. Before you can connect to the LAN service on a
remote Bluetooth device, the device must be configured for Internet
Connection Sharing (ICS). If ICS is not properly setup, you cannot connect
70
to the Internet using the LAN service. For information on how to setup ICS
for your remote Bluetooth device, please refer to the documentation that
came with your Bluetooth adapter. Setting up ICS requires knowledge of
network architecture, so it may be a good idea to contact a local network
technician or your network administrator for help with setting up ICS.
3.3.2.3 FTP Service
This service works similarly to using FTP on the Internet. It allows you to
transfer folders and files to and from the remote Bluetooth device. When
referring to the FTP service, we will refer to the file/folder list on the remote
Bluetooth device as the "remote folder list" and the file/folder list on the Voice
Sense QWERTY as the "local folder list".
After you have successfully connected to the FTP service, the Bluetooth
Manager places you in the remote folder list. The remote folder list displayed
is determined by the remote Bluetooth device. Typically, this folder is called
the Bluetooth Exchange Folder, but you should check your remote Bluetooth
device documentation for definitive information.
You can interact with the remote folder list in much the same way as you
interact with files and folders in the File Manager. With the FTP service, you
can perform the following functions:
1. Copy
2. Paste
3. Send To
4. Retrieve File
5. New Folder
6. Delete File/Folder
7. Open Local Folder. If you press "Enter" on this option, you are taken to the
local folder list. If you are in the local folder list, this menu option changes to
"Move to remote folder".
8. Select All
9. Information
71
In the next few sections, we will discuss the various FTP functions. Please
note that while sending data to and from the remote Bluetooth device, the
remote Bluetooth device may still need to give access permission to the
Voice Sense QWERTY. Please consult the documentation for the remote
Bluetooth device for details.
3.3.2.3.1 Copy and Paste
These functions allow you to copy and paste files between the local folder
and the remote folder.
Use the following steps to copy files from a local folder to the remote folder:
1) From the remote folder list, press “Alt” to open the FTP menu. Press “up
arrow” or “down arrow” to navigate to "Open Local Folder", and press
"Enter". You can also press "o" while in the menu, or you can press “Ctrl-o”
to open the local folder directly from the remote folder list. After activating
this function, the unit says, "Opening Local Folder", and you are placed in
the Disk list that appears in File Manager. You are placed on "flashdisk" by
default, but if you have an SD card or USB memory stick inserted, you can
navigate to them by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
2) As when navigating in the File Manager, you can access a disk by
pressing "Enter" on it. Use the same navigation keys as in the File Manager
to navigate the local folder. Note that you cannot select folders. You can only
select files. If you try to select a folder, the Voice Sense QWERTY says,
"Deactivated".
3) Once you have selected files by pressing "Space", you can copy them by
pressing “Alt”, and navigate to "Copy" by pressing “up arrow” or “down
arrow”, and press "Enter". Or, you can press "Ctrl-c".
4) After you have activated the copy command, Voice Sense QWERTY
announces, "Copying" and "Open Remote Folder". You are then returned to
the remote folder list.
5) In the remote folder list, navigate to the folder where you want to paste the
file. Press "Ctrl-v". Or, you can press “Alt”, and use “up arrow” or “down
arrow” to navigate to the "Paste" function, and press "Enter". If the file is
72
larger than 300 KB, progress messages are spoken each time an additional
10% is completed. If the file is less than 300 KB, only progress beeps are
heard.
6) When the file is pasted successfully, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays
the message, "xxx file pasted", where xxx is the name of the file. If the file is
not pasted successfully, "xxx file not pasted" is displayed. After the file is
pasted successfully, the unit also announces, "Paste completed", and you
are returned to the remote folder list.
Use the following steps to copy a file from the remote folder list to the local
folder list:
1) Navigate the remote folder, just as you would in the File Manager. For
information on how to navigate the File Manager, please refer to chapter 4 in
this manual.
2) Select the files that you want to copy by pressing "Space", you can open
the FTP menu by pressing “Alt”, and use “up arrow” or “down arrow” to
navigate to "Copy", and press "Enter". You can also activate this function by
pressing "Ctrl-c". Note that you can only copy files, you cannot copy folders,
to send to the local folder.
3) After you have activated the "Copy" function, the Disk list appears as it
does in the File Manager. You are placed on "flashdisk" by default. However,
if you have an SD card or USB memory stick inserted, you can navigate to
those disks by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
4) After entering a disk, open the menu by pressing “Alt”. Then, move to
"Paste" with “up arrow” or “down arrow”, and press "Enter". You can also
activate this function by pressing "Ctrl-v". If the file is larger than 300 KB,
progress messages are spoken each time an additional 10% is completed. If
the file is less than 300 KB, only progress beeps are heard.
5) When the file is pasted successfully, Voice Sense QWERTY displays the
message, "xxx file pasted", where xxx is the name of the file. If the file is not
pasted successfully, "xxx file not pasted" is displayed. After the file is pasted
successfully, the unit also announces, "Paste completed", and you are
returned to the local folder list.
73
3.3.2.3.2 Send To
This function allows you to send files from the local folder list to the remote
folder list. Note: this option is only available in the local folder list. This is
very similar to the copy and paste function with a couple of notable
differences. One difference is that you do not have to paste the file to the
remote folder. It is done as soon as you activate the "Send To" function.
ANOTHER difference is that when you activate this function, the file can only
be sent to the root of the remote folder list. To copy a file using the "Send
To" function, follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” from the remote folder list to open the menu. Then, press “up
arrow” or “down arrow” to move to "Open Local Folder", and press "Enter".
You can also activate this function directly from the "remote folder list" by
pressing “Ctrl-o”.
2) After you have activated the "Send To" function, the disk list appears as it
does in the File Manager. You are placed on "flashdisk" by default. However,
if you have an SD card or USB memory stick inserted, you can navigate to
those disks by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. Please refer to chapter 4
in this manual for information on file and folder navigation.
3) Select a file by navigating to it and pressing "Space". Note: you can select
only files; folders cannot be selected.
4) After you have selected a file, press “Alt”, and press “up arrow” or “down
arrow” to move to "Send To", and press "Enter". Or, you can press “Ctrl-s” to
activate the "Send To" function directly.
5) As with copying and pasting, progress beeps are heard during the send
process. If the file is larger than 300 KB, progress messages are spoken
each time an additional 10% is completed. If the file is less than 300 KB, only
the progress beeps are heard. When the transfer is complete, the unit
announces, "xxx file sent", where xxx is the name of the file. If the file does
not transfer, the unit says, "xxx file not sent". When all selected files are
transferred, the Voice Sense QWERTY announces, "Successfully sent", and
you are returned to the remote folder list.
74
3.3.2.3.3 Retrieve File
The "Retrieve File" function allows you to retrieve a file from the remote
folder list, and move it to the local folder. This function is only available from
the remote folder list. When using this function, all retrieved files are saved
to the "flashdisk/download" folder. Use the following steps to retrieve a file:
1) Navigate the remote folder list using the same commands as in the File
Manager (see chapter 4).
2) PRESS "Space" to select the file you want to retrieve. Note that you can
select only files, not folders.
3) After selecting the file, press “Alt” to open the menu, and use “up arrow” or
“down arrow” to move to "Retrieve File", and press "Enter". You can also
activate this function directly by pressing "Ctrl-r".
4) As with copying and pasting, progress beeps are heard. If the file is larger
than 300 KB, progress messages are also spoken each time an additional
10% is completed. If the file is less than 300 KB, only progress beeps are
heard. When the transfer is complete, the unit announces, "xxx file
retrieved", where xxx is the name of the file. If the file does not transfer,
Voice Sense QWERTY says, "xxx file not retrieved". When all of the selected
files are transferred, the message "Retrieve completed" is spoken, and you
are returned to the remote folder list.
3.3.2.3.4 New Folder
The "New Folder" function allows you to create a new folder in either the
local folder list or the remote folder list. Use the following steps to create a
new folder:
1) With the FTP service connected, from either the local or remote folder list,
navigate to the folder in which you want to create a new folder. Move
between the "remote folder list" and "local folder list" by pressing “Ctrl-o”.
Use normal folder and file navigation commands to move among the items in
the folder list.
75
2) Press “Alt” to open the menu, and use “up arrow” or “down arrow” to
navigate to "New Folder", and press "Enter". Or, you can activate the "New
Folder" function directly from the folder list by pressing "Ctrl-f".
3) An edit box appears and the unit prompts, "New folder name:". Type the
new folder name using ASCII characters, and press "Enter". If the folder is
created successfully, the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "xxx folder created",
where xxx is the name of the folder. You are then returned to your previous
location: either the remote or local folder list.
4) To cancel the folder creation, press "Alt-F4", and you are returned to the
previous list.
3.3.2.3.5 Delete File/Folder
This function allows you to delete files or folders from the remote or local
folder list. Note that if a folder contains sub-folders, you cannot delete the
folder. To delete a file or folder, do the following:
1) With the FTP service connected, navigate to the local or remote folder list,
and select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to delete using "Space". You can
move between the "remote folder list" and "local folder list" by pressing “Ctrlo”.
2) After selecting the file(s) or folder(s) you want to delete, press “Alt”, use
“up arrow” or “down arrow” to move to "Delete File/Folder", and press
"Enter". You can also activate the "Delete" function directly by pressing
"Del".
3) If the file(s) or folder(s) are deleted successfully, "Delete completed" is
spoken.
3.3.2.3.6 Information
This function allows you to obtain information about files or folders located in
the remote or local folder list. You can obtain file or folder information by
following these steps:
76
1) With the FTP service connected, navigate to the local or remote folder list,
and select the file or folder about which you want information.
2) Press “Alt” to open the menu, use “up arrow” or “down arrow” to move to
"Information", and press "Enter". Or, you can activate the "Information"
function directly from the folder list by pressing "Ctrl-i".
3) The "Information dialog box" appears. The dialog box contains "Type",
"Size", "Date", "Attribute (except for folders)", and "Close". You can move
among these controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". If you select multiple
files, the "Information" dialog displays the number of selected files and total
size.
3.3.2.4 ActiveSync Service
This service offers the same functionality as connecting the Voice Sense
QWERTY to a computer via USB and using ActiveSync. If the connection to
the ActiveSync service is successful, you will hear the chime indicating
ActiveSync is successfully connected. As with all of the Bluetooth services,
the remote Bluetooth device may need to authorize the Voice Sense
QWERTY. You are then returned to the Bluetooth Service list. As with using
ActiveSync via USB, you can copy and paste files from the Voice Sense
QWERTY from the remote Bluetooth device to the Voice Sense QWERTY
and vice versa.
To disconnect the service, press "Ctrl-d" from the Bluetooth Manager. The
Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Service disconnected", and you are returned
to the Bluetooth Service list.
You cannot use ActiveSync via USB and Bluetooth at the same time. If the
remote Bluetooth device is connected via USB and using ActiveSync, you
must terminate the USB ActiveSync connection on the remote Bluetooth
device in order to use the ActiveSync service via Bluetooth.
3.3.2.5 Serial Port
77
If you connect this service, you should not connect to other Bluetooth
services. The Serial Port service allows you to use your Voice Sense
QWERTY as a wireless Terminal for screen reader via Bluetooth. Note: you
must be using Window-Eyes, SuperNova, VoiceOver, or another compatible
screen reader to use the Voice Sense as a wirelessterminal for screen
reader. To use the Voice Sense QWERTY as a wireless Bluetooth keyboard
with Window-Eyes or iPhone or iPad, please reference the following
sections. If you are using another screen reader than those addressed
below, please contact HIMS by e-mail at [email protected]
3.3.2.5.1 Setting up the Voice Sense to Work as a Bluetooth
terminal with Window-Eyes
The following steps will walk you through setting up the Voice Sense
QWERTY to work as a Bluetooth terminal with the Window-Eyes screen
reader from GW Micro. These instructions assume that you already have
Bluetooth installed on your computer. The following instructions also assume
that you are running Window-Eyes 5.5, or higher, and at least Windows XP,
Service Pack 2. Before you begin, make sure that your Voice Sense is
turned on. Although it may not be necessary, you should close all running
applications on the Voice Sense QWERTY, and be placed in the Program
menu for best results. If you have more than one Voice Sense, make sure
that only the Voice Sense that you want to configure is turned on.
3.3.2.5.2 Setting up the Computer
1) Navigate to the Bluetooth icon in the System Tray. You may do this in
Windows XP by pressing "windows key-b", and use the Right or Left Arrow
Keys until you reach the Bluetooth icon. Then, press the "context menu key".
Note that if you don't have the Bluetooth icon in the System Tray, you may
have to change the settings for the Bluetooth icon to appear. Go to the
Windows Control Panel, Bluetooth Devices, Options, and check the check
box that says "Show the Bluetooth Icon in the Notification Area".
78
2) Press the "up or down arrow" keys until you get to "Open Bluetooth
settings".
3) Press "Enter".
4) Select the Device tab control. You may need to press Ctrl-Tab in order to
select this tab control.
5) Tab to the Add button.
6) Press "Enter".
7) Press "Space" to check the checkbox for "My device is setup and ready to
be found".
8) Press enter".
9) The XP machine will find the Voice Sense, and it will be called "Windows
CE". Remember that the Voice Sense QWERTY must be turned on in order
to be found as mentioned above. If you forgot to turn the Voice Sense on,
leave it turned on, exit the Bluetooth settings, and start at step number 1
above.
10) Press the "down arrow" key to focus Windows CE.
11) Tab to the Next button.
12) Press "Enter".
13) Press "down arrow" to focus the radio button, "Let me choose my own
passkey". Focus will automatically be put in the edit box, and you may hear a
tool tip that says, "We recommend using a passkey that is 8 to 16 digits
long". You should type your passkey here. For example, you might type,
"1111".
14) Press "Enter". Windows will then begin exchanging the passkeys, and a
new dialog will appear on the computer.
15) The Voice Sense QWERTY will then ask for the passkey by saying,
"Computer Edit Box PIN code:" Using the same passkey that was typed in to
the computer, type in the same passkey on the Voice Sense QWERTY and
press "Enter".
16) The computer should display the message, "Found new hardware" and
the final dialog should appear on the computer. Remember that you can
press "ctrl-shift-w" to have the entire dialog read using Window-Eyes. The
dialog should display that the Bluetooth device was successfully set up. It is
very important to note the COM ports for the outgoing COM port and the
incoming COM port. For example, the outgoing COM port may be COM 5,
79
and the incoming COM port may be COM 6. Do not be surprised if your
COM ports are not set to COM 5 and COM 6. The COM ports used can vary
from computer to computer.
17) Press "tab" to get to the Finish button, and press "Enter" to activate it.
18) You will then be taken back to the Bluetooth device settings dialog.
Press Ctrl-Tab twice to focus the COM ports tab control.
19) Press "tab" to get to the list of COM ports, and press the Down Arrow to
move through the list of COM ports to make sure that they match the COM
ports that were mentioned when you completed the Bluetooth device wizard.
You should hear your first COM port, then the direction, and the name. After
you press "down" Arrow again, you should hear the next COM port, the
direction, and name. For example, when you press the "down arrow" key the
first time, you might hear, "COM 5 Outgoing Windows CE Blue Tooth Serial".
When you press the "down arrow" key a second time, you might hear, "COM
6 Incoming Windows CE".
20) Tab to the OK button, and press Enter.
You have now setup the Voice Sense QWERTY and the computer.
However, you must properly setup Window-Eyes in order to use the Voice
Sense QWERTY as a Bluetooth terminal.
3.3.2.5.3 Setting up Window-Eyes
1) Press "ctrl-backslash" to open the Window-Eyes Control Panel.
2) Press "alt-f" to open the File menu.
3) Press the "up arrow", or "down arrow" to move to Select Braille Display,
and press "Enter". Or, just press B to open the Select Braille Display dialog
without using the Arrow Keys.
4) Press the "down arrow" or the letter b until you hear Voice Sense.
5) Press "tab" to get to the COM port list box
6) Select the COM port that was given as the outgoing COM port when you
setup the computer to interact with the Voice Sense via Bluetooth.
7) Press "Enter"
Now that you have set up Window-Eyes, you need to return to the Voice
Sense QWERTY to finish the setup.
80
3.3.2.5.4 Setting up the Voice Sense QWERTY
1) Press "Windows" to get to the Program menu.
2) Press UP or DOWN arrow to get to the Utilities menu, or just press the
letter u".
3) Press "Enter".
4) Press UP or DOWN arrow to get to Terminal for screen reader, and press"
enter".
5) Press UP or DOWN arrow to get to Bluetooth Serial Port, and press
"Enter".
The Voice Sense QWERTY should be connected as a Bluetooth keyboard
terminal. To exit Terminal Mode, press “Alt-X". Please note that "F1" on the
Voice Sense still takes you to the Program menu as you can continue to
multi-task while in Terminal Mode. This enables you to use the applications
on the Voice Sense at the same time, and be able to switch back to using
the Voice Sense as a Bluetooth Braille display.
3.3.2.5.5 Using Voice Sense QWERTY as a Keyboard with
iPhone, iPad, or iPod
Use the following instructions to connect the Voice Sense QWERTY as a
Bluetooth keyboard terminal with your iPhone, iPad, or iPod. Note: You must
be running IOS 4.2 or higher on your i-device in order to use the Voice
Sense as a Bluetooth keyboard with VoiceOver. These instructions refer to
the iPhone, however, they apply to all compatible i-devices: iPhone 3Gs and
higher, iPad, and iPod Touch 3G and later.
On the Voice Sense QWERTY:
1) Turn Bluetooth on using "F9".
2) From the Program menu, press u to access the "Utilities" menu, then
press s to execute Terminal for Screen reader.
3) Choose "Bluetooth Serial" as your connection type and pres "Enter".
81
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "connecting" soon followed by "Terminal
Mode"
On the I-Phone:
1) Navigate to Settings/General/Accessibility/VoiceOver/Braille.
2) If Bluetooth is not activated on the I-Phone, it will prompt you to do this.
WHEN Bluetooth is activated, the I-Phone searches for devices.
3) The Voice Sense should appear in the list of available Braille devices.
4) Double tap the "Voice Sense QWERTY" in the Braille devices list.
5) You are asked for a pin code. Enter any 4 digit code of your choosing.
6) Double tap the "Pair" button.
Returning to the Voice Sense QWERTY:
The Voice Sense asks for a pin code. Enter the same pin code you entered
into the iPhone and press Enter.
You should hear a chime on the iPhone, and the text displayed on the
iPhone should now be navigable with your Voice Sense QWERTY keyboard.
For information on operating the iPhone using the Voice Sense as a
Terminal,
please
refer
to
Apple's
accessibility
website
at
www.apple.com/accessibility
To exit "Terminal for Screen reader" press “Alt-X”.
3.3.2.6 Bluetooth keyboard service
You can use this service to connect a Bluetooth keyboard to your Voice
Sense QWERTY.
Before you try to use this service, please be sure the Bluetooth keyboard is
turned on and in Bluetooth range.
Use the following steps to connect to a Bluetooth keyboard:
1) Navigate to the Bluetooth keyboard in the Bluetooth Device List and press
"Enter".
82
2) "Keyboard" should be displayed in the list of available services.
3) Press "Enter" on the "Keyboard" service.
4) If the keyboard requires a PIN code you are prompted to enter it. Some
devices do not require a PIN code, in which case, you are not prompted to
enter one.
5) IF you are prompted, input the PIN code on the Voice Sense QWERTY
and press "Enter". If the keyboard requires a PIN code, you must also input
the PIN code on the Bluetooth Keyboard. (You should be able to locate PIN
code information for the Bluetooth keyboard in the documentation that came
with it.)
3.3.2.7 Bluetooth Printer service
You can use this service to print documents from the Voice Sense QWERTY
via a Bluetooth enabled printer.
Follow these steps to connect to a Bluetooth enabled printer:
1) Press "F9" to turn on Bluetooth.
2) Execute "Bluetooth" Manager from the "Program" menu.
3) The Voice Sense QWERTY scans for Bluetooth devices.
4) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to navigate to the Bluetooth enabled
printer in the Bluetooth Devices List.
5) Press "Enter".
6) The Voice Sense QWERTY scans for available services.
7) PRESS “up arrow” or “down arrow” to navigate to the "Printer" service.
8) Press "Enter"
9) The printer should connect to Voice Sense QWERTY.
3.3.2.8 Using Multiple Services
You can use the LAN, FTP, and ActiveSync Bluetooth services
simultaneously. However, if you plan to use any of these services at the
same time, you should connect the FTP service before connecting the LAN
and ActiveSync services. If you do not connect the FTP service first, you
may experience problems. If you are using the Serial
83
Port service, you should not connect to any other Bluetooth services.
3.3.3 Hot keys in Bluetooth Manager
Scann for Bluetooth device: Ctrl-r
Connect to device: Enter on the device name
Connect to service: Enter on the service name
Disconnect service in Bluetooth service list: Ctrl-d
Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace
Remove device settings in Bluetooth device list: Del
1) FTP service
Open local folder/move to remote folder: Ctrl-o
Copy: Ctrl-c
Paste: Ctrl-v
Send to: Ctrl-s
Retrieve file: Ctrl-r
New folder: Ctrl-f
Delete file/folder: Del
Information: Ctrl-i
3.4 Pronunciation Dictionary
The "Pronunciation dictionary" is used to modify how Voice Sense QWERTY
pronounces specified words as defined by your entries into the dictionary.
You can open it by pressing "p" from the "Settings" menu. You can also
launch the “Pronunciation Dictionary” from anywhere on the unit by pressing
“Caps Lock-p”.
The "Pronunciation dictionary" is composed of the list, "Add Word" button,
"Modify Word" button, "Delete Word" button and "Close" button. You can
move among these controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
The list is shown as "word: xx ?yy" where "xx" is the original word and "yy" is
the alternative pronunciation. For example, if you wanted to hear "Who"
pronounced as "world health organization" and you added the word to the
84
pronunciation dictionary, it is listed as "word: WHO ?world health
organization". You can move up or down through items in the pronunciation
dictionary by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. You can also click the
cursor routing key corresponding to the item position you want to focus. For
example, if there are 10 items in the list and you want to focus the 5th item,
you can click the 5th cursor routing key and your focus is placed on the 5th
item on the list. The pronunciation dictionary does not list entries in
alphabetical order, but rather, in the order they were added to the dictionary.
To add a new word, press "Enter" on the "Add Word" button or you can
press " Alt-i ". You are prompted to, "Add entry:" Type the word for which you
want to change the pronunciation and press “Tab” to "Replacement:" Type
the letters that produce the alternative pronunciation you desire. Press
"Enter" or press “Tab” to move to the "Confirm" button and press "Enter".
The word is added, and the focus is returned to the "Add Word" button. To
cancel this modification, press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button or press "Esc"
or press "Alt-F4".
To modify a stored entry, navigate to the item you want to modify. Move to
the "Modify Word" button by pressing “Tab”, and press "Enter". Or when the
entry is focused, press “Alt”. You are prompted to, "Modify entry: (focused
word)". Press “Tab” and you are placed in the "Replacement: (new
pronunciation)" edit box. Type the new replacement pronunciation text and
press "Enter". Or press “Tab” again to move to the "Confirm" button and
press "Enter". The word is modified and the focus is returned to the "Modify
Word" button. To cancel this modification, press "Enter" on the "Cancel"
button or press "Esc" or press "Alt-F4".
To delete a stored entry, navigate to the entry you want to delete. Move to
the "Delete word" button by pressing “Tab”, and press "Enter". Or, press
"Del" on the item you want to delete. You are prompted, "Delete? Yes". If
you are sure you want to delete the item, press "Enter". If not, press "Space"
to change to "No" and press "Enter".
To exit the "Pronunciation dictionary", you can press "Enter" on the "Close"
button or press "Alt-F4".
85
3.5 Menu manager
3.5 Menu Manager Using the Menu manager on the Voice Sense QWERTY, you can manage
what menus and/or programs are displayed in the Main Menu or sub
menus. You can show or hide almost any program in the Main Menu with a
few exceptions. You may not hide the File manager, the Menu Manager
itself, or the "Programs" menu which only appears if external programs are
installed. To execute the "Menu manager", follow these steps: (1) From the "program" menu, press "S" or "Enter" on the ""Settings"" menu. (2) Press the short cut key, M or "Enter" on "Menu manager". (3) The "Menu manager'" dialog is displayed. You can also launch the "Menu Manager" from anywhere on the unit by
pressing "Caps Lock-M". The dialog of the "Menu manager" consists of the following items: 1) The menu/program list 2) "Modify Menu Name" button (Only appears when cursor is placed on a
menu) 3) Confirm button 4) Cancel button To navigate among the programs, press the Up or Down arrow. Press "Tab" or "Shift-tab" to navigate to the "Confirm" and "Cancel" buttons. When placed on a menu such as "Media" or "Web Tools", you do not have
the option of showing or hiding the item. Menus are displayed if they have
programs accessible inside them. If you have chosen to hide all the
programs in a given menu, this menu will not be displayed. When your
86
cursor is placed on a menu, you have the option of renaming the item. To
rename a menu item, follow these steps: i. Navigate to the menu you wish to rename. II. Tab to "Modify Menu Name", and press "Enter". IIi. Voice Sense prompts, "Menu Name", and you are placed in an edit box
in to which you can type the new menu name. IV. When you have typed the new name in to the edit box, press "Enter", or
tab to "Confirm" and press "Enter". To hide unused programs on the Voice Sense QWERTY, press "Space" on
each of the programs you wish to hide in the list. Press "Enter" to save your
settings, or tab to "Confirm" and press "Enter". You must reset the Voice
Sense QWERTY using the "Reset" button on the back of the unit for these
settings to take effect. When the Voice Sense QWERTY reboots, the
programs you chose to hide are no longer displayed. To unhide the programs, return to the "Menu Manager" dialog, and press
"Space" on the programs you wish to unhide, and press "Enter" to save the
settings. Press "Reset" once again, and the programs reappear in the
menus after the unit reboots. 3.6 Backup/Restore Personalized settings
"Backup/Restore Personalized settings" is a utility used to backup/restore
the option settings for each program in the Voice Sense QWERTY all at
once. You can run this utility by pressing "k" from the "Settings" menu. You
can also launch the “Backup/Restore Personalized Settings” dialog from
anywhere on the unit by pressing “Caps Lock-K”.
The "backup/restore" dialog contains: the "program option check box list", a
"Select all" button, a "Backup" button, a "Restore" button, and a "Cancel"
button. You can move among the check boxes in the "program option check
87
box list", by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. You can move among the
controls in the dialog by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
The "program option check box list" contains "Options settings", "File
manager options", "Word processor options", "Address manager options",
"Schedule manager options", "Media player options", "Web browser options",
"E-mail options", “DAISY Player options”, “Radio options”, "Bluetooth
manager options", "Social Networking options", "Database manager options"
and “BookShare Download options”.
In this list, move to the program options you want to backup or restore and
check the item by pressing "Space". You can uncheck a checked item by
pressing "Space" again. To select all of the program options in the list, press
"Enter" on the "Select all" button or press “Control-a”.
After selecting all the options you want to backup or restore, press "Enter" on
the "Backup" or "Restore" button. If you select the "Backup" button, you are
prompted to select a path for storing the backup file. Navigate to the folder in
which to store the backup files using normal file/folder navigation commands.
Select the folder or disk in which to store the backup by pressing "Space",
and press "Enter" to start the backup process.
Each of these options has its own backup file. This means that if you backup
options for 5 programs, it generates 5 backup files.
If you select the "Restore" button, you are prompted for the path from which
to restore backup files. Again, use normal file and folder navigation to select
the folder containing your backup files. If you select a folder in which there is
no backup, you receive a message indicating there is no backup option file.
To restore your settings, select the folder containing the backup files by
pressing "Space", then press "Enter" to initiate the restore process.
If you hard reset your Voice Sense QWERTY, or its battery is fully
discharged, the main option settings and settings for each program are
initialized to the default values. If you have created a backup of your settings,
you can restore the option settings after the hard reset.
You can also activate the “Backup” and “Restore” buttons using “Control-b”
and “Control-r” respectively.
88
3.7 Change device Name
The “Change device Name” function allows you to change the Bluetooth
name of your unit. By default, the Voice Sense is named something like
“Voice Sense035”. You may wish to give it a more personalized name in
order to identify it more easily when pairing with another device. This is
especially important when using “Sense Chat” as you’ll be pairing 2 Sense
notetakers, and it is important to know which is which.
You can access the “Change device Name” dialog by navigating to the
“Settings” menu, then to “Change Device Name”. You can also launch the
“Change device Name” dialog from anywhere on the unit by pressing
“Control-Win-E”.
The “Change device Name’ dialog consists of 3 controls: a “Device Name”
edit box, a “Confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. Use “Tab” and “Shift-tab”
to move among the controls.
To change your device name, type a new name in the edit box and press
“Enter”. Or, after typing the new name, tab to “confirm” and press “Enter”. If
you decide you do not wish to change your device name, tab to the “Cancel”
button and press “Enter”, or press “Escape”.
Once you have changed your device name, it is necessary to reset the unit
for the change to take effect. Reset the unit by pressing the small round
button on the back. The next time you use another device to search for
Bluetooth devices, your Voice Sense should appear under your new name.
3.8 Global Options
The "Global Options" on the Voice Sense QWERTY is a large dialog box
for controlling many preferences/settings. You can access "Global Options"
by pressing “Windows” key to get to the main menu, and navigating to
“Settings” and pressing “Enter”. Navigate to "Global Options" by pressing
“down arrow” or “up arrow”. Press "Enter" to open the "Global options”
dialog. You can also open the “Global Options from anywhere on the
notetaker by pressing “F10”.
89
You can navigate among the items in "Global Options" using “up arrow” and
“down arrow” or using the scroll keys. You can also use shortcut keys to
quickly move to specific items in the "Global Options" dialog. You can toggle
an option on or off or cycle through the available values of a setting with the
"space" or "Backspace" keys.
Many of the Global Options also have global hotkeys allowing you to adjust
these settings from anywhere on the unit. You can view the shortcut and
hotkey for an option by placing your cursor on it and pressing “Function-Z”.
To save the changes you've made to the "Global Options" settings, press
"Enter". When you press "Enter" to save the settings, the Voice Sense
QWERTY says, "Saved options," and you are returned to the place on the
notetaker from which you entered the "Global Options". To cancel without
saving changes, press the "Esc" key or "Alt-F4". The Voice Sense QWERTY
announces, "Canceled saving options".
From the options list, you can also use “Tab” or "shift-tab" to navigate to the
"Confirm" and "Cancel" buttons. If you want to save your settings, press
"Enter" on the "Confirm" button. If you do not want to save changes, press
"Enter" on the "Cancel" button.
Before we go in to detail about each option, let's first go through a brief
overview of what appears in the "Global Options" dialog.
3.8.1 Global Options Overview
The "Global Options" dialog contains various settings that can be changed in
the Voice Sense QWERTY. As stated above, you can open "Global
Options" from anywhere on the unit by pressing “F10”. The "Global Options"
dialog contains five groups, making it easy to jump to a particular section in
the very long list of settings present in the dialog.
90
1. Braille settings (includes Braille display, Braille cursor, eight dot mode,
view/input grade, Braille Code and message display time)
2. Voice settings (includes language, voice, punctuation level, keyboard
echo, capitalization alert, numbers, abbreviations, voice volume, voice
rate, voice pitch, Main Volume, Sub Voice Rate, and scroll voice)
3. Display settings (flip LCD display, LCD font size, and video display)
4. Print settings (includes printer port and print paper size)
5. General settings (includes audio alerts, play power on/off sound, Switch
Function and Control, Switch Command and Alt, left scroll buttons, right
scroll buttons, skip empty lines, control information, hide passwords, hot
key information, announce shortcut keys, power saving mode, power
saving kick in, check today's schedule, one-handed mode, Automatic
spell-check, default document type, default Browser, Automatically
synchronize with time server, progress indicator, Bluetooth, wireless
LAN, Ethernet port, and mass-storage device mode.)
You can navigate among the five groups by pressing "page down or "page
up”. When you navigate to a particular group, you are placed at the location
in "Global Options" where that group of options begins. Though the "Global
Options" dialog is divided into groups for ease of navigation, it is actually one
long continuous list of settings. As explained above, you can move between
items in the "list" by pressing "up arrow” or "down arrow”. You can change
the setting for each option by pressing "Space" or "Backspace".
Note: in addition to navigating by group, you may also use shortcut keys to
jump to specific settings in the "Global Options" dialog. However, it should
also be noted that often, the same shortcut key is used for multiple options.
Thus, as is the case when using first letter navigation, pressing a shortcut
key moves the focus to the first setting that matches the shortcut key,
pressing the key again moves to the next setting that matches that shortcut
key. If there are no more settings matching the shortcut key, the Voice
Sense QWERTY wraps around to the first match.
91
As stated above, many items in "Global Options" also have global hot keys.
This means you can use this hot key from anywhere on the unit to instantly
modify that particular setting without bringing up the "Global Options" dialog.
3.8.2 Global Options in Detail
Let's take a look at each setting in the "Global Options" dialog in more detail.
3.8.2.1 Braille Cursor
Note: This option is only available when connected to SyncBraille.
Use this setting to define how you want the Braille cursor to appear on the
Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille). By default the cursor is set
to "Always up". Press "Space" to change the cursor to "Blinking," and again
to turn the cursor "Off".
Use "c" to jump quickly to this option.
Note that the Braille cursor can appear in 3 different forms:
1. "Dots 7-8"
2. Blinking "dots 7-8"
3. Blinking "dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8"
The blinking "dots 7-8" is displayed when you are using "overwrite mode" in
the word processor. The blinking "dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8" appears when you
are selecting text to denote the end of the selection.
In all other situations, the cursor is displayed as "dots 7-8".
3.8.2.2 Eight Dot Mode
Note: this option is only available when connected to SyncBraille.
You can choose to use 6-dot-Braille or 8-dot-Braille mode when entering
ASCII text. The shortcut key is "e". By default 8-dot-Braille is set to off.
WHEN your cursor is placed on this option, you can turn on 8-dot-Braille
92
mode by pressing "Space". You can toggle this option on/off by pressing
"FN-F4" from anywhere.
3.8.2.3 View Braille Grade
This option lets you choose what grade of Braille you want to use when
viewing text.
The shortcut key is "g". The available settings are
Uncontracted Braille, Contracted Braille, and Computer Braille. You can
cycle among the settings by pressing "Space". You can press "Fn-g" to cycle
through the Braille grades from any location on the Voice Sense QWERTY.
3.8.2.4 Braille Code
The Braille code setting defines the rules by which Braille is translated to text
and vice versa. The Voice Sense QWERTY offers 3 English Braille codes as
well as entry of Spanish, French, Italian, and German Braille. Thus the
Braille code can be set to use "US", “UK”, "UEBC", (Unified English Braille
Code) or "Spanish”, “French”, “German”, or “Italian".
The original intent of the UEBC was to explore the possibility of bringing
together three of the official Braille codes that are used for Braille in Englishspeaking countries for various purposes, viz.: literary material (English
Braille, American Edition), mathematics and scientific notation (Nemeth
Code), and computer notation (Computer Braille Code).
Choosing one of the other 4 languages allows you to input Braille according
to that language’s Braille rules, and read documents created in that
language using the associated Braille translation. The Braille language also
affects, lists, combo boxes, and edit boxes. Buttons and static boxes are not
affected by the change in Braille language.
The short cut key used to jump to the Braille code option is "c". The default
setting is "US". Use "Space" to change to "”UK”, UEBC" or "Spanish",
“French”, “Italian”, or “German”.
93
You can cycle through all the available Braille codes from anywhere on the
unit using “Windows-Alt-b”.
Note: If you change the Braille Code option while you are editing Braille in
the Word Processor, the meaning of the Braille in your current document will
be changed to reflect the current Braille Code setting. To avoid this problem,
the Braille Code option should be changed before launching the Word
Processor.
3.8.2.5 Message Display Time
This option defines how the Voice Sense QWERTY deals with system
messages. You can set the unit to ignore system messages, to stand by until
you press a key, or, if the Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille) is
on, you can define how long the message remains on the display before
automatically disappearing. Use "m" to quickly jump to this item in "Global
Options".
The available settings are "Stand by," "Ignore", and display times of 1 to 10
seconds. The default setting is "3 seconds". Use "Space" to increase the
message display time by one second and "Backspace" to decrease the
message display time by one second. If you read the message before the
display time has elapsed, you can clear the message by pressing any key.
Set the unit to standby mode by pressing "Space" until you reach "Stand by".
In this mode, the message remains indefinitely until you press a key. If you
choose "Ignore," messages are ignored and do not appear on the display.
3.8.2.6 Language
The Voice Sense QWERTY can output speech in US English, Mexican
Spanish, French, German, and Italian. You can change the Text-to-Speech
(TTS) engine using the "Language" setting in the "Global Options" dialog.
94
When you change the language of the text to speech engine using this
setting, menu items, prompts, and static boxes are not affected and remain
spoken in English. However, list items, combo boxes, and all edit boxes and
multi-edit boxes, such as documents or e-mail messages, are spoken and
text is entered using the language chosen with the “Language” setting.
When text is entered using a given language, the language attribute is
attached to that text, and whenever it is encountered on the unit, it is spoken
using the TTS of the language in which it was created. You can change the
language associated with a certain block of text using the “Edit Language
Attribute” function described in section 5.2.15 of this manual.
The shortcut for jumping quickly to the "Language" setting is "l". Press
"Space" to toggle the TTS voice between "English", "Spanish", “French”,
“German”, and “Italian”.
Note: you can change the language from anywhere on the unit by pressing
"Alt-Windows-v".
3.8.2.7 Voice
Note: This option only appears when connected to SyncBraille.
This option allows you to toggle the Voice Sense QWERTY voice on and off.
This option can only be used if the SyncBraille Braille display is connected
as the speech cannot be disabled if there is no braille output. The shortcut
key is "v". By default the voice is set to on. You can change the status of the
voice by pressing '"Space". You can toggle the voice on and off from
anywhere on the Voice Sense QWERTY by pressing "F5".
3.8.2.8 Punctuation Level
Use this setting to choose how you want the Voice Sense QWERTY to read
punctuation marks. The shortcut key is "p". The available options are "All,"
"Off", "Punctuation," and "Symbol". The default setting is "Off", thus, by
95
default, the Voice Sense QWERTY speaks no punctuation marks or symbols.
Use "Space" to cycle through the four settings. If you select "All", the Voice
Sense QWERTY speaks all punctuation marks and symbols. When the
option is set to "Punctuation", the Voice Sense QWERTY speaks
punctuation marks; when the "Symbol" option is chosen it speaks all symbols
and no punctuation marks.
3.8.2.9 Keyboard Echo
With this option, you can define what the Voice Sense QWERTY speaks as
you type. The shortcut key is "k". The setting values are "On with characters
and words," "On with characters," "On with words," and "Off". The default is
"On with characters and words," thus each keystroke is announced and each
word is spoken when "Space" is pressed. If you select "On with characters,"
each keystroke is announced as you type it. If you select the "On with words"
option, each word is spoken after "Space" is pressed. You can cycle through
the options by pressing "Space".
3.8.2.10 Capitalization alert
Use this option to choose how the Voice Sense QWERTY alerts you that a
character is capitalized, either when typing or when navigating a document
or edit box by character using “Left arrow” or “Right arrow”. The shortcut
key is "u". The setting values are "Off", "Say cap," and "Pitch". The default
value is "Pitch". If you select the default, when you encounter a capital letter,
the pitch of the voice is raised to indicate it. If you select "Off", the voice
remains the same regardless of upper or lower case. And if you select the
"say cap," option, "cap" is spoken before the letter to indicate capitalization.
For example, when you encounter the capital letter "V," Voice Sense
QWERTY speaks "cap v".
3.8.2.11 Numbers
96
This option defines how you want the Voice Sense QWERTY to speak
numbers. The shortcut key is "n". The default value is "On". If "numbers" is
set to "On", "2007" is read as "two thousand seven". If "numbers" is set to
"Off", numbers are spoken as digits, and "2007" is read as "two zero zero
seven". You can change the value by pressing "Space".
3.8.2.12 Abbreviations
You can turn the translation of acronyms on/off on Voice Sense QWERTY.
Use "a", to jump quickly to the "Abbreviations" option in the "Global Options"
dialog. If "Abbreviations" is set to "On", when the Voice Sense QWERTY
encounters "Ala" it speaks "Alabama". But if "Abbreviations" is set to 'Off', it
speaks "Ala".
3.8.2.13 Voice Volume
Use this option to set the volume level of the voice on the Voice Sense
QWERTY. The shortcut key is "l”. The volume level can be set using values
1 to 21, with 1 being the lowest volume level and 21 being the highest. Use
"Space" to increase the volume by 1 increment, and "Backspace" to
decrease it.
From anywhere on the Voice Sense QWERTY, you can increase the volume
with "F6" and decrease it with "Shift-F6".
3.8.2.14 Voice Rate
This option controls the rate of the speech on Voice Sense QWERTY. The
shortcut key is "r". You can set the rate using values 1 to 12, with 1 being the
slowest, and 12 being the fastest. Press "Space" to increase the rate of
speech by one increment, and "Backspace" to decrease it.
From anywhere on the Voice Sense QWERTY, you can increase the speech
rate using "F7" and you can decrease it with "Shift-F7".
97
3.8.2.15 Voice Pitch
Use this option to control the pitch of the voice on the Voice Sense
QWERTY. The shortcut key is "t". The available values are 1 to 10, with 1
being the lowest pitch and 10 being the highest. Use "Space" to increase
the voice pitch one level, and "Backspace" to decrease it.
From anywhere on Voice Sense QWERTY, you can increase the pitch by
pressing "F8" and decrease it by pressing "Shift-F8".
3.8.2.16 Sub Voice Rate
The Sub Voice rate option controls the rate of the voice used to output
speech in languages other than English. The values range from levels 1 to
12, with the default set to 8. Use “Space” to increase the Sub Voice rate and
“Backspace” to decrease it. The shortcut key is “r”.
You can adjust the Sub Voice rate from anywhere on the Voice Sense
QWERTY using “Windows-F7” to increase it and “Shift-Windows-F7” to
decrease it.
3.8.2.17 Main Volume
Use the Main Volume option to control the master volume of the unit.
Adjusting the Main volume changes the level of both system audio as well as
TTS. The available values are 1 to 21. Use “Space” to increase the Main
Volume and “Backspace” to decrease it. The shortcut is “v”. You can also
adjust the main volume from anywhere on the unit by pressing “WindowsShift-F6” to decrease it, and “Windows-F6” to increase it.
3.8.2.18 Scroll Voice
Note: this option is only available when connected to SyncBraille.
98
Use this setting to choose whether you want the Voice Sense QWERTY to
speak while using the scroll buttons as you read. The shortcut key is "s" with
the default set to "Off". The default setting (Off) means the Voice Sense
QWERTY does not speak when you use the scroll keys to move through a
document. Set this option to "On" if you would like to hear the Voice Sense
QWERTY speak text as you scroll through it. Use "Space" to toggle the
option on/off.
3.8.2.19 LCD
This option controls the status of the LCD screen. If you turn the LCD screen
on, sighted people can view what is displayed on the Voice Sense Qwerty.
The shortcut key is "l " with the default set to "Off". You can choose to turn
the LCD "On", "Off", or "On with backlight". You can cycle between the three
options by pressing "Space".
3.8.2.20 Flip LCD display
Note: This option is displayed only when Voice Sense QWERTY is
connected to the external LCD accessory.
The Voice Sense QWERTY gives you the option of viewing the text on the
LCD screen in normal or reverse orientation. By default, "flip LCD" is set to
"Off", meaning the text is shown in normal orientation. If the option is set to
"On", the text is in reverse orientation so that someone across the table can
view the display in the correct orientation from "his/her position. You can
toggle the value on/off using "Space".
This is a useful tool for teachers or parents wanting to view a student's work,
or for communicating with deaf-blind users.
3.8.2.21 LCD Font Size
Note: This option is displayed only when Voice Sense QWERTY is
connected to the external LCD accessory.
99
Use this setting to change the font size of the text on your LCD. The shortcut
key is "f". The default is set to 19. The font size can be set using values 12 to
20. Use "Space" to increase the font 1 size, and "Backspace" to decrease it.
If you have the font size set to 20, and you increase the font by one size, the
font wraps around to 12. If your font size is 12, and you decrease the font by
one size, the font wraps around to 20.
3.8.2.22 Printer Port
Use this option to define which port is used to send information to your
printer when printing a document. The shortcut key is "p". The default is set
to "USB". You can also choose to print via a parallel or Bluetooth printer. Use
"Space" to cycle among the 3 options.
Note: if you want to use a parallel printer, you must use a USB to parallel
adapter and connect the printer to the USB port on the Voice Sense
QWERTY.
3.8.2.23 Print Paper Size
This option allows you to select the size of the paper that an ink printer is
using so the document is scaled correctly when printing. To jump quickly to
this option, use "s". You can adjust the size by pressing "Space". The
available sizes are "Letter" (8.5 inches by 11 inches) and "Legal" (8.5 inches
by 14 inches.)
3.8.2.24 Audio alerts
Use this setting to choose whether the Voice Sense QWERTY alerts you to
various events using audio signals,. The shortcut key is "a". Audio alerts are
useful if the speech on the Voice Sense QWERTY is turned off. By default,
"Audio alerts" are turned "On". When "Audio alerts" are set to “beep”, you
100
hear a beeping sound when you type keystrokes that are not acceptable in
your current context on the Voice Sense.
If you don't want to hear a warning or alert, , press "Space" until you reach
the "Off" setting.
3.8.2.25 Play Power On/Off Sound
Use this option to choose whether you hear the power on/off sound when
you turn on/off the Voice Sense QWERTY. The shortcut key is "s". The
default for this option is set to "On".
If you want the Voice Sense QWERTY to power on/off silently, press
"Space" to turn "Off" "Play power on/off sound".
3.8.2.26 Skip Empty Lines
You can choose to have the Voice Sense QWERTY alert you to a blank line
by announcing "Blank" as you encounter empty lines while scrolling through
a document or you can choose to have the unit skip empty lines. The
shortcut key is "e" and the default is set to "Off". Use "Space" to toggle the
option on/off.
3.8.2.27 Control Information
Use this setting to determine where information is announced regarding the
type of control on which you are currently located, a list item, menu, combo
box, etc. The short cut key is "i" and the default is set to "After". To toggle
"Control information" between before, after and off, press "space.
If you select "Before," control information, such as "list item", or "combo box"
is spoken before a menu/list item or form control. If you select "After," control
information is announced after the item or control. If you have control
information set to "Off", control information is not displayed or spoken.
Note: if Control Information is set to anything other than “Off”, it always
appears in Braille before the control.
101
Note that if you are using the Web browser the control symbols are
displayed even if the "Control information" option is set to "Off".
3.8.2.28 Hide passwords
When you enter a password in a computer edit box, The Voice Sense
QWERTY can either display an asterisk, *(dots 1-6) or the actual password
as you type it.
The short cut key is "p" and the default is set to "On". This means passwords
are hidden, and thus will be shown using asterisks. To show passwords as
you type them, use "Space" to toggle this setting to "Off".
3.8.2.29 Hot Key Information
As described previously, hot keys are keystrokes used to immediately
access or activate an item, such as a menu, or a particular item in a list. Use
this option to define how hot key information is announced. The short cut key
is "h" and default is set to “On”. The setting values are “On,” and “Off”. You
can cycle through each of the options by pressing “Space”.
If you select "On", the "Open" option in the File Menu of the Word Processor
is announced, "Open (o) Ctrl-o". And if you select “Off,” you can’t hear the
hot key information.
3.8.2.30 Announce shortcut keys
The "Announce shortcut keys" option lets you choose whether the Voice
Sense QWERTY speaks the shortcut key for a function. The shortcut key for
this option is "s" and the default is set to "On". For example, if you press "F2"
to bring up the program menu in the Word Processor, you may hear, "File (f)
pull down". In this case, the shortcut key for accessing the Word Processor's
"File" menu is the letter "f". If you do not wish to hear the shortcut keys
announced, toggle "Announce shortcut keys" off by pressing "Space".
102
3.8.2.31 Power Saving Mode
Use this option to set the Voice Sense QWERTY to save power by
automatically shutting down after a certain period of time. The shortcut key is
"p". The default setting is set to "On". Use "Space" to cycle through the
available values: "On", "Off", and "Message". If you never want your Voice
Sense QWERTY to shut down automatically, set the option to "Off". If you
set the option to "Message," The Voice Sense QWERTY gives you a
warning message that says "power on" to remind you the unit is still powered
on after 10, 20, or 30 minutes of inactivity (depending on the setting that you
choose for power saving kick in).
Note: this option is available only when the AC adaptor is not connected to
the unit. In other words, even if this option is set to "On", if the AC adaptor is
connected to the unit, the unit does not enter Power Save Mode, even when
the "Power saving kick in" time has elapsed.
3.8.2.32 Power Saving Kick In
Use this option to set the time of inactivity before entering Power Save Mode.
The shortcut key is "k" with the default set to "After 10 minutes". This means
the Voice Sense QWERTY enters power saving mode when you have not
used the Voice Sense QWERTY for 10 minutes. Use "Space" to cycle
through the available settings: 10 minutes, 20 minutes, and 30 minutes.
3.8.2.33 Check Today's Schedule
In the "Schedule manager" (which you will learn about later), you can keep
track of your appointments using the Voice Sense QWERTY. YOU can set
the Voice Sense QWERTY to check today's schedule for appointments each
time you turn it on. The short cut key for this option is "s". To toggle this
option on/off, press "Space".
103
3.8.2.34 One-Handed Mode
This option allows users with only the use of one hand to use the Voice
Sense QWERTY in a specific mode adapted for that purpose. The shortcut
key is "h". The default setting is "Off". Use "Space" to toggle one-handed
mode on/off. For detailed information about one-handed mode, refer to "2.14
One-Handed Mode".
Note: If this option is set to “On" when you connect a USB keyboard, it is
automatically turned off when the keyboard is connected. The option returns
to its previous state when the USB keyboard is disconnected from the unit.
3.8.2.35 Automatic spell-check
Use this option to set whether the Voice Sense QWERTY automatically
checks spelling as you type in "multi line edit boxes" in programs such as the
schedule manager, address manager, e-mail messages, the word processor,
etc. The short cut key for this option is "c".
By default this option is set to "Off", thus spelling is not automatically
checked as you type. Press "Space" to toggle automatic spell checking
on/off.
If the option is "On", and you enter a misspelled word, Voice Sense
QWERTY emits a beep sound to indicate a misspelling. This beep sounds
even if audio alerts are turned off.
3.8.2.36 Default Document Type
This option is used to set the default document type for new documents you
create using the word processor on the Voice Sense QWERTY. The shortcut
key for this option is "q". By default, "Text document" is selected as the
default file type.
104
You can choose "Sense document", "Braille document," or "Text document"
as your default document type. Press "Space" to cycle through the three
options.
Note: When you connect a USB QWERTY keyboard to the Voice Sense
QWERTY, this option is automatically set to "Text document". When the
USB keyboard is disconnected, the default document type is returned to
whatever it was set to before the USB keyboard was connected.
3.8.2.37 Default Browser
This option allows you to set whether to use the original Sense Web Browser
or the newer Quick Browser as your default browser for opening web pages
from programs such as E-mail, RSS, Google Search, and Twitter.
The shortcut key for this option is “B”. By default, this option is set to the
original “Web Browser”. Press “Space” to toggle between the “Web Browser”
and “Quick Browser”.
3.8.2.38 Automatically synchronize with time server
If you have the "Automatically synchronize with time server" option turned on,
the date and time is synchronize with an internet time server automatically
each time the Voice Sense QWERTY is connected to internet. Using this
feature, you can ensure the accuracy of the time on the Voice Sense
QWERTY by synchronizing with an atomic clock via the internet.
The shortcut key is "t". The default setting is "ON". Use "Space" to toggle
time server synchronization on/off.
3.8.2.39 Progress indicator
The progress indicator setting defines how the progress of opening a
document, copying files or opening a webpage is indicated. The shortcut key
is "p”. You can choose among "Silent," (no progress indication) "Beep,"
(continuous beeps while the task is performed) and "Message" (progress is
105
shown as a percentage). By default, progress indication is set to "Message".
Press "Space" to cycle through the three settings,
3.8.2.40 Bluetooth
Use this option to turn Bluetooth on or off. The shortcut key for this option is
"b". Toggle Bluetooth on/off by pressing "Space". By default, it is set to "Off".
You can toggle Bluetooth on and off from anywhere on Voice Sense
QWERTY by pressing "F9".
Note: you must turn Bluetooth on to connect to Bluetooth enabled devices. It
is recommended that you turn Bluetooth off when it is not in use to save
battery power.
3.8.2.41 Wireless LAN
Use this setting to turn Wireless LAN on or off. The shortcut key for this
option is "w". You can toggle wireless on/off by pressing "Space". By default,
it is set to "Off". You can toggle it on and off from anywhere on Voice Sense
QWERTY by pressing "F11"
Note: you must turn Wireless LAN on before connecting to a wireless
network or to the internet via a wireless router. It is recommended that you
turn wireless off when not in use to save battery power.
3.8.2.42 Ethernet port
Use this setting to turn the Ethernet port on or off. The shortcut key for this
option is "l". You can toggle Ethernet on/off by pressing "Space". By default,
it is set to "On". You can toggle it on and off from anywhere on the Voice
Sense QWERTY by pressing "Fn-F11"
Note: to save battery power, turn this option off when you are not using
Ethernet connectivity.
106
3.8.2.43 Mass-storage device mode
Mass Storage Device Mode enables the drives on your Voice Sense
QWERTY to be viewed as removable storage devices on a PC when
connected via USB. The shortcut key for this option is "d" with the default
set to "On". Use "Space" to toggle this option on/off.
If Mass Storage Device Mode is turned off, the Voice Sense QWERTY can
be connected to the PC as a Windows Mobile device and accessed using
Microsoft ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center for synchronization
of calendar and contacts with Outlook.
When you have finished modifying settings in the "Global Options" dialog,
press "Enter" to save the settings. You can also “Tab” or "shift-tab" to the
"Confirm" button, and press "Enter". If you do not want to save the settings,
“Tab” or "shift-tab" to the "Cancel" button, and press "Enter". You can also
cancel saving the settings by pressing "Alt-F4" or "Esc".
107
4. File Manager
4.1 Overview
The functionality and structure of the "File Manager" on the Voice Sense
QWERTY is very similar to "Windows Explorer" on a personal computer. To
run the "File Manager", press "f" from the "program" menu or press "Enter"
when your cursor is placed on "File Manager". You can also launch the “File
Manager” from anywhere on the unit by pressing “Windows-F”.
The "File Manager" contains 2 basic areas: an "address window" and a "file
list". When you first open the "File Manager", you are placed in the drive list.
By default, you are placed on the internal flash drive, named "flashdisk". You
can use the “up arrow” or “down arrow” or the scroll buttons to navigate the
items in the drive list. Press "Enter" on the drive you want to open. The Voice
Sense QWERTY then displays the list of the files/folders on the drive you
have opened.
When you press “Tab” or "shift-tab" on the "file list," you enter the "address
window". The "address window" contains the path of the current directory or
file.
For your convenience, the "File Manager" contains both menus and hot keys,
allowing you to easily activate items in the program with a single keystroke
as well as access and select a function through the menus even if you have
not memorized the associated keystroke. YOU can bring up the menus by
pressing “Alt”.
WARNING!! The Voice Sense QWERTY makes it possible to format the
flashdisk to solve corruption problems and/or start over with a clean internal
drive. Formatting the flashdisk erases everything on the flashdisk. Be
extremely cautious when executing this command. If you execute this
command, you will lose all of your data. You will NOT be able to retrieve this
data once the command is executed. To format the flashdisk, press and hold
" Fn-f”. While holding down these keys, quickly press and release the reset
button. Continue holding "Fn-f" until you hear the "format start"
announcement.
108
4.1.1 Navigating the File List
The "File Manager" contains two kinds of lists: the "file list" and the "menu
list", or rather, the list of items contained in the "File Manager" menu. The
menus in the Voice Sense QWERTY wrap. This means, when you reach the
end of the list of items in a menu, the Voice Sense QWERTY automatically
brings you back to the top of the list when you press “down arrow”. However,
when you reach the end of a "file list," the Voice Sense QWERTY remains at
the end of the list, even if you press “down arrow”. The following is a list of
the keystrokes used for navigating lists:
1. Move to previous item: Up arrow or up scroll button
2. Move to next item: Down arrow or down scroll button
3. Move to the beginning of a list: Ctrl-Home
4. Move to the end of a list: Ctrl-End
The following keystrokes are valid only in a "file list".
1. Jump to folder or file list: Ctrl-Down arrow
2. Move between file list and address window: Tab / shift-tab
3. Enter the selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
4. Move back a level in the folder structure: Backspace
5. Jump to the drive list: Shift-Backspace
6. Move to the previous group of 32 items: Fn-Up arrow
7. Move to the next group of 32 items: Fn-down arrow
8. Jump to a file or folder by pressing the first character of the folder or file
name. You must use ASCII characters.
4.1.2 Selecting folders and files
1. Select individual items "Space": * is displayed in front of the item to denote
its selection. Pressing "Space" again on the selected folder or file cancels
the selection.
109
2. Continuous selection (“Ctrl-b”): This selects all of the items from the point
where this command is executed to the item where the cursor is located. *
appears in front of the selected items.
3. Select all (“Ctrl-a”): This selects all the files and folders in the current list.
You can use navigation keys to move among the selected items to check
their selection status. You can cancel selections or reselect de-selected
items by pressing "Space". When the "Select All" command is executed, the
Voice Sense QWERTY says the number of selected files, and * appears in
front of the selected files on the Braille display (When connected to
SyncBraille).
4.1.3 Cancel / Exit
Cancel (“ESC”): This command will cancel a function.
Exit (“Alt-F4”): This will cancel or stop a selected function or exit the program.
4.2 Working with Files and Folders
When you open the "File Manager," the list of available drives is displayed.
Navigate to the drive you wish to access, and press "Enter" to open it. The
Voice Sense QWERTY displays the list of folders and files on that drive. The
items in quotation marks are folders, and the items without quotation marks
are files.
The items in the list are followed by numbers, such as 1/5 or 2/5. The
numbers following the items indicate an item's placement in the list and the
total number of items in the list. For example, "database 1/5," indicates
"database" is the first folder in a list containing five items.
4.2.1 Selecting drives
When you open the "File Manager," the first item in the list is "flashdisk". If
an SD card or USB flash drive is inserted, it also appears in this list.
110
Navigate to and select a drive by using the up and down arrows or the scroll
buttons. After selecting your desired drive, press "Enter" to open it.
4.2.2 Entering and Exiting Folders
There are several ways to open a folder. You can utilize the menu to open a
specific folder.
1) Bring up the menu by pressing “Alt”. Select the "Open" option from the list
and press "Enter".
2) You can also press the hot key “Ctrl-o” to activate the "Open" command
and open the desired folder.
3) Finally, as described above, you can simply press "Enter" on the selected
folder.
To exit the current folder, use the "Backspace" key. You are returned to the
previous level in the folder structure.
4.2.3 Opening a File
You can open a file by pressing "Enter" on the selected item. You can also
use “Ctrl-o” to open a file or folder. The Voice Sense QWERTY automatically
loads the appropriate application or program to open the chosen file.
You can also open a file by using the menu. Press “Alt” to open the menu.
Then, press the letter "o" or press "Enter" on "Open".
The Voice Sense QWERTY supports the following file formats:
1. Document files: hbl, brl, txt, HPF, brf, rtf, doc/docx, PPT/PPTX, PDF and
unprotected EPUB files are supported in the Word Processor.
2. Web formats: url, and html files are supported by the Web browser.
3. Media formats: ac3, asf, asx, m3u, mp2, mp3, ogg, pls, wav, wax, wma,
wmv and flac files are supported by the Media Player.
4. DAISY books, including those from BookShare, NLS, and Open Library
are supported by the DAISY player.
5. zip and EML files are supported directly from the “File Manager”.
111
If you press "Enter" on a file type other than those mentioned above, the
"Open With" dialog box appears, because the file type is not associated with
a program. You can also bring up the "Open With" dialog box using the
menu. By using the "Open With" menu option, you can open the currently
selected file with a program other than the one originally associated with that
file type. First, press “Alt” to bring up the menu. Navigate to "Open With," and
press "Enter". You can jump quickly to this option in the menu by pressing
"e". You can also open the dialog box by pressing "Ctrl-h" from the file list.
This dialog box consists of the "Open With" list, the "adopt" list, a "Confirm"
button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move between these elements by
pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". Within the list, you can select the next item by
pressing "down arrow” and the previous item by pressing “up arrow”.
When the dialog box opens, "Open with: Word processor" is displayed. In
this list, you can select a program, the Word Processor, Media Player, or
Web Browser. Pressing “down arrow” selects the next program, and “up
arrow” selects the previous program. Once you have selected the program
with which to open the file type, press “Tab” to move to the "adopt" list. If you
have selected the Word Processor, pressing “Tab” takes you to an additional
list called "Open mode". Using this list, you can specify whether the file is
opened as a Braille file or a text file. Press “down arrow” or “up arrow” to
select one of the two file types, then press “Tab” to move to the "Apply to"
radio button. Use this radio button, to specify whether only the currently
selected file or all of the files with the same file extension are opened with
the specified program. After setting your preference, press "Enter" or “Tab”
to move to the "Confirm" button, and then press "Enter" to apply the settings.
If you have specified a program that does not support the file type, nothing is
displayed or played after the program is launched.
If you activate the "Open With" menu after focusing on folders that have
DAISY or media files, the associated program, DAISY or Media Player is
displayed. If you activate the "Open With" menu, and encounter a folder that
does not have the DAISY info file (discinfo.html or ncc.html), the DAISY
Player is not displayed as an associated program. You can play all of the
files after selecting either the DAISY or Media Player.
112
4.2.4 Send To
You can use this option to copy files and folders to different drives such as a
flash drive, USB flash drive (also known as USB stick memory), or an SD
card. After selecting files and folders, open the menu with “Alt”, and choose
the "Send To" option. When you press "Enter" on "Send To", the Voice
Sense QWERTY displays the list of drives that you can send your files or
folders to. You can choose a destination drive by using the “Up arrow” or
“Down arrow” or up and down scroll buttons. Pressing "Enter" on the desired
drive starts the copying of the selected files and folders to the selected drive.
You can activate the "Send To" option by pressing “Ctrl-s” from the file list.
4.2.5 Copy / Move
"Copy" leaves the selected files and folders in their original locations, and
creates copies of them in your chosen destinations. "Move" removes the
selected files and folders from their original locations, and moves them to the
new locations you have chosen.
Use the copy/move function as follows:
1. Select the files and folders you wish to copy.
2. Open the menu, and choose "Copy" from the list to copy the selected files
and folders. You can execute the "Copy" command directly from the file list
by pressing "Control -c". If you want to move the selected files and folders,
choose "Cut" from the menu. Use "Control-x" to execute the "Cut" command
directly from the file list. When the "Copy" or "Cut" command is executed, the
Voice Sense QWERTY returns to the file list.
3. Navigate to the destination folder.
4. Open the menu, and choose "Paste". Press "Enter" on "Paste," and your
selected files and folders are copied or moved. You can press "Control-v" to
execute the "paste" command directly from the file list.
If the destination folder is the same as the source folder, the Voice Sense
QWERTY attaches "Copy1" to your original file names. If the same files are
copied into the same folder a second time, the Voice Sense QWERTY
attaches "Copy2" to the original file names.
113
If your destination folder has the same name as the file you are copying, the
Voice Sense QWERTY prompts "File xxx already exists. Overwrite? Yes".
Press "Enter" if you want to replace the file. If you do not want to overwrite
the file, select "No," and press "Enter". When "No" is selected, the "Paste"
function is canceled.
4.2.6 Delete Files or Folders
To delete files or folders, navigate to the folders or files you want to delete,
and select them. Open the menu by pressing “Alt” and choose the "Delete"
option. Press "Enter" on "Delete" to complete the deletion of the selected
files and folders. You can also press the letter "d" after opening the menu to
delete the selected items. You can also delete selected files or folders by
using hot keys. “Del” is the hotkey assigned to perform the delete function.
When you delete only one file or one folder, it is not necessary to use the
select function. Instead, simply navigate to the file or folder you want to
delete, and use one of the methods previously described to delete the file or
folder.
4.2.7 Rename
You can change the name of a file or folder by using this function. To change
the name of a file or folder, move to the file or folder you wish to rename.
Open the menu by using “Alt” choose "Rename" from the menu list and
press "Enter", or press "r" to activate the "Rename" function quickly. You can
also use the hot key "Control-r" to activate the "Rename" function directly
from the file list. The Voice Sense QWERTY asks for a new name. On the
Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille), "New file (or folder) name:
(current file/folder name)" appears. You must type the new file/folder name in
ASCII characters. Press "Enter" after entering a new file name to complete
the renaming process.
You cannot use the following characters in a file name or folder: “|, \, <,
>, ?, :, *”
114
4.2.8 New Document
Use this option to create a new document. There are several ways to access
this function. You can open the menu by pressing “Alt”, navigate to "New
Document" and press "Enter". Or, you can open the menu and press "n".
The hot key for this option in the "File Manager" is "Ctrl-n".
When the new document function is activated, the Voice Sense QWERTY
displays "File type: text (txt)". You can create two types of documents: text
files and Braille files. You can use the down arrow to select the "Braille (brl)"
file format. When you press "Enter" on either "text (txt)" or "Braille (brl)," the
Voice Sense QWERTY displays "New document name: New Document0.txt"
or "New Document0.brl". "New Document0.xxx" is the default file name
based on the file type you have chosen. The number after the new document
increases by one whenever you create a new document for which you do not
specify a name. You can also type in the document name you prefer and
press "Enter". The new document you named is created. “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *”
characters cannot be used when creating a file name.
4.2.9 New Folder
Use this option to create a new sub-folder under the current folder. Open the
menu in the "File Manager" by pressing “Alt” and select "New Folder" from
the menu list. Press "Enter" on "New Folder" to activate this function. You
can use the letter "f" to jump the new folder option in the menu. "Alt-f" is the
hot key that you use to access this feature directly from the file list.
The Voice Sense QWERTY prompts, "New folder name:,". Enter your
preferred new folder name in ASCII, and press "Enter". Your new folder is
created.
When creating a new folder name, you cannot use the following characters:
"|, \, <, >, ?, :, *”
4.2.10 File Conversion
115
The "File conversion" function on the Voice Sense QWERTY is similar to the
"Save As" function in the Word Processor. This feature converts files to
different file formats. The Voice Sense QWERTY file conversion feature
supports the following file formats: "Sense Word (hbl)," "Text (txt)," and
"Braille (brl)".
The Voice Sense QWERTY can convert a single file or multiple files at once
to your preferred file format. Select files using the file selection method
described previously. After selecting the files you want to convert, open the
menu by pressing “Alt”. Navigate to the "File Conversion" option, and press
"Enter". You can also use the letter "t” to jump to the file conversion option
from within the menu. Use "Ctrl-t" to execute the "File Conversion" command
directly from the file list.
The Voice Sense QWERTY prompts you to choose the preferred file format.
Use the “up arrow” or “down arrow” to select the desired file format. When
you press "Enter" on the file format you want, the Voice Sense QWERTY
begins converting files to the file format you have chosen. The Voice Sense
QWERTY keeps the original file names for the files you have converted,
except for the file name extension which reflects the new file type. If a file
with the same name and extension already exists, "date" and "time" are
added to the file name.
4.2.11 Select All
This feature selects all the files and folders in the current list. You can
access this feature from the menu, or by using a shortcut key. Press “Alt” to
open the menu. Press the down arrow (“down arrow”) to navigate to "Select
All". Press "Enter" to execute the "Select All" function. You can use the letter
"a" to jump to and execute "Select All" from within the menu. Use "Ctrl-a" to
select all the files and folders in the current list without entering the menu.
When "Select All" is activated, the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "x objects
selected". The Voice Sense QWERTY then returns to the file list.
A * appears in front of each file name you have selected. You can cancel the
selection of a file or folder by pressing "Space". This feature is a convenient
method for selecting multiple files for copying, cutting, or deleting.
116
4.2.12 Search for File
Use the "Search for File" function to locate a file or folder for which you know
all or part of the name, but not the location. You can press "Alt” to open the
menu and move to "Search for File," and press "Enter". Or use b to jump to
and execute the search function from within the menu. You can press "Ctrl-f"
to activate this function directly from the file list. The Voice Sense QWERTY
displays the "file for find" dialog box.
The dialog box consists of the "edit box for entering the text of the name to
search", a "combo box to select a drive", "check box enabling to choose
whether or not to search sub-folders", a "search button", a "cancel button"
and the results list. You can use “Tab” or "shift-tab" to move through the
controls.
When you activate the file search, the unit prompts "File for find:" and you
are placed on the edit box for entering the file name to search". Type all or
part of the file name and press "Enter". Voice Sense QWERTY searches for
all files containing the text you entered. When the file search is complete,
you are placed in the results list.
You can navigate among the items in the results list with the “Up arrow” or
“Down arrow”. If you press "Enter" on a file, you are placed on the path
where the file is stored and the file search dialog box is closed. You can
open the file by pressing "Enter" on the file name again.
If you want to search for a file on another drive, after typing the file name,
press “Tab” to move to the "target disk" combo box. You can press “Up
arrow” or “Down arrow” to navigate to a different drive. If you press "Enter"
either on a specific drive or on the "Search button," Voice Sense QWERTY
searches that drive for files matching the text you entered in the edit box.
The drive list displays all storage devices currently connected to the Voice
Sense QWERTY. If there are many files in a drive, it can take some time to
perform a search. While the search is being performed, "searching" is
displayed to alert you to the fact that the search is active.
If you want to search the root of a drive excluding sub-folders, press “Tab” to
move to the "Search sub-folders" check box. Press "Space" to uncheck this
117
option, and press "Enter". By default, Voice Sense QWERTY includes subfolders when you search for files.
4.2.13 Sort Files
This option is used to specify the order in which files and folders are
displayed in the file list. Press “Alt” to bring up the menu. Navigate to "Sort
Files By," and press "Enter". Or, press (g" from within the menu to jump to
and execute this option. You can access this feature directly from the file list
by pressing "Ctrl-g"
Files and folders can be sorted according to the following: "Name," "Size,"
"Extension," and "Date and Time". You can move among these items by
pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”. Press "Enter" after selecting the sorting
criterion, and files and folders are displayed in the specified order. If you
select "Name" or "Extension," the list is sorted in ascending order, and if you
select "Size" or "Date and Time," the list is sorted in descending order. By
default, files and folders in the file list are sorted by "Name" with folders
appearing at the top of the list, and files appearing at the bottom. Once you
have chosen how you want your file and folder lists sorted, the option is
stored so that files are sorted according to your preference each time you
open the "File Manager".
4.2.14 Set File Info
This item is used to set what kind of information is displayed for each item in
the file list. Press “Alt” to bring up the menu. Navigate to "Set File Info," and
press "Enter". Or press "i" to quickly access this item from within the menu.
You can access this feature directly from the file list by pressing "Ctrl-i"
Use this option to select the information to be displayed for each item in a list.
The available options are, "Name," "Name, Size," and "Name, Size, Date
and Time". You can move among these items by pressing "down arrow or
“up arrow”. Press "Enter" after selecting the information to be displayed, and
the file list is updated, showing all the information you specified. By default,
only names are displayed in the "file list". If you have selected "Name, Size,"
118
the name and size of files are displayed. However, for folders, size is not
displayed. This option is stored and remains in effect until a hard reset is
performed.
4.2.15 Display only Files of Type
This is used to specify what type of files are displayed in the file list. Press
“Alt” to bring up the menu. Navigate to "Display only Files Of Type," and
press "Enter". Or press w to quickly access this option from within the menu.
You can also access this feature directly from the file list by pressing "Ctrl-w"
Choose which files are displayed by selecting one of the following items: "All
Files," "Sense Word Files," "MS Word Files," "Text Files," "Braille files,"
"HTML Files," "URL Files," "Media Files," and "Wave Files". You can move
among these items by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”. Press "Enter"
after selecting the file type you want, and only the files of the specified type
are displayed in the file list. Folders are displayed no matter which type you
have specified. By default, all files are displayed in the file list. This setting
remains in effect only until you close the "File Manager," so all the files are
displayed once again on restart of the "File Manager".
4.2.16 Zip
With this function, you can compress files and folders into a zip file.
Compressing a file makes the total file size smaller, making it easier to email,
or to save space on a storage device. To use the "Zip" function, follow these
steps:
1) Select the files or folders you want to compress in the "file list" by using
one of the methods described previously.
2) Open the menu by pressing “Alt”," and press "Enter" on "Zip". Or, from
within the menu, press "z". You can also activate this function directly from
the file list by pressing "Ctrl-z".
3) Voice Sense QWERTY prompts, "Zip filename: (default filename.zip)".
"Default filename" is the file name that is used for the compressed file if you
119
try to compress only one file or folder. If you try to compress several files or
folders, the default name is the folder name that contains the files and
folders.
4) Press "Enter" (or Tab to "Confirm" and press "Enter", and the zip file is
created in the current directory. If you want to change the name of the zip file,
you can modify the default by using the cursor keys or type in a new name. If
you want to cancel, press "Esc" or "Alt-F4". Or, Tab to "Cancel" and press
"Enter".
4.2.17 Unzip
The "Unzip" function allows you to unzip (or decompress) a zip file,
regardless of whether it was created on Voice Sense QWERTY or a PC. To
activate the "Unzip" function, use the following steps:
1) After selecting a zip file, open the menu with “Alt”, and press "Enter" on
"Unzip". Or, press "u" from within the menu. You can also activate this
function directly from the file list by pressing "Ctrl-u" when placed on a zip file.
2) Voice Sense QWERTY prompts, "Unzip to folder name: (default folder
name)". The default folder name is the same as the compressed file name.
For example, if you unzip a file called "test.zip," "unzip folder name: test" is
displayed.
3) Press "Enter," or move to "Confirm" by pressing “Tab” and press "Enter".
The Voice Sense QWERTY unzips the files to the default folder. If you want
to change the default folder name, you can modify the default folder name.
Or, you can type a new name. If you want to cancel, press "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
You can also move to the "Cancel" button by pressing “Tab”, and press
"Enter".
Note: You can also initiate the unzip process simply by pressing "Enter" on a
zip file.
4.2.18 Information
Use this option to query The Voice Sense QWERTY for information about
files and folders (the file/folder’s properties). The information feature in the
120
"File Manager" provides you with information about the file type, file size, the
date and time of the file or folder's creation, and whether the file/folder is
protected. Press “Alt” to open the menu. Navigate to "Information" and press
"Enter". Use the letter "P" to open the "Information" feature quickly from
within the "menu". "Alt-Enter" is the hot key for this option. You can use this
hot key to access this feature directly from the file list.
The Voice Sense QWERTY displays the information about a file or folder in
the following order: file type, file size, creation date and time, and attribute.
You can review this information by pressing “Tab”.
1. File type: Displays the file format information, such as "brl file," "doc file,"
or "txt file". When a folder is selected, this area indicates that the item is a
folder containing x number of files and folders.
2. File size: displays the size of the selected file or folder. When multiple files
or folders are selected, this area displays the total size of the selected files
and folders.
3. Date and time: Displays the time and date the folder/file was created or
modified.
4. Attribute: Displays whether the file is write protected or is writable. You
can change this attribute by using the “Up arrow” or “Down arrow” or "space”.
When multiple files or folders are selected, this attribute is not shown.
5. Confirm: To change the attribute, press "Enter" on "Confirm".
6. Cancel: To cancel the change, press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button.
4.2.19 Share Folder On Network
The Voice Sense allows you to share folders over a network, so that you
may access them from other devices, such as computers, on the network.
After selecting a folder you want to share open the menu with "Alt" and
press "Enter" on "Share This Folder on a Network". Or, press J from within
the menu. You can also activate this function directly from the file list by
pressing "Alt-S" when placed on the folder you want to share. The Voice Sense prompts, "Folder successfully shared, please reset your
Voice Sense". If a folder is shared, this menu item reads "Do not share this
121
Folder". You can unshare a folder by selecting it and choosing the "Do Not
Share this Folder" item from the menu, or by pressing "Alt-U". 4.2.20 Set Local Security
If you have chosen to share folders over a network, you may wish to
require a username and password for access to the folder in order to
ensure others cannot gain unauthorized access to the shared folders on
your Voice Sense. To secure your folder, select the folder and open the
menu with "Alt" and press "Enter" on "Local Security Setting" Or, press "Y"
from within the menu. You can also activate this function directly from the
file list by pressing "Alt-P" when placed on the folder you want to secure. The "Local Security Setting" dialog contains 4 items: "Username" computer
edit box, "Password" computer edit box, a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel"
button. You can move among the items using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". To secure your folder with a username and password, type the username
and password you wish to use into the respective computer edit boxes.
Press "Enter" to save your settings, or Tab to "Confirm" and press "Enter".
If you do not wish to save your settings, Tab to "Cancel" and press "Enter"
or press "Escape" or "Alt-F 4". 4.2.21 EML Viewer
The Voice Sense QWERTY allows you to view and interact with EML files (email message files) directly from within the File Manager. E-mail messages
created and received using the E-mail program on the Voice Sense are
stored in the “E-mail” folder on the unit’s flashdisk. The e-mail folder contains
“pop3” and “Imap” folders consisting of subfolders for each account in that
category. Each account folder contains folders for each mailbox, which, in
turn, contain the message or “EML” files.
At times, you may find it more efficient to access a specific e-mail using the
File Manager as you do not have to wait for the e-mail program to load the
122
mailboxes, etc. Use normal file and folder navigation as described previously
to access the EML file, or rather, the message you wish to locate. When you
have located the message you wish to open, you can open it in the EML
Viewer by pressing “Enter”.
The EML Viewer opens the message, and places you in the message body.
The “EML Viewer” dialog contains 7 controls: “Subject” static box, “Date”
static box, “From” static box, “Message Body” multi-line edit box, “”Attach”
file list box (only appears if message contains attachment), Forward” button,
“Reply” button, and “Close” button. You can move among the controls using
“Tab” or “Shift-Tab”.
From within the Message body, use normal file reading commands to
navigate the message. (see section 5, Word processor for more details) You
may also forward or reply to a message from the EML Viewer. To forward a
message, tab to the “Forward” button and press “Enter” or press “Control-f”.
from within the message. To reply to a message, tab to the “Reply” button
and press “Enter” or press “Control-r” from within the message.
When either “Forward” or “Reply” is launched, you are placed on the “To”
field of a new message dialog. Create the forwarded or reply message just
as you would in the Voice Sense QWERTY’s “E-mail” program. (see section
8 of this manual.)
To close the EML file/message and return to the file list, tab to the “Close”
button and press “Enter” or press “Alt-F4”.
4.3 Using the Address Window
This edit box lets you type the direct path of the file name you want to open.
This window also contains the history list for easily accessing recently
opened files or directories.
123
4.3.1 Editing
When you are in a file or folder list, you can press “Tab” to navigate to the
address window. The Voice Sense QWERTY displays the current path
including the current drive name, such as "flashdisk/download/". When you
edit the path, use the cursor routing keys to move the cursor to the place
where you wish to modify the text of the path. When you first enter the
address window, the cursor is located at the end of the path name.
The address window is only visible when you are in a file or folder list. When
you are in the drive list, the address window is not available.
4.3.2 Typing a Path / File Name
When you relocate the cursor with a cursor routing key, the Voice Sense
QWERTY inserts the text at the cursor location. If you know the exact path
and file name, you can type in the path and file name to open the file with the
appropriate application. For example, if you type in "flashdisk/download" in
the address window and press "Enter," the Voice Sense QWERTY displays
the list of the files in the download folder. If you type "flashdisk/My
Documents/sample.txt" in the address window, and press "Enter," the Voice
Sense QWERTY loads the Word Processor, and opens the file "sample.txt".
When the file is open, you can read or edit the file, "sample.txt".
4.3.3 Opening the History List
The history list contains paths, folders, and files that you have opened
previously. You can access the history list from within the address window
by pressing the down arrow. Use the “Up arrow” or “Down arrow” to review
the history list. You can also use the scroll buttons to navigate this list. To
open a file in the history list, press "Enter". The file opens with the
appropriate application. (See section 4.2.3).
While navigating the history list, you may type in new path names or file
names to instantly access a file or folder.
124
4.4 Network and sharing
The network file sharing function enables you to share files between your
Voice Sense QWERTY and computers connected to the same network, and
access files on other computers just as you would files located directly on
your Voice Sense QWERTY.
In other words, you can copy files on the Voice Sense from other computers
on the network, edit files on other computers with the Word Processor or
even open media files on other devices and play them in the Media Player
on the Voice Sense QWERTY. In addition, you can share folders on your
Voice Sense QWERTY and access them from other computers connected to
the network.
You can share files over a network using LAN or WIRELESS LAN. When
using LAN, once the Voice Sense QWERTY is connected, you can easily
find and access the shared files of other computers connected to the
network.
However, when using wireless LAN, it is only possible to access shared files
when your Voice Sense QWERTY and the connected computer are at the
same layer. This means that you can't search for a computer connected to
router A if you are connected to router B, a wireless LAN sub-connection of
router A.
For more detailed information on LAN/WIRELESS LAN configurations, refer
to the "Setup Internet" section of the "Utilities" chapter in this user manual.
4.4.1 Search for shared computers and add to the network
list.
When you open the "File Manager", network is displayed in the drive list. The
network list consists of the shared folders on computers connected to your
network that you have added to the network list. From the network list, you
can open the shared folder, or delete the network location from the list. If you
have not added shared folders to the network list, this list is empty. To add
items to the network list, you must search the network for devices, then
select the shared folders on these devices and add them to the network list.
125
To search shared computers connected to the network, Use the "Network
Connection Setting" dialog to search for computers with shared content. You
can open the "Setup Network connection" dialog box, by pressing "Alt-e"
regardless of your position in the File Manager. Or Press “Alt” to open the
menu and navigate to "Network Connection Setting" and press "Enter".
The "Network Connection Setting" dialog box contains the following controls:
"Remote name" computer edit box
"Remote folder" list box
"Add/Remove" button
"Cancel" button
When the "Network connection Setting" dialog box is opened using "Alt-e",
you are placed on the "Computer name" edit box. Type the computer name
with or without backslashes and press "Enter".
For example, if the computer name you want to search is "hims", type
"\\hims" or "hims" and press "Enter". If the shared computer is found, a login
prompt may be displayed according to the shared computer setting.
If the computer is running Windows vista or Windows 7, you must enter the
folder path as shown below.
Ex) "\\hims\sharing", "hims\music"
Note: if the shared folder name exceeds 11 characters, it cannot be
recognized by the Voice Sense QWERTY.
If the computer you are trying to access does not have a network user name
and password specified, type "guest" in the Login edit box and press "Enter".
If the computer requires a specific network user name and password, make
sure they are entered correctly. If login is successful, you are placed in the
Remote Folder list and the folders shared on that computer appear in the list.
Move to the desired folder in the list and press "Enter" on the "Add" button.
The network location of the shared folder is added to the network list in the
File Manager. You may select as many folders as you wish from the Remote
Folder list and add them to the network list.
126
Use the following keystrokes to navigate the "Network Connection Setting"
dialog:
Move to the next control: "Tab”
Move to the previous control: "Shift-Tab"
Use the following keystrokes in the Remote Folder list.
Move to the next item in the list: "down arrow”
Move to the previous item in the list: "up arrow”
Select current item: Space
Select all items: Enter-a
Use the "Add" button, to add the selected shared folder from the Remote
Folder list to the File Manager's network list. From the Remote Folder list,
press "enter" to exit the "Network connection Setting" dialog box. YOU can
also cancel using "Alt-F4" or "Esc".
Once the network locations of the shared folders have been added to the list,
they are accessible from the "network" option in the File Manager as long as
you are connected to the network where they reside. In other words, if you
have added a location for a shared folder on your home network, you cannot
access this location from your office as you are no longer connected to the
home network on which the shared folder is located. Also remember that you
cannot access shared folders on a network if you do not have a wireless or
LAN connection to that network.
4.4.2 Remove Remote folder
There are 2 ways to remove a remote folder from the File Manager's network
list: using the "Remove" option in the network list, or via the "Network
Connection Setting" dialog.
Using the network list:
Execute the File Manager and choose "network" from the drive list. Navigate
to the remote folder you want to remove and press "Del".
127
You can also access this function using the menu. Press “Alt” to open the
menu. Arrow down to "Remove this remote folder on network" and press
"Enter".
Using the "network connection setting" dialog:
Press "Alt-e" to open the "network connection setting" dialog. Navigate to the
remote folder you want to remove. Press “Tab” to navigate to the "Remove"
button and press "Enter".
4.5 Hot Keys in the "File Manager"
The following is a list of hot keys that can be used in the File Manager
1. Open: Ctrl-o
2. Open with: Ctrl-h
3. Zip: Ctrl-z
4. Unzip: Ctrl-u
5. Send To: Ctrl-s
6. Copy: Ctrl-c
7. Cut: Ctrl-x
8. Paste: Ctrl-v
9. Delete: DEL
10. Rename: control-r
11. New document: Ctrl-n
12. New folder: Alt-f
13. File conversion: Ctrl-t
14. Select all: Ctrl-a
15. Sort files by: Ctrl-g
16. Set file info: Ctrl-i
17. Display only files of type: Ctrl-w
18. Search for file: Ctrl-f
19. Information: Alt-Enter
20. Setup Network connection: Alt-e
21. Remove remote folder on network Alt-u
128
5. Word Processor
You can execute the “Word Processor” in a couple of ways:
1. Press “Windows” to bring up the main “Program” menu.
Navigate to “Word Processor” using the DOWN arrow,
and press “Enter”.
2. Type “W” from the main menu to quickly jump to and
open the “Word Processor”.
3. You can launch the “Word Processor” from anywhere on
the unit by pressing “Windows-W”.
When you launch the Word Processor on the Voice Sense QWERTY, you are placed in a new, blank document. The menu can be opened by pressing “Alt”. Don't worry if you can't remember the exact shortcut keys for all of the Word Processor functions, as you can activate all the functions of the Word Processor via the Word Processor menu. The menu in the Word Processor consists of File, Edit, Go To, Read, and Layout. To access these menus, press “Alt” in the Word Processor, select a menu item, and press "Enter". Or, you can press “Alt” followed by the shortcut for the corresponding menu item. For example to open the edit menu, press “Alt” to open the menu, and navigate to the Edit menu by pressing “Up arrow” or “Down arrow” and press "Enter". Or, press “Alt” and press "e". Before going in to more detail about the Word Processor, it is also important
to note that while you are anywhere in a document, you can discover your
location by pressing "Fn-s". In addition, if you are editing a document, and
turn the Voice Sense QWERTY off, it announces the status when you power
back on. In the next few sections the features of the Word Processor are
explained in more detail. The functions of each of the available menu items
are also explained.
5.1 File Menu
The "File" menu contains the functions that allow you to create new
documents, open documents saved to a disk, save edited documents, and
print and emboss. It also contains various option settings. To select the file
menu, press “Alt”, and press "f". Or, press "Enter" on "File".
129
5.1.1 New
The new command creates a new, editable document. By default, the name
of the new document is "noname.txt". The extension, ".txt" is the extension
given to text documents that are created on the Voice Sense QWERTY. It is
the same file name that is created automatically when the Word Processor
opens.
Note: if you have changed your default document type in the "Global
Options", the extension may be “.brl” or “HBL”, as your default document
type can be set to Braille, text, or Sense document.
To create a new document, select "New" from the "File" menu. Or, press
"Ctrl-n". If "New" is executed while editing another document, you are
prompted for the file type of the new document: "Sense Document (s)" is
displayed first. If you press “down arrow” repeatedly, "Braille Document (b)"
and "Text Document (t)" are displayed. Select the document type you want,
and press "Enter".
"New" refers to creating a new, blank document after closing the document
that is currently being edited. Closing the document currently being edited
means that the document is erased from the temporary memory. If a new
document is created or opened without saving the document currently being
edited, the Voice Sense QWERTY asks whether to save the current
document, so that changes to it are not lost. When "Save: Yes" is displayed,
users can select "Yes" To save the current document or select "No" in order
not to save the changes. If you press "Space" once more and select
"Cancel", the Word Processor cancels the new document, and returns to the
current document.
5.1.2 Open
The open command opens a document that has already been savedto a
disk. Select “Open” from the “File” menu, or press “Ctrl-o”. The “Open File”
dialog is displayed.
130
The "Open dialog" is a tool that helps you find documents that you want to
edit and read. It consists of the "file list" (the list of files or folders in the
current directory), "File name" (an edit box for typing the file name directly),
"Type" (for choosing the format of the file you want to open), a "Confirm"
button (for confirming the selection), and a "Cancel" button (for canceling
the selection). To move among the controls, press “tab” or “shift-tab”.
When the "Open dialog" is executed, you are placed in the "File name:" edit
box. YOU can type in a file name that you want to open, and press "Enter".
The Voice Sense QWERTY searches for the file in the "/flashdisk/My
Documents" folder. If you have recently accessed other files, you can scroll
through them by pressing “Up arrow” or “Down arrow”or the up and down
scroll buttons. You can open a selected file by pressing "Enter". If you select
a folder and press "Enter", the list of files in that folder is displayed.
To access a file that is on an SD card or USB memory stick, you can access
the file in the "Open" dialog by moving to the "file list" using "shift-tab”. Then,
press "Backspace" until you reach the drive list. Use “Up arrow” or “Down
arrow” to navigate among the drives until you reach the USB stick memory
or the Sd card. Press "Enter" to open the storage device and the files and
folders are displayed.
When opening documents, The Voice Sense QWERTY chooses the Braille
grade depending upon the file type. For example, if you press "Enter" to
select a file that has the extensions hbl or brl, or if you type in a file name
with those extensions and press "Enter", the Voice Sense QWERTY opens
the selected file in Grade 2 Braille. You are not able to change the Braille
grade in these documents. If you press "Enter" to select a file that has the
extensions txt or doc, it opens the file according to the "View/Input grade"
setting in "Global Options". After the file opens, you can switch the Braille
grade among computer Braille, uncontracted Braille, and grade 2 Braille,
using "FN-g".
The Word Processor allows you to open and work with up to 10 files
simultaneously. If you already have one document open, and you try to open
another document, the Voice Sense QWERTY asks you to save changes to
the document that is already open. Once the document is saved, an open
dialog appears. However, your original document remains open. You can
131
move among open documents by pressing "shift-tab” for the previous
document, and "tab” to move to the next document.
5.1.3 Save
The save command saves a document to a disk. To use this option, press
“Alt” to open the "File" menu and execute the "Save" command by pressing
"Enter" on it, or you can press "s" to quickly jump to and execute it. You can
also use the hot key, “Ctrl-s” while editing a document.
If the document has not been saved previously, when you execute "Save",
the "Save as dialog" opens. You can refer to section 5.1.4 for information on
using the "Save as dialog".
If you execute "Save" after editing an existing document, Voice Sense
QWERTY saves the document with your changes under the same file name
without opening a dialog. After saving a document, you are returned to
document editing.
When you have several documents open, you can save and close the
focused document, by pressing "Ctrl-F4". The document is saved and closed,
and your focus is placed in the previous document in the tab order.
Note:
1) Though you can open PDF and unprotected EPUB files in the Word
Processor, they cannot be saved under these file types as editing in these
formats is not supported. If you save one of these documents, the "Save as"
dialog opens so that you can save in one of the file types supported by the
Voice Sense QWERTY.
2) When saving as "rtf" and "doc", the file formatting is lost as the creation of
advanced formatting is not supported in the Voice Sense QWERTY.
5.1.4 Save As
The "Save As" option is used to save a document under a different file name,
in a different location, or as a different file type. To execute this command,
132
press “Alt”, and press "Enter" when the "File" menu is displayed. Move to
"Save As" by pressing “down arrow”. Then, press "Enter". Or, use the hot
key, "Ctrl-s", while editing a document.
If you execute "Save As", the "Save as dialog" is displayed. This dialog is
almost the same as the "Open" dialog. It consists of "file list", "File name",
"Type" (representing the file format), a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel"
button. When the dialog opens, "File name:" is displayed. You can move
among the controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
If you execute "Save As" when you are editing an existing document, the
displayed file name, file format, and the folder are the same as those of the
existing file. When executing "Save as", on "PDF" and "EPUB", documents,
the formatting is lost as these files are converted to txt format on opening.
If you execute "Save" or "Save As" while in a new document, the displayed
default file name is "noname.brl" and the file path is "flashdisk/My
Documents/".
To edit the displayed file name, press the cursor routing key at the position
you want to edit, and modify it. Or, to create a new file name, simply type in
the new file name to overwrite what is currently in the edit box. You cannot
use the following characters in a file or folder name. “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *”
To change the file format, navigate to "Type". Move to your desired file
format by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
To save a file with a file name that is in the file list, move to the "file list" by
pressing "shift-tab".
5.1.5 Saving password Protected Files
The Voice Sense QWERTY allows you to encrypt and password protect files
which you do not wish for anyone else to be able to open, accidentally or
otherwise. Before you save a document as a protected file, you must set a
password in the “Settings” option under the “File” menu. Press “Alt” to open
the menu, navigate to “settings”, and press “Enter”. Press “tab” twice to
move to the “Set Password” button, and press “Enter”.
133
The “Set Password” dialog consists of 5 items: “Delete the original file”
checkbox, “, a “Password?” edit box, a “Retype Password” edit box, a
“confirm” button, and a “cancel” button. Move among the items in the dialog
by pressing “Tab” and “Shift-Tab”.
The “Delete the original file” checkbox allows you to choose whether, when
you save the file as a protected file, the original is deleted. If you wish to
delete the original file, press “Space” to check this box. By default, it is
unchecked.
Once you have chosen whether to delete the original file, tab to each of the
edit boxes for typing the password, and type it using computer Braille. When
the password is entered in both edit boxes, Tab to the “Confirm” button and
press “Enter” to save your password. The unit announces, “Set password
completed” and returns you to the “settings” dialog. If you decide you do not
wish to save your password, Tab to “Cancel” and press “Enter” or press “AltF4”.
When you have created and saved a password for the file you wish to
protect, access the “Save as” dialog as described in the previous section,
and choose “HPF” (HIMS Protected File) as your file type. Your document is
encrypted and password protected. The next time you open the document,
you are prompted for the password you created. To open the document, type
it in and press “Enter”.
Note: When saving protected files, please ensure you make note of the
password used to protect them. Use passwords you can remember, and
make note when typing them that they are typed correctly. Though it is not
impossible, recovering password protected documents is extremely difficult,
and your document will need to be sent to HIMS for decryption.
5.1.6 Close Current Document
134
The "Close Current Document" command allows you to close the currently
focused document without closing the Word Processor. You can access the
"Close Current Document" command by pressing “Alt”. Then, press "Enter"
on the "File" menu. Use the “Up arrow” or “Down arrow” to navigate to
"Close Current Document", and press "Enter". Or, you can press "q" in the
"File" menu. You can also access this function by pressing "Ctrl-F4" while
editing a document. Please note that this function is not available if you only
have one document open. You must have at least two or more documents
open to execute the "Close Current Document" command.
5.1.7 Print
The "Print" command is used to print or emboss the current document. To
execute this command, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on the "File" menu.
Then, move to "Print" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter", or just
press "p”. While editing a document, the hot key for printing is "Ctrl-p". There
are two lower level dialogs for the "Print" option. One is for printing with an
ink printer, and the other is for embossing in Braille. Remember that you can
move between the menu items by using “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
1. Embossing in Braille
Open the document that you want to emboss. Press “Alt” to activate the
menu. Locate "print" in the "File" menu and select "Embosser", or press "b".
When you select "Embosser (b)" above, the "Embosser dialog" is opened
and contains the following items:
1) Start page number
This is the first page number to be embossed. The default page number is
set to 1. You can change the value of the page number, by typing in a new
value. Press “down arrow” to move to "End page number"
2) End page number
This is the last page number to be embossed. The default value is set to
100000. This means the document is embossed to the end of the document,
unless the document exceeds 100000 pages. To change the value, input the
number of the end page. Use “down arrow” to move to "Number of copies").
135
3) Number of copies
This option designates the number of copies to be embossed. The default
value is set to 1. You can change this number by typing your desired number
of copies. Press “down arrow” to navigate to "Set Braille format".
4) Set Braille format
In this option, you can set whether or not the Braille document layout
settings specified in Voice Sense QWERTY are used when embossing. If
you set this to "Yes", the document is embossed using the Braille document
layout settings in Voice Sense QWERTY. If you set it to "No", the document
is embossed in the format specified in the original document.
5) Confirm / Cancel
To begin embossing the document, move to "Confirm" by pressing “Tab”,
and press "Enter". Or, to cancel embossing, move to "Cancel" by pressing
“Tab”, and press "Enter".
When "Enter" is pressed on "Confirm", "Print: Yes" is displayed. Press
"Enter" on "Yes", and embossing commences. If you do not want to emboss,
press "Space" to select "No", and press "Enter". You can also choose to
create an electronic Braille file of the document according to the embossing
preferences. To do this, press "Space" once more to select "Save as file",
press "Enter", and the current document is saved as a "brl" file. If you've
chosen to emboss, and there are problems with the Braille printer, the Voice
Sense QWERTY shows an error message and returns to the open document.
2. Print Text
This option is used when you want to print a document on an ink printer. To
do so, open the document to be printed and press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on
the "File" menu. Move to "Print" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly, and
press "Enter". Or just press "p" from the "File" menu. The dialog for the
"Printer" is almost the same as for the "Embosser". After you input the values
as in the embosser dialog, press “Tab” and press "Enter" on "Confirm".
"Print: Yes" is displayed. If "Enter" is pressed, printing commences. If you
136
press "Space" to move to "No", and press "Enter", printing is canceled, and
the Voice Sense QWERTY returns you to the open document.
Note that the Voice Sense QWERTY is compatible with all HP printers
(level PCL 3 or higher), and with HP-compatible printers and Epson printers
using the ESC/P-R library to the compatible printers.
5.1.8 Settings
To change your Word Processor preferences, press “Alt”, and press "Enter"
on "File". Move to "Settings (e)" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly, and
press "Enter" or just press "e” from the "File" menu. While editing a
document, pressing "Ctrl-e" opens the "Settings" dialog.
The "Settings" dialog contains the following: the "settings" list, "Default
folder" button, “Set Password” button, "Confirm" button and a "Cancel"
button. You can move among the controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
And you can move among the items in the settings list by pressing “up arrow”
or “down arrow”.
The following are the settings that can be changed:
1. View format character (Yes/No): If this option is set to "Yes", all of the
format characters are displayed. Use "Space" to toggle this option. A
"carriage return is shown as “$p", and a "mark is indicated by ‘$pl".
Advanced formatting is indicated by the following characters:
Font properties:
$sf $ef à Start/End font
$n à Font Name(ex: $nAr à Arial, $nTNR à Times New Roman, $nWi à
$Wingdings).
$s à Font Size
$c à Font Color
$sb $eb à Start/End bold
$si $ei à Start/End italic
$su $eu à Start/End underline
137
Table formatting:
$stb $etb à Start/End table
$str $etr à Start/End table row
$std $etd à Start/End table cell
$w à Table width
$h à Table height
$cp à Table cell padding
$cd à Table cell spacing
$vt à Table align top
$vm à Table align middle
$vb à Table align bottom
Style properties:
$ml à Margin left
$mr à Margin right
$ti à Text indent
$mt à Margin top
$mb à Margin bottom
$lh à Line Height
$c à Align Center
$j à Align Justify
$r à Align Right
$l à Align Left
Miscellaneous:
$sl $el à Start/End Hyper link.
$pg à Page Break
$le à Language English
$ls à Language Spanish
$lf à Language French
$lg à Language German
$li à Language Italic
138
2. Reading unit (Line/Paragraph): Defines the unit of movement when
pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow” while reading a document. If this option
is set to "Line", “up arrow” moves up line by line. If this option is set to
"Paragraph", “up arrow” moves backward in a document paragraph by
paragraph. To toggle between "Line" and "Paragraph", press "Space".
3. Read only (Yes/No): If this option is set to "Yes", the document cannot be
modified. This setting is used to protect the document from any unintentional
modifications. To change it to "No", press "Space".
4. Reading mode (Original/Compressed): This option sets the reading mode.
Original reading mode shows the document in its original format.
In "Compressed" reading mode, The Voice Sense QWERTY displays
document content on the Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille)
continuously without regard to formatting such as carriage returns ($p). To
toggle between "Original" and "Compressed" reading modes, press "Space".
5. Auto scroll speed (1~35): This option sets the duration of displaying one
Braille display length while you are auto scrolling in a document. Thirty-five is
the fastest scrolling speed. Pressing "Space" increases the scroll speed and
"Backspace" decreases it.
6. Automatic save interval (Don't save automatically, 10~60): This option
defines the automatic save time interval for the file that is currently being
edited. The setting time can be increased or decreased by 10 minutes if you
press "Space" or "Backspace" respectively. If you do not wish for the
document to be saved automatically, choose "Don't save automatically".
7. Apply settings to all documents (Yes/No): This option allows you to apply
the current settings to all documents. If "Yes" is selected, the settings apply
to all documents, if "No" is selected, the settings affect only the document
currently being edited. To toggle between "Yes" and "No", press "Space".
8. Support Formatting Documents: (Yes/no). This setting allows you to
choose whether or not to process document formatting when loading
documents that contain advanced formatting features such as Microsoft
Word documents. Press “Space to toggle between “Yes” and “No”.
9. The Word View Display option allows you to choose whether to show text
documents in full display view. Full display view allows a sighted teacher or
assistant to view what is on the notetaker using a PGA monitor. The focused
line of text is shown at the top, followed by a full screen of text below. Use
139
"Space" to toggle "Word View Display" on and off. Or, you can use "ControlAlt-M" to toggle Word Display View on/off directly within a document. Use the
following keystrokes to navigate the full screen view: Read the current line on the visual screen: Alt-FN-S
Move to the first line on the visual screen: Alt-Home
Move to the last line on the visual screen: Alt-End
Move to the previous line on the visual screen: Alt-Up arrow
Move to the next line on the visual screen: Alt-Down arrow
Change the position of the current cursor line to the first line on the visual
screen: Alt-Page Up or FN-Up arrow
Set the highlight color of the current line on the visual screen. (Options are
yellow and black): Alt-U
To change the default save-to folder, move to the "Default folder" button by
pressing "tab" and press "Enter". You are placed in the "file list". Navigate to
the folder or disk you want using normal navigation keys, press "Space" on
the folder you wish to select, and press "Enter".
To set a password for your currently open file, move to the “Set password”
button using “Tab”, and press “Enter”. Set your password as described in
section 5.1.5, “Saving protected Files”.
When you are finished setting your preferences, move to the "Confirm"
button by pressing "tab" and press "Enter". If you do not want to save the
settings, press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button. Activating the "confirm" or
"Cancel" buttons performs the operation and returns you to the document
you are currently editing.
5.1.9 Exit
This command closes the Word Processor. To execute this command, select
"Exit" from the file menu, or press "Alt-F4". If you have edited the document
and have not saved the changes, when you select "Exit", you are prompted
140
to save the current document. You can select "Yes" or "No" with the
spacebar and press "Enter" to exit the Word Processor.
5.2 Edit Menu
On the Voice Sense QWERTY, you can edit all files regardless of what the
view/input grade is set to. The "Edit" menu contains the following items:
"Start Selection", "Copy", "Cut", "Paste", "Delete", "Delete Blank Lines", "Add
To clipboard", "Clear Clipboard", "Select All", "Insert From File", "Insert Date",
"Toggle Insert/Overwrite Mode", and "Check Spelling". To open the menu,
press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "Edit". Or, you can press "e" from the menu.
5.2.1 Start Selection
The "Start Selection" command allows you to select a certain portion of text
that you would like to edit. When you use the "Start Selection" command, the
cursor appears as blinking "dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8" to indicate what text is
being selected. When text is selected, you can make changes to only the
selected text, without affecting the text in the rest of the document. This
command is especially useful for copying, cutting, and pasting.
To select text in a document, place your cursor on the location at which you
want to start selecting text. Press “Alt” to open the "Edit" menu, and press
"Enter" on "Start Selection", or you can press "b" in the "Edit" menu to get to
this option. While editing a document, pressing “Ctrl-b” activates this
command.
The end point of the selected text is determined by the location at which you
place the cursor after setting the start point. For example, if you have typed
the word, "mother" in a document, and you want to select the word "mother",
place the cursor on the letter m, activate the "Start selection command", and
place the cursor directly after the letter r. The word "mother" is selected.
5.2.2 Copy
141
After selecting text in a document, press “Alt” to open the menu, and move to
"Edit" by pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter" to open the "Edit" menu.
Press “down arrow” to move to "Copy" and press "Enter", or press "c" from
the "Edit" menu. While editing a document, pressing "Ctrl-c” activates this
command.
When you copy the selected text, it is copied to the clipboard. The clipboard
is the virtual space that is used for storing copied data temporarily. If you
copy new text to the clipboard, the data in the clipboard that you copied
previously is erased, and is replaced by the current text selection.
5.2.3 Cut
To cut a selection of text, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "Edit". Move to
"Cut" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly, and press "Enter", or press "x"
from the "Edit" menu. While editing a document, pressing "Ctrl-x" activates
the "Cut" command.
The difference between "Cut" and "Copy" is that if you execute the "Cut"
command, the selected text is moved to the clipboard and the selection is
removed from the document. The "Copy" command simply copies the
selection to the clipboard, and the selected text remains in the document.
5.2.4 Paste
To paste selected text to the clipboard, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on
"Edit". Move to "Paste" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly and press
"Enter", or press "v" from the "Edit" menu. While editing a document, press
"Ctrl-v" to paste the text from the clipboard to your current cursor location.
5.2.5 Delete
To delete selected text, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "Edit". Move to
"Delete" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly, and press "Enter", or press
"d" from the "Edit" menu. While editing a document, you can press "Del" to
delete selected text.
142
5.2.6 Delete Blank Lines
To delete blank lines, you must select the area of the document from which
you want the blank lines to be deleted. Once done, press “Alt”, and press
"Enter" on "Edit". Move to "Delete blank lines" using “up arrow” or “down
arrow” and press "Enter", or press "l" from the "Edit" menu. To delete empty
lines while editing a document, press "Alt-e".
5.2.7 Add to Clipboard
To add selected text to the clipboard, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "Edit".
Move to "Add To Clipboard" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter", or
press "p”. While editing a document, pressing "Ctrl-Insert" activates this
command.
"Add To Clipboard" is almost the same as the "Copy" command. However,
while the "Copy" command replaces the text copied previously with the
newly selected text, the "Add To Clipboard" command does not erase the
previously copied data, but appends the newly selected text to the clipboard.
5.2.8 Clear Clipboard
To clear the clipboard, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "Edit". Move to
"Clear Clipboard" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly, and press "Enter".
Or, you can press "e" from the "Edit" menu. Executing the "Clear Clipboard"
command erases everything on the clipboard. While editing a document, you
can press "Ctrl-Del" to activate this command.
5.2.9 Select All
The "Select All" command selects all text in a document. To activate this
command, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "Edit". Move to "Select All" by
pressing “down arrow” repeatedly, and press "Enter", or press "a" from the
"Edit" menu. While editing a document, press "Ctrl-a" to activate this function.
143
5.2.10 Insert from File
This command inserts another file in the document you are currently editing.
To execute this command, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on the "Edit" menu.
Move to "Insert from File" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly and press
"Enter", or press "I" from the "Edit" menu. While editing a document,
pressing “Ctrl-i" activates this function.
When you use this option, an insert dialog is displayed similar to the "Open"
dialog. Select file you want to insert, and press "Enter". The selected file is
inserted at the beginning of the paragraph on which your cursor is located.
When you execute "Insert from File", if the format of the inserted file differs
from your current document, the text inserted from the file is converted to the
file format of the current document. For example, if you insert "sample.txt" in
"sample.brf" and save it, the saved file is "sample.brf".
Note: If you insert a Braille file in to a text file, the Braille document is backtranslated to text. Though the inserted text appears normally in grade 2, on
rare occasions you might see differences in the back-translated text.
5.2.11 Insert Date
To insert the date into your document, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on
"Edit". Move to "Insert Date" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly and press
"Enter", or press "w" from the "Edit" menu. The current date and time "is
inserted at your current cursor location. While editing a document, press
"Ctrl-w" to activate this command.
5.2.12 Insert Time
To use this function, press “Alt”, and press "enter" on "edit". Move to "insert
time" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly and press "enter", or press "t"
from the "edit" menu. The current time is inserted into your document at your
cursor location. While editing a document, press "Alt-w" to activate this
function.
144
5.2.13 Toggling Insert and Overwrite Modes
There are two ways of editing documents on the Voice Sense QWERTY.
The first is to insert your text, which pushes back the text after the cursor.
This is called "Insert mode" because you are simply inserting text. When you
are in "Insert mode", the cursor displays as "dots 7-8". The second is to
overwrite text at the cursor location. This is called "Overwrite mode". In
"Overwrite mode", the cursor displays as blinking "dots 7-8".
When you start the Word Processor (or open a document), "Insert mode" is
the default. You can switch to "Overwrite mode" by pressing "Insert". To
return to "Insert mode", press "Insert" again. You can also access this
function via the menu. Press “Alt”, press "Enter" on "Edit". Navigate to
"Toggle Insert/Overwrite Mode" using “up arrow”, or you can press "m" from
the "Edit" menu.
5.2.14 Check Spelling
This option is used to check spelling while editing a document.
To execute the spell checker, do the following:
1) Open the menu by pressing “Alt”.
2) Move to the "Edit" menu by pressing “down arrow”.
3) Press "Enter" on the "Edit" menu.
4) Press “down arrow” until "Check Spelling" is displayed. Or, press "k" To
move to "Check Spelling" directly.
5) Press "Enter" on "Check Spelling".
Or, you can open the spell checker by pressing "Ctrl-k" while editing a
document.
When "Check Spelling" is executed, a dialog is displayed containing the
following items:
"Range" combo box
145
"Custom dictionary" dialog (c)
"Options" dialog (o)
"Begin" button (b)
"Cancel" button
You can move among the controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
The following explains each item in detail:
The "Range" combo box is used to designate the range to be spell checked.
1. Whole document: check the entire document.
2. Chapter: check the current chapter.
3. Paragraph: check the current paragraph.
4. From cursor to bottom: check from the cursor position to the end of the
document.
5. Current word: check only the word under the cursor.
You can move among the items in the combo box by pressing “up arrow” or
“down arrow”.
When you press "Enter" on the "Custom dictionary" dialog, the following
items are displayed:
1. List: shows the words that are registered in the custom dictionary.
(Example: Braille 1/20). If there are no words registered, "no items" is
displayed.
2. Add word (Alt-a): press "Enter" on this button, and you are prompted to
"Add word:". Type the word you wish to add and press "Enter". The new
word is added and the Voice Sense QWERTY returns to the "Add word"
button.
3. Modify word (Alt-m): select the word to be modified from the "list" and
press "Enter". You are prompted to "Modify word:". Input the correct word
and press "Enter". The selected word is modified and you are returned to the
"Modify word" button.
4. Delete word (Del): select the word to be deleted from the "list" and press
"Enter".
146
5. Close: this command closes the dialog.
You can move among the items by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
When you press "Enter" on the "Options" dialog, the following items are
displayed:
1. Always suggest recommended word: if this option is set to "On", the Voice
Sense QWERTY suggests a word if the word that is encountered is not in
the dictionary. The default is set to "On". If the option is set to "Off", the
Voice Sense QWERTY does not recommend a word. To toggle between
"On" and "Off", press "Space".
2. Use main dictionary only: if this option is set to "On", the spell checker
does not look up any words in the "custom dictionary". It only uses the main
dictionary. The default value is set to "Off". You can toggle between "On"
and "Off" by pressing "Space".
3. Skip an upper-case word: if this option is set to "On", words with only
upper-case letters are not checked. The default is set to "On". You can
change it by pressing "Space".
4. Skip a word which includes an address: if this option is set to "On", the
words that contain an address are not checked. The default is set to "On".
You can change it by pressing "Space".
5. Skip a word which includes numbers: if this option is set to "On", the
words that include numbers are not checked. The default value is set to "Off".
You can change it by pressing "Space".
6. Confirm: if you press "Enter" on "Confirm", the changes that you made
above are saved, and the Voice Sense QWERTY exits the "Options" dialog.
7. Cancel: if you press "Enter" on "Cancel", the changes that you have made
above are canceled and the Voice Sense QWERTY exits the "Options"
dialog.
To move among the option settings, press “up arrow” or “down arrow”. To
move to "Confirm" or "Cancel", press “Tab” or "shift-tab".
Press "Enter" on the "Begin" button and the Voice Sense QWERTY starts to
check spelling. If you press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button, the "Spell Check"
is canceled.
147
Once "Spell Check" is executed, the following dialog is displayed:
1. Text window: shows the sentence with the current word to be checked.
The cursor is located at the word that is to be checked.
2. Change word edit box: shows the current word to be checked. You can
input the correct word directly into the edit box.
3. Suggestions list: if the word to be checked is not in the dictionary, the
Voice Sense suggests words. You can move among the suggestions by
pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
4. Skip once (s): if you press "Enter" on this button when a word is
encountered that is not in the dictionary, the word is not modified. You can
also press the "down scroll button" To skip the word.
5. Skip all (i): if you press "Enter" on this button, all instances of the currently
focused word are not modified and are automatically skipped throughout the
spell check range.
6. Add to custom dictionary (a): if you press "Enter" on this button, the word
that is currently focused is added to your "Custom dictionary".
7. Modify once (c): focus on the modified word and select the desired word
from the "suggestions list" and press "Enter". The currently focused word is
replaced with your selection from the "suggestions list".
8. Modify all (m): focus on the modified word and select the desired word
from the "suggestions list" and press "Enter". All instances of the currently
focused word are replaced by the suggested word.
9. Cancel: if you press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button, the "Spell Check" is
exited.
You can move among the controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". When the
spell check is complete, the Voice Sense QWERTY announces, "00 words
checked. 00 misspellings found. 00 words corrected".
Also remember, you can check the spelling of the current word by pressing
"Alt-k" while editing a document. A list of suggestions is displayed. Move
through the list using “up arrow” or “down arrow”, and press "Enter" to
replace the misspelled word with the selected suggestion.
148
5.2.15 Edit Language attribute
When you change the language attribute for a block of text, the text to
speech voice used to read the selected text automatically changes to the
language attributed to that text. This ensures that pronunciation of the text is
proper for the language in which it was created. You can edit the language
associated with a selected block of text using the “Edit Language Attribute”
function.
To use this function, press “Alt”, and press "enter" on "edit". Move to
"Select edit Language Attribute" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly and
press "enter", or press "i" from the "edit" menu. To activate this function,
directly, press “Windows-Alt-I”. The unit prompts, “Change language?” and
a combo box is displayed from which you can choose the desired language.
Navigate among the languages using “up arrow key” and “down arrow key”.
When you reach your desired language, press “Enter” to change the
language associated with the selected block of text. You can also type the
first letter of your desired language from the prompt box to activate that
language attribute: For example, Use “f” for French, “s” for Spanish, etc.
If “View Format Characters” is on, text language is noted as follows:
Spanish: $LS
French: $LF
German: $LG
Italian: $LI
English: $LE
5.2.16 Font Setting
The "Font Setting" dialog allows you to choose the type, size, color and
style of the font for the current text selection. You can open the "Font
Setting" dialog by pressing "Alt" and press "Enter" on "Edit". Navigate to
"Font Setting" using the Down arrow or you can press "F from the "Edit"
149
menu. You can open the "Font Setting" dialog while editing a document
using "Alt-M".
The "Font Setting dialog contains the following items: "Font Name" list box,
"Size" list box, "Color" list box, "Underscore" combo box, "Bold" combo box,
"Italics" combo box, a "Confirm" button and a "Cancel" button. You can
move among the controls in the dialog using "Tab" and "Shift-Tab".
The "Font Name" list box contains a "None" option for choosing no font
type, and 84 font choices based on popular fonts available in Microsoft
Windows. The "Size" list box allows you to set the font size in various
increments from 8 to 72 point font. The "Color" list box contains a "None"
option, 140 color options, and an option called "User definition" which
allows you to enter the exact RGB value of a color in cases where the color
you want is not in the list or you need to be very specific about the color
you're using. When you choose "User Definition" as your color option, 3
edit boxes appear in the tab order: "Red", "Green" and Blue". Enter the
appropriate red, blue, and green values in these edit boxes to define your
font color. Use "Space" to toggle "Underscore", "Bold" and "Italics" on/off
when your cursor is placed on the appropriate combo box. When you have
finished setting your font, Tab to Confirm" and press "Enter". If you do not
wish to save your settings, Tab to "Cancel" and press "Enter" or press
"escape" or "Alt-F 4".
5.3 Go to Menu
To open the "Go To" menu in the Word Processor, press “Alt”, and move to
"Go To" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter". Or, you can press "g"
from the menu. The "Go To" menu contains the following items: "Find", "Find
Again", "Replace", "Go To Location", "Go to Previous Page", "Go To Next
Page", "Set Mark", "Go to Mark", "Go To Previous Document", and "Go To
Next Document".
5.3.1 Find
150
The find function allows you to search for text in a document. Once the text
is found you are taken to that position in your document. To execute this
command, press “Alt”, and move to "Go To" by pressing “down arrow” and
press "Enter". Move to "Find" by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”, or you
can press "f" from the "Go To" menu. While editing a document, pressing
"Ctrl-f" activates the "Find" command. When "Find" is executed, the "Find"
dialog is displayed. This dialog consists of "Text to find", "Search direction",
"Match case", a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move
among the fields by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
1. Text to find
The first field in the "Find" dialog is "Text to find". In this edit box, you can
type the text that you want to find. To find the text immediately, press "Enter".
To set other fields in the dialog, press “Tab” to move to the next field.
2. Search direction
The next field is "Search direction". The default direction is "Forward". If you
would like to change the search direction, press "Space" to toggle between
"Forward" and "Backward". After you type in the text to be found, and set the
search direction, press "Enter" To find the text immediately.
3. Match case
The next field is "Match case". This field displays only when you execute the
"Find" command in a text file. This field does not display in Braille files. The
default value is "No". To change the value, press "Space".
4. Confirm
To execute "Find", press "Enter" on "Confirm". You can also execute "Find"
by pressing "Enter" on "Text to find" or "Search direction".
5. Cancel
To cancel the "Find" function, press "Enter" on "Cancel". Or, you can cancel
the "Find" command by pressing "Alt-F4".
If Voice Sense QWERTY finds the text you typed, the sentence with the text
is displayed. If there was no text that matched what you typed, the cursor
remains in its current location and the Voice Sense QWERTY announces
"not found". This function saves the text last searched for, as well as the
direction, so you can use it again to search for the next occurrence of the
text.
151
When using the find command, the current cursor position is very important.
If the cursor is located at the beginning of the document, it is necessary to
select the "Forward" search direction. If the cursor is located at the end of
the document, it is necessary to select "Backward" as the direction used for
searching. If you do not choose the correct search direction in regards to the
text you're looking for and your current position, the text is not found even if it
is present in the document.
5.3.2 Find Again
To execute the "Find Again" command, press “Alt”. Then move to "Go To" by
pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter". Move to "Find Again" by pressing
“down arrow” and press "Enter", or press "h" from the "Go To" menu. While
editing a document, press "F3" to activate this command. When "Find Again"
is executed, "Find Again" looks for the text that was searched for in the
previous "Find". "Find again" searches in the same direction that was used
with the last "Find". If you have not yet used the "Find" command in the
current document, "Find again" is not available.
5.3.3 Replace
To execute this command, press “Alt”, and move to "Go To" by pressing
“down arrow”, and press "Enter". Move to "Replace" using “down arrow” and
press "Enter", or press "r" from the "Go To" menu. While editing a document,
pressing "Ctrl-r" activates this function.
"Replace" opens a dialog that consists of the following fields: "Text to find",
"Replace with", "Search direction", "Match case", "Replace", "Confirm" and
"Cancel". You can move among the fields by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
Each of the controls is described below:
1. Text to find
Type the text that you want to replace in this field.
2. Replace with
Type the replacement text in this edit box.
152
3. Search direction
The "Search direction" has the same function as the "Search direction"
explained in section 5.3.1. After you set the search direction, press "Enter" to
start the replacement of text, or press “Tab” to set the "Match case" or
"Replace" options.
4. Match case
This field displays only when you execute the "Replace" command in text
files. This field does not display in Braille files. The default value is "No". To
change the value, press "Space".
5. Replace
You may want to replace only one instance of the text you searched for. Or,
you may want to replace all the instances of the searched text. Choose
"Once" or "All" according to your preference. You can toggle between the
two choices by pressing "Space".
6. Confirm and Cancel
Pressing "Enter" on "Confirm" starts finding and replacing text. If there is no
text that matches the text you typed, "Not found" is displayed, and the
function is canceled. Pressing "Enter" on "Cancel" cancels the "Replace"
function.
5.3.4 Go to Location
The "Go to Location" command moves quickly to a specific location. You can
move to a specific page, paragraph, or line. To execute this command, press
“Alt”, and move to "Go To" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter".
Move to "Go To Location" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter".
While editing a document, press "Ctrl-g" to activate this function.
When "Go to Location" is executed, the Word Processor says, "Move to
page number". If you type a number here, the Voice Sense QWERTY takes
you to the page number that corresponds with the number you type. You can
also type the letter "f" before the number. This tells the Voice Sense
QWERTY that you are looking for a page number, and not a paragraph, or,
line number. Type the number of the page you want to move to without the
PLUS sign or minus sign, and press "Enter". The Word Processor jumps
153
from the start of the document to the specific page. To move forward from
your current location, put the PLUS sign in front of the number and letter. For
example, to move forward five pages type "+f5". To move backward from
your current location, type the minus sign in front of the number and letter.
You can also use this function to move to a specific paragraph. Select "Go
To Location" in the "Go To" menu, or press "Ctrl-g". The Voice Sense
QWERTY says, "Move to page number:" Before you type the number of the
paragraph you want to go to, type "p", then type the number of the paragraph.
By typing in the letter "p", the Voice Sense QWERTY knows that you are
looking for a paragraph, and not a page or line. To move forward from your
current location, type the PLUS sign in front of the number and letter. To
move backward from your current location, type the minus sign in front of the
number and letter. If the paragraph number you type is not valid, the Voice
Sense QWERTY announces, "Move range error".
You can also use this function to move to a specific line. Select "Go To
Location" in the "Go To" menu, or press "Ctrl-g". The Voice Sense QWERTY
says, "Move to page number:" Before you type the number of the line that
you want to go to, type "l", then type the line number. AS when jumping by
page and paragraph, to move forward from your current location, type the
PLUS sign in front of the number and letter. To move backward from your
current location, type the minus sign in front of the number and letter. If the
line number you type is not valid, the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Move
range error".
You can also go to a specific line number on a specific page. The Voice
Sense QWERTY enables you to type this information at the same time. To
do this, press "Ctrl-g", or you can select "Go to Location" in the "Go To"
menu. Then, when the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Move to page
number:" you can type the page number followed by the line number. For
example, to move to the 3rd line on the 20th page, you would type "20 3", or
you could type "f20 3".
5.3.5 Go to Previous Page
154
The “Go To Previous Page” command allows you to move to the page that is
located before the page you are currently on. To execute this command,
press “Alt,” and move to “Go To” by pressing “Down arrow”. Then, press
“Enter” on “Go To”. Move to “Go to Previous Page” by pressing “Down arrow,”
and then press “Enter,” or press “Page up” while you are in the document.
Once you have activated the “Go to Previous Page” function, the Voice
Sense QWERTY goes directly to the previous page.
5.3.6 Go to Next Page
The "Go To Next Page" command allows you to move to the page that is
located after the page you are currently on. To execute this command, press
"Alt", and move to "Go To" by pressing "down arrow", and press "Enter".
Move to "Go To Next Page" by pressing "down arrow”, and press "Enter". Or,
you can press “Page down” while you are in the document. Once you have
activated the “Go to Next Page” function, the Voice Sense QWERTY goes
directly to the next page.
5.3.7 Set Mark
The "Set mark" command marks a position in the document that you want to
return to later. To execute this command, press “Alt”, and move to "Go To"
by pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter". Move to "Set mark" by pressing
“down arrow”, and press "Enter", or press "m" from the "Go To" menu. While
editing a document, press "Ctrl-m" to activate this command.
Move the cursor to the location that you want to mark, and press "Ctrl-m”.
The Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Mark name:". To name the mark use the
letters a through z. While editing a document, the Voice Sense QWERTY
does not show the mark sign unless you have selected "View format
character" in "Settings", explained in section 5.1.7. If you have this option
turned on, the bookmark sign is shown in the document. You can go to
marked text by using "Left arrow” or “Right arrow” and the bookmark sign
appears, which is "$pl (mark name)". If you move the cursor to the mark
location in a document, you can see dots 7-8 all through the mark sign. This
155
means that the Voice Sense QWERTY deals with the marked text as a
chunk, but not with each character.
5.3.8 Go to Mark
The "Go to Mark" command finds a mark that has previously been set. To
execute this command, press “Alt”, and move to "Go To" by pressing “down
arrow” and press "Enter". Move to "Go to Mark" by pressing “down arrow”,
and press "Enter", or press "j” from the "Go To" menu. While editing a
document, go to marked text by pressing "Ctrl-j".
The Voice Sense QWERTY says "Move to mark:". Type the character of the
mark name that you want to locate, and the Voice Sense QWERTY moves
the cursor to the marked position.
5.3.9 Go to Previous Document
If you have multiple documents open, you can easily move among them. To
go to the previous document, press “Alt”, and move to "Go To" by pressing
“down arrow”, and press "Enter". Move to "Go To Previous Document" by
pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter". Or, you can press "shift-tab" while
editing a document.
5.3.10 Go to Next Document
To go to the next document, press “Alt”, and move to "Go To" by pressing
“down arrow”, and press "Enter". Move to "Go to Next Document" by
pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter". Or, you can press “Tab” while
editing a document.
5.4 Read Menu
The "Read" menu is used to read specific parts of the document with speech
and/or Braille. To open the "read menu", press “Alt”, and press "r". The items
in the "Read" menu are: "Read Selected Text", "Read Beginning Of Selected
156
Text", "Read From Beginning To Cursor", "Read From Cursor To End", "Auto
Scroll", "Read Current Sentence", "Read Current Line", "Read Current Word",
"Read Current Character", and "Read Status".
5.4.1 Read Selected Text
The "Read Selected Text" command reads the text you currently have
selected. To execute this command, press “Alt”, and move to the "Read"
menu by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter", or press "r" to open the
"Read" menu. Press "Enter" on "Read Selected Text". While editing a
document press "Alt-b" to activate the "Read Selected Text" function.
Although you activate this function, the cursor location does not move to the
selected text. It is simply read aloud, and your cursor remains in its current
position.
5.4.2 Read Beginning of Selected Text
The "Read Beginning of Selected Text" command allows you to hear the first
line of the selected text without moving the cursor position. To execute this
command, press “Alt”, and move to the "Read" menu by pressing “down
arrow”, and press "Enter". Move to "Read Beginning Of Selected Text" by
pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter", or press "u" from the read menu.
While editing a document, press "Ctrl-u" to activate this function.
5.4.3 Read from beginning to cursor
Using this function, the Voice Sense QWERTY speaks the text in the
document from the beginning to the current cursor position. To execute this
command, press “Alt”, and move to the "Read" menu by pressing “down
arrow”, and press "Enter". Move to "Read From Beginning To Cursor" by
pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter", or you can press "t" from the read
menu. While editing a document, press "Alt-g" to activate this function.
If you want to stop speech before you reach the cursor location, you can
press “Ctrl”. Your cursor remains in the position on which it was located
157
when you activated this function. In other words, the cursor does not relocate
to the position at which you interrupted reading.
5.4.4 Read from Cursor to End
This command reads a document from the current cursor position to the end
of the document. While the Voice Sense QWERTY is reading the text, the
cursor remains at the location from which you executed this command.
However, when reading is completed, the cursor is placed at the end of the
document.
To execute this command, press “Alt”, and move to the "Read" menu by
pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter". You can move to "Read From
Cursor To End" by pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter", or you can
press "g" from the "Read" menu. While editing a document, press “Fn-Enter"
to activate this function.
If you interrupt speech before reading is completed, you can press "Ctrl", to
move the cursor to where you stopped reading.
5.4.5 Auto Scroll
The "Auto Scroll" command scrolls the Braille display (When connected to
SyncBraille) automatically through the document. The speed of the "Auto
Scroll" is set in the "Settings" menu, located in the "File" menu, explained in
section 5.1.7. When using auto scroll, no speech is heard as the Braille
display (When connected to SyncBraille) scrolls through the document.
To execute this command, press “Alt”, and move to the "Read" menu by
pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter". Move to "Auto Scroll" by pressing
“down arrow”, and press "Enter", or press "a" from the read menu. While
editing a document, you can turn the auto scroll feature on and off by
pressing the up and down scroll buttons simultaneously. For faster scrolling,
press "right arrow”. For slower scrolling, press "left arrow”. Read a line again
by pressing the up scroll button or “Up arrow” Similarly, to skip lines you do
not wish to read, press the down scroll button or “Down arrow”.
158
5.4.6 Read Current Sentence
This function reads the current sentence. To execute this command, press
“Alt”, and move to the "Read" menu by pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter"
to move to "Read Current Sentence" by pressing “down arrow” and press
"Enter". Or you can press "e", from the read menu. While editing a document,
press "fn-n" to activate this function.
5.4.7 Read Current Line
This function reads the current line. To execute this command, press “Alt”,
and move to the "Read" menu by pressing “down arrow”. Then, press "Enter".
Move to "Read Current Line" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter", or
you can press "l" from the read menu. While editing a document, press "Fnc" to activate this function.
5.4.8 Read Current Word
This function reads the current word. To execute this command, press “Alt”,
and move to the "Read" menu by pressing “down arrow”. Then, press "Enter".
Move to "Read Current Word" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter",
or you can press "w" from the read menu. While editing a document, press
"Fn-x" to activate this function.
5.4.9 Read Current Character
This function reads the current character. To execute this command, press
“Alt”, and move to the "Read" menu by pressing “down arrow”. Then, press
"Enter". Move to "Read Current Character" by pressing “down arrow”, and
press "Enter", or you can press "c" from the read menu. While editing a
document, press "Fn-z" to activate this function.
5.4.10 Read Status
159
This function gives you information about your current file. When you
activate this function, the Voice Sense QWERTY tells you the "file name",
"edit mode (insert or overwrite)", and "file protection (write or read only)". To
execute this command, press “Alt”, and move to the "Read" menu by
pressing “down arrow”. Then, press "Enter". Move to "Read Status" by
pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter", or you can press "s" from the read
menu. While editing a document, press "Fn-/(slash)" to activate this function.
5.4.11 Read Selected Text in Current Language
This function allows you to read the currently selected text in another
language. To execute this command, press “Alt”, and move to the "Read"
menu by pressing “down arrow”. Then, press "Enter". Move to "Read
Selected Text in Current Language" by pressing “down arrow”, and press
"Enter". While editing a document, press "Alt-Windows-r" to activate this
function. When you execute this command, you are prompted to choose the
language in which you wish to read the selected text. Navigate to the desired
language using Up or Down arrow, and press “Enter”. The text is then
spoken using the TTS of your chosen language.
5.5 Layout
The "Layout" menu contains options for setting the layout for printing on an
ink printer or embossing on a Braille embosser. The "Layout" menu contains
the following items: "Braille Document Layout", "Print Document Layout",
"Braille Paragraph Layout", and "Print Paragraph Layout". The changes
made in the "Layout" menu are not displayed on the Braille display (When
connected to SyncBraille). To check the layout, open the menu by pressing
“Alt”, and press "l" to open the Layout menu.
5.5.1 Braille Document Layout
While editing a document, press “Alt” to open the menu, and select "Layout"
or press "l", and select "Braille Document Layout". Or, you can press "Alt-F5"
160
to open the "Braille Document Layout" dialog while editing a document.
"Braille Document Layout" is used to set the width and height of the paper for
embossing as well as other options.
You can navigate the menu items with “up arrow” or “down arrow”, and you
can move to "Confirm" or "Cancel" by pressing “Tab”. You can skip an item
by pressing “down arrow” if you don't want to change the default setting.
You can adjust the following settings:
1. Set characters per line
This sets the number of Braille characters per line to emboss. The default
value is set to 32. To change the value, type the number of characters per
line. Move to the next setting by pressing “down arrow”.
2. Set lines per page
This sets the number of lines per page to be embossed. It includes the line
on which the page number is printed. For example, if it is set to 26, the
content of the document is embossed with 25 lines and the page number is
printed as the 26th line. To change the value, type the number of lines that
you want to emboss. Move to the next setting by pressing “down arrow”.
3. Print type
This sets whether the document is embossed on one or both sides of the
page. The default value is set to double sided embossing. For single sided
embossing, press "Space". Move to the next setting by pressing “down
arrow”.
4. Page numbering type
This sets the numbering type for embossing a document. The default type is
set to "Double sided". It means that the page number is embossed on every
page. The setting values are "Double sided", "Odd", "Even", and "None".
Press "Space" and "Backspace" to change the value. Press “down arrow” To
move to the next setting.
5. Set page numbering
This sets the position of the page number when embossing. The selections
are "Upper right" and "Lower right". The default setting is set to "Lower right".
Press "Space" To change the setting. Press “down arrow” To move to the
next setting.
6. Header
161
This is an edit box in which you can type the text to be embossed as the
header. To move to the next setting, press “down arrow”.
7. Footer
This is an edit box into which you can type the text to be embossed as the
footer. After you set your preferences, move to "Confirm" or "Cancel", by
pressing “Tab”.
8. Confirm / Cancel
To apply settings, when "Confirm" is displayed press "Enter". If you do not
want to change the setting when "Cancel" is displayed press "Enter".
5.5.2 Print Document Layout
This option allows you to set the document layout for printing on an ink
printer. Press “Alt” to open the menu, and select "Layout" or press "l". Select
"Print Document Layout". Or, press "Alt-F6" while editing a document. The
settings in this menu are applied throughout the document. You can navigate
the menu items with “up arrow” or “down arrow”, and you can move to
"Confirm" or "Cancel" by pressing “Tab”. You can skip an item by pressing
“down arrow” if you do not want to change the default setting.
The following is a detailed explanation of each setting:
1. Set top margin
This sets the top margin for ink printing. The top margin is the distance from
the top of the paper to the first line of the printed paragraph. The default
value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches). To change the default setting, type
a new value.
2. Set bottom margin
This sets the bottom margin for ink printing. The bottom margin is the
distance from the bottom of the paper to the last line of a printed paragraph.
The default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches). To change the default
setting, type a new value.
3. Set left margin
This sets the left margin for ink printing. The left margin is the distance from
the left edge of the paper to the first text that is printed. The default value is
162
set to 20 mm (about 0.78 inches). To change the default setting, type a new
value.
4. Set right margin
This sets the right margin for ink printing. The right margin is the distance
from the right end of the printed text to the right edge of the paper. The
default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches). To change the default
setting, type a new value.
5. Set page numbering
This sets the position where the page numbers are printed. The available
positions are "Upper left", "Upper middle", "Upper right", "Lower left", "Lower
middle", and "Lower right". To change the setting, press "Space" or
"Backspace".
6. Header
This is used to edit the header printed at the top of each page. Move to
"Header", and type the text that you want to be printed.
7. Footer
This is used to edit the footer printed at the bottom of each page. Move to
"Footer", and type the text that you want to be printed.
8. Distance between lines
This sets the distance between the printed lines. The default value is set to
150%. The distance can be anywhere from 100% to 300%. If you type a
value that exceeds this range, the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Out of
range. Value too large", and waits for you to type another value.
9. Confirm / cancel
To apply the settings, press "Enter" when "Confirm" is displayed. If you do
not want to apply a setting when "Cancel" is displayed, press "Enter".
5.5.3 Braille Paragraph Layout
To open the "Braille Paragraph Layout" dialog, press “Alt”. Then, press
"Enter" on "Layout", or press "l". Select "Braille Paragraph Layout" and press
"Enter". Or, you can press "Alt-F7" while editing a document. These settings
are only applied to the selected paragraph.
163
You can navigate between the menu items by pressing “up arrow” or “down
arrow”. Move to the "Confirm" or "Cancel" buttons by pressing “Tab”. You
can skip an item by pressing “down arrow” if you do not want to change the
default setting.
In this dialog, you can set the following items:
1. Indent first line
This indents the first line of the paragraph as designated by the number of
characters. The default value is set to 0. To change this setting, type the
number of characters to be indented. Press the down scroll button or “down
arrow” To move to the next setting.
2. Indent all lines except the first line
This indents all the lines of the paragraph, except the first line of the
paragraph as designated by the number of columns. To indent the text, type
the number to indent.
3. Confirm / cancel
Press “Tab” or "shift-tab" to get to the Confirm and Cancel buttons. To apply
changes, press "Enter" when "Confirm" is displayed. To exit the settings
without making changes, press "Enter" when "Cancel" is displayed.
5.5.4 Print Paragraph Layout
You can set the layout of the current paragraph for printing on an ink printer.
To set "print paragraph layout", press “Alt”. Select "Layout", or press "l" and
select "Print Paragraph Layout". Or, press "Alt-F8", while you are editing a
document. This setting applies only to the current paragraph. You can
navigate the menu items by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”, and you
can move to "Confirm" or "Cancel" by pressing “Tab”. You can skip an item
by pressing “down arrow” if you do not want to change the default setting.
The following is a detailed explanation of the settings for "Print Paragraph
Layout:"
1. Set left margin
164
This sets the left margin for the current paragraph. The default value is set to
0mm. To change the setting, type the value of the margin you want. Move to
the next setting by pressing the down scroll button or press “down arrow”.
2. Set right margin
This sets the right margin for the current paragraph. The default value is set
to 0mm. To change the setting, type the value of the margin you want. Move
to the next setting by pressing the down scroll button or press “down arrow”.
3. Indent first line
This sets the indentation of the first line by the value you select. THIS setting
is valid for the paragraphs that follow, unless the setting is changed. The
default value is set to 0. To change the setting, type the number of
characters to indent. Press the down scroll button or press “down arrow” To
move to the next setting.
4. Indent all lines except the first line
All the lines in the paragraph, except the first line, are indented by the value
you select. This setting is valid for the following paragraphs, unless the
setting is changed. The default value is set to 0. To change the setting, type
the number of characters to indent.
5. Alignment
This sets the alignment type. The default type is set to "Left justified". The
other options are "Centered" and "Right justified". Press "Space" To change
the setting.
6. Set style
When printing a document with an ink printer, the style of each paragraph
can be set independently for differing types of text. Style includes "font type",
"font size", and "text shape". You can select "Text", "Title", "Sub title",
"Abstract 1", and "Abstract 2" by pressing "Space" or "Backspace". The
default fonts for each style are listed below.
Text: Times New Roman, Font size 11
Abstract1: Times New Roman, Font size 11, Boldface
Abstract2: Times New Roman, Font size 14, Boldface
Sub title: Courier New, Font size 16, Italic, Boldface, Center-aligned
Title: Times New Roman, Font size 20, Boldface, Center-aligned
7. Confirm / cancel
Press “Tab” or "shift-tab" to get to “confirm” and “cancel” buttons.
165
To apply the settings, press "Enter" on "Confirm". To cancel without saving
settings, press "Enter" on "Cancel".
5.6 Nemeth Code Entry
Whether you are a student, or in a work position which requires a large
amount of mathematic writing, you may find it advantageous and/or more
natural to enter mathematic expressions using the Nemeth Code for
Mathematic and Scientific notation. As many of the symbols in the Nemeth
code overlap with those in the literary Braille code, it is necessary to enter a
special Nemeth mode to ensure Nemeth entry is translated correctly. Press
“Alt-N” to toggle Nemeth Mode on/off. When nemeth mode is on, the unit
announces, “Start Nemeth mode”. When Nemeth Mode is turned off, the unit
announces, “End Nemeth Mode”. While in Nemeth Mode, the QWERTY
keyboard functions as a Braille keyboard just as it does when entering text in
a Braille file. When you end nemeth Mode, the keyboard is returned to
normal QWERTY entry.
When Nemeth Mode is on, you may enter mathematic and algebraic
expressions as you would normally enter them on a Perkins Brailler and they
will be translated and spoken correctly by the notetaker.
You may also import and export math using DOC and RTF files. If you save
a file with Nemeth entry as a DOC, a teacher or colleague may view or print
the file and the math symbols will appear correctly. Note: the “support
Formatting” option must be set to “No” in the “Settings” dialog of the “File”
menu for this to work correctly.
You may also import an RTF file and mathematic text will be rendered using
Nemeth symbols.
[Supported Nemeth symbols]
Category
Operations
Math Symbol
Braille Dots
Identity
dots-1-2-3
Plus or Minus
dots-3-4-6 then 5 then 3-6
Minus sign
dots-3-6
166
Comparative symbols
Plus sign
dots-3-4-6
Divided By
dots-4-6 then 3-4
Times
dots-4 then 1-6
Factorial
dots-1-2-3-4-6
Hollow Dot
dots-4-6 then 1-6
Union
Dots-4-6 then 3-4-6
Intersection
dots-4-6 then 1-4-6
Asterisk Times Sign
Dots-4 then 3-4-5-6
Curved division sign
Dots-1-3-5
Percent
Dot-4 then 3-5-6
Equals
Dots-4-6 then 1-3
Greater Than Or Equal To
Dots-4-6 then 2 then 1-5-6
Less Than Or Equal To
Dots-5 then 1-3 then 1-5-6
Directly over
Dots-1-2-6
Directly under
Dots 1-4-6
Greater Than
Dots-4-6 then 2
Less Than
Dots-5 then 1-3
Not Equal to
Dots-3-4 then 4-6 then 1-3
Congruent
Dots-4 then 1-5-6 then 4-6 then 13
Not Congruent
Dots-3-4 then 4 then 1-5-6 then 46 then 1-3
Similar
Dots-4 then 1-5-6
Not Similar
Dots-3-4 then 1-5-6
Approximately Equal
Dot-4 then 1-5-6 then 4 then 1-5-6
Equivalent
Dot-4 then 1-2-6 then 6 then 1-2-6
167
Is to (Ratio sign)
Dot-5 then 2
Is proportionate to
Dot-5-6 then 2-3
Not Greater Than
Dots-3-4 then 4-6 then 2
Not Less Than
Dots-3-4 then 5 then 1-3
Element Of
Dot-4 then 1-5
Subset of
Dots-4-5-6 then 4 then 1-3
Such that
Dots-1-2-5-6
Dots-4-5-6 then 4-6 then 2 then 1-
Proper Superset
Punctuation
5-6
Negative sign
Dots-3-6
Plus as opposed to positive
dots 3-4-6
vertical bar
Dots-1-2-5-6
Double vertical bar
Dot-6 then 1-2-5-6
Ampersand
dots-1-2-3-4-6
Decimal point
dots-4-6
Comma
dot-6
Left parentheses
Dots-1-2-3-5-6
Right Parentheses
Dots-2-3-4-5-6
Left Brace
Dots-4-6 then 1-2-3-5-6
Right Brace
Dots-4-6, 2-3-4-5-6
Left Bracket
Dots-4 then 1-2-3-5-6
Right Bracket
Dots-4 then 2-3-4-5-6
Separation line
dots 2-5
A period as opposed to a
subscript
dots-2-5-6
Tally
dots 4-5-6
168
Measurement symbols
Fractions
Roots, Superscripts
and Subscripts
Bold indicator
dots-4-5-6
Italics indicator
dots 4-6
Vertical line
dots 4-5-6
Termination indicator
dots 1-2-4-5-6
Multipurpose indicator
dot 5
Prime
dot-3
Double prime
dot-3 then 3
Feet
dot-3
Inches
dot-3 then 3
Minutes
dot-3
Seconds
dot-3 then 3
Degrees
dots-4-5 then 4-6 then 1-6
Open Fraction indicator
dots-1-4-5-6
Close Fraction indicator
dots-3-4-5-6
Open Mixed Number
Dots-4-5-6 then 1-4-5-6
Close mixed Number
Dots-4-5-6, Dots-3-4-5-6
Fraction line
dots-3-4
Long Horizontal fraction line
dots-3-4 then dots-3-4
Script indicator
dot 4
Subscript Indicator
dots-5-6
Superscript with subscript
dots-4-5
Baseline indicator
dot-5
Square Root
dots-3-4-5
Root
dots-3-4-5
169
Limits symbols
End Root
dots-1-2-4-5-6
Infinity
Dot-6 then Dots-1-2-3-4-5-6
Lower Limit of
dots-1-4-6 then 1-2-3 then 2-4
then 1-3-4
dots-1-2-6 then 1-2-3 then 2-4
Upper Limit of
Integrals symbols
Data Set Symbols
geometric Symbols
then 1-3-4
Integral sign
dots-2-3-4-6
Double integral
dots-2-3-4-6 then 2-3-4-6
Triple integral sign
dots-2-3-4-6 then 2-3-4-6 then 23-4-6
Integral with infinity
dots-2-3-4-6 then 4 then 6 then 12-3-4-5-6 then 1-2-4-5-6
Element of
dots-4 then 1-5
Not an Element Of
dots-3-4 then 4 then 1-5
Null set
dots-3-5-6
Subset of
dots-4-5-6 then 5 then 1-3
Is a subset of or is equal to
dots-4-5-6 then 5 then 1-3 then 15-6
Is a superset of or is equal to
dots-4-5-6 then 4-6 then 5 then 15-6
Contains
dots-4-5-6 then 4-6 then 2
Shape indicator
dots-1-2-4-6
Right arrow
dots-1-2-4-6 then 2-5 then 2-5
then 1-3-5
Left arrow
dots-1-2-4-6 then 2-4-6 then 2-5
then 2-5
Perpendicular
dots-1-2-4-6 then 1-2-3-4
Parallel
dots-1-2-4-6 then 1-2-3
170
Currency symbols
Greek symbols
Angle
dots-1-2-4-6 then 2-4-6
Triangle
Dots-1-2-4-6 then 2-3-4-5
Circle
dots-1-2-4-6 then 1-4
Square
dots-1-2-4-6 then 2-5-6
Pentagon
Dots-1-2-4-6 then 2-6
Hexagon
dots-1-2-4-6 then 2-3-5
Octagon
dots-1-2-4-6 then 2-3-6
Horizontal Bar
Dots-1-5-6
Cents
Dot-4 then c
Dollar
Dot-4 then s
Pounds
Dot-4 then l
Greek indicator
dots-4-6
Alpha
a
Beta
b
Sampi
c
Delta
d
Epsilon
e
Phi
f
Gamma
g
Iota
i
Kappa
k
Lambda
l
Mu
m
Nu
n
Omicron
o
171
Pi
p
Koph
q
Rho
r
Sigma
s
Tau
t
Upsilon
u
Vau
v
Xi
x
Psi
y
Zeta
z
Chi
Dots-1-2-3-4-6
Stigma
Dots-2-3-4-6
Theta
Dots-1-4-5-6
Eta
Dots-1-5-6
Omega
w
5.7 Reading PowerPoint Files
The Word Processor in the Voice Sense supports reading and navigating of
Microsoft PowerPoint (PPT and PPTX) files. These files are opened as
protected, read Only files, and you may navigate them using normal text
reading commands. You may also move forward and back by slide using
“Space” and “Backspace” respectively.
You can bring up the list of slides in a presentation by pressing “Alt-Shift-S”.
Use the Up and Down arrows to navigate the slides, and press “Enter” on
the one you wish to navigate to.
172
5.8 Keys for Text Scrolling and Deleting
While reading a document, you can use the following commands to read with
Braille and/or speech. You can move character by character, word by word,
or paragraph by paragraph.
Previous character: Left arrow
Next character: Right arrow
Previous word: Ctrl-Left arrow
Next word: Ctrl-Right arrow
Beginning of line: Home
End of line: End
Previous sentence: Ctrl-Alt-Right arrow
Next sentence: Ctrl-Alt-Left arrow
Previous line: Up arrow
Next line: Down arrow
Next paragraph: Ctrl-Down arrow
Previous paragraph: Ctrl-Up arrow
Top of document: Ctrl-Home
Bottom of document: Ctrl-End
Read the current paragraph Fn-v
Read the current line: Fn-c
Read the current sentence: Fn-n
Read the current word: Fn-x
Read the current character: Fn-z
Use the following commands to delete various elements of a document
according to your current cursor position.
Delete the current paragraph: Alt-Del
Delete the current line: Ctrl-Backspace
Delete the current word: Alt-Backspace
Delete the current character: Del
173
5.9 Cursor Location
While reading a document, you can query the cursor location. To do this,
press "Fn-s". Your current position is announced in several ways: "Page: xx,
Line: xx, column: xx, xx%, Word x/y,Paragraph: xx/yy, Line: xx/yy".
5.10 Hot keys in the Word Processor:
1. File menu
New document: Ctrl-n
Open: Ctrl-o
Save: Ctrl-s
Save as: Alt-s
Close current document: Ctrl-F4
Print: Ctrl-p
Settings: Ctrl-e
Exit: Alt-F4
2. Edit menu
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Copy: Ctrl-c
Cut: Ctrl-x
Paste: Ctrl-v
Delete: Del
Delete blank lines: Alt-e
Add to clipboard: Ctrl-Insert
Clear clipboard: Ctrl-Del
Select All: Ctrl-a
Insert from file: Ctrl-i
Insert date: Ctrl-w
Insert time: Backspace-w
Toggle insert/overwrite mode: Insert
Check spelling: Ctrl-k
174
Check spelling of the current word: Alt-k
3. Go to menu
Find: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Replace: Ctrl-r
Go to location: Ctrl-g
Go to previous page: Page up (Fn-Up arrow)
Go to next page: Page down (Fn-Down arrow)
Set mark: Ctrl-m
Go to mark: Ctrl-j
Go to previous document: Shift-tab
Go to next document: Tab
4. Read menu
Read selected text: Alt-b
Read beginning of selected text: Ctrl-u
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g
Read from cursor to end: Fn-Enter
Auto scroll: up-down scroll buttons
Read status: Fn-/
5. Layout menu
Braille document layout: Alt-F5
Print document layout: Alt-F6
Braille paragraph layout: Alt-F7
Print paragraph layout: Alt-F8
6. Miscellaneous hot keys
Move to previous character: Left arrow
Move to next character: Right arrow
Move to previous word: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to next word: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the beginning of the line: Home
Move to the end of the line: End
175
Move to previous line: Up arrow
Move to next line: Down arrow
Move to previous sentence: Alt-Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to next sentence: Alt-Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to previous paragraph: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to next paragraph: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-Home
Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-End
Read current paragraph: Fn-v
Read current line: Fn-c
Read current sentence: Fn-n
Read current word: Fn-x
Read current character: Fn-z
Delete current paragraph: Alt-Del
Delete current line: Ctrl-Backspace
Delete current word: Alt-Backspace
Delete current character: Del
Confirm current cursor position: Fn-s
Set view format character: Ctrl-5
Set reading unit: Ctrl-3
Set read only: Ctrl-2
Set reading mode: Ctrl-4
176
6. E-mail
The e-mail program is used to communicate with others by sending
messages via the Internet. To use the e-mail program, you must have an email account, provided to you by your Internet account provider or sign up for
a free account such as Gmail or hotmail.
Your e-mail account needs to support POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) or
IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) and SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol) to be accessed with the Voice Sense QWERTY. You should check
with your Internet account provider to make sure that your provider supports
POP3/IMAP and SMTP.
POP3 and IMAP are two different standard protocols for receiving e-mail.
POP3 and IMAP function very differently from each other and each has its
own advantages.
When you access your received messages via POP3, they are downloaded
from the server, and stored locally on whatever device you are using to
download them; in this case, the Voice Sense QWERTY. You have the
option of setting whether or not to delete the messages from the server on
download. If you do, once they are downloaded, they are deleted from the
server. If you choose to leave the messages on the server, and you delete
an e-mail from the Voice Sense QWERTY, it is downloaded again the next
time you access new mail as the Voice Sense QWERTY simply retrieves
anything from the server it does not find stored locally. . If you wish only to
access your e-mail on the Voice Sense QWERTY, you may find it more
advantageous to use POP3, and set the PLUS not to leave messages on the
server. In this case, your e-mail is completely controlled by the Voice Sense
QWERTY. Your received messages are downloaded from the server, and
when you delete an e-mail, it goes away. Whatever you choose to save is
saved, and whatever you choose not to save is not.
If you access your received messages via IMAP, rather than just retrieving
the information from the mail server, Each time you load a mailbox on the
177
Voice Sense QWERTY, it synchronizes itself with the information found on
your e-mail server. In other words, rather than pulling the information from
the server, you are viewing the contents of your various e-mail boxes as they
exist on the server. If you delete a message, that message no longer
appears on any device you use to access your e-mail. If you move it to a
different folder, you will see it in that folder on any device you use to access
your e-mail. The advantage to IMAP is that, when using multiple devices,
you can access the same e-mails from any of them, and changes made on
one device apply to the information on the general e-mail server, and thus,
also affect all devices as they access it. This is especially useful when using
different devices in different situations; for example, using a PC at work, a
PLUS when you travel, and a smart phone while in the car.
SMTP is the protocol used to send a message from an e-mail client, (in this
case the PLUS’s e-mail program) and deliver it to an e-mail server.
Before you use the e-mail program, you must configure the Voice Sense
QWERTY to access the Internet, (see section 3.2 "Internet Setup").
Note: The menus in the Voice Sense’s e-mail program are specific to the
task you are performing: for example, When checking the "Inbox" in the email program, the menus are different from the menus that are used when
you are writing an e-mail. Read this chapter carefully and familiarize yourself
with the specific contexts before using the e-mail program on the Voice
Sense QWERTY.
6.1 Executing E-mail and E-mail Account management
To use the e-mail program, you must configure the e-mail program to access
your various e-mail accounts. The following sections provide a detailed
explanation of how to execute e-mail, how to add e-mail account information,
and how to check, modify, and delete this information.
178
6.1.1 Executing e-mail
To execute the e-mail program, follow these steps:
1) Navigate to "E-mail" in the "program" menu, by pressing “up arrow” or
“down arrow”.
2) Press "Enter" on "E-mail" or press "E".
You can also launch the “E-mail” program from anywhere on the unit by
pressing “Windows-E”.
When you launch the e-mail program for the first time, the Voice Sense
QWERTY says, "You must create at least 1 mail account from the accounts
manager in the Tools menu". Then, the "Inbox" is opened. The "Inbox" is the
main window of the E-mail program. When you run the e-mail program for
the first time, this "Inbox" is empty and the Voice Sense QWERTY displays
"no items".
Press "Shift-Tab", and you are placed in the mailbox list.
By default, the Voice Sense QWERTY contains the following mailboxes:
1) Inbox: received mail that has not been deleted or saved to a different
folder.
2) Sent: sent messages you have chosen to store
3) Outbox: messages waiting to be sent, either when you save mail in
"Outbox" or sending mail fails.
By pressing “up arrow” and “down arrow”, you can move among the
mailboxes.
If there are e-mail messages in the "Inbox", "Opening inbox”. is announced
and is shown on the LCD display; and "xx% processed" is displayed on the
Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille). Once progress has reached
100%, the "Inbox" is opened and displays the received e-mail in the
message list. Move to "Sent" or "Outbox", and press "Tab". If there are any
179
e-mail messages in "Sent" or "Outbox", they are displayed in message lists
as in the "Inbox".
6.1.2 Managing e-mail account information
In the "Accounts manager", you can manage e-mail account information.
To access the "Accounts Manager", follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu from the "Inbox" message list.
2) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Tools". Press "Enter" on "Tools". Or
press "T".
3) You are placed on "Accounts manager".
4) Press "Enter".
5) "Account name: no items" is displayed. You can also move to this menu
by pressing "Ctrl-m".
The "Accounts manager" contains the following 6 items.
1. Accounts list
2. Information
3. Add
4. Modify
5. Delete
6. Close
You can move among these items by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". You can
execute each item by pressing "enter" on it.
To exit the "Accounts manager", move to the "Close" button, and press
"enter". Or, press "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
The following is a detailed explanation of each item in the "Accounts
Manager".
6.1.2.1 Add e-mail Account
180
To receive e-mail, you must add an e-mail account with which to send and
receive messages. To add an e-mail account, follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Move to "Tools", by pressing “down arrow”.
3) Press "Enter" or press "T".
4) You are placed on "Accounts manager". Press "Enter".
5) "Account name: no items" is displayed. You can also jump quickly to this
dialog from the "Inbox" by pressing "Ctrl-M".
6) Press "Tab", to move to "Add".
7) Press "Enter" on the "Add" button or press "A".
8) The dialog is opened and "Account name:" is displayed. Type the name
by which you want to identify the e-mail account: (example, "Gmail" or "work
e-mail").
9) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Display name". Type the "Display name"
in the edit box. This name is the name people will see when they receive an
e-mail from you.
10) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Logon username". Type the "Logon
username" in the computer edit box. (Ex: Sense or [email protected]).
Note: some providers require you to use the entire e-mail address as the
username, while others may use the part of the address before the at-sign.
BE sure you type the username correctly for your e-mail provider.
11) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Password". Type the "password" in the
computer edit box. Note: by default, the password is hidden, and thus
displays as asterisks. Be sure to type carefully as you cannot review your
password unless you have chosen not to hide passwords in the “Global
Options”.
12) Press “down arrow”, to move to "E-mail address". Type your "E-mail
address" in the computer edit box. (Ex: [email protected])
13) Press "Down arrow", to move to "Default mail server". You can choose to
use a “POP3” or “IMAP” server using “Space”.
14) Press “Down arrow”, to move to “Incoming Server?”. If you have selected
“IMAP” as your incoming server type, “Incoming IMAP server?” is displayed.
If you have chosen “POP3” as your incoming server type, “Incoming POP3
server” is displayed. Type the "Incoming server" in the computer edit box.
181
(Ex: imap.himsintl.com, or pop.himsintl.com). Check with your Internet
account provider or network administrator for your specific incoming server
name.
15) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Outgoing SMTP server". Type the
"Outgoing SMTP server" in the computer edit box. Check with your Internet
account provider or network administrator to find out what you should use as
the Outgoing SMTP server.
16) Press "Tab", to move to the "Confirm" button.
17) Press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button.
18) The Voice Sense QWERTY exits to "Account name list" and shows the
added account name (Ex: Account name: Voice Sense QWERTY 1/1).
19) When you finish adding accounts, press "Alt-F4" to exit to the "Inbox".
To move from a setting item (Ex: ID, password) to the previous setting item,
press “up arrow”. And, to move to the "Confirm" button or the "Cancel" button,
press "Tab" or "Shift-Tab".
If you made a typing error in an item such as account name, ID, or password,
you can correct the error as follows;
1) To delete the letter where the cursor is located, press "Del".
2) To delete the letter in front of the cursor position, press "Backspace".
3) To delete the current line, press "Ctrl-Backspace".
Note: many e-mail service providers use secure servers with different port
numbers. If your service provider requires you to use encryption, you must
set these options in the "Advanced" dialog explained in section 8.1.2.1.1.
6.1.2.1.1 Signature and Advanced
While adding your account, you can create a signature and set advanced
options in the "Advanced" dialog.
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Tools".
3) Press "Enter" on "Tools" or press "T".
182
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Accounts manager".
5) Press "Enter" on the "Accounts manager".
6) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Account name". You can also use the
hot key, "Ctrl-M" to quickly open this dialog.
7) Press "Tab”, move to "Add".
8) Press "Enter" on the "Add" button or press "A".
9) When you have filled in everything in the Main Account settings list, press
"Tab”, to move to "Advanced".
10) Press "Enter" on the "Advanced" button.
11) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Use secure POP3 (POP-SSL)" or “Use
IMAP SSL”. The default value of this check box is unselected. If your POP3
or IMAP server uses "SSL", select the check box by pressing "Space".
12) Press “down arrow” to move to "POP3 (or IMAP) port number". The
POP3 port number is set to 110 by default, and the IMAP port number is set
to 143 by default. Type a different POP3 or IMAP port number in the
computer edit box if your provider requires a different port number. Note: if
you check "SSL" above, the pop port number is automatically changed to
995, as most pop servers with SSL require. If you check SSL for an IMAP
server, the default IMAP port number is automatically set to 993 as is most
common for IMAP servers using SSL.
13) Press “down arrow” to move to "SMTP encryption type". The setting
values are "None", "SSL" and "TLS". If your Outgoing SMTP server uses
"SSL" or "TLS", change the value by pressing "Space".
14) Press “down arrow” to move to "SMTP port number": set to 25 by default.
Type a different value in the computer edit box if your provider uses a
different SMTP port number. Common port numbers are 465 for SMTP
servers using SSL, and 587 for SMTP servers using TLS.
15) Press “down arrow” to move to "SMTP username". If your Internet
account provider requires you to use a different SMTP username, enter it in
this computer edit box.
16) Press “down arrow” to move to "SMTP password". Type the password
that corresponds to the above ID. It should be typed using ASCII.
17) Press “down arrow” to move to "Use as default send-from account" To
use the username and password that were set in steps 7 and 8, select the
check box by pressing "Space".
183
18) Press “Down Arrow” to move to “default IMAP account”. (only appears if
you are using IMAP as your incoming server type)
19) Press “down arrow” to move to "Keep mail copies in server". When you
download e-mail from your e-mail server, you can set the Voice Sense
QWERTY to keep e-mail messages on the server or delete them as they
download. Press "Space" to toggle "Yes" and "No", and press "enter" if you
do not want a copy of the e-mail to remain on the e-mail server.
20) Press “down arrow” to move to "Save mail copies in sent mailbox". When
you send e-mail, you can set whether or not the Voice Sense QWERTY
stores e-mail messages you send in the sent mailbox. Press "Space" to
toggle "Yes" and "No", and press "Enter".
21) Press "Tab", move to "Use signature". The default value is "No". To
attach a signature to your mail, press "Space" to change "No" to "Yes".
22) Press "Tab", to move to "Signature".
23) Press "Enter" on the "Signature" button.
24) You are placed in the "Signature:" multi edit box. Type the information for
the signature you want to attach to your e-mails.
25) Press "Tab", to move to "Confirm".
26) Press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button.
27) This saves the signature, and you are returned to the "Signature" button.
You can cancel by pressing "enter" on the "Cancel" button.
28) Press “Tab”, and press "enter" on the "Confirm" button.
6.1.2.2 Checking added account list
Use the following steps to view the information about an added e-mail
account.
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Press “down arrow” to move to "Tools".
3) Press "Enter", or press "T" from the menu.
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Accounts manager".
5) Press "Enter" on the "Accounts manager".
184
6) Press “down arrow” or “up arrow” to move to the desired account in the
account list.
7) If the desired account is displayed, press "Enter". Or "Tab" to move to the
"Information" button, and press "enter".
8) The "Information" dialog is opened, and "Account name: (Added account
name)" is displayed (Ex: account name: Voice Sense QWERTY).
9) Press “down arrow” or “Tab” to read the information for each item.
Pressing "enter" on the "Close" button returns you to the account list.
IN this dialog you can read all information associated with an e-mail account.
USE the navigation keys listed below to move among the items in the dialog:
Move to the previous item: Up arrow
Move to the next item: down arrow
Move to the first item: Home
Move to the last item: End
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
Move to the next control: Tab
6.1.2.3 Modifying an e-mail account
Use the following steps to modify the information for an e-mail account.
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Press “down arrow” to move to "Tools".
3) Press "Enter" on "Tools" or press "T"
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Accounts manager".
5) Press "Enter" on the "Accounts manager".
6) Press “down arrow” or “up arrow” to move to the desired account in the
account list.
7) When the desired account is displayed, press "Tab" to move to the
"Modify" button, and press "Enter". Or, press "m".
185
8) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Account name" and you are placed in
the "Account name" edit box with the current information filled in. For
example, "Account name: Voice Sense QWERTY".
9) The "Modify" dialog is opened. You can now make changes to the
information presented.
10) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Display name" and make any changes
you wish.
11) Use “down arrow” to continue through the dialog, editing any of the fields
you wish to modify as you navigate them.
12) When you reach the bottom of the main account settings dialog, press
"Tab", to move to the "Advanced" button, and press "Enter". Again, use
“down arrow” to move through the list of items in this dialog, and make
changes as necessary.
13) When you have finished making modifications, press "Tab”, to move to
"Confirm" and press "Enter".
14) You are returned to the main account settings dialog. Press “Tab” to
move to the "confirm" button, and press "Enter".
15) When the modification is complete, you are returned to the "account list".
As described, you can move among the items (account name, logon
username, password...) by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. You can
move to the "Confirm" button or the "Cancel" button by pressing “Tab” or
"shift-tab".
For all of the items, the values that were entered previously are displayed. If
you type new information, the new information replaces the old information.
To modify part of an item, press the "cursor routing key" at the desired
position and edit the text.
If you made a typing error in an item (account name, logon username,
password...), you can modify it using the following hot keys:
1. Delete the current letter by pressing "Del".
2. Press "Backspace" To delete the previous letter.
3. To delete the current line, press "Alt-c".
186
6.1.2.4 Deleting an E-mail Account
Use the following steps to delete an E-mail account.
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Press “down arrow” to move to "Tools".
3) Press "Enter" on "Tools" or press "T".
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Accounts manager".
5) Press "Enter" on "Accounts manager".
6) Press “down arrow” or “up arrow” to move to the desired account in the
account list.
7) When the desired account is displayed, press "Del". Or, press "Tab" to
move to the "Delete" button, and press "Enter".
8) "Are you sure you want to delete the (added account name) account?
Yes" is displayed.
9) Press "enter" To delete it.
10) The Voice Sense QWERTY deletes the account, shows "Successfully
deleted", and returns to the "account list".
To cancel the deletion, press "Space" when the "Are you sure you want to
delete the (Added account name) account? Yes" is displayed. Press "enter".
Or, press "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
6.2 Receiving and Sending E-mail
6.2.1 Receiving E-mail
The Voice Sense QWERTY is capable of receiving plain text e-mail and html
e-mail messages.
4. POP3
You can receive e-mail messages from POP3 accounts by doing the
following:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
187
2) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Message".
3) Press "Enter" on "Message" Or, press "M".
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Reply".
5) Press “down arrow”, move to "Check for New Mail".
6) Press "Enter" on "Check for New Mail". Or press "N".
7) You are presented with the "Account name" list. You can also move to this
dialog directly from the "Inbox" by pressing "Alt-m". This dialog consists of
"account list", a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button.
8) When "Account name: (Added account name x/x)" is displayed, press “up
arrow” or “down arrow” to move to the desired account.
9) Press "enter" when the desired account is displayed, or press "Tab" to
move to the "Confirm" button, and press "enter".
10) The Voice Sense QWERTY displays "There are xx messages to receive.
Now receiving”. "x/you mail received;" "Successfully received x out of y
message" is displayed. When the e-mail messages are downloaded from the
server, the e-mail message list is displayed in the "Inbox" (Ex: Subject:
(subject of the e-mail received) xx/xx).
If the e-mail size is greater than the Voice Sense QWERTY can handle, it
announces, "This message is too large to download. Skipping". And the
Voice Sense QWERTY begins downloading the next e-mail message.
To cancel the download, press "Tab" to move to the "Cancel" button, and
press "enter", or you can press "Esc".
2) IMAP
When receiving messages via an IMAP server, you can both check the
newest mail, according to the number of messages you have it set to
automatically receive in the “Set options” dialog, or you can ask the Voice
Sense QWERTY to load older e-mail messages. To receive the newest email messages, press “Alt-m” from the message list of the mailbox on which
you are located. To receive previous mail, press “Alt-e”. You can also access
“Get new mail” and “Get Previous mail” from the “Message” menu by
pressing “Alt” and navigating to “Message”. Press “Enter” on “Message” and
choose “Get New Mail” or “Get list of previous mail” and press “Enter”. In
188
addition, when using IMAP, as you navigate the various mailboxes in an
account, new mail is automatically received for each mailbox as you open it.
When you execute the command to receive mail, the Voice Sense QWERTY
announces, “Getting new mail” or “Getting previous mail”. As the messages
are downloaded, progress beeps are heard and full cells are displayed to let
you know the action is being taken. When the Voice Sense QWERTY
finishes receiving messages, you are placed in the mailbox from which you
executed the “get mail” command.
6.2.2 Move to account or mail box There are two ways to move to an account or mail box.
You can access the accounts list or mailbox list by pressing “Tab” or “ShiftTab” until you reach “mailboxes” or “Accounts”. Use “Up arrow” or “Down
arrow” to move among the items in the list, and press “tab” to open the
Account or mailbox.
You can also use the following hot keys to navigate accounts and mailboxes:
Go to the next mailbox: Alt-Fn-down arrow.
Go to previous mailbox: Alt-FN-Up arrow.
Go to the next account category: Control-FN-Down arrow.
Go to the previous account category: Control-FN-Up arrow.
Note: the hot keys are not available from the account list or mail box list.
They are only available from the message list.
6.2.2 Reading Received E-mail Messages
If you downloaded e-mail from your server, the e-mail messages are listed in
the "Inbox". Each e-mail in the "Inbox" contains the following items.
1. Subject
2. Date
189
3. From (Sender)
4. CC
5. Message
6. Attach (this is displayed only for an e-mail that has one or more attached
files)
You can move among the items by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
6.2.2.1 Subject Control
"Subject" shows the title of the e-mail; "Subject: (subject of the e-mail) xx/yy".
After the subject of the e-mail, you find "xx/yy", which shows the number (xx)
of the current e-mail and the total number (yy) of received e-mail messages.
For example, "11/21" means that the e-mail is the 11th e-mail out of a total of
21 e-mail messages.
If there is a file attached to the e-mail, "a Subject: (subject of the e-mail)
xx/yy" is displayed. The symbol "a (dot 1)" means that the e-mail has an
attached file. It is displayed as "a (dot 1)" on the Braille display (When
connected to SyncBraille), and it is announced as "1 attachment", which
indicates the number of the attached files.
The Voice Sense QWERTY also indicates which e-mail messages have
been read, and which e-mail messages are unread. E-mail messages that
have not yet been read have a dash placed in front of the subject. For
example, let's suppose there is an e-mail with an attachment that has been
unread. It would appear as -a Subject: (subject of the e-mail) xx/yy.
You can move among e-mail messages when the subject is displayed, by
using the following keys;
Move to the next e-mail: down arrow
Move to the previous e-mail: up arrow
Move to the first e-mail in the Inbox: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last e-mail in the Inbox: Ctrl-End
6.2.2.2 Date Control
190
"Date" shows the date and time when the e-mail was received; "Date: (date),
(time) xx/yy". The date is displayed in the following order: day, month, date,
and year. The time is displayed in the following order: hour, minute, and
second using the 24 hour system. And, "xx/yy" shows the current number of
the e-mail in relation to the total number of e-mail messages received. You
can also move among e-mail messages when the date is displayed using the
same navigation keys described above.
The Voice Sense QWERTY also indicates which e-mail messages have
been read, and which e-mail messages are unread when viewing by date.
6.2.2.3 Sender Control
"From" shows the sender information; "From: (sender's e-mail address)
xx/yy". The Voice Sense QWERTY also indicates which e-mail messages
have been read, and which e-mail messages are unread when viewing by
sender.
You can save the e-mail id of the sender to your contacts in the "Address
Manager" using the following steps:
1) Press "Ctrl-i" when "From: (sender's e-mail address) xx/yy" is displayed.
2) The "add address" dialog is opened, and "Name: (sender's user name or
e-mail address)" is displayed.
3) Type the sender's name, or, if what is automatically filled in is acceptable,
press “Tab” to move to "Confirm", and press "enter".
When you type the name, you can type it directly without pressing a cursor
key to designate the input position. Or, you can modify what is already filled
in, by pressing a corresponding cursor key, and editing the text. If the
address is saved, and the dialog is closed, the Voice Sense QWERTY
returns you to the message list, and shows you the "From" item again.
By saving the e-mail ID using the above method, the name and its e-mail id
is saved in the Voice Sense QWERTY's "Address Manager". . The saved email ID can be used to send a message to that person at a future time.
191
To cancel saving the e-mail ID, press “Tab” to move to the "Cancel" button,
and press "enter", or press "Esc".
6.2.2.4 CC Control
"CC" shows the carbon copy recipient. This control is shown if the e-mail has
a "CC".
You can save the e-mail id of the carbon copy recipient using the process
described above for saving a sender's e-mail address.
6.2.2.5 Message Control
"Message" displays the message body of the selected e-mail. You can move
to a message by pressing “Tab”. Or, you can read a message by pressing
"enter" when "Subject", "Date", or "From" is displayed. When you press
"enter" on the "Subject", "Date", or "From" controls, the entire message is
automatically spoken. To interrupt reading, press "Ctrl".
To return to the "Subject" while reading the message, press "Esc".
When you read the message, all of the navigation and control keys are the
same as in the "Word Processor".
6.2.2.6 Attachment Control
You can find and download attached files by navigating to "Attach" on
messages containing attachments. Voice Sense QWERTY displays this
control only for e-mails which contain attachments. Attachments are
displayed as, "Attach: (attached file name) xx/yy". The "yy" is the total
number of the attached files to the e-mail and "xx" is the "xxth" attached file.
Use the following steps to download attachments:
1) From the body of a message containing attachments, press "Tab" to move
to the attached files list.
2) Move to the desired file name in "Attach" by pressing “down arrow” or “up
arrow”.
192
3) Press "Space" on the file name you want to download to select it. * is
displayed in front of the file name.
4) Press "enter" to download the file. You are prompted, "Attachments will be
saved to /flashdisk/download. Do you want to change this location? No"
Press "enter".
By doing so, the selected file is saved in the "download" folder on the
"flashdisk".
If you have more than one attachment you want to download, you can press
"Ctrl-a" to select all attachments in the list, or press space on any number of
individual files to select them. To download only the currently focused file,
you can simply press "enter" on it.
To change the download path:
1) When you are prompted, "Attachments will be saved to
/flashdisk/download. Do you want to change this location?", navigate to
"Yes" and press "Enter".
2) You are placed in the file list of the "Downloads" folder on the "flashdisk".
Use normal file and folder navigation keys as described in the "File Manager"
section of this manual to locate the folder into which you want to save the
attachments.
3) Press "Space" to select the folder in which to save the attachments, and
press "Enter".
4) The file is downloaded, and you are returned to your e-mail message on
the “attachments” field.
6.2.2.7 Reading HTML e-mail
If you receive an html e-mail, follow these steps to access the links, etc:
1) Open the message with the Web browser by pressing the hot key, "Alt-o".
2) Or, you can use the menu: Press “Alt”, move to "Message" and press
"enter". Navigate to "Open Message In Web Browser" and press "enter".
The "Web Browser" is launched and you can view the html message in the
"Web Browser". If the e-mail message contains links, you can visit these
193
sites by pressing "Enter" just as you would on any web page, provided your
Voice Sense QWERTY is connected to the Internet.
6.2.3 Writing e-mail
Use the following steps to create an e-mail message:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File" menu.
3) Press "Enter" on the "File" menu.
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Write New Message".
5) Press "Enter" on "Write New Message".
6) "To:" is displayed on the Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille).
Pressing "Ctrl-n" opens this dialog directly from the "Inbox"..
7) Press "shift-tab" to move to the "Account" combo box. Move to the
account from which you want to send this message by using “up arrow” or
“down arrow”. Press “Tab” to move to the "To:" field.
8) Type the e-mail address of the recipient, or rather, the person to whom
you are sending the message. (Ex: [email protected]).
9) Press “Tab” to move to "CC:".
10) Type the e-mail address of the copy recipient using computer Braille. If
you do not need to carbon copy anyone, you can skip to the next step.
11) Press “Tab” to move to "BCC:".
12) Type the e-mail address of the blind copy recipient using computer
Braille. If there is no blind copy recipient, you can skip to the next step.
13) Press “Tab” to move to "Subject:".
14) Type the subject of the e-mail message.
15) Press “Tab” to move to "Message body:"
16) Type the text of your e-mail message. The input method and the editing
method are the same as the input and editing method used in the word
processor
17) When you finish writing the e-mail message, press “Alt” to open the "Email" menu. The "File" menu is displayed again.
18) Press "enter".
194
19) Press “down arrow” to move to "Send".
20) Press "enter". You can also send mail directly by pressing “Ctrl-s”.
21) "Sending…". is displayed, and the e-mail is sent. When the e-mail is
finished sending, "Successfully sent new message" is displayed. If sending
fails, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Unable to sent message". If this
occurs, the e-mail is saved in the "Outbox".
Note: Be sure you have an active Internet connection before executing the
"Send" command, as you cannot send e-mail if the Voice Sense QWERTY
cannot access the Internet.
After sending is completed, or has failed, you are returned to the "Inbox".
To cancel e-mail message creation or sending, press "Esc or "Alt-F4" and
you are returned to the "Inbox".
6.2.3.1 Attaching a File
While you are writing e-mail, you can attach files to your messages.
Use the following steps to attach a file:
1) While writing e-mail, press “Alt” to open the menu. Voice Sense QWERTY
displays "File" menu.
2) Press "Enter" on the "File" menu.
3) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Attach File".
4) Press "Enter" on "Attach File". The file list is opened. You can also access
"attach file" directly by pressing "Ctrl-f".
5) The default folder for the "file list" is the "upload" folder on the "flashdisk".
Use normal file and folder navigation keys to locate the file or files you want
to attach.
6) Move to the desired file, and press "enter". To attach more than one file,
move to each file, and press "Space" to select it. * is displayed in front of the
selected file names. Press "enter" To attach the selected files.
7) When the selected files are attached, the Voice Sense QWERTY
announces, "xx attached", and returns to the message body. "xx" is the
number of the attached files.
195
If there are files attached to an e-mail, the "Attach" item is displayed in the
tab order after the "Message body".
Attachments are displayed as: "Attach: (attached file name) xx/yy (file size)".
"yy" is the total number of attached files, and "xx" means the "xxth" file out of
"yy" files. You can move among the attached files by pressing “up arrow” or
“down arrow”. If there is a file in the attached file list you do not wish to
attach, you can delete it from the list by pressing "Del".
If you press "Del", “Delete (file name) file? Yes" is displayed. If you press
"enter", this file is deleted from the attached file list. If you press "Space" to
switch from "Yes" to "No", and press "enter", your selection is cancelled, and
the file remains in the attached file list.
6.2.3.2 Sending E-Mail to Multiple Recipients
You can type more than one recipient, carbon copy recipient, or blind copy
recipient. If you type more than one e-mail address in these fields, the same
e-mail is sent to all of them at once.
When you input more than one recipient, you must insert a semi-colon or
comma between the e-mail addresses.
For example, [email protected];[email protected]
6.2.3.3 Searching the Address List
You can add a recipient to "To", "CC", or "BCC" from the address list without
typing in the e-mail address directly.
The following are the steps to search for and add e-mail addresses to the
recipients of a message:
1) Press “Alt” to open the "E-mail" menu from "To", "CC", or "BCC". "File" is
displayed.
2) Press "Enter" on the "File" menu.
3) Press “down arrow” to move to "Lookup Address".
196
4) Press "Enter" on "Lookup Address". "Search for address" is displayed.
Press "Ctrl-l” to look up an address directly from one of the recipient fields.
5) Type the last name of the desired recipient at "Search for address", and
press "enter". Or, press “Tab” to move to "Confirm", and press "enter".
6) "xx addresses are found" is displayed, and the first item of the found list is
also displayed. "xx" is the number of the found addresses that have the
same name in the address list (Ex: HIMS [email protected] 1/xx)
7) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to move to the desired address, and
press "enter". You can select more than one address by pressing "Space".
When you have chosen the addresses you want, press "enter".
8) The selected addresses are inserted in "To", "CC" or "BCC".
If you press "enter" without typing in the desired name, all of the addresses
in your address list are displayed. If there is no matching address, "No
match". is announced and "Search for address" is displayed again.
6.2.3.4 Saving E-Mail to the Outbox
Messages are saved in the "Outbox" in 2 ways:
1. The user saves the e-mail to the "Outbox" for later sending.
2. An e-mail fails to send due to a network error or other reason.
The "Save Mail in Outbox" dialog contains the following:
1. "File name" edit combo box
2. "Confirm" Button
3. "Cancel" Button
4. "Storage folder" List
You can move among the menu controls by using "Shift-Tab" or "Tab".
Use the following steps to save an e-mail in the outbox:
1) Press “Alt” after creating the e-mail message. The "File" menu is
displayed.
2) Press "enter".
3) Press “down arrow” to move to "Save Mail In Outbox".
197
4) Press "Enter".
5) The dialog for saving is opened.
6) "File name: (subject of writing e-mailgg.txt" is displayed. You can also
jump to this dialog by pressing "Fn-s" while writing a message.
7) Press "Enter" on "File name: (subject of writing e-mailgg.txt", or press
“Tab” to move to the "Confirm" button.
8) The message is saved as "(subject of writing e-mailgg.txt".
9) To name the e-mail message, type a file name. Use the same procedure
as in "Save As" in the "Word Processor". You can also change the path
where the message is stored.
10) After the Voice Sense QWERTY saves the e-mail message, it returns to
the previous location.
By following the explanation above, the e-mail message is saved as
"(subject of writing e-mailgg.txt" in the "flashdisk/email/storage box".
If you do not input a subject when writing the e-mail, the file is named
"noname".
If you choose to save the e-mail in a location other than
"flashdisk/email/storagebox", you cannot access the e-mail message in the
"Outbox". Thus, you cannot send the e-mail unless it is returned to the
"Outbox" storage folder.
While creating a "message", press "Esc" or "Alt-F4” To cancel writing the email.
1) The Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Currently writing mail. Save? Yes".
2) To return to the "Inbox" without saving the e-mail, press "Space" to
change "Yes" to "No", and press "Enter".
6.2.3.5 Saving E-Mail as New Name in the "Outbox"
If you save an e-mail message in the "Outbox", you can save it under a
different file name. To do this, use the steps described above, but choose
"Save Draft" from the "File Menu".
198
6.2.3.6 Sending the E-Mail in the "Outbox"
Use the following steps to send e-mail from the "Outbox":
1) When the Voice Sense QWERTY displays message list in "Inbox".
2) Press "Shift-Tab", to move to "Mailbox".
3) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to "Outbox".
4) Press "Enter".
5) Voice Sense QWERTY displays the message list in the "Outbox".
6) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to the mail message you want
to send.
If you want to send all the e-mails in the list: Press "Ctrl-a” to select all.
If you want to send individual messages, use normal selection commands to
select them.
8) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
9) Press "Enter" on the "File" menu.
10) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to "Send" menu.
11) Press "Enter" on the "Send" menu.
12) The selected messages are sent.
Press “Ctrl-s” to directly execute the "Send" command.
If you send all the messages in the "Outbox", no items" is displayed.
6.2.3.7 Setting Default E-mail account
If you have set up more than one e-mail account on the Voice Sense
QWERTY, you can set the default e-mail account for sending messages.
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu from any mailbox but "Outbox".
2) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Tools".
3) Press "Enter" on the "Tools menu" or press "T".
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays the "Accounts manager".
6) Press "Enter" on the "Accounts manager".
6) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Account name" list.
199
7) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to the e-mail account you want
to set as the default.
8) Press "Tab", to move to "Modify".
9) Press "Enter" on the "Modify" button or press "m".
10) Press "Tab", to move to "Advanced".
1) Press "Enter" on the "Advanced" button.
12) Voice Sense QWERTY displays the "Use secure POP3 (POP-SSL)".
13) Press “down arrow”, repeatedly to move to "Use as default send-from
account SMTP".
14) Press "Space" to change the state of the check box to "checked".
15) Press "Tab", to move to "Confirm" and press "Enter".
16) You are returned to the "Advanced" button.
17) Press "Tab", to move to "Confirm" and press "Enter".
18) Voice Sense QWERTY announces, "Successfully modified account" and
you are returned to the accounts list.
Voice Sense QWERTY displays "default" on the LCD and Braille display next
to the default account.
6.3 Advanced E-mail features
6.3.1 Deleting E-mail
You can delete e-mail messages individually, or you can select multiple
messages and delete them simultaneously.
6.3.1.1 Deleting an e-mail
You can delete an e-mail in the mailbox by following the steps below;
1) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to move to the "Subject" of the e-mail
you want to delete.
2) Press "Del".
200
3) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Delete (subject of the selected e-mail)
mail? Yes".
4) Press "Enter" To delete the e-mail.
To cancel, press "Space" to change "Yes" to "No" and press "Enter".
You can also cancel e-mail deletion by pressing "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
6.3.1.2 Deleting Multiple E-mail Messages
To delete two or more e-mail messages, use the following steps:
1) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to move to the e-mail "Subject" that you
want to delete. You can also select messages from the "Date control".
2) Press "Space" on the e-mail messages you want to delete.
3) Voice Sense QWERTY displays * in front of the selected e-mail subject.
4) Move to other e-mail messages you want to delete by pressing “down
arrow” or “up arrow”. Press "Space" on each of the messages you wish to
delete.
5) Press "Del".
6) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Delete xx message? Yes". "Xx" is the
total number of messages to be deleted.
7) Press "Enter".
You can also select all messages in the current mailbox by pressing "Ctrl-a",
or select a contiguous group of messages by pressing "Ctrl-b" to set the
beginning of the selection, and move your cursor to the last message you
want to select.
To cancel this function, press "Space" to change "Yes" to "No" on the delete
prompt and press "Enter".
Or you can cancel by pressing "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
6.3.2 Reply And Reply All to a Received E-Mail.
201
When you reply to an e-mail, you can edit or add a message to the original
message, or add another recipient.
Example:
Suppose you received an e-mail with the following information:
Sender's e-mail address: [email protected]
Subject of the e-mail: Welcome to HIMS
You could reply to this e-mail using the following steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu from "Subject", "Date", or "Message body" of
a message in the "Inbox".
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File".
3) Press “down arrow” to move to "Message".
4) Press "Enter".
5) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Reply".
6) Press "Enter" on "Reply".
7) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Message body".
8) The message body already contains the original message body of the
received e-mail; "--- below Original Message ---. You can also execute the
"Reply" command directly by pressing “Ctrl-r".
9) Press "Shift-Tab" to move to "Subject", "BCC"", "CC", and "To".
10) At "Subject", Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Subject: Re: Welcome to
HIMS". And, at "To", Voice Sense QWERTY displays "To: [email protected]".
11) Press "Tab" to move to "Message body".
12) Type the text you want to add or edit.
13) Press "Ctrl-s” to send the e-mail.
You can save replies just as you can save new messages in the "Outbox" for
sending later.
You can reply to an e-mail by using either "Reply" or "Reply To All", as
Choosing "Reply" sends en e-mail to only the original sender. Choosing
"Reply To All" sends an e-mail back to the original sender as well as all other
recipients of the original e-mail.
202
To activate the "Reply To All" function:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File".
3) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Message".
4) Press "Enter".
5) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Reply".
6) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Reply To All".
7) Press "Enter" on "Reply To All". You can activate the "Reply To All"
function directly by pressing "Alt-r".
8) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "To: (the original sender and all other
original recipients)"
9) You can use the same steps to send a message as when using the
"Reply" function.
6.3.3 Forwarding a Received E-Mail Message
"Forwarding" refers to sending an e-mail you received to another person.
You can also add to or edit the message and subject. You can also attach a
file to this e-mail.
Example:
Let's suppose there is an e-mail message that you received as follows:
Sender's e-mail address: [email protected]
Subject of the e-mail: Welcome to HIMS
You can forward this e-mail to others using the following method:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu from the "Subject", "Date", or "Message
body".
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File".
3) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Message".
4) Press "Enter" on "Message".
5) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Reply".
203
6) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Forward".
7) Press "Enter" on "Forward".
8) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "To:". You can activate the "Forward"
command directly by pressing "Ctrl-f". Input the e-mail address of the new
recipient, or multiple recipients.
9) Press "Tab", to move to "CC", "BCC", and "Subject".
10) At "Subject", Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Subject: Fw: Welcome to
HIMS".
11) Press "Tab", to move to "Message body".
12) The original e-mail message is shown following, "----- Forwarded
Message -----".
13) Type any additional text you wish to add to the message, or make any
edits to the forwarded text.
14) Press "Ctrl-s” to send the e-mail.
When you forward an e-mail, you have all of the same capabilities as when
writing a new e-mail. Thus, you can add recipients and attach files to the email you are forwarding just as with a new message. And, as with a new
message, you can also save to the "Outbox" for sending later.
6.3.4 Saving a Received E-mail as Document.
There may be times when you wish to save a received message as a
document. You can do this using the following steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File".
3) Press "Enter" on "File".
4) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Save As Text".
5) Press "Enter" on "Save As Text".
6) The "save as dialog" is opened.
7) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File name: (subject of e-mail being
read.txt". You can open this dialog directly by pressing "Fn-s".
8) Press "Enter" on the "File name: (subject of e-mail being read.txt". Or
press “Tab”, to move to the "Confirm" button, and press "Enter". If you wish,
204
you can rename the file using the same method as in the "Save As" dialog of
the "Word Processor".
9) You are returned to your previous location.
The text file is saved in "flashdisk/My Documents" with the file name
"(subject of e-mail being read.txt". You cannot change the file format. You
can read the saved text file in the "Word Processor".
To cancel "Save As Text", press "Tab" from the "Confirm" button to move to
"Cancel". And press "Enter". Or, press "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
6.3.5 Printing E-Mail Messages
You may wish to emboss or print an e-mail message.
To print an e-mail message, do the following:
1) Connect the Voice Sense QWERTY to an ink printer. Make sure to use
the same printer port set in the "Global Options".
2) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
3) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File".
4) Press "Enter" on "File".
5) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Print E-mail".
6) Press "Enter" on "Print E-mail".
7) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Print type". Press "Alt-p" to activate the
"print" function directly.
8) Press "Space" or “down arrow”, to change the "print type". The setting
values are "Printer" and "Embosser".
9) After selecting the "Print type", press "Enter". Or press "Tab”, to move to
the "Confirm" button, and press "Enter".
10) The selected e-mail is printed.
To cancel printing, press "Tab" to move to "Cancel" and press "Enter". Or
press "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
6.4 Additional features of E-mail
205
6.4.1 Find
The "Find" command is used to search for messages in the current mailbox.
The "Find" function looks for text that matches the text you enter in "Subject",
"Date", and/or "From". This function only works in the "Subject", "Date", or
"From" controls.
The "Find" dialog consists of the following:
1. "Find": Edit box for text to search
2. "Search" radio button
3. "Direction" radio button
4. "Confirm" button
5. "Cancel" button.
In the "Find" dialog, you can move among the five controls by pressing "Tab"
or "Shift-Tab". The hot key for opening the "Find" dialog is "Ctrl-Shift-f ".
To activate the "Find" function, use the following steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File".
3) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Edit".
4) Press "Enter" on "Edit".
5) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Select All".
6) Press “down arrow” or “up arrow”, to move to "Find".
7) Press "Enter" on "Find". Or press "f".
8) Voice Sense QWERTY displays the "Find:" edit box for typing the text you
want to search.
9) After typing the text, press "Tab" to move to the "Search" radio button.
You can select among "All", "Subject", "Date", or "From". Choosing "All"
searches all three fields. You can select an item by pressing “down arrow” or
“up arrow”. By selecting a field, you can search that specific field for the text
you want to find.
10) Press "Tab", to move to the "Direction" radio button, containing the
values "Forward" or "Backward". Pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow” selects
the search direction.
206
11) Press "Tab", to move to the "Confirm" button.
12) Press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button.
To cancel, press "Tab" on "Confirm", move to "Cancel". And press "Enter".
Or, you can press "Alt-F4" or "Esc" anywhere in this dialog to cancel "Find".
6.4.2 Find Again
The "Find Again" command finds the next occurrence of the text according to
the search text and direction specified in the "Find" dialog. As with "Find", the
"Find Again" function only works in the "Subject", "Date", or "From" fields.
To activate the "Find Again" function, use the following steps:
1) Press "Alt" to open the menu.
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File"
3) Press “down arrow”, to move to the "Edit"
4) Press "Enter" on "Edit".
5) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Select All".
6) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to "Find Again".
7) Press "Enter" on "Find Again". Or press "g".
To activate this function directly, press "F3".
6.4.3 Move to Next Unread Message
The "Move To Next Unread Message" option allows you to move to the next
unread message. If you use this function on the last unread message in a list,
you are sent to the first unread message in the list.
To activate this function from the "Subject", "Date", or "From" field,
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File".
3) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Edit".
4) Press "Enter" on "Edit".
5) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Select all".
207
6) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Move to Next Unread Message".
7) Press "Enter" on "Move to Next Unread Message". Or press "u”.
To use this function directly, press "Ctrl-u".
6.4.4 Copy or Move to Mailbox
You can copy and move e-mails using the "Copy to Mailbox" or "Move To
Mailbox" commands in the "Edit" menu.
The "move/Copy dialog" contains the following:
1. "Folder" list.
2. "Create mailbox" Button
3. "Delete mailbox" Button
4. "Rename mailbox" Button
5. "Confirm" Button
6. "Cancel" Button
You can move among the controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". And you
can move among items in the "Folder" list by pressing “up arrow” or “down
arrow”.
To cancel this dialog, press "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
To copy and move an e-mail to another folder, follow these steps:
1) You can select individual e-mails by pressing "Space", select a continuous
group with “Ctrl-b”, or select all with "Ctrl-a”. Or you can select e-mail using
the "Select All" or "Start Selection" options in the ""Edit" menu.
2) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
3) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File".
4) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Edit".
5) Press "Enter" on "Edit".
6) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Select All".
7) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Copy to Mailbox" or "Move To Mailbox".
8) Press "Enter" on "Copy to Mailbox" or "Move To Mailbox".
208
9) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Folder list". You can activate these
functions directly by pressing "Alt-c" or "Alt-x”.
10) Press “down arrow”, to move to the folder into which you want to copy or
move messages.
11) Press "Enter".
12) The e-mail is moved or copied to the folder.
13) You are returned to the mailbox from which you activated the "Move" or
"Copy" command.
6.4.4.1 Creating a Mailbox
You can create additional mailboxes in the "E-mail" folder for sorting and
storing your messages.
To create a new mailbox, follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu from the “Inbox" message list
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File".
3) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Edit" and Press "Enter". Or Press "e”.
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Select All".
5) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to "Copy to Mailbox" or "Move
To Mailbox".
6) Press "Enter". Or press "Alt-c" or "Alt-x”, to open this dialog directly from
the message list.
7) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Folder" lists.
8) Press "Tab", to move to "Create mailbox".
9) Press "Enter" on "Create mailbox".
10) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Mailbox name:". Type the mailbox
name you want to create.
11) Press "Enter" or press "Tab”, to move to "Confirm" and press "Enter".
12) Voice Sense QWERTY displays the created mailbox in the "Folder" list.
The folder is also visible in the "Mailbox" and in the e-mail folder from "File
manager".
6.4.4.2 Deleting Folders/mailboxes
209
You are not able to delete "Inbox", "Sent", or “Outbox". However, you can
delete folders/mailboxes you have created.
To delete a folder, follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu from the message list of the "Inbox".
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "File".
3) Press “down arrow”, move to "Edit" and Press "Enter". Or Press "e”.
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Select All".
5) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to "Copy to Mailbox" or "Move
To mailbox".
6) Press "Enter". Or press "Alt-c" or "Alt-x”, to activate these commands
directly.
7) Voice Sense QWERTY displays the "Folder" list.
8) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to the folder you want to delete.
9) Press "Tab”, to move to "Delete mailbox".
10) Press "Enter".
11) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Delete (mailbox name) mailbox? Yes".
12) Press "Enter".
You can also delete the current mailbox by pressing "Del" on the folder you
want to delete.
To cancel this function, press "Tab” to move to "Cancel". And press "Enter".
If you attempt to delete the "Inbox", "Sent", or "Outbox", Voice Sense
QWERTY plays the warning sound to notify you of the error.
6.4.4.3 Changing the name of a Folder Mailbox
You can also rename a mailbox. To do this, follow these steps:
1) Open the "Move/Copy to Mailbox" dialog as described in the steps above.
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays the "Folder" list.
3) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to the folder you want to
rename.
4) Press "Tab”, to move to "Rename mailbox".
210
5) Press "Enter".
6) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Folder mailbox:"
7) Type the new name for the folder mailbox.
8) Press "Enter. Or press "Tab” to move to "Confirm" and press "Enter".
If you attempt to rename the "Inbox", "Sent", or "Outbox", the Voice Sense
QWERTY plays the warning bleep to notify you of the error.
6.5 Using the Tools Menu
IN addition to the "Accounts Manager", the "Tools" menu contains options for
setting path and e-mail options.
The "Tools" menu contains the following four items:
1. Accounts Manager
2. Set path
3. Set options
4. Set spam
The "Accounts Manager" was explained at the beginning of this chapter. The
other items are explained in detail below:
6.5.1 Set Path
"Set Path" sets the default download path where file attachments and e-mail
are stored. You can set the download path using the following steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the "E-mail" menu from the "Inbox".
2) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Tools".
3) Press "Enter".
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Accounts manager".
5) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Set Path".
6) Press "Enter" on "Set Path".
211
7) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Save attachments path:
/flashdisk/download". You can open this dialog directly by pressing "Ctrl-p".
"Set Path" contains the following three items:
1. Save attachments path
2. Send attachments path
3. Disk to save mail in
You can move among these items by pressing “down arrow” and “up arrow”.
Each item consists of "Path", "Modify", and "Close". At "Path", the default
path is displayed. You can move among this information by pressing “Tab” or
"shift-tab".
"Set Path" is closed if you press "Esc" or "Alt-F4". Or, you can close it by
pressing enter on the "Close" button.
6.5.1.1 Set the Save Attachments Path
The default path for downloaded attached files is "/flashdisk/download".
You can set the download path using the following method:
1) Use the steps described above to access the "Save Path" dialog.
2) Press "Enter" on "Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download", or press
"m". Or, press "Tab” " to move to the "Modify" button, and press "Enter".
3) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "download folder xx/yy".
Use normal file and folder navigation keys to locate the folder in which you
want to save attachments.
4) Press "Space" to select the folder, and press "Enter". If a folder is selected,
* is displayed in front of the selected folder.
If you press "Enter" to set the path, the Voice Sense QWERTY shows the
changed path. For example, if you changed the path to the "My Documents"
folder, "Save attachments path: /flashdisk/My Documents" is displayed.
6.5.1.2 Set the Send Attachments Path
212
"Send attachments path" is the path where the e-mail program looks by
default when you attach a file to an e-mail.
The default path is
"/flashdisk/upload". You can change this path to a different path using the
following steps:
1) Open the "Set Path" dialog using the steps described above.
2) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Send attachments path:
/flashdisk/upload".
3) Press "Enter" or "m" on "Send attachments path: /flashdisk/upload". Or,
press "Tab", to move to the "Modify" button and press "Enter".
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "upload folder xx/yy" Use normal file and
folder navigation keys to locate the folder you want to use as the path for
attachments to be sent.
5) Press "Space" to select the desired folder, and press "Enter".
6) Voice Sense QWERTY displays * in front of the selected folder.
If you set the path by pressing "Enter", the Voice Sense QWERTY shows the
changed path.
6.5.1.3 Set the Disk in which to save mail
The e-mail messages that are downloaded from your network are saved in
the "e-mail" folder, located on the "flashdisk". If the size of an e-mail you are
receiving is so large that it cannot be downloaded and stored in the
"flashdisk", or you simply want to store your e-mail somewhere else, you can
save to a different disk using the following steps:
1) Connect the external storage disc to the Voice Sense QWERTY.
2) Use the steps described above to open the "Set Path" dialog.
3) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Disk to save mail in: /flashdisk".
4) Press "Enter" or "m" on "Disk to save mail in: /flashdisk". Or, press "Tab",
to move to the "Modify" button, and press "Enter".
5) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "flashdisk".
213
6) Press “down arrow” or “up arrow”, to move through the disk list. If you
have connected a USB memory stick or SD memory, Voice Sense QWERTY
displays "USB" or "SD" (SD memory).
7) Press "Enter" on the desired disk.
Voice Sense QWERTY displays the changed disk.
6.5.2 Set Options
The “Set options” dialog contains 5 items: “Default mail server”, “default
mailbox for POP3 server”, “get the number of mail at once for IMAP”, a
“confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. You can move among the items in
the dialog using “Tab” and “Shift-Tab”. Use “Up arrow” and “Down arrow” to
move among the settings in the settings list.
To open the “Set Options” dialog, , follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the "E-mail" menu from the "Inbox".
2) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Tools".
3) Press "Enter".
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Accounts manager".
5) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Set Options".
6) Press "Enter" on "Set Options". Or activate this command directly, by
pressing "Ctrl-o”.
The first item in the “Set options” dialog is “Default server?”. You can set the
default server to “IMAP” or “POP3”. Use “Space” to change the value of the
setting.
The next item in the “Set Options” dialog is “Use inbox as default mailbox
when using POP3 server? Yes.”. if you want the e-mail program to always
place you in the “inbox” when starting e-mail using POP3, leave this setting
as is. If you would like to use a different mailbox, press “Space” to change
this option to “no”.
214
The next option in the dialog is “Get the number of mail at once when using
IMAP”. The default is set to 64. Use “Space” or “Backspace” to cycle through
the various options. The available values are All, 32, 64, 96, and 128.
When you have finished adjusting the settings, press “Enter” to save the
options, or tab to the “Confirm” button and press “Enter”. If you do not wish
to save your changes, tab to the “cancel” button and press “Enter” or press
“Alt-F4”.
6.5.3 Spam Settings
When the Voice Sense QWERTY downloads e-mail from the e-mail server,
there may be a number of e-mail messages that are spam. In this case, you
can avoid downloading these spam e-mail messages by identifying specified
words in the subject or specifying e-mail addresses you know are from
spammers.
The spam e-mail messages that are identified by your "Spam Settings" are
not downloaded into the Voice Sense QWERTY, and remain on the e-mail
server.
Use the following steps to set spam e-mail filters:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu from the "Inbox".
2) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Tools".
3) Press "Enter".
4) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Accounts manager".
5) Press “down arrow”, to move to ""Spam Settings".
6) Press "Enter".
7) Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Type: Subject 1/3". You can also open
this dialog directly by pressing "Ctrl-e".
The "Spam Settings" dialog contains the following 6 items;
1. Type
2. List
215
3. Add
4. Modify
5. Delete
6. Close
You can move among the items by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-Tab".
To exit "Spam Settings", move to the "Close" button and press "enter", or
press "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
"Type" can be set to 1 of 3 options: "Subject", "E-mail address string", and
"Host". You can move among these options by pressing “up arrow” or “down
arrow”. The "list" is displayed in a different form according to the "Type" you
choose.
If you have selected "Subject", the list is displayed as "Subject: (Registered
word) 1/xx". If you selected "E-mail address string", it is displayed as "E-mail
address string: (Registered e-mail address string) 1/xx". It is displayed as "no
items" if there is no registered word or e-mail address string.
The following explains how to register, modify, and delete the spam settings.
6.5.3.1 Add As Spam E-Mail
1) Use the steps described above to open the "Spam Settings" dialog.
2) Press "a" when "Type: Subject 1/3" is displayed. Or, press "Tab" to move
to the "Add" button, and press "enter".
3) The "add dialog" is opened and "Subject add:" is displayed.
4) Type the words, by which you want to identify spam messages and press
"Enter". Or, press "Tab" to move to the "Confirm" button, and press "enter".
5) "Successfully added spam data" is announced and you are returned to the
"list". "Subject: (registered word) 1/1" is displayed.
If there is more than one registered word, you can move among them by
pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
By adding the word as explained above, if there are any e-mail messages
that include the words you entered in the subject of the message, the Voice
216
Sense QWERTY downloads those e-mails from the e-mail server, but
deletes them automatically.
You can also avoid receiving e-mail messages from a specific sender or host
by registering it.
The following are the steps to register a sender's e-mail address as spam:
1) Use the steps described above to open the "Spam Settings" dialog.
2) Press “down arrow” when "Type: Subject 1/3" is displayed. "Type: E-mail
address string 2/3" is displayed.
3) Press "a" or press “Tab” to move to the "Add" button, and press "enter".
4) The "Add dialog" is opened, and "E-mail address string: (e-mail address)"
is displayed. The "(e-mail address)" is the sender's e-mail address that was
focused when you opened the dialog. You can choose to filter by this
address, or type a different e-mail address in the edit box.
5) Press "Enter" on "E-mail address string: (e-mail address)". Or, press "Tab"
to move to the "Confirm" button, and press "Enter".
6) "Successfully added spam data" is announced and "E-mail address string:
(Registered e-mail address) 1/1" is displayed.
When "E-mail address string: (registered e-mail address) 1/1" is displayed,
you can add another address by pressing "a" or pressing "Tab" to move to
the "Add" button, and press "Enter". You can check the registered e-mail
addresses by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
To register a specific host as a spam sender, do the following:
1) Use the steps described above to open the "Spam Settings" dialog.
2) Press “down arrow” when "Type: Subject 1/3" is displayed to move to
"Type: Host 3/3".
3) Press "a" on "Type: Host 3/3", or press "Tab" to move to the "Add" button,
and press "Enter".
4) The "Add dialog" is opened, and "Host add: (host address)" is displayed.
By default, "host address" is the host address that was focused on when you
executed this command. You can add this host or type a different host in the
edit box.
217
5) Press "Enter" on "Host add: (host address)". Or, press “Tab” to move to
the "Confirm" button, and press "enter".
6) The Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Successfully added spam data" and
shows "Host: (registered host address) 1/1".
When "Host: (registered host address) 1/1" is displayed, you can add
another host by pressing "a" or pressing "Tab" to move to the "Add" button,
and press "Enter". You can check the registered host addresses by pressing
“up arrow” or “down arrow”.
To cancel setting spam filters from the "Add dialog", press "Tab" to move to
the "Cancel" button, and press "Enter". Or, press "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
6.5.3.2 Modifying Spam Registration
To modify a spam filter you have set, do the following:
1) Access the "Spam Settings" dialog as described previously, and navigate
to the "Type" of spam setting you want to modify by pressing “up arrow” or
“down arrow”.
2) Press "Tab" to move to the list of registered items in that category.
3) Navigate to the item you want to modify using “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
4) Press "m" or press "Tab" to move to the "Modify" button, and press
"Enter".
5) Make the modifications in the edit box.
6) Press “Tab” to move to the "confirm" button, and press "Enter" to save the
changes.
6.5.3.3 Deleting Spam
You can also delete an item that has been registered in the spam list.
1) Access the "Spam Settings" dialog as described previously, and navigate
to the "Type" of spam setting you want to delete by pressing “up arrow” or
“down arrow”.
2) Press "Tab" to move to the list of registered items in that category.
218
3) Navigate to the item you want to delete using “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
4) Press "d" or press "Tab" to move to the "Delete" button, and press "Enter".
6.6. Hot Keys for E-Mail
6.6.1 Hot Keys That Are Used in the Inbox
Open "accounts manager": Ctrl-m
Switch from offline to online mode (IMAP): Alt-l.
Check for New Mail: Alt-m
Get previous mail (IMAP): Alt-e.
Go to previous account category: Alt-FN-Up arrow.
Move to next account category: Alt-FN-Down arrow.
Move ot previous mailbox: Alt-FN-Up arrow.
Move to next mailbox: Alt-FN-Down arrow.
Write New Message: Ctrl-n
Reply: Ctrl-r
Reply all: Alt-r
Forward: Ctrl-f
Open "set path": Ctrl-p
Open "set option": Ctrl-o
Open "set spam": Ctrl-e
Find: Ctrl-shift-f (Only while in a message)
Find again: F3 (Only while in a message)
Move to next unread message: Ctrl-u
Move to mailbox: Alt-x
Copy to Mailbox: Alt-c
Add a sender to the address list: Ctrl-i (valid only on the "from" field of the
"Inbox").
Delete received e-mail: Del (valid only on the "Subject" and "date" fields in
the "Inbox").
Save the received e-mail as text file: Alt-s
Print the received e-mail: Alt-p
Cancel: Esc
219
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Alt-F4
6.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward,
and Saving to Outbox
Search address list: Ctrl-l
Attach file: Ctrl-f
Send e-mail: Ctrl-s
Save in mail outbox: Alt-s
Cancel: Esc
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Alt-F4
6.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading/writing E-Mail Messages
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Select all: Ctrl-a
Copy to the clipboard: Ctrl-c
Cut to the clipboard: Ctrl-x (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail in the
"Inbox").
Paste from the clipboard: Ctrl-v (not valid when reading e-mail in the "Inbox")
Delete: Del (not valid when reading e-mail in the "Inbox")
Cancel block: Esc
220
221
7. Media
The “Media” menu on the Voice Sense QWERTY consists of programs
related to media playback: specifically music, fideos, and DAISY content.
The “Media” menu contains 3 items: “Media Player”, “FM Radio”, and
“DAISY Player”.
You can open the “Media” menu by pressing “Windows” to bring up the main
“Program” menu, then navigating to “Media” using the DOWN Arrow and
pressing “Enter”. Or, you can quickly jump to and open the “Media” menu by
pressing “M” from the main menu.
The following sections will discuss the programs in the “Media” menu in
detail.
7.1 Media Player
The Media Player on the Voice Sense QWERTY is a program you can use
to play audio files as well as listen to the audio for some video file formats.
The Media Player plays the following formats, ac3, asf, asx, m3u, mp2, mp3,
MP 4, mpa, mpg, ogg, pls, wav, wax, wma, flac, midi and wmv. Note: you
cannot see the video for "avi" and "wmv" files, however, you may listen to the
audio contained in these formats.
You can control the playing of audio files using either keyboard commands
or the media buttons on the front panel of the Voice Sense QWERTY. The
Media Player can play back audio recordings and books as well as music
files.
You can launch the “Media Player” by navigating to it in the “Media” menu
and pressing “Enter”. Or, you can launch the “Media Player” from anywhere
on the unit by pressing “Windows-M”.
7.1.1 Using the media buttons
Near the center of the front panel on the Voice Sense QWERTY is a group
of 5 buttons with varying shapes. These buttons can be used to control the
Media Player. Moving from left to right, the buttons are: "Back", "Record",
222
"Stop", "Play/Pause", and "Forward". These buttons are used for playing and
recording music or voice quickly and easily.
The media buttons can control media playback, DAISY content playback, or
FM radio operation, depending on the position of the Media Mode switch,
located to the left of the media buttons. Slide this switch to the right-most
position, "Media Mode", to control media playback.
If the "Play/Pause" button is pressed while you are using another program on
the Voice Sense QWERTY, the unit opens the Media Player and begins
playing the files in the most recently played list. If there are no files in the
playlist, the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "There are no items to display".
"Back", "Stop", and "Forward" are available after audio playback is started.
Note: As the Voice Sense QWERTY is able to multi-task, initiating audio
playback with the "Play/Pause" button does not close the program you were
running when you pressed it. To return to your former position, press "F2-F3"
to cycle through the running programs until you reach your former location.
7.1.1.1 Play/Pause Button
The "Play/Pause" button has a long, rectangular shape. It is the second
button from the right in the group of media buttons. As explained above,
pressing the "Play/Pause" button starts playback of the files in the most
recently played media playlist. A playlist can contain only 1 file, or many files.
If there is more than one file in the playlist when you press the "Play/Pause"
button, the Voice Sense QWERTY plays all the files in the list one after
another. If you press the "Play/Pause" button during playback, audio
playback is paused. To resume playing, press the button again. If you press
the "Play/Pause" button while you are in the "Record" dialog, the most
recently recorded file is played.
7.1.1.2 "Forward" button and "Back" button
Both of these buttons have a triangular shape. The "Back" button is the leftmost button in the media group and is pointed to the left. The "Forward"
223
button is the right-most button in the media group and is pointed to the right.
If you press the "Forward" button, the next file in the playlist is played, and
pressing the "Back" button plays the previous file. If you press one of these
buttons while an audio file is playing, the Voice Sense QWERTY stops
playing the current file, and jumps to the previous or next file (depending on
which button you press) and starts playing it. If you press the "Forward"
button (while the last file in the list is playing, (or the "Back" button (while the
first file in the list is playing), it has no effect, as there is no file to navigate to.
7.1.1.3 Record Button
The "Record" button has a circular shape, and is used to record sound using
the built-in or an external microphone. The "Record" button is located directly
to the right of the "Back" button. You can use this button to create a
recording from anywhere on the unit provided the Media Mode switch is set
to the right-most position. Pressing the "Record" button once opens the
"Record" dialog. Press the "Record" button again to start recording. Press
the "Record" button while you are recording to pause recording. Resume
recording by pressing the "Record" button one more time. Press the "Stop"
button, directly to the right of the "Record" button, to stop and save your
recording. The recorded file is saved in the "flashdisk/media/record" folder.
7.1.1.4 Stop Button
The "Stop" button has a square shape and a dot on it, and is used to stop
playback or recording. If you press "Stop" during audio playback, the next
time media playback is launched, the Voice Sense QWERTY starts playing
the first file in the playlist. If you press this button while recording, the Voice
Sense QWERTY stops and saves the recording. If you press the "Stop"
button in the "Record" dialog when not recording, the dialog closes.
7.1.1.5 Using the media buttons in Open File dialog
224
Press and hold the "Stop" button to open the "Open File" dialog from within
the "Media Playback" dialog. Press and hold "Stop" again to close the "Open
File" dialog and return to the "Media Playback" dialog.
In the "Open File" dialog, the "Play/Pause" button functions the same as
"Enter". The "Stop" button, "Record" button, "Back" button and "Forward"
button function the same as "Backspace", "Space", “up arrow” and “down
arrow” respectively.
Namely, you can navigate up and down by pressing the "Back" and
"Forward" buttons in a file list; and you can select and unselect items by
pressing the "Record" button. Press the "Stop" button to move back a level in
the folder structure. And press "Play/Pause" button to play the selected files.
7.1.2 Keyboard and Extended Keys
You can use the QWERTY keyboard to perform the same functions as the
media buttons as well as more advanced features in the Media Player. To
open the "Media Player", press "Enter" on "Media Player", or press m from
the Voice Sense QWERTY "program" menu. As explained previously, you
can also open the Media Player by pressing "Play-Pause" when the "Media
Mode" switch is set to the right-most position.
The "Media Playback" dialog contains two information tabs: "playback
information" and "playlist". Press “Tab” or "Shift-Tab" to move between these
tabs.
7.1.2.1 Playback Information Tab
The "playback information" tab displays the track number, the file name, and
the current playback status: (play, pause, or stop). If there are no files in the
playlist, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Title: There are no items to
display". If you press “down arrow”, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays
playback time information.
First, the elapsed or remaining time is displayed. You can set whether the
elapsed time or remaining time is displayed, using the "playback settings"
dialog. If you have selected the "Remaining time" with this option, the 225
(minus sign), is displayed before the time. Next to the elapsed/remaining
time, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays the total playback time of the
currently selected file.
If there are no files in the playlist, "Time: There are no items to display" is
displayed.
7.1.2.2 Playlist Tab
The "playlist" tab displays all the files in the playlist. For each file in the
playlist, it displays the track number, file name, the location of the file in the
list, and the total number of files in the list. If there is no file in the playlist, the
Voice Sense QWERTY displays the message "no items".
For example, if you had the following track on the Voice Sense QWERTY:
"Track 1 Chopin - Fantasie Impromptu 1/10", "Track 1" indicates this file is
the first item in the playlist. "Chopin - Fantasie Impromptu" is the file name.
"1/10" indicates this file is the first of ten files in the playlist.
7.1.2.3 LYRICS Tab
The Voice Sense QWERTY's Media Player supports the viewing of lyrics for
MP3 files which contain them. The "Lyrics tab appears in the tab order only if
the file you are playing contains lyrics in its file information. If your file
contains lyrics, the "Lyrics" tab appears in the tab order after the "Playlist"
tab. The lyrics to the currently playing track are displayed in a multi edit box.
Read and navigate the lyrics using normal document navigation commands.
See chapter 5 of this manual on the "Word Processor" for details on
document navigation.
7.1.2.3 Hot Keys in the Playback Information and playlist Tabs
The hot keys that can be used in the "playback information" and the "playlist"
tabs are as follows:
226
1) Hot keys in the Play Information Tab
Hot key
Down arrow
Up arrow
Function
Move to the next information
Move
to
the
previous
information
Space
“Pause” when it is play state
and “play” when it is pause
state.
Enter or x
Start playing
Backspace or c
Stop playing
Alt-Right arrow or z
Play the next file
Alt-Left arrow or b
Play the previous file
Ctrl-End
Play the last file
Ctrl-Home
Play the first file
Alt-Down arrow
Play the fifth file after the
current file
Alt-Up arrow
Play the fifth file before the
current file
Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to next position by time
index and play
Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to previous position by
time index and play
Ctrl-Up arrow or Ctrl-Down Change time index
arrow
Shift-Left arrow
Speed up
Shift-Right arrow
Slow down
Shift-Up arrow
Volume up
Shift-Down arrow
Volume down
Alt
Open menu
F1
Open help
Tab/Shift-tab
Move to “play list” tab
Alt-F4
Exit “Media player”
227
2) Hot Keys in the Play List Tab
Hot key
Down arrow
Up arrow
End
Home
Space
Ctrl-b
Enter
Backspace
Del
Alt-Right arrow
Alt-Left arrow
Ctrl-End
Ctrl-Home
Ctrl-Down arrow
Ctrl-Up arrow
Ctrl-Right arrow
Ctrl-Left arrow
Ctrl-Up arrow
Shift-Left arrow
Shift-Right arrow
Shift-Up arrow
Shift-Down arrow
Alt or F10
Function
Move to the next file
Move to the previous file
Move to the last file
Move to the first file
Select/resume
current
file
(while playing, it is used as
play/pause)
Start selecting files
Start playing the selected files
Stop playing
Delete the selected files in the
play list
Play the next file
Play the previous file
Play the last file
Play the first file
Play the fifth file after the
current file
Play the fifth file before the
current file
Move to next position by time
index and play
Move to previous position by
time index and play
Change time index
Speed up
Slow down
Volume up
Volume down
Open menu
228
F1
Tab/Shift-tab
Alt-F4
Open help
Move to “playback information”
tab
Exit “Media player”
7.1.3 How to Use the Media Player Menu
To open the "Media Player" menu, press “Alt” while in the "Media Playback"
dialog. This menu contains five items: "File", "Play", "Record", "Position",
"Mark" and "Settings". The "File" menu allows you to add or delete files in
the playlist. The "Play" menu lists all of the commands related to playing files.
The "Record" menu opens the "Record" dialog which allows you to record
sound and play it. The "Position" menu contains commands related to
bookmark and go to position. The "Settings" menu allows you to set various
Media Player options.
7.1.3.1 File
To use the "File" menu, press “Alt” to open the "Media Player" menu, then
press "Enter" on "File", or press "f". A submenu appears, containing "Open
File", "Open Folder", "Add File", "Add Folder", "Save Playlist", "Save As
Playlist", "Delete Item", "Open URL" and "Exit". You can move between
these items by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”. Press "Enter" on the
item you want to execute. To return to the Media Player menu, press "Esc".
To exit the menu, press, "Alt-F4" and you are returned to the "Media
Playback" dialog.
7.1.3.1.1 Open File
You can use the "Open File" menu item to add files to the playlist and start
playing them. If you press "Enter" on "Open File", a dialog opens, similar to
the "file list" in the "File Manager". You can navigate folders and files just as
you would in the "File Manager". The files playable in the "Media Player" are
229
those with the extensions, ac3, asf, asx, m3u, mp2, mp3, ogg, pls, wav, wax,
wma, flac, midi and wmv.
If you select all the files you want to play, and press "Enter", the Voice Sense
QWERTY adds the files to the playlist, and starts playing the first file. You
can select more than one file in the "Open File" dialog by pressing "Space"
on each of the items you want to add to the playlist. When you have selected
all the files you want, press "Enter".
When you open the "Open File" dialog, files in the default folder are
displayed. The default folder is set to "/flashdisk/media". You can also open
the "Open File" dialog by using the hot key, “Ctrl-o” directly from the "Media
Playback" dialog.
7.1.3.1.2 Open Folder
The "Open Folder" menu item is used to add all of the audio files in the
selected folders to the playlist. If you press "Enter" on "Open Folder" in "File"
menu, or press "Ctrl-f" in the "Media Playback" dialog, the "Open Folder"
dialog is opened. The "Open Folder" dialog is almost the same as the "Open
File" dialog. The difference is that only folder names are displayed in the
"Open Folder" dialog. When you open the "Open Folder" dialog, the default
folder name is displayed. The default folder is set to "flashdisk". Press
"Enter" to display all of the folders in "flashdisk", and press “up arrow” or
“down arrow” to move among the folders. To enter the folder under your
cursor, (and list any sub-folders contained there) press "Enter" on it. Press
"Backspace" to move back to the parent folder. To select a folder, press
"Space" on the folder name. You can select more than one folder. Once you
have selected all of the folders you want, press "Enter". The Voice Sense
QWERTY adds all of the supported audio files from the selected folders to
the playlist and starts playing the first file.
7.1.3.1.3 Add File
The "Add File" menu item is used to add audio files to the currently playing
list. If you press "Enter" on "Add File" in the "File" menu, or press "Alt-o" in
230
the "Media Playback" dialog, the same dialog that is used for "Open File" is
displayed. Select all of the files that you want, and press "Enter" (as in the
"Open File" dialog). The Voice Sense QWERTY adds the selected files to
the playlist. However the Voice Sense QWERTY does not start playing these
files. To start playing the files in the playlist, press the "Play/Pause" button
on the front panel. Or, you can press "Enter" on "play" in the "play" menu. A
detailed explanation of the "play" menu can be found in section 9.3.2.
7.1.3.1.4 Add Folder
The "Add Folder" menu item is used to add all of the audio files in a selected
folder to the currently playing list. If you press "Enter" on "Add Folder" in the
"File" menu (or press "F3" in the "Media Playback" dialog), the same dialog
that is used for "Open Folder" is displayed. If you select all of the folders you
want to add, and press "Enter", the Voice Sense QWERTY adds all of the
supported audio files in the selected folders to the playlist. However, it does
not start playing the files. You can start playing the files in the playlist by
pressing the "Play/Pause" button on the front panel of the Voice Sense
QWERTY, or press "Enter" on "play" in the "play" menu.
7.1.3.1.5 Save playlist
The "Save Playlist" menu item is used to save the playlist to a disk drive. To
access this function, you can press “Alt” to open the "File" menu and execute
the "Save Playlist" command by pressing "Enter" on it. Or, you can press "s"
to quickly jump to and execute it from within the menu. You can also press
"Ctrl-s" from the "Media Playback" dialog.
If you are saving files to a new playlist, the "Save as playlist" dialog opens.
If you execute "Save Playlist" after adding files to an existing playlist, the
Voice Sense QWERTY saves the playlist with the same file name without
opening the dialog. After saving the playlist, it returns to the "Media
Playback" dialog.
231
7.1.3.1.6 Save as playlist
The "Save As Playlist" menu item is used to save the playlist under a
different name or in a different location. Press “Alt” to open the "File" menu
and execute the "Save As Playlist" command by pressing "Enter" on it; or
you can press "l" to access it quickly. You can also press "Alt-s" from the
"Media Playback" dialog.
If you execute "Save As Playlist", the "Save As Playlist" dialog is displayed.
This dialog consists of "file list", "File name", a "Confirm" button, and a
"Cancel" button. When the dialog is opened, "File name:" is displayed. You
can move among the tabs by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". The file format of
playlists saved by the Voice Sense QWERTY is always "m3u". By default,
playlist files are saved in "/flashdisk/media".
To create a new file name, type in the new file name. You cannot use the
following characters in a file mane. "|, \, <, >, ?, :, *".
To change the location, move to the "file list" by pressing "shift-tab".
Navigate to the location in which you want to save the playlist, and press
"Enter".
7.1.3.1.7 Delete Item
To delete a file from the playlist, first, locate the file you want to delete in the
"playlist" tab by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow” repeatedly. Then, open
the "Media Player" menu by pressing “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "File".
Navigate to "Delete Item" by pressing “down arrow” repeatedly, and press
"Enter". Or, you can press "Del" on the file you want to delete from the
playlist. You can select more than one file in the "playlist" tab by pressing
"Space" on each file to be deleted. * is displayed before each selected item.
If you press "Space" on a selected item, the selection is canceled and the /
disappears.
You can also delete multiple files in a block from the playlist. Press “Ctrl-b”
on the first file to be deleted. “Ctrl-b” indicates the start of the block. Next, if
you press “down arrow” or “up arrow”, the displayed files are selected. After
selecting the files you want to delete, press "Del" to delete them.
232
7.1.3.1.8 Tag Information
The "Tag Information" option in the "File" menu allows you to view
information about the currently playing file such as Artist, Genre, etc. To
open the "Tag Information" dialog, press "Enter" on "Tag Information" in the
"File" menu, or press "Control-T" while playing a file.
The "Tag Information" dialog consists of an information list, and a "Close"
button. You can move among the items using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". Move
among the items in the information list using the Up or Down arrow. The
information list includes "Title", "Artist", "album", "Genre", "Official
homepage", "Link", "Sample Rate", "Bitrate" and "Channels". When you
have finished viewing the information, Tab to the "Close" button and press
"Enter", or press "Escape".
7.1.3.1.9 Open URL
The "Open URL" menu item is used to play the audio stream from a web
page. If you press "Enter" on "Open URL" in the "File" menu, or press "Ctrl-i"
in the "Media Playback" dialog, the "Open URL" dialog is displayed. In this
dialog, type the web address of an audio stream and press "Enter". The
Voice Sense QWERTY automatically accesses the audio stream from the
Internet and begins playing it.
Note: Please make sure to have an active Internet connection before
attempting to open an audio stream.
7.1.3.1.10 Exit
You can exit the "Media Player" by selecting "Exit" in the "File" menu, or by
pressing "Alt-F4" in the "Media Playback" dialog. The Voice Sense QWERTY
stops playing (if it is playing a file), and exits to the "program" menu.
233
7.1.3.2 Play
The "Play" submenu contains all of the commands that can be used to
control playback. To access this menu, press “Alt” to open the "Media
Player" menu. Press “down arrow”. The Voice Sense QWERTY displays
"Play (p)->". Press "Enter", and the "Play" submenu is displayed. You can
move among the items in this menu by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”.
To return to the "Media Player" menu, press "Esc". Press "Alt-F4" To close
the menu and return to the "Media Playback" dialog.
7.1.3.2.1 Play
If you press "Enter" on "Play", the Voice Sense QWERTY begins playing the
files in the current playlist. You can also start playback from the "Media
Playback" dialog by pressing Space".
7.1.3.2.2 Previous Track
"Previous Track" is used to play the previous file in a playlist. You can also
do this by pressing “z” or “Alt-Left arrow” in the “Media player” dialog box.
7.1.3.2.3 Next Track
This item is used to play the next file in the playlist. You can also press “b” or
“Alt-Right arrow” in the “Media player” dialog box to do this.
7.1.3.2.4 Back 5 Tracks
Use this command to play the fifth file before the file that is currently playing.
You can also press “Alt-Up arrow” in the “Media playback” dialog box to do
this.
7.1.3.2.5 Forward 5 Tracks
234
Use this command to play the fifth file after the file that is currently playing.
You can also do this by pressing “Alt-Down arrow” in the “Media playback”
dialog box.
7.1.3.2.6 First Track
Use this command to play the first file in the playlist. You can also do this by
pressing “Ctrl-Fn-Left arrow” in the “Media player” dialog box.
7.1.3.2.7 Last Track
Use this command to play the last file in the playlist. You can also do this by
pressing “Ctrl-Fn-Right arrow” in the “Media playback” dialog box.
7.1.3.2.8 Volume Up and Volume Down
These options are used to adjust the audio playback volume. Here, the
volume level ranges from 0 to 10. You can also adjust the volume level by
pressing “Shift-Up arrow (up)” or “Shift-Down arrow (down)” in the “Media
playback” dialog box. The actual volume level depends on the value of
“voice volume” that is set in the “global options”. For example, if “voice
volume” is set to 5, and the volume level in the “Media player” is set to its
maximum 10, the actual volume is 5. If the volume level in the “Media player”
is set to 5, the actual volume level is 2.5.
7.1.3.2.9 Speed Up and Slow Down
You can use these controls to adjust the audio playback speed. The speed
level ranges from -2 to 8. You can also adjust the speed level by pressing
“Shift-Left arrow” or “Shift -Right arrow” in the “Media playback” dialog box.
“Shift -Right arrow” increases the audio playback speed, and “Shift-Left
arrow” decreases the audio playback speed.
235
7.1.3.2.10 Pause
This item pauses playback of a file. If you activate this command again, the
Voice Sense QWERTY resumes playback from the position where the file
was paused. You can also do this by pressing "Space" in the "Media
Playback" dialog.
7.1.3.2.11 Stop
This command stops playback of the currently playing file. You can also do
this by pressing “c” or “Backspace” in the “Media playback” dialog box.
7.1.3.3 Record
This menu item is used to open the "Record" dialog. To open the "Record"
dialog, press “Alt” to open the "Media Player" menu. Press “down arrow”
twice to move to "record (r)", and press "Enter". Or you can press "r" from
the Media Player Menu. The Voice Sense QWERTY displays the "Record"
dialog. You can also open this dialog by pressing "Ctrl-r" from the "Media
Playback" dialog.
The "Record" dialog contains an "information" tab and five buttons. You can
move among these by pressing “Tab” or “Shift-Tab”. Activate the buttons in
this dialog by pressing "Enter" on the button you want to use. You can also
activate the buttons by typing the character displayed after the button name.
7.1.3.3.1 Record/Playback Information Tab
This tab is displayed only when the Voice Sense QWERTY is recording, or
when there is a file that has just been recorded. The information displayed
in this tab includes: the file name, the current status, and two pieces of time
information. The file name is the name of the file containing the sound that is
currently being recorded or played. The current status is one of the following:
recording, playing, pause, or stop. The time information that is displayed first
is the elapsed recording time and the elapsed or remaining time while
236
playing, (depending on the "Display time" setting in the "Playback Settings"
dialog, explained in section 9.3.6.2). The final piece of time information
during recording is the available recording time according to the space
available on your flashdisk. While playing, the total length of the file in time is
displayed. You can move between time information and other information by
pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”.
7.1.3.3.2 Record
Use this command to start recording. You can also start recording by
pressing the "Record" button on the front panel of the Voice Sense
QWERTY. While recording, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays the
"recording information" tab. whenever you start recording the Voice Sense
QWERTY creates a file. The file is named "record 01.mp3", or "record
02.mp3" etc. By default, these files are saved in "/flashdisk/media/record".
You can change the save-to folder and recording file type using the "Record
Settings" option, explained in section 9.3.6.3. When recording, pause the
recording by pressing "Tab" to move to the "Pause" button, and then press
"Enter". You can also pause by pressing the "Record" button on the front
panel. To resume recording, press "Enter" on the "Continue" button, or press
the "Record" button again. To stop recording, press “Tab” repeatedly to
move to the "Stop" button, and press "Enter".
If you wish to cancel the recording, you can press Alt-F4”. You are prompted,
“Do you want to save the current file? Choose “Yes” or “No” using the Up
and Down arrows and press “Enter”.
7.1.3.3.3 Play
This button is used to play the file that has just been recorded. You can also
start playing the recorded file by pressing the "play" button on the front panel.
This function is only available just after you have recorded a file. While
playing, the "playback information" tab is displayed. To pause or stop playing,
tab to the desired button and press "Enter".
237
7.1.3.3.4 Stop
Use this command to stop recording or playback. If you press "Enter" on
"Stop" while recording, the Voice Sense QWERTY stops recording and
shows the "recording information" tab. If you press "Enter" on the "Stop"
button during playback, the Voice Sense QWERTY stops playing and shows
the "playback information" tab. You can also stop recording or playing by
pressing the "Stop" button on the front panel.
7.1.3.3.5 Pause
Use this command to pause the recording or playing of a file. If you press
"Enter" on "Pause", or press the "Play/Pause" button on the front panel,
recording or playing is paused, and the "recording information" or "playback
information" tab is displayed.
7.1.3.3.6 Continue
Press "Enter" on "Continue" when the current status is "pause", and the
Voice Sense QWERTY resumes recording or playing.
7.1.3.3.7 Cancel
If you press "Enter" on "Cancel", the Voice Sense QWERTY stops recording
or playing, closes the "Record" dialog, and returns to the "Media Playback"
dialog. If you press "Enter" on "Cancel" while recording, the recorded file is
not saved. To save the recording and exit the dialog; press "Enter" on "Stop",
and then move to the "Cancel" button, and press "Enter". You can also use
"Esc" or "Alt-F4" to cancel an operation.
7.1.3.4 Position Menu
238
ACCESS the "Position" menu to set or delete a bookmark while listening to
music or an audio file. This menu also lets you jump to a specified time in an
audio file.
The "Position" menu contains 7 items:
1. Mark Position
2. Delete Marked Position
3. Jump To Marked Position
4. Go To Time
5. Go To Percent
6. Set Start Point
7. Release Point
You can move between the menu items by pressing “down arrow” or “up
arrow”. To activate a menu item, press "Enter".
7.1.3.4.1 Mark Position
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is
paused, a bookmark is set. A bookmark marks a specific location, so you
can return to the exact spot at a later time.
To execute this function,
1) Press “Alt” and move to "Position" by pressing “down arrow”.
2) Press "Enter" on "Position".
3) Navigate to "Mark Position" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter".
4) Or, press "Alt" when playing a file, or when a file is paused.
7.1.3.4.2 Delete Marked Position
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is
paused, it deletes the bookmark that was previously created.
To execute this function,
239
1) Press “Alt” and move to "Position" by pressing “down arrow”.
2) Press "Enter" on "Position".
3) Navigate to "Delete Marked Position" by pressing “down arrow”, and press
"Enter".
4) Or, you can press "Alt-d" when playing a file, or when a file is paused.
If you execute this function in a file that does not have a bookmark, the Voice
Sense QWERTY displays, "There is no bookmark in selected file".
7.1.3.4.3 Jump to Marked Position
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is
paused, it jumps to the position of a bookmark that has already been created.
To execute this function,
1) Press “Alt” and move to "Position" by pressing “down arrow”.
2) Press "Enter" on "Position".
3) Navigate to "Jump To Marked Position" by pressing “down arrow”, and
press "Enter".
4) Or, you can press "Alt-j" when playing a file, or when a file is paused.
If you execute this function in a file that does not have a bookmark, the Voice
Sense QWERTY displays, "There is no bookmark in selected file".
7.1.3.4.4 Go to Time
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is
paused, it moves to a time that you specify, and begins playing the file at
that position.
To execute this function,
1) Press “Alt” and move to "Position" by pressing “down arrow”.
2) Press "Enter" on "Position".
3) Navigate to "Go To Time" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter".
240
4) Or, you can press "Ctrl-g" when playing a file, or when a file is paused.
5) The Voice Sense QWERTY displays "Go to position: 0 minute".
6) Type the time you want to go to, and press "Enter". You can jump more
than an hour using a couple of methods:
If you wish to type 1 hour and 20 minutes, type the "1", "Space" or “:”, "20"
sequentially. Also you can input 80 minutes by simply typing "80". If there is
no "Space" or “:", the input value is dealt with as minutes.
If you type a time longer than the total playback time of the file or playlist, the
Voice Sense QWERTY displays, "invalid time", and resumes playing from
the paused location.
7.1.3.4.5 Go To Percent
In play or pause status, you can move to a specified percentage of a file.
1) In playing or pause status, press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) By pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”, navigate to the "Position" menu.
3) Press "Enter". Or press "a"
4) By pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”, move to the "Go to percent"
menu item.
5) Press "Enter". Or press "Alt-p" from the "Media Playback" dialog.
6) You are prompted "Go to percent: XX".
7) Enter the percent that you want to move to in the edit box using numbers
0 to 99.
8) Press "Enter".
9) You are placed at the position in the file matching the percentage you
entered.
7.1.3.4.6 Set Start Point
A B repeat mode allows you to play a specific part of an audio file as many
times as you wish. This can be useful when learning a new language, and
you need to hear the same information in a file over and over again.
A B repeat mode requires setting start and end points for repetition.
241
To set a start and end point, follow these steps:
1) Press "p" at the position at which you want to set the start point.
2) Or, press “Alt” and move to "Position" by pressing “down arrow”. Press
"Enter" on "Position". Move to "Set start point" by pressing “down arrow” and
press "Enter".
3) The unit announces, "Set start point" and the file continues playing.
4) To set the end point, press "p" at the point where you want to end the
section for repetition.
Or, you can execute A B repeat mode by pressing the "Record button"
during playback.
1) Press "Record button" at the position at which you want to set the start
point.
2) To set the end point, press the "Record button" again at the point where
you want to end the section for repetition.
Note: You can only use the "Record button" to perform this function while a
file is playing. If playback is paused or stopped, the "record button" activates
the recording function.
After you have highlighted a section of a file using start and end points, A B
repeat mode allows you to play that specific part of the file as many times as
you wish. To set how many times a specified section repeats, go to
"playback settings" under the "settings" menu.
7.1.3.4.7 Release Point
To set a release point, press "Esc". Or, press “Alt” and move to "Position" by
pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter" on "Position". Move to "Release point"
by pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter". After stopping playback of the
specified section, the file continues playing.
7.1.3.5 Mark
242
You can insert a mark while listening to music or an audio file. The mark is
stored even when you exit the program or play another file.
To use the mark function, press “Alt” and move to "Mark" by pressing “down
arrow”. And press "Enter".
The "Mark" menu has the following submenus.
7.1.3.5.1 Set Mark
To set a mark while listening to audio, Open the menu, and press "Enter" on
"Mark". Navigate to "Set Mark" and press "Enter". Or, to activate this function
directly, press "Alt-m" up to 1000 marks can be inserted into a file.
The marks are automatically numbered in sequential order.
7.1.3.5.2 Move to Mark
You can move to the next or previous mark by pressing "V" or "N"
respectively. You can also move to a mark using the menu. Press “Alt” and
move to "Mark". And press "Enter". Navigate to the "Previous Mark" or the
"Next Mark" item and press "Enter".
You can also move to a mark using the mark number.
1) Open the menu and press "Enter" on "Mark". Navigate to "Move To Mark".
2) Press "Enter" on "Move To Mark". Or press "Alt-j" from the "Media
Playback" dialog.
3) Input the mark number in the edit box and press "Enter".
4) If you input a non-existent mark number, The Voice Sense QWERTY
displays, "Mark x does not exist" and the edit box is displayed again.
7.1.3.5.3 Delete Mark
Use the following steps to delete a mark:
1) Open the menu and press "Enter" on "Mark". Navigate to "Delete mark".
2) Press "Enter" on "Delete Mark". Or press "Alt-d" from the "Media
Playback" dialog.
243
3) The Voice Sense QWERTY displays: "Enter mark name to delete:". Type
the number of the mark to be deleted and press "Enter".
4) If you input a non-existing mark number, an "input error" message is
appears, and the edit box is displayed again.
7.1.3.5.4 Mark Manager
You can open the Mark Manager dialog to query mark information for the
current audio file by pressing "Alt-k". You can also open the dialog using the
menu. Open the menu by pressing “Alt” and move to "Mark". Press "Enter",
and navigate to "Mark Manager" and press "Enter".
The dialog consists of the "mark list", a "Move button", a "Delete button", and
a "Close button". You can move among the controls by pressing “Tab” and
"shift-tab".
All of the marks for the current file appear in the "mark list" with the "name
and setting time of mark". You can navigate to the other information in the
list by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
You can delete a mark in the list by pressing "Del". In addition, you can start
playback from the specific mark by pressing "Enter" on the mark name or by
pressing "Enter" on the "Move button"
To close the mark manager dialog, press "Enter" on the "Close" button or
press "Esc".
7.1.3.6 Settings
Using this menu, you can change settings for recording, playing, and general
Media player options. To access the "Settings" menu, press “Alt” to open the
"Media Player" menu. Press “down arrow” three times to reach "Settings",
and press "Enter". Or, you can press s from within the "Media Player" menu.
The "Settings" submenu appears containing four items: "Configuration",
"Playback Settings", "Record Settings", and "Effect settings".
244
7.1.3.6.1 Configuration dialog
If you press "Enter" on the first item, "Configuration", or press "Alt-c" from the
"Media Playback" dialog, the "Configuration" dialog is displayed, containing
the following: the "Display title" option, the "Store position of file if longer
than:", a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move among the
controls by pressing “Tab” and "shift-tab". Move among options for a setting
by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
The "Display title" option allows you to set whether or not the track title is
announced when you move to previous/next track. The default value is set to
"Off". You can toggle this option by pressing "Space".
The "Store position of file if longer than:" option allows you to set memory of
your last position on files longer than the length you specify. The default is
set to "Off" meaning your last position is never saved. You can set the value
to 5, 10, 30, or 60 minutes. If you set the value to 30 minutes, your last
position is remembered for all files longer than 30 minutes. This option can
be useful if you don't want to save the position for music files, but you want
to save the position of audio books or podcasts.
To save the changed settings and exit the dialog, press "Enter". Or move to
the "Confirm" button by pressing “Tab” repeatedly and press "Enter". To
cancel saving changes and exit this dialog, press "Esc", or "Alt-F4". You can
also press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button to close the dialog without
changing any options.
7.1.3.6.2 Playback Settings dialog
If you press "Enter" on "Playback Settings", or press "p" on the "Settings"
menu, the "Playback Settings" dialog is displayed. In this dialog, pressing
“Tab” or “Shift-Tab” moves among setting options, "Confirm" and "Cancel".
The setting options are "Display time", "Repeat", "Playlist", "Shuffle", "Times
to repeat the specified track", "Set speed", and "Time index". Press “down
arrow” or “up arrow” to move among the various options. You can also open
this dialog by pressing “Ctrl-s” from the "Media Playback" dialog.
245
The "Display time" option allows you to set which type of time messages are
displayed in the "playback information" tab. You can set it to either "Elapsed
time" or "Remaining time". You can change its value by pressing "Space".
The "Repeat" option allows you to set whether all files in the playlist are
played repeatedly. If this option is set to "Yes", all files in the playlist are
played repeatedly, and if it is set to "No", the Voice Sense QWERTY stops
playing after playing the last file in the playlist. Again, you can change the
value of this option by pressing "Space".
The next option is "Playlist". To play audio files from File Manager, you can
select multiple files by pressing "Space" and play them by pressing "Enter".
If the playlist already contains files, this setting allows you to choose whether
you want to overwrite the playlist or to append the selected files to the
playlist. The default value is "Overwrite" meaning the playlist is created anew
with the selected files. If you press "Space", the value is set to "Append" and
the selected files are appended to the playlist.
The "Shuffle" option allows you to set the audio playback order. The default
value is set to "Off" thus, audio files are played in the order they appear in
the playlist. If you set "Shuffle" to "On", the playlist is reorganized in random.
If you have just one audio file in the playlist and you switch the option to "On",
a message "Shuffle mode not available" is displayed.
"Times to repeat the specified track" allow you to set how many times you
wish to repeat, when you execute section repetition. "Times to repeat the
specified track" You can choose from values 1 to 10 or unlimited. The default
setting is 3. Pressing "Space" increases the times to repeat the specified
track and "Backspace" decreases the times to repeat the specified track.
The "Set speed" option allows you to set the audio playback speed.
The speed level ranges from 1 to 10. The default setting is 5.
To change the value, press "Space" or "Backspace". The higher the number,
the faster the audio playback speed.
The "Time index" option allows you to set the time by which to jump. The
default value is set to 1 minute. The values are "5 seconds", "10 seconds",
"30 seconds", "1 minute", "3 minutes", "5 minutes", "10 minutes", "15
minutes", "20 minutes", "30 minutes" and "1 hour". You can change the value
using "Space" or "Backspace".
246
Or, you can change the value of the time index by pressing “Ctrl-Left arrow”
or “Ctrl-Right arrow” from the "Media Playback" dialog. Press “/”, to hear
the current time index.
After changing the time index, press “Ctrl-Left arrow” or “Ctrl-Right arrow”,
to jump to previous or next position by time index.
To save your settings and exit the dialog, press "Enter" or tab to the
"Confirm" button, and press "Enter". To cancel the changes, and exit the
dialog, press enter on the "Cancel" button, or press "Esc" or "Alt-F4".
7.1.3.6.3 Record Settings dialog
If you press enter on "Record Settings" in the "Settings" menu, or press "Altr" from the "Media Playback" dialog, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays the
"Record Settings" dialog, which contains "Recording type", "Sample rate",
"Quality", "recording source", "Set folder", "Confirm" button and a "Cancel"
button. You can move among the controls by pressing “Tab” and "shift-tab".
And you can move among the options by pressing “up arrow” or “down
arrow”.
The "Recording type" allows you to set the default file type of recorded files.
The default value is set to "mp3". You can toggle between "wav" and "mp3"
by pressing "Space".
The next three options are used to control the quality of recorded sound.
Higher values in "Sample rate" and "Bitrate"/”Bits per channel” mean a better
quality of recorded sound, as well as a larger file size for recorded files. In
other words, to record high quality sound, the total time the Voice Sense
QWERTY can record is shortened. On the other hand, if you lower the
values of these options, the Voice Sense QWERTY can record sound longer,
but the sound quality may not be as good. You can change these values by
pressing "Space". When using “mp3”, “Sample rate” is available from 16000
Hz to 44100Hz and “Bitrate” value is available from 64K to 320K.
When using “wav”, “Sample rate” value is available from 8000Hz to
44100Hz and “Bits per channel” value is available between 8 bits and 16 bits.
When you record sound using the external microphone, you must set the
recording source to "External Mic". When you record audio using the line-in247
cable, you must set the recording source to "Line in". When you record
sound using the internal microphone, set the recording source to "Internal
Mic".
The "Set folder" option allows you to set the default folder where the
recorded files are saved. The default value is set to "/flashdisk/media/record".
To specify a different folder, press "Enter" on "Set folder", and a File
Manager-type dialog is displayed. Select a folder as you would in the "Open
Folder" dialog.
Press "Enter" to save your settings, or "Esc" to exit the dialog without saving
your settings.
Note: the following tables show approximate available recording times when
recording at various sample rates using both WAV and MP3. The available
recording time is measured based on a newly formatted, empty flashdisk.
* Recording type: mp3
- 48000Hz 320K: 217’h 55’m
- 44100Hz 192K: 363’h 45’m
- 32000Hz 128K: 544’h 48’m
- 24000Hz 96K: 726’h 25’m
- 22050Hz 80K: 872’h 27’m
- 16000Hz 64K: 1089’h 37’m
* Recording type: wav
- 44100Hz: 49’h 25’m
- 22050Hz: 98’h 50’m
- 11025Hz: 197’h 40’m
- 8000Hz: 272’h 25’m
7.1.3.6.4 Effect Settings dialog
Press "Alt" to open the menu in the Media player program, move to
"Settings" menu and press "Enter". By pressing the Down arrow. Move to
248
"Effect settings" and press "Enter". or press "Control-E" in the "Play list tab"
or "Playback information tab".
The "Effect settings" dialog box is displayed, containing the following options:
"Equalizer" list box, "Bassboost", "Surround", "3D Effect", "Reverb" and
"Echo" and "Confirm" and "Cancel" buttons. You can move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". And you can move among options
or list items by pressing the up or Down arrow.
The "Equalizer list box allows you to choose from a number of
preprogrammed sets of equalizer settings optimized for certain types of
music, such as Jazz, Classical, Pop or Rock. Use the Up and Down arrows
to navigate the "Equalizer" list. Navigate to your desired setting, and press
"Enter". You should immediately hear the sound of your playback changed
according to the "Equalizer setting you chose.
The "Bass boost" option is used to emphasize bass sound. Enter a value
from 0 to 20 in the edit box. The higher the value you enter, the more bass
sound is heard.
The "Surround" can bring out ambient sound more distinctly. Enter a value
from 0 to 100 in the edit box. The higher the value you enter, the stronger
the surround effect.
The "3D Effect" can enhance the surround effect. Enter a value from 0 to 100
in the edit box. The higher the value you enter, the stronger the 3D effect.
The "Reverb" option adds reverberation to the audio files you are listening to.
Enter a value from 0 to 100 in the edit box. The higher the value you enter,
the stronger the reverb effect.
The "Echo" option is used to add an echo effect to your audio files. Enter a
value from 0 to 100 in the edit box. The higher the value you enter, the
stronger the echo effect.
To save your settings, press "Enter". To exit the dialog without making
changes, press "Esc".
7.1.4 Hot Keys in the Media Player
1) Hot Keys for the Commands for the File Menu
249
Open file: Ctrl-o
Open folder: Ctrl-f
Add file: Alt-o
Add folder: Alt-f
Save play list: Ctrl-s
Save as play list: Alt-s
Delete item: Del
Open URL: Ctrl-l
2) Hot Keys for Commands While in the Playback menu
Play: Enter, x, Play button
Previous track: Alt-Left arrow, z, Previous button
Next track: Alt-Right arrow, b, Next button
Previous section while playing Audible: Ctrl-Page up (Ctrl-Fn-Up arrow)
Next section while playing Audible: Ctrl-Page down (Ctrl-Fn-Down arrow)
Back 5 track: Alt-Up arrow
Forward 5 track: Alt-Down arrow
First track: Ctrl-Home
Last track: Ctrl-End
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow
Speed up: Shift-Right arrow
Slow down: Shift-Left arrow
Pause/continue: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow or Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to next position by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to previous position by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow
Delete play list during stop: Del
3) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Record Dialog Box
Open the record dialog box: Ctrl-r, Record button
Record: Record button
Pause/continue recording: Space, Record button
Play: Play button
250
Pause/continue play: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
4) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Position Menu
Set bookmark: Ctrl-m
Delete bookmark: Ctrl-d
Jump to bookmark: Ctrl-j
Go to position: Ctrl-g
5) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Mark Menu
Set mark: Alt-m
Move to mark: Alt-j
Move to previous mark: V
Move to next mark: N
Delete mark: Alt-d
Mark manager: Alt-k
6) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Settings Menu
Configuration dialog box: Alt-c
Playback settings dialog box: Ctrl-p
Record settings dialog box: Alt-r
Effect settings dialog box: Ctrl-e
7) Hot keys for toggling options.
Toggle “display time” between “elapsed time” and “remaining time”: t
Toggle “repeat” between “Yes” and “No”: r
Toggle “shuffle” between “On” and “Off”: s
7.2 FM Radio
To use the "FM Radio" program on the Voice Sense QWERTY, you must
connect headphones to the headphone jack on the unit, as the headphone
251
cord serves as the antenna, and without it, radio reception will be poor to
nonexistent.
From the program menu, use the scroll buttons to navigate to the “Media”
menu, and press “Enter”. Navigate to "FM Radio" and press "Enter". You can
also press "r" to quickly jump to and launch the "FM Radio” from the “Media
menu". You can launch the “FM Radio” from anywhere on the unit by
pressing “Windows-R”.
When the FM Radio program is launched, your Voice Sense QWERTY
announces the radio frequency. If you have used the FM Radio program
previously, the Voice Sense QWERTY tunes to the frequency that you last
listened to.
Note: the frequency range of the FM Radio is 87.5MHz to 108MHz.
7.2.1 Listening to FM Radio via the internal speakers
When you execute the FM Radio after connecting headphones, sound from
the radio is directed through the headphones. As previously explained, it is
necessary to connect the headphones to provide an antenna for radio
reception. However, there may be times when you wish for the sound from
the radio to output through the speakers on the Voice Sense QWERTY. To
listen to the radio through the internal speakers, press "Fn-x", or just X, to
toggle internal speaker output on/off.
You can also change this option using the menu:
1) Press “Alt” to open the FM Radio menu, press "Enter" on "File" menu, and
press "Enter" on "Settings".
2) Or press "Ctrl-e" to quickly access the "settings" dialog.
3) "Internal speaker: No" is announced, as the speaker setting is the first
setting in the dialog.
4) Press "Space" to change the setting to "Yes" and press "Enter" to apply
the setting.
The radio sound should now output through both the headphones and the
internal speakers.
252
Note: This setting is available only in the FM Radio program. If you exit the
FM Radio program and you wish to hear the audio output of the Voice Sense
QWERTY through the internal speakers, you must disconnect the
headphones.
You can adjust the radio volume independent of the general volume of the
Voice Sense QWERTY. The radio volume can be adjusted using "shift -down
scroll button" to lower the volume and "shift-up scroll button" to raise it.
7.2.2 Frequency control
While listening to the radio, to tune to another frequency, press “Alt” to open
the menu. Navigate to "Frequency" and press "Enter" to open the
"Frequency" menu.
The "Frequency" menu consists of the following items:
1) Previous Frequency
2) Next Frequency
3) Auto Scan Backward
4) Auto Scan Forward
5) Go to Frequency
To navigate between these items, press “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
Pressing "Enter" activates the selected item.
You can also use hot keys from within the radio to quickly execute these
commands. Press "Ctrl-Left arrow" to scan backward for the next radio
station. If you press "Ctrl-Right arrow", your Voice Sense QWERTY
autoscans forward. Press “Right arrow”, to increase the frequency by
0.1MHz. Press “Left arrow”, to decrease the frequency by 0.1MHz.
Press "Ctrl-f" to input the frequency directly. Type the frequency in numbers
in the edit box and press "Enter" to jump to that frequency.
In addition to using the keys on the top panel, you can use the media buttons
on the front panel to control the FM Radio. To control the radio using the
media buttons, the Media mode switch should be moved to the left-most
position, "FM". After setting the Media Mode switch, pressing the "Back"
button scans backward, and pressing the "Forward" button scans forward.
253
7.2.3 Adding and navigating presets
Use the following steps to add the currently selected frequency as a preset.
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu. Navigate to "Presets" and press "Enter".
2) Navigate to "Add Preset" and press "Enter". (Use the hot key “Ctrl-s” to
quickly access this option)
3) The "add preset" dialog is opened and "Frequency: (current frequency)" is
announced.
4) Press "Tab".
5) You are placed in the "Label" edit box. Type the name by which you want
to identify the preset.
6) Press "Tab" to move to "Confirm" and press "Enter".
If you wish to add a frequency other than the one you're currently listening to,
you may type the number of the frequency you wish to add in the
"Frequency" edit box of the "add preset" dialog.
You can navigate your presets by using “Alt-Left arrow” to move back a
preset, and “Alt-Right arrow” to move forward a preset.
To delete a preset, navigate to the preset and press "Del". Note: when this
command is executed, the preset is deleted instantly without any warning or
verification.
You can also add and delete presets using the Preset Manager dialog. Press
“Alt” to open the menu, and navigate to "presets" and press "Enter".
Navigate to the "Preset Manager" and press "Enter". You can also press
"Ctrl-m" to open the Preset Manager directly.
The Preset Manager dialog contains the "Preset list", an "Add" button, a
"Delete" button, a "Modify" button and a "Close" button. You can move
through the controls by pressing “Tab” and "shift-tab".
Pressing "Enter" on the "add" button opens the "add preset" dialog explained
above. If you wish to change the label of a previously added preset, move to
the desired preset item in the preset list by pressing “up arrow” or “down
arrow”. Press “Tab” to move to the "Modify" button and press "Enter". The
254
"Modify" dialog is opened. The structure of the "Modify dialog" is the same as
that of the "Add" dialog. The only difference is that the preset label and
frequency are both filled in for the "Modify" dialog.
If you want to delete a preset from the preset list, select the desired preset
and move to the "Delete" button by pressing “Tab” and press "Enter".
To exit the Preset Manager" dialog navigate to the "Close" button and press
"Enter" or press "Esc".
You can also use the media buttons on the front panel to add and move
among presets.
To use the media buttons, the Media Mode switch should be set to "FM
radio".
Press the "record" button for more than 2 seconds, to open the "add preset"
dialog. To move to the previous preset in the Preset List, press the "Back"
button for more than 2 seconds. Pressing the "Forward" button for more than
2 seconds moves to the next preset in the preset list.
Pressing the "stop" button for more than 2 seconds deletes the selected
preset.
7.2.4 Recording from the FM Radio
To record the audio of the radio station to which you are currently listening,
press “Alt” To open the menu, navigate to "Record (r)" and press "Enter". Or
use the hot key, "Ctrl-r". The "record" dialog is opened and the Voice Sense
QWERTY begins recording.
The record dialog consists of the following controls:
1. "Record status" status bar
2. "Pause/Continue" button
3. "Stop" button
4. "Cancel" button
You can move among these controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
While recording the radio, press "Tab" and press "Enter" on the "Pause"
button or press "a" to pause recording. The name of this button is changed to
255
"Continue". If you activate the "Continue" button or press "g", recording
resumes.
To stop the recording, press "s”. Or press "Tab" and press "Enter" on the
"Stop" button.
To check the duration of the current recording while recording, press “down
arrow”. The unit announces the current recording run time and total possible
recording time.
Recorded files are saved in the "flashdisk/media/radio" folder. The files are
named according to the preset label and frequency. If you are recording a
radio station that is not in your preset list, the recording is named "radio"
followed by the frequency. The first recording of a station is numbered 01,
and each subsequent recording of that station is numbered 02, 03, etc.
If you stop recording, the record dialog is exited automatically. If you press
"Enter" on the "Cancel" button or press "c", the recorded file is not saved and
the dialog is exited.
Note: while recording, you cannot change the preset or frequency.
While listening to the radio, you can instantly start recording by pressing the
"record" button on the front panel. As previously explained, make sure the
Media Mode switch is set to FM radio mode. If you press the "record" button,
the record dialog is opened and recording begins.
If you press the "stop" button on the front panel during recording, recording
stops and the recorded audio file is saved. If you press the "pause" button
during recording, the "pause" button is changed to the "continue" button.
Press the "pause" button again, (now the "continue" button) to resume
recording. Pressing the "Back" button or the "Forward" button moves among
the controls in the "record" dialog.
7.2.4.1 Changing record folder
To change the folder where recorded files are saved, follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu and press "Enter" on "File".
2) Navigate to "Record Settings" and press "Enter". Or use the hot key, "Alts" to open the "Record Settings" dialog.
256
3) You are placed on the first item, "Recording type: mp3".
4) Press “Tab” to move to the "Record folder" setting.
5) "Record folder: /flashdisk/media/radio" is displayed. Press "Enter".
6) The list of folders and files in the "Media" folder is displayed. Press
"Backspace" to move back a level in the folder structure, and press “up
arrow” or “down arrow” to move to your desired folder.
7) Press "Space" on the folder in which you wish to store recordings and
press "Enter".
8) "Record folder: (Changed folder)" is announced.
9) Press "Tab" to move to the "Confirm" button and press "Enter".
When the recording type is set to “MP3”, the available "Sample rate” values
range from 16000Hz to 48000Hz and available "Bitrate" values range from
64K to 320K.
When the recording type is set to “WAV”, the available "Sample rate" values
range from "8000Hz" to "44100Hz" and you can set the "Bits per channel" to
8 bits or 16 bits.
To change the sample rate and bit rate, press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to
move to the desired item to be changed. Press "Space" to change the value.
When you have finished setting your preferences, press “Tab” to move to the
"Confirm" button and press "Enter".
Raising the values of the sample rate and bit rate produces a higher quality
recording. However, higher quality recordings, though they have better
sound, take up greater amounts of storage space. Be sure to set your
recording values according to your specific quality and space requirements.
7.2.5 Additional features
1. Sensitivity adjustment
If the Voice Sense QWERTY cannot tune to the broadcast frequency you
desire, adjust the scanning sensitivity. To adjust the sensitivity, open the
"Settings" dialog as described in Section 10.1. Press “down arrow” to
257
navigate to "Sensitivity" and press "Space" or "Backspace" to adjust the
sensitivity. Higher values increase the scanning sensitivity of the radio. If the
sensitivity is increased, you can fine tune to more frequencies.
2. Mute
While listening to the radio, press "Space" to mute the audio. Pressing
"Space" once again unmutes the radio. You can also mute the radio by
pressing the "stop" button on the front panel, and unmute by pressing the
"play" button. If mute is activated, the radio is silent, but TTS (text to speech)
and all other system sounds are heard.
7.2.6 Hot Keys in the FM Radio
Open the presets dialog box: Ctrl-e
Open the menu: Alt
Internal speakers on/off: X or Fn-x
Move to next frequency: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to previous frequency: Ctrl-Down arrow
Auto previous frequency: Ctrl-Left arrow or short press previous button
Auto next frequency: Ctrl-Right arrow or short press next button
Go to frequency: Ctrl-f
Move to previous preset: Alt-Left arrow or long press previous button
Move to next preset: Alt-Right arrow or long press next button
Add preset: Ctrl-s or long press record button
Delete the preset: long press stop button or Delete
Open the record dialog box: Ctrl-r
Record start/pause: short press record button
Record stop: short press stop button
Mute on: short press stop button or Space
Mute off: short press play button or Space
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow
Record settings: Alt-r
258
7.3 DAISY Player
Using the DAISY Player on the Voice Sense QWERTY, you can listen to
files and read books that use the DAISY format. DAISY is an acronym for
(DIGITAL ACCESSIBLE INFORMATION SYSTEM). One advantage to
DAISY books is that you can listen to the audio as well as read the
associated text with the audio in DAISY books where both text and audio are
present.
The Voice Sense QWERTY supports DAISY books that are version 3.0 or
earlier. The DAISY player also supports DAISY content from specialized
service providers, such as books from NLS, BookShare, and the Open
library.
The DAISY Player supports the following book types:
DAISY 2.0/2.02/3.0, DAISY XML/Digital Talking Book.
ANSI/NISO Z39.86 2002, 2005.
NLS content: 3gp, AMR-WB+
Bookshare.org DAISY content, learning Ally Audio Plus content,
NIMAS 1.1
DRM: supports 2006 PDTB2 authentication.
archive.org (open library)
Note: To access content from services such as BookShare and the National
Library Service, you must sign up for these services, meet all eligibility
requirements, and pay any associated fees if applicable.
7.3.1 Registering with Digital Book service providers
1) Registering your Voice Sense with NLS:
As of firmware version 6.2, the Voice Sense DAISY Player supports
playback of digital talking books from the National Library Service for the
Blind and Physically Handicapped (NLS) as well as protected DAISY content
from the Open library (openlibrary.org/archive.org). In order to play content
from these services, you must register your Voice Sense with the National
library Service.
259
Note: the following instructions assume you already have an account with
the NLS Braille and Audio Reading Download service (BARD). If you do not
currently have a BARD account, please contact your regional NLS lending
library or visit:
https://nlsbard.loc.gov/ApplicationInstructions.html
To register your Voice Sense with NLS BARD, follow these steps:
1) Log in to your account on the BARD main page.
2) Choose the "Update Account Settings" link.
3) Choose the "Add a purchased player" link.
3) Fill out the form as requested; choose "Sense Notetaker" as the player
type.
4) You will receive an email confirming your request to add a purchased
player.
6) If there are no problems with your eligibility, within a couple of days, you
will receive another email confirming your eligibility to add the Sense
Notetaker to your account. This message also informs you that an email has
been sent to HIMS to confirm your eligibility.
7) When HIMS receives the email confirmation of your eligibility, we will send
an email requesting your key number and notetaker model, including
instructions for obtaining your key number.
8) When we receive your key number and notetaker model, we will send the
key file via email. (The key file is a small file with a .kxo extension.)
9) Save the attachment, and copy it to the root of your notetaker's flashdisk.
(Please be sure to copy the .kxo file to the root of the flashdisk. It must not
be contained in a folder, but must reside at the top level of the flashdisk
directory.)
10) Play an NLS book. The key file installs itself on a special protected area
of the flashdisk.
To obtain your key number, follow these steps:
1) Press "f1" to bring up the main menu.
2) Press h to access the Help Menu.
260
3) Press "I" to bring up the Information Dialog.
4) Navigate below "Mac Address for wireless LAN".
5) After the words "Key Number" a 5 or 6 digit number is displayed.
2) Setting up your notetaker with Learning Ally:
Note: These instructions assume you already have an account with
Learning Ally. If you do not have an account, you can learn more and
obtain instructions for signing up at www.learningally.org.
Instructions for obtaining a Learning Ally UAK for your notetaker:
1.) Log in to your Learning Ally account
2.) Once you reach “My Home” page, click the “My Bookshelf” link in the
upper right portion of the header
3.) On the “My Bookshelf” page on the left hand side, you should see a
selection labeled “I’m ready to listen to my audiobooks”- click the
“Continue” button in that selection. Note: if you already have an
authorized Learning Ally device on your account, this option is labled
“Choose a different device”.
4.) On the “Choose A Device” screen, select the “DAISY- Compatible
Player” radio button and click “Continue”
5.) On the “Setting-Up Your DAISY-Compatible Device” screen click the
“Authorize a DAISY Device” link beneath the player model drop down
6.) That link will open a new tab or window titled “Authorize DAISY
Player (UAK)”, select the “Notetaker” from the drop-down list and
click Continue
7.) Enter your notetakers key number, and then click “Continue”
Instructions for obtaining the Key Number on the Sense notetaker
1.) Press F1 (Windows key) to bring up the main “Program” menu
2.) Press “H” to access the “Help” menu
3.) Press “I” to open the “Information” dialog
4.) Use “Space-4” (down arrow) to navigate to “Key Number”
5.) After the words, “Key Number”, a 5 or 6 digit number is displayed.
Instructions for Installing the UAK
261
1.) Save the zip file obtained from the Learning Ally site to your PC.
2.) Connect your Sense Notetaker to the PC via the USB cable, and then
turn it on
3.) Extract (unzip) all the files into the root of the flash disk of the unit
4.) Download a Learning Ally book to your Sense notetaker using the
Learning Ally Audio Book Manager
5.) Disconnect the Sense notetaker from the PC
6.) Use the notetakers DAISY Player to select and play the Learning Ally
book
7.) Your notetaker will then prompt you for your 4 digit Learning Ally PIN
Number. Type 7323, and press Enter. Your Sense notetaker will now
be authorized to play Audio PLUS books, and your selection will start
playing.
Once your Sense notetaker is authorized, you should delete the UAK files
from the root of the flash disk and keep a backup copy of the original zip file
on your computer.
Instructions for setting up a HIMS notetaker as a device on the Learning
Ally Audio Book Manager
1.) Open the Audio Book Manager, and log in
2.) Tab to the “Player List”, arrow down to “Manage Players” and press
“Enter”
3.) Tab to “Add a player to Learning Ally Audio Book Manager” and press
“Enter”
4.) When prompted to “Select the Audio Book player you would like to
use”, arrow down to “Manually Manage your Files” and press “Enter”
5.) Tab to “Add player details” and press “Enter”
6.) You are placed in a text box in which you can write a nickname for
the player. Please create a nickname that makes the notetaker easy
to identify so that you can identify it when choosing a player with
which to synchronize content. For example, you may call it “Voice
Sense” or “Voice Sense QWERTY”. By default, the nickname is “
Manually Manage Your Files-1”
7.) If you tab, the next item contains the download path. You may keep
the default or change the path.
Note: You can also change the path to which to synchronize books
when choosing sync options before activating synchronization. You
262
may choose to synchronize the files to a location on your computer,
and manually copy them later to your HIMS notetaker using an SD
card or by connecting via Mass Storage Mode, or you may connect
your notetaker in Mass Storage Mode, and synchronize them directly
to a chosen location on the notetaker.
8.) Tab to “Add Player” and press “Enter” to complete the addition of
your HIMS notetaker to your “Player List”
9.) Tab to “Close Window” and press “Enter” to return to the “Player List”
10.)
To select your HIMS notetaker as the player to which to
synchronize content, navigate to it using your arrow keys, and press
“Enter”
For instructions on synchronizing content or other functions of the
Learning Ally Audio Book Manager, please see the Learning Ally
Audio Book Manager User Guide.
7.3.2 Executing the DAISY Player
To launch the DAISY Player, follow these steps: (1) Press "Enter" on "DAISY Player" in the Voice Sense QWERTY " “Media"
menu.
(2) Or press the shortcut key "d” from the "Media" menu.
Or, you can launch the DAISY player from anywhere on the unit by pressing
“Windows-D”.
(3) When you launch the DAISY Player, all of the drives available on the
Voice Sense QWERTY are displayed (regardless of whether they contain
DAISY-formatted files).
(4) You can navigate the list with “up arrow” or “down arrow”. You can open
a drive containing DAISY-formatted files by pressing "Enter" on the drive
name.
(5) After opening the drive, all of the folders on the drive, and any DAISY
book titles on the drive that you have opened are displayed.
(6) When you locate a folder containing a DAISY book you want to open,
press "Space" to select it.
(7) Press "Enter" to play the book.
263
If you have DAISY books in a folder on a drive, you can go into the folder by
pressing "Enter" on it. Make sure that you do not press "Space" on the folder.
You can navigate the drive by using the same navigation keys used in the
file manager. Navigate to the folder containing the DAISY book you wish to
read or listen to. Press "Space" to select the folder, and press "Enter" to play
the DAISY book. If you only have one DAISY book in the selected folder, it
automatically starts playing after showing the title. If your selected folder
contains more than 1 DAISY book, you can play the DAISY book by pressing
"Enter" on the selected book after navigating the file list with “up arrow” or
“down arrow”.
If you replay a book that you have listened to before, playback resumes from
the location where you last exited. To stop playing a DAISY book, press "AltF4". A prompt box appears asking if you would like to exit the DAISY Player.
You can select "Yes" or "No" with "Space" or "Backspace" and press "Enter".
You can also control DAISY playback using the media buttons on the front
panel. To use the media buttons to control the DAISY Player, the Media
Mode switch must be set to the center position, "DAISY Mode". You can start
DAISY playback by pressing the "play" button on the front panel. While
playing DAISY content, press "play" again to pause playback. PRESS the
"Back" button to move back 1 navigational element, and press the "Forward"
button to move forward by 1 navigational element. Use the "Record" button
to set the navigational element by which the "Back" and "Forward" buttons
move. Controlling the DAISY Player via the Media buttons is explained in
further detail later in this chapter.
Open the DAISY Player menu by pressing “Alt”. The menu contains "File",
"Document", "Mark", and "Heading". You can navigate the menu items using
“up arrow” and “down arrow”. To activate a menu item, press "Enter".
7.3.3 Components of the DAISY Player
While playing DAISY content, four controls/components are available:
1) "heading"
2) "Information"
264
3) "Play"
4) "Pause"
You can move among the controls using “Tab” and "shift-tab". While playing
a DAISY book, “heading", shows you a prefixed heading or navigation
element as well as the text under that element if text exists. In "information",
you can find the current page, level, phrase, elapsed time, and running time.
You can move among these items with “up arrow” or “down arrow”. You can
press "Enter" on "Pause" or "Play", to pause or play the audio. From
anywhere in the four control components, you can toggle play/pause by
pressing "Space".
7.3.4 File
When in the "File" menu, you can open a new DAISY book, check file
information on the currently open book, and set voice parameters. You can
open the "File" menu by pressing “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "File". Or, you
can press "f" to quickly access the File menu.
The "File" menu contains:
1) "Open DAISY"
2) "Voice Settings"
3) "Book-Info"
4) "Exit"
You can move among these items with “up arrow” or “down arrow”. You can
activate the selected item by pressing "Enter".
7.3.4.1 Open DAISY
You can open another DAISY book using "Open DAISY". To get to "Open
DAISY", press “Alt” to open the menu, and press "Enter" on "File". Use
“down arrow” to navigate to "Open DAISY" and press "Enter". Or, you can
use the hot key “Ctrl-o”.
When you activate "Open DAISY", the drive list is displayed.
265
You can also open the "Open DAISY" dialog by holding the "Stop" button. If
you press and hold the "Stop" button again, this dialog is closed and you are
returned to your previous position.
The "Play” button performs the same function as "Enter" in the "Open
DAISY" dialog. The "Stop" button, "Record" button, "Back" button and
"Forward" buttons perform the same functions as "Backspace", "Space", “up
arrow” and “down arrow” in the "open DAISY" dialog.
Namely, you can move up and down by pressing the "Back" and "Forward"
buttons in the "Open DAISY" dialog. And you can select and unselect by
pressing the "Record" button. Press the "Stop" button, to move back a level
in the folder structure, and press the "play" button to play the selected file in
the "Open DAISY" dialog.
To use these functions, you must set the Media Mode switch to "DAISY
Mode".
7.3.4.2 Voice Settings
In the "Voice Settings", you can set the DAISY Player voice parameters.
To execute voice settings, follow these steps:
(1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
(2) Move to "Voice Settings", below the "File" menu and press "Enter". Or
press "s".
(3) Or, you can directly activate the "Voice Settings" by pressing “Ctrl-s”.
Executing this option opens the "Voice Settings" dialog.
The dialog contains the following items:
1) DAISY play Type: (Available when a DAISY book contains both text and
audio, this option allows you to choose your playback method.)
2) Voice control
- Set speed
- Set volume
- Set to control information of contents
3) Confirm
4) Cancel
266
You can move among the four controls with "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". In the
"voice control" tab, you can move among "Set speed", "Set volume" and "Set
to control information of contents" with “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
To cancel this function, press "Esc or "Alt-F4".
7.3.4.2.1 DAISY play type
This option appears when playing text audio DAISY books. You can access
this option directly by pressing "Ctrl-t".
The default setting is "Audio". This means the DAISY Player plays audio in
text audio DAISY. If you set the "Text", it plays the text in text audio DAISY,
and thus the content is read using the TTS.
To change the setting value, press “up arrow” or “down arrow”. After
changing the setting value, press "Enter". Or press "Tab", to move to
"Confirm" and press "Enter".
7.3.4.2.2 Volume and Speed
You can increase the levels of speed and volume with "Space", and
decrease them with "Backspace". After setting the levels, press "Enter" to
confirm your settings.
Without using the "Voice Settings" menu, you can increase or decrease the
speed and volume with the following hot keys:.
1. Increase the speed: Shift-Right arrow
2. Decrease the speed: Shift-Left arrow
3. Increase the volume: Shift-Up arrow
4. Decrease the volume: Shift-Down arrow
7.3.4.2.3 Auto Play On/off
By default, the DAISY Player automatically begins reading content when you
open a book or return to a book that you have already read. If you are in
267
situations where it is not ideal for your notetaker to be speaking aloud, you
may wish to turn this option off, so that you can open the DAISY Player and
navigate text without the concern that the unit will begin reading the book
aloud.
From the “Auto Play” setting, press “Space” to toggle between ‘On” and “Off”.
Press “Enter” to save the setting. When Auto play is off, when you press the
“Play/Pause” key, the unit reads only to the end of the current phrase. When
Auto Play is on, the unit reads continuously to the end of the book unless
you manually pause or discontinue it.
7.3.4.2.4 Set to control information of contents
Use this function when you play NIMAS DAISY content. The default setting
value is "On". To change the setting value, press "Space" or "Backspace".
If you set this to "On", the Voice Sense QWERTY displays controls and
information symbols while playing NIMAS DAISY content.
NIMAS DAISY controls include "image", "description", "caption", "prodnote,
and "table". These controls appear on the Braille display (When connected to
SyncBraille) as "img" for image, "desc" for "description" and "prodnote",
"cap" is for "caption", and "tdt for "table".
7.3.4.3 Book-Info
Using "Book-Info", you can query the information on the currently playing file.
Press “Alt” and press "Enter" on "File". Press “down arrow” repeatedly to
move to "Book-Info" and press "Enter" on "Book-Info". You can also activate
"Book-Info" by pressing "Alt-Enter".
Activating "Book-Info" opens the "Book-Info" dialog. The dialog contains a
status box with "running time and pages", another status box containing the
"mark information", and a "Close" button. You can move among the three
controls with “Tab” or "shift-tab". The first status box contains "Total time",
"Read time", "Remaining time", "Total pages", "Current page", and
"Remaining pages". The second status box contains the "Total marks" and
"Mark page". You can move among the items with “up arrow” or “down
268
arrow”. If you want to close the dialog, press "Enter" on "Close", and you are
returned to the currently playing file.
7.3.4.4 Exit
To exit the DAISY Player, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "File". Press
“down arrow” repeatedly to move to "Exit" and press "Enter". Or, you can
press "Alt-F4" to instantly exit the DAISY Player. When you execute the
"Exit" command, the Voice Sense QWERTY prompts, "Exit DAISY Player.
Are you sure?" press "Enter" on "Yes", which is the default; or, if you do not
want to exit, select "No" by pressing "Space", and press "Enter".
7.3.5 Document Navigation
When in the "Document" menu, you can move by phrase or level while
playing a DAISY book. To activate the "Document" menu, press “Alt” and
press "d".
The "Document" menu contains the following items:
1) "Play/Pause"
2) "Previous Phrase"
3) "Next Phrase"
4) "Previous Page"
5) "Next Page"
6) "Go To Page"
7) "Move down"
8) "Move up"
9) "Set To Prior Level"
10) "Set To Next Level".
You can move among these items using “up arrow” or “down arrow”. To
activate a menu item, select the menu item, and press "Enter".
7.3.5.1 Play and Pause
269
You can access "Play/Pause" in the menu by pressing “Alt”, and press
"Enter" on "Document". Then, use “down arrow” to move to "Play/Pause",
and press "Enter". You can also activate "Play/Pause" directly by pressing
"Space". While playing, you can move to the beginning of a document by
pressing “Fn-Left arrow”. You can move to the last phrase by pressing “FnRight arrow”.
7.3.5.2 Move by Phrase
You can access this command in the menu by pressing “Alt,” and then press
“Enter” on “Document”. Then, use “Down arrow” to move to “Previous
Phrase” or “Next Phrase,” and press “Enter”. You can move to the next,
previous, next fifth, or previous fifth phrase without opening the menu by
pressing “Right arrow”, “Left arrow”, “Ctrl-Up arrow”, or “Ctrl-Down arrow”,
respectively.
Also you can move to the previous or next phrase directly with a short press
of the "Back" button or "Forward" button on the front panel. To move by
phrase using the "Back" and "Forward" buttons, you must set the Media
mode switch to "DAISY mode".
7.3.5.3 Move by Page
You can access this item in the menu by pressing “Alt”, and press "Enter" on
"Document". Then, use “down arrow” to move to "Previous Page", "Next
Page", or "Go To Page", and press "Enter". You can move to the next or
previous page directly by pressing "page down" or "page up" during play or
pause status. You can jump to a specific page by pressing "Ctrl-g". When
you activate "Go To Page", you are prompted "Move to page number?" Type
the number of the page that you want to move to in the edit box. Press
"Enter", and the Voice Sense QWERTY moves you to that page.
7.3.5.4 Move by Level
270
You can access this function in the menu by pressing “Alt,” and then press
“Enter” on “Document”. Then, use “Down arrow”to move to “Move up” or
“Move down,” and press “Enter”.Or, you can move up and down without
opening the menu by pressing “Alt-Left arrow” or “Alt-Right arrow”. You can
set the level by pressing “Alt-Down arrow” or “Alt-Up arrow”. Namely, if the
level is set to 3, you can move through the level 1, 2 and 3 and if the level is
set to 1, you can move through the level 1 only.
7.3.5.5 Move by Time Index
You can use this function in the following situations:
1. While playing an audio DAISY book or in pause status.
2. While playing audio in an audio text DAISY book or in pause status.
The setting values are "5 seconds", "10 seconds", "30 seconds", "1minute",
"3 minutes", "5 minutes", "10 minutes", "15 minutes", "20 minutes", "30
minutes" and "1 hour".
To set previous time index, follow these steps:
(1) Press “Ctrl-Alt-Up arrow”. Every time you press “Ctrl-Alt-Up arrow”,
Voice Sense QWERTY toggles between 30, 10, or 5 seconds; 1 hour
and 30 minutes.
(2) Choose the setting value you want.
To set next time index, follow these steps:
(1) Press “Ctrl-Alt-Down arrow”. Every time you press “Ctrl-Alt-Down
arrow”, Voice Sense QWERTY toggles between 5, 10, or 30 seconds:
1 minute, 3 minutes and 5 minutes.
(2) Choose the setting value you want.
The time index to move by a specified amount of time is as follows.
1) Move to previous time: Press “Ctrl-Alt-Left arrow”. If you set “5
minutes”, it moves back 5 minutes from your current position.
271
2) Move to next time: Press “Ctrl-Alt-Right arrow”. If you set “5 minutes”,
it moves forward 5 minutes from your current position.
7.3.5.6 Move by Text Index
You can use this function in the following situations:
1. While playing a text DAISY book or in pause status.
2. While playing text in an audio text DAISY book or in pause status.
The setting values are "Phonetic", "Character", "Word" and "Sentence".
To set previous text index, follow these steps:
(1) Press “Ctrl-Alt-Up arrow”. Every time you press “Ctrl-Alt-Up arrow”, Voice
Sense QWERTY toggles between “Sentence”, “Word”, “Character” or
“Phonetic”.
(2) Choose the setting value you want.
To set next text index, follow these steps:
(1) Press “Ctrl-Alt-Down arrow”. Every time you press “Ctrl-Alt-Down arrow”,
Voice Sense QWERTY toggles between “Phonetic”, “Character”, “Word” and
“Sentence”.
(2) Choose the setting value you want.
To move by the specified text index value, follow these steps:
(1) Move to previous text: Press “Ctrl-Alt-Left arrow”. If you set “Sentence”, it
moves back 1 sentence from your current position.
(2) Move to next text: Press “Ctrl-Alt-Right arrow”. If you set “Sentence”, it
moves forward 1 sentence from your current position.
7.3.6 Mark
Using the "Mark" menu, you can insert a mark or jump to a previously
created mark in a DAISY book. Up to 1000 marks can be inserted into each
DAISY book. You can open the "Mark" menu by pressing “Alt”, then "m". In
the "Mark" menu, you will find the following items:
272
1) "Previous Mark"
2) "Next Mark"
3) "Set Mark"
4) "Move To Mark"
5) "Delete Mark"
You can move among the menu items using “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
7.3.6.1 Previous Mark
The "Previous Mark" function allows you to move to a location prior to your
current position where you have placed a mark. You can access the
"Previous Mark" function by pressing "Enter" on the "Mark" menu, move to
"previous mark" by pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter". Or just press
"p" to execute the "Previous Mark" command. You can also move to the
previous mark by pressing "V" while reading DAISY content.
7.3.6.2 Next Mark
The "Next Mark" function allows you to move to a location ahead of your
current position where you have placed a mark. You can access the "Next
Mark" function by pressing "Enter" on the "Mark" menu, Navigate to "Next
Mark" by pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter". Or just press "n" to
execute the "Next Mark" command. You can also move to the next mark by
pressing "N" while reading DAISY content.
7.3.6.3 Set Mark
You can set a mark anywhere you want while playing a file to note a position
you would like to return to at a later time. You can set a mark by pressing
"Ctrl-m" from within a DAISY book. You can also activate this function by
pressing “Alt”. Then, press "Enter" on "Mark". Use “down arrow” to move to
"Set Mark", and press "Enter". Or press "m" when you are in the "Mark"
menu. The "Set Mark" dialog opens, and you are prompted to "Enter mark
name:". Enter the number of the mark that you want to insert from 1 to 1000.
273
7.3.6.4 Move to Mark
You can move to the next or previous mark by pressing "V" or "N" during
play/pause status. You can also move to a specific mark by pressing "Ctrl-j".
You can access this feature in the menu by pressing “Alt”. You can then use
“down arrow” to move to "Mark", and press "Enter". Or, you can press "j"
when you are in the "Mark" menu. If you activate the "Move To Mark"
function, you are prompted for the "Mark name to move to:". Type the mark
name in the edit box. If you have not previously set a mark, you cannot use
this function.
7.3.6.5 Deleting a Mark
You can activate the "Delete Mark" function by pressing "Del" during
playback. You can also activate this function from the menu by pressing “Alt”.
Use “down arrow” to move to "Mark", and press "Enter". Use “down arrow” to
move to "Delete Mark", and press "Enter" once more. When you activate the
"Delete Mark" function, you are prompted to "Enter mark name to delete:".
Make certain that you want to delete the mark that you have entered. If you
type a mark name in this edit box, the mark is deleted without warning or
confirmation.
7.3.7 Heading
When in the "Heading" menu, you can navigate a document by the available
text headings, or you can search a heading during DAISY playback. You can
open the "Heading" menu by pressing "Alt", and press "h".
The "Heading" menu contains the following items:
1) "Previous Heading"
2) "Next Heading"
3) "Scan Heading"
4) "Read Heading"
274
5) "First Heading"
6) "Last Heading"
7) "Find Heading"
8) "Find Again"
You can move among the sub-menu items using “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
7.3.7.1 Move by Heading
While playing a DAISY book, you can move heading by heading using hot
keys. You can move to the next, previous, first, and last heading by pressing
“Ctrl-F6”, “Ctrl-F5”, “Ctrl-f7”, and “Ctrl-F8” respectively. You can also move
to the previous or next heading directly using the media buttons on the front
panel. Before you use this feature, be sure to set the Media Mode switch on
the front panel to "DAISY mode". To move to previous or next heading, press
the "Back" or "Forward" button for about 2 seconds and release it.
7.3.7.2 Move to Specific Heading
To move to a specific heading, follow these steps:
1) Press "Ctrl-h" while playing a DAISY book.
2) The Voice Sense QWERTY displays, "Current Heading: xx Total heading:
yy. Enter the heading number to move to:".
3) Type the number of the heading you want to move to.
4) Press "Enter".
5) The DAISY book starts playing at the specified heading..
7.3.7.3 Find Heading
You can activate the "Find Heading" function by pressing "Ctrl-f". When you
press this hot key, you are prompted, "Heading to find:" and You are placed
in an edit box into which to type the heading name. The "Find Heading"
dialog also contains "Search direction:", a "Confirm"button, and a
"Cancel"button. You can move among the four items with “Tab” or "shift-tab".
275
Tab to the "Search Direction" combo box, and press "Space" to toggle
between forward and backward. Tab to "Confirm", and press "Enter" to
execute the search.
7.3.7.4 Scan Heading and Read Heading
While playing a DAISY book, you can read your current heading, or scan the
headings from your current location to the end of the book. You can scan
them by activating the "Read Heading" or "Scan Heading" in the "Heading"
menu or by using the hot keys for these functions.
You can query the current heading (in the open book, by pressing "Ctrl-w".
When you activate this function, the current heading name and level are
displayed. By pressing "Ctrl-n”, you can scan the heading list from the
current position to the end of the book. The headings from the current
position to the end are displayed in a list. Press "Enter" or "Space" on a
heading in this list to start playback at that position. If you want to cancel the
"Scan Heading" function, press "Esc" or "Alt-F4", and you are returned to
your previous location.
7.3.7.5 Find Phrase
You can also search for a phrase in an open DAISY book.
Follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Voice Sense QWERTY displays, "File".
3) Press “down arrow”, to navigate to "Heading".
4) Press "Enter" on the "Heading" menu. Or press "h".
5) "Previous heading" is displayed.
6) Press “down arrow”, to move to "Find Phrase".
7) Press "Enter" on the "Find Phrase" option. Or press "s".
You can also open the "Find PHRASE" dialog directly by pressing "Alt-s".
The "Find Phrase dialog" consists of the following:
1) Phrase to find
276
2) Search direction
3) Confirm
4) Cancel
You can move among the 4 controls by pressing "Tab" and "Shift-Tab".
Type all or part of the phrase in the edit box. Press "Tab", to move to
"Search direction". The default setting is "Next". You can choose "Next" or
"Back". To change the setting value, press "Space".
After setting the "Search direction", press "Enter". Or press "Tab", to move to
"Confirm. Press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button.
Playback starts at the searched phrase.
If you want to cancel the "Find Phrase" dialog, press "Enter" on the "Cancel"
button. Or press "Alt-F4".
7.3.8 Hot Keys in the DAISY Player
Play
Play/Pause: Space
Move to the beginning of document: Home
Move to the last phrase: End
Increase the speed: Shift-Right arrow
Decrease the speed: Shift-Left arrow
Increase the volume: Shift-Up arrow
Decrease the volume: Shift-Down arrow
Move by Phrase
Move to the next phrase: Ctrl-Right arrow or short press “Forward” button
Move to the previous phrase: Ctrl-Left arrow or short press “Back” button
Move to the next fifth phrase: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the previous fifth phrase: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move by page
Move to the next page: Page down
277
Move to the previous page: Page up
Go to the page: Ctrl-g
Move by level
Move up: Alt-Left arrow
Move down: Alt-Right arrow
Set to prior level: Alt-Up arrow
Set to next level: Alt-Down arrow
Move by heading
Move to the next heading: Ctrl-F6 or long press “Forward” button
Move to the previous heading: Ctrl-F5 or long press “Back” button
Move to the last heading: Ctrl-F8
Move to the first heading: Ctrl-F7
Check the current-reading level and heading: Ctrl-w
Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Ctrl-n
Move to Specific Heading: Ctrl-h
Find Phrase: Alt-s
Heading
Find heading: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Scan heading: Ctrl-n
Read heading: Ctrl-w
Set mark
Set mark at current position: Ctrl-m
Move to the next mark: N
Move to the previous mark: V
Delete mark: Del
Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Move to the title list: Shift-Backspace
Open DAISY file: Ctrl-o
278
Voice settings: Ctrl-s
Set DAISY play type: Ctrl-t
Check the book-info: Alt-Enter
279
8. Organizer
The “Organizer” menu on the Voice Sense QWERTY contains items similar
to those normally found in an electronic or hard copy organizer. The
“Organizer” menu contains 3 items: “Address Manager”, “Schedule
Manager”, and “Database Manager”.
To open the “Organizer” menu, press “Windows” key to bring up the main
menu, navigate to “Organizer” using the DOWN arrow, and press “Enter”.
Or, you can press “o” from the main menu to quickly jump to and open the
“Organizer” menu.
The following sections will discuss each of the programs in the “Organizer”
menu in detail.
8.1 Address Manager
8.1.1 What is the "Address Manager"?
The "Address Manager" is a program that you can use to keep track of your
contact information for friends and colleagues, such as company addresses,
home addresses, e-mail addresses, as well as other information.
The "Address Manager" consists of two main dialogs: "Add Address" and
"Search Address". In the "Add Address" dialog you can enter contact
information, such as names, company addresses, home addresses and so
on. In the "Search Address", dialog you can look for information that is stored
in the "Address Manager". You can edit or delete information you find. You
can also select addresses to be printed using an ink print or Braille printer.
IN addition, you can connect to a web site by pressing "Enter" on a
homepage address field if the field contains an address for a web site.
In the "program" menu, you can start the "Address Manager" by first opening
the “Organizer” menu by pressing “O”, then typing "a". You can launch the
“Address Manager” from anywhere on the unit by pressing “Windows-A”.
Before going into the details of how to use the "Address Manager", let's
discuss the structure of address data.
The address data that is stored in the "Address Manager" consists of a set of
records. A "record" is a collection of contact information about one person or
280
company. Each record contains 23 fields. These 23 fields are: "Last name",
"First name", "Company name", "Title", "Mobile phone", "Home phone",
"Home fax", "Company phone", "Company fax", "Home street address",
"Home city", "Home state", "Home zip code", "Home country", "Company
street address", "Company city", "Company state", "Company zip code",
"Company country". "Home e-mail", "Company e-mail", "Home page", and
"Memo". Thus, one record contains all the information you can enter about a
person or company.
8.1.2 Starting the "Address Manager"
When you press "Enter" on the "Address Manager" in the ”Organizer" menu,
the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Search Address", and displays the prompt,
"Last name:" and the "Search Address" dialog is opened.
In the "Address Manager", you can use the menus to conveniently browse
and execute all of the available commands. When you cannot remember the
exact hot key for the command you want to execute, you can press “Alt” to
open the menu and access all of the functions there.
8.1.3 Using "Add Address"
This dialog allows you to enter new addresses in the "Address Manager". To
use the "Add Address" function, press “Alt” to bring up the "Address
Manager" menu, then press “up arrow”, “down arrow” or the up and down
scroll buttons to move to "Add Address". Then, press "Enter". Or, press "Ctrln" directly from in the "Address Manager".
8.1.3.1 Adding an Address
"Add address" is a dialog that contains a list of 22 input fields, the "Memo"
field, a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. In the input fields, you can
enter the information corresponding to the 22 fields of a record. "Confirm" is
used to save the information entered, and "Cancel" is used to discard the
entry. You can move among the input fields, "Memo", "Confirm", and
281
"Cancel" by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". Among the 22 input fields, you can
move from one field to the next by pressing the “up arrow”, “down arrow” or
the up and down scroll buttons. Type in the appropriate information for each
field, and press the down arrow to move to the next field. You do not have to
fill in all of the fields. To skip a field, press the “Down arrow”, and the field is
left blank. You are then prompted for the information for the next field.
When you have entered information in the desired fields, you can save the
information by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab" repeatedly to move to the
"Confirm" button and press "Enter". Or, you can press "Enter" in any field.
If you don't want to save the information, press “Tab” or "shift-tab" repeatedly
to move to the "Cancel" button, then press "Enter".
After you cancel or save the entry, you are prompted to enter information
into another record, beginning with the "Last name" field.
You can use the cursor routing keys to move from one field to the next.
In any input field, if you press the first cursor routing key to the left, the first
input field ("Last name:") is displayed and you can type a name. To enter a
mobile phone number without entering other information, press the 5th
cursor routing key, then enter the phone number. To jump to the "Home email" field, the 20th field, press the 20th cursor routing key.
If you have pressed the 23rd cursor routing key, or any key to the right of the
23rd key is pressed, you will hear a warning sound because there are only
23 fields in a record.
You can enter telephone numbers separating the various parts of the
number with a -. To type in a dash (-) while typing in a telephone number
(e.g. 000-000-0000), you should press “-”.
If you want to put an extension after a phone number, enter the phone
number as described above, and then type a comma (,), followed by the
extension number, as in “000-000-0000,100”.
Press “tab,” to get to the “Memo” field. You can type in multiple lines of text
in the “Memo” field. When you want to start a new line of text, press “Enter”.
When you have finished entering information for a record, press “tab” until
you reach the “Confirm” button. Press “Enter.
282
8.1.3.2 Setting Add Address Fields
"Set Address Fields" enables you to select what of the 22 fields to be shown
when you enter contact information. There are 22 fields in a record, but you
may not want to enter information in every one of the 22 fields. You can use
"Set Address Fields" to select only the fields that you need.
To use this function, press “Alt” to bring up the menu, then select "Set
Address Field", or press "o" then press "Enter". Or, you can press “Ctrl-o”
from the "Add Address" dialog.
To the right of each field name, "used" or "unused" is displayed. The default
value is set to "used". To toggle the value, press "Space".
After setting all the fields you want to change, move to the "Confirm" button
or the "Cancel" button by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab", and press "Enter" to
save or cancel the changes. You can also cancel the changes by pressing
"Esc" or "Alt-F4".
8.1.3.3 Using "Search Address" in "Add address"
From "Add Address", access the "Search Address" function to jump to
another record. To use the "Search Address" function, press “Alt” to open the
menu. Next move to "Search Address", then press "Enter", or press "s". You
can also press “Ctrl-s” from the "Add Address" dialog.
If you have entered information in a record before executing "Search
Address", you are asked, "Save changes? Yes/No". After you make your
choice, the "Search Address" dialog is displayed.
8.1.4 Searching For an Address
8.1.4.1 Using "search address"
The "Search Address" dialog enables you to search for information stored in
the "Address Manager". If you execute the "Address Manager" from the
"program" menu, the "Search Address" dialog is opened automatically. To
283
open "Search Address" from "Add Address", you can either select it from the
menu, and press "Enter", or press “Ctrl-s” from the "Add Address" dialog. If
you press "Enter" in the "Search Address" dialog, without typing any text,
when "Last name:" is displayed, you can browse through all of the records
that are stored in the "Address Manager". A "record" is a collection of
information about one person. If more than one record is found, you can
move to the next record by pressing “down arrow”. To move to the previous
record, press “up arrow”.
To navigate fields and records in the search result list, you can use the
following hot keys:
Move to a previous field in a record: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next field in a record: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the first field in a record: Home
Move to the last field in a record: End
Move to the previous record: Up arrow
Move to the next record: Down arrow
Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last record: Ctrl-End
Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow
Move to next same field different record: Right arrow
You can also search records using the other fields. To find records with a
company name, press “down arrow” repeatedly until "company name:" is
heard. Then, type the company name, and press "Enter". The first record
that has the company name is displayed.
When you enter text to be searched, you do not have to type the entire
content of a field. For example, to find a record about "Edward", type in "ed"
in the "search name" field. Then, all the records whose name field contains
"ed" is found.
8.1.4.2 Setting Searching Address Fields
284
This option enables you to select the fields that you want to search. Press
“Alt” to bring up the menu, and select "Set Address Search Fields". Then,
press "Enter". Or, you can press “Ctrl-o” from the "Set Address Search
Fields" dialog.
To search only the name, mobile phone number, and company telephone
number fields, move to those fields that you do not want to search by
pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”, then press "Space" to change the value
of that field to "unused". By pressing "Space", you can toggle the value of a
field between "used" and "unused".
8.1.4.3 Using "Add Address" In "Search Address"
You can also access the "Add Address" command from the "Search
Address" dialog. To do this, press “Alt” to bring up the menu, then select
"Add Address". Then, press "Enter". You can also press "Ctrl-n", from the
"Search Address" dialog.
8.1.5 Backing up and restoring the address list
8.1.5.1 Backup Address List
If you perform a hard reset, or if your battery dies, all of the data in the
"Address Manager" is lost. So, it is very important that you make a backup
file every time you make a change to the address list. To go to "Backup
Address List", open the menu by pressing “Alt”. Then, use the up and down
arrows to navigate to "Backup Address List". Then, press "Enter". You can
also press "u" from the menu to get to "Backup Address List". Or, you can
press "Ctrl-u" to activate this function directly.
If you already have a backup file, you are prompted, "Backup file already
exists. Continue to backup? Yes". If you have made changes to your
address list, press "Enter" to create a new backup file. To keep the previous
backup file press “down arrow”, to move to "No", and press "Enter". When
you create a backup file in your address list, you will have a new backup file
285
with the extension DAT, and you will have another file with the extension
BAK created from the previous "address.dat" file).
8.1.5.2 Restore Address List
To restore the address list after a hard reset, press “Alt” to open the menu,
and use the up and down scroll buttons to find "Restore Address List". Then,
press "Enter" on "Restore Address List". Or, you can press "r" from the menu
to find "Restore Address List". You can also press "Ctrl-r" to activate this
function directly.
If you activate the "Restore Address List" function, and you already have an
address list, you are prompted, "Address file already exists. Which do you
prefer? Append". If you press "Enter", the backup address list is appended to
the current address list. If you press “down arrow” once and press "Enter" on
"Overwrite", the new backup file is restored, erasing the old backup file. For
example, let us assume that you have three records in your address list and
you have ten addresses in your backup file. If you select "Append", you will
have 13 records in your address list. In this case, three addresses could
possibly be redundant. If you select "Overwrite", you will have 10 addresses
backed up, and the three original addresses are deleted. If you don't want to
either "Append" or "Overwrite", press “down arrow”, to navigate to "Cancel",
and press "Enter".
8.1.5.3 Setting Backup Options
You can back up your address list manually using the "Backup Address List"
function. You can also backup your address list automatically using the "Set
Backup Options". To activate the "Set Backup Options" function, press “Alt”
to open the menu. Then press “down arrow” or “up arrow” repeatedly to
locate "Set Backup Options". Then press "Enter". Or, you can press "e" from
the menu to go to "Set Backup Options". You can also activate the function
directly by pressing "Ctrl-e".
When you activate this function, a dialog opens. The dialog has three
controls: "Backup mode" radio button, a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel"
286
button. You can move among the controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". To
move among radio buttons, press “up arrow”, "Backspace", “down arrow”, or
"Space".
The "Backup mode" has three radio buttons: "Always backup changes when
exiting", "Manual backup", and "Prompt backup changes when exiting".
1. If you select the "Always backup changes when exiting", a new backup file
is automatically created when you exit the "Address Manager" if you modify
the address list or add other information.
2. If you select the "Manual backup", it does not create a new backup file
even if there are changes to the address list. In this case, you can only
create a new backup file using the "backup address list" menu option.
3. If you select the "Prompt backup changes when exiting", the message
"Backup changes? Yes" appears when you exit the "Address Manager", if
you have modified the address list or added other information. If you press
"Enter" on "Yes", a new backup file is created and the "Address Manager" is
closed. If you press “down arrow” once and press "Enter" on "No", it will exit
without making a new backup file.
You can change the backup mode by pressing "Enter" after focusing on one
of the three radio buttons. Or, you can press "Enter" on "Confirm" after
moving to it using “Tab”. The default backup mode is set to "Prompt backup
changes when exiting.
8.1.6 Importing and Exporting CSV
"CSV" is the acronym for Comma Separated Value. A CSV file is used for
the digital storage of data structured in a table form, with the information in
the various columns separated using commas. The "Address Manager" can
import a CSV contact file created using MS outlook or some cell phones.
1. "Import from CSV" allows you to import the data from a CSV file in to the
"Address Manager".
287
2. "Export to CSV" allows you to export the data of the "Address Manager"
as a CSV file.
8.1.6.1 Import from CSV
You can import the data from a CSV file in to the "Address Manager", using
this function. You can execute this function, from anywhere in the "address
Manager".
8.1.6.1.1 Executing Import CSV"
To execute "Import from CSV", follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Press "down arrow” to move to "Import from CSV" and press "Enter". Or
press "c.
You can also activate this function by pressing "Alt-i".
8.1.6.1.2 Import from CSV Controls
1. "File name" edit combo box
2. "Confirm" Button
3. "Cancel" Button
4. "Path search" list
You can move among the controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-Tab".
8.1.6.1.3 Importing a CSV file
To import a CSV file, follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to "Import from CSV" and
press "Enter". Or press "C" from the menu. You can activate this function
directly by pressing "Alt-i".
3) You are prompted for the "File name".
288
4) Type the name of the file you want to import. For example, to search for
"address.CSV", type "address" or "address.CSV" in the "File name" edit box.
5) Press "Shift-Tab" to move to "Path Search" list. Navigate to the folder that
contains the CSV file. For example, if the CSV file is located in the download
folder under the flashdisk, press "Enter" on the download folder to open it.
6) After selecting the folder, press "Enter". Or press "Tab” move to "Confirm"
and press "Enter".
7) Import of the CSV file is performed.
If you don't know the file name of the CSV file,
1) Press "Tab" on the "File name".
2) Move to "Path search" list.
3) The "Open File" dialog is displayed. Use normal navigation commands to
navigate to the CSV file and press "Enter".
To cancel this function, press "Tab" to move to "Cancel" and press "Enter".
Or press "Alt-F4.
8.1.6.1.4 Adding the data from the CSV file to the "Address
Manager"
When the CSV file is imported, "Last name: unused 1/xx" is displayed.
Structure appears as below.
1. Field list address/ Add address
1) Unused
2) Field name list of CSV file
2. "Allow fields in first record"
3. "Confirm"
4. "Cancel"
By pressing "Tab" or "Shift-Tab", you can move among the controls.
By pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”, you can move among the items in
"Unused" and "Field name list in the CSV file".
To add the CSV file data to the "Address Manager", follow these steps:
289
1) On "Last name: unused 1/xx", press “up arrow” or “down arrow”. Move to
the field of the CSV file that you want to import to the "Last name" field.
For example, there might be 5 fields like, "Name", "Company name", "title",
"Company address" and "Company zip code" in the CSV file. "Last name:
unused 1/6" is displayed. To import the value of the "Name" field from the
CSV file, press “down arrow” and move to "Name". Then Voice Sense
QWERTY displays "Last name: Name 2/6" on the LCD and Braille display. If
there is no field value from the CSV file to import, leave the field "unused".
If you set "First name" and "Company name", as "unused" you are prompted,
"you must select one or more of first name and company name". You must
select a value from the CSV file for "First name" and/or "Company name".
2) After setting your preferences, press "Tab" to move to other field such as
"Group", "Company", and "Title" etc.
3) Press "Tab", move to "Allow fields in first record". You can change the
setting, by pressing "Space". When you import the CSV file, you can choose
whether the data from the CSV file for each field should be imported using
this option. Some CSV files may contain data that is not equivalent to any of
the fields in the "Address Manager", or you may simply not wish to import
certain pieces of information.
4) Press "Tab", move to "Confirm".
5) Press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button.
6) You are prompted, "Address file already exists. Which do you prefer?"
The default value is "Overwrite". The setting values are "Overwrite" and
"Add". You can either replace the existing file with the data imported from the
CSV file, or you may add it to the existing address list. To change the setting
value, press "Space.
7) You are returned to "Search Address".
8) Press "Enter". The data imported from the CSV file should now appear
among your address records.
To cancel this function, press "Tab” to move to "Confirm" and press "Enter".
Or press "Alt-F4".
290
8.1.6.2 Exporting CSV
You can export the data from the "Address Manager" as a CSV file, using
this function.
8.1.6.2.1 Executing the "Export To CSV" function
To execute the "Export to CSV" function, follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Press “up arrow” or "down arrow” and move to "Export to CSV".
3) Press "Enter". Or press "x".
You can execute this function directly by pressing "Alt-x".
8.1.6.2.2 Structure of the "Export to CSV" dialog
1. "File name" edit combo box
2. "Confirm" Button
3. "Cancel" Button
4. "File storage" list
You can move among the controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-Tab".
8.1.6.2.3 How to save as CSV file
To save as CSV file, follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to "Export to CSV".
3) Press "Enter". Or press "X".
4) You are prompted, "File name".
5) Type a file name for the exported data.
6) Press "Tab", to move to "Confirm".
8) Press "Enter".
The file is saved in the "Flashdisk".
To cancel this function, press "Tab" to move to "Cancel" and press "Enter".
Or press "Alt-F4".
291
8.1.6.2.4 How to change the Save Location
To change the location where the CSV file is saved, follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to "Export to CSV".
3) Press "Enter". Or press "x".
4) "File name" is displayed.
5) Press "Tab", to move to the file list. Use normal file and folder navigation
commands to choose a different location for saving the CSV file.
6) Press "Tab" to move to "Confirm".
7) Press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button. The file is saved in the new location.
To cancel this function, press "Tab" to move to "Cancel" and press "Enter".
Or press "Alt-F4".
8.1.7 Commands in the Records Found List
8.1.7.1 Find again
To search for another name, press "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". The prompt, "Last
name:" is displayed. You can type the new text for which you want to search.
Just as in a new search, you can start the search by pressing "Enter".
8.1.7.2 Opening a home page
If a record has a homepage address or an email address, you can open the
homepage or send an email. Move to the "Home page", "Home e-mail" or
"Company e-mail" field by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. Then, press
"Enter" on "Home page", "Home e-mail" or "Company e-mail".
If you press "Enter" on a "Home page", the Voice Sense QWERTY
automatically opens the Web browser program. If you press "Enter" on a
"Home e-mail" or "Company e-mail", the Voice Sense QWERTY opens the
292
"E-mail" program, so that you can send an email to the selected email
address.
Before you use this command, please make sure that you are connected to
the internet.
8.1.7.3 Editing Addresses
To edit information in a record, find the desired address by using the "Search
Address" function, then move to the field you want to change by using “CtrlLeft arrow” or the “Ctrl-Right arrow”. Then, press “Alt” to open the "menu",
and select "Modify Address". Press "Enter", or you can press "Ctrl-m", to
activate this command directly. You can now enter new information the field.
When you have modified the information, press "Enter". The Voice Sense
QWERTY saves the changes, and you are returned to the first field of the
record.
To save the changes and exit modify mode, move to "Confirm" by pressing
“Tab” or "shift-tab", then press "Enter". To exit from modify mode without
saving the changes, move to "Cancel" by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab" and
press "Enter". You can also exit from "Modify Address" by pressing "Esc" or
"Alt-F4".
8.1.7.4 Deleting Addresses
To delete the record you are currently reading, open the "menu" by pressing
“Alt”, and select "Delete Address". Then, press "Enter" or press "d" from the
"menu". Or, you can press "Del" while viewing the record. You can also
delete more than one record at a time as follows:
1. Select the records to be deleted and use the "Delete" command.
To select the record that you want to delete, press "Space" when the record
is displayed. Selected records can be deleted by pressing the "delete" key.
The records you have selected * symbol to the left of the "last name:" field.
The Voice Sense QWERTY says, "selected". If you cancel a selection by
pressing "Space" on a selected record, the / disappears, and the Voice
Sense QWERTY says, "Canceled selection".
293
2. Select all and delete
To delete all the records in the "Address Manager", press “Alt” to open the
"menu" and choose "Select All". Then, press "Enter". Next, press “Alt” to
open the "menu" again, and then select "Delete Address". Then, press
"Enter". Or, you can press "Ctrl-a" to select all, and press "Del" to delete the
addresses.
8.1.7.5 Printing addresses
This option allows you to print the selected records to a Braille printer or an
ink printer. First, search the records to be printed with the "Search Address"
command, then select the records that you want to print. To select a record,
press "Space" on the record to be printed. To select all records in the
"Address Manager", press "Ctrl-a” or choose "Select All" from the "menu",
and press "Enter".
After selecting the records to be printed, press “Alt” to open the "menu", and
then select "Print Address". Then press "Enter", or press "Ctrl-p" to activate
this function directly from the “Search Address" dialog. The Voice Sense
QWERTY prompts you to select a printer. The default selection is "Printer".
Press "Space" once, and the selection is changed to "Embosser". Press
"Space" again, and "Cancel" is selected. Press "Enter" when the option you
want is displayed.
8.1.7.6 Saving Addresses to a File
You can also save selected records to a file.
To save selected records in a document, press “Alt” to open the "menu",
select "Save addresses As File", then press "Enter". Or, you can press "AltS" from the "Search Address" dialog after selecting the desired records. The
"file save" dialog is displayed and you are asked to enter the file name and
select a file format. After you type the file name, and select one of the
available file formats, press "Enter" on "Confirm", and the selected record(s)
are saved. This dialog is the same as the "Save As" dialog in the Word
processor, except that, here, when you are saving addresses to a file, the
294
default file name is not displayed. Refer to section 5.1.4 to learn about the
"Save As" dialog in the Word processor.
8.1.8 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook
The "Address Manager" can be synchronized with Microsoft Outlook on your
personal computer to help you keep track of your information. For a more
detailed explanation of how to connect the Voice Sense QWERTY to your
computer and use ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center to
synchronize your contacts with Microsoft Outlook, please refer to chapter 19,
"Using ActiveSync".
8.1.9 Hot Keys in the "Address Manager"
1. Move keys for moving from field to field in add address or in the “menu”
Move to the previous field or menu item: Up arrow or up scroll button
Move to the next field or menu item: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to the first field or menu item: Home
Move to the last field or menu item: End
2. Move Keys For Moving From Record To Record in the search result list
Move to a previous field in a record: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next field in a record: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the first field in a record: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last field in a record: Ctrl-End
Move to the previous record: Up arrow
Move to the next record: Down arrow
Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last record: Ctrl-End
Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow
Move to next same field different record: Right arrow
3. Shortcut keys in the “menu”
Add address: i
Modify address: m
295
Delete address: d
Select all: a
Save as a file: t
Print address: p
Backup address list: u
Restore address list: r
Set backup options: e
Set address search fields: o
Import from CSV: c
Export to CSV: x
4. Hot Keys For The Commands
Add address: Ctrl-n
Modify address: Ctrl-m
Delete address: Del
Select all: Ctrl-a
Save as a file: Alt-s
Print address: Ctrl-p
Backup address list: Ctrl-u
Restore address list: Ctrl-r
Set backup options: Ctrl-e
Set address search fields: Ctrl-o
Import from CSV: Alt-i
Export to CSV: Alt-x
5. Miscellaneous hot keys
Cancel: ESC
Exit: Alt-F4
8.2 Schedule Manager
8.2.1 Overview
296
The "Schedule Manager" is a program used to manage important information
about appointments, anniversaries, and events. The Schedule Manager can
also inform you of appointments at a specified time using alarms. You can
start the "Schedule Manager" from the "program" menu, by pressing the up
or down arrows to move to the “Organizer” menu and press “Enter”.
Navigate to “Schedule Manager” using the UP or DOWN arrow, and press
“Enter” to open it. Or, you can press “O”, then "s" from the "program" menu.
You can launch the “Schedule Manager” from anywhere on the unit by
pressing “Windows-S”.
The "Schedule Manager" has two main dialog boxes: "Add Schedule" and
"Search Schedule". In "Add Schedule", you can enter information for a new
appointment. Using "Search Schedule", you can look for information about a
specific appointment stored in the "Schedule Manager", and edit or delete
the schedule information.
8.2.2 Starting "Schedule Manager"
When you press "Enter" on "Schedule Manager", or press "s" from the
"program" menu, the "Search Schedule" dialog box is displayed so you can
quickly search for an appointment. You are prompted for a "Find date:" with
the current date filled in as the default. To add a new appointment or
schedule, press “Alt” to open the menu. Then, select "Add Schedule", then
press "Enter". Or, you can quickly open the "Add Schedule dialog" by
pressing "Ctrl-n" from the "Search Schedule" dialog. As with other programs
on the Voice Sense QWERTY, you can use menus and shortcut keys in the
"Schedule Manager".
8.2.3 Setting time and date
Due to the nature of appointments and schedules, it is very important that
dates and times are entered correctly to ensure that your schedule is
accurate and you are alerted to your appointments at the proper times
through the "Check Today's SCHEDULE" option as well as the alarms that
can be associated with appointments in the "Schedule Manager".
297
As date and time entry is associated with several programs on the Voice
Sense QWERTY, such as the "Wake up Alarm", the "time And Date" option
in the SettingsMenu, and of course the "Schedule Manager", The Voice
Sense QWERTY provides you with a consistent interface for entering time
and date information in these dialog boxes. Before we start talking about
using the "Schedule Manager" we will explain how to enter the date and time.
When you are asked to enter a date and time, you can either type in the date
and time, or select it using shortcut keys, outlined at the end of this section.
When entering time, use "hh mm" format, two digits for the hour, and two
digits for the minute separated by a colon.. For example, use "10 05" to enter
5 minutes past 10. You can enter a date in "mm dd yyyy" format, two digits
for the month, two digits for the day, and four digits for the year, as in "09 01
2004", with slashes separating the day, month, and year.
You may also select the various components of your date and time using
navigation keys:
1. Date setting keys
Move to the next day: Right arrow
Move to the previous day: Left arrow
Move to the next week: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the previous week: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next month: Down arrow
Move to the previous month: Up arrow
Move to the next year: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the previous year: Ctrl-Up arrow
2. Time setting keys
Move to 1 hour after: Down arrow
Move to 1 hour before: Up arrow
Move to 10 minutes after: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to 10 minutes before: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to 1 minute after: Right arrow
Move to 1 minute before: Left arrow
298
8.2.4 Adding a Schedule
To add a new appointment, press “Alt” to open the menu. Select "Add
Schedule", and press "Enter", or press "Ctrl-n" from the "Search Schedule"
dialog. The "Add Schedule" dialog has a set of input fields, a "Confirm"
button, and a "Cancel" button. The input fields are "Start date", "Start time",
"End date", "End time", "Subject", "Location", "Memo", "Alarm time", and "Set
recurrence schedule". You can move among the input fields by pressing
“Tab” or "shift-tab". For the "Subject" and "Memo" fields, you can type text,
and for the "start date", "End date", "start time", "End time" fields, you can
either type in a date/time, or select it using the shortcut keys described
above. If you press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button, the schedule information
is saved. If you press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button, the entry is not saved.
8.2.4.1 Start date
When you start "Add Schedule", the "Start date" edit box is displayed. To
use the date displayed, simply press “Tab” to move to the next field. To enter
a new date, type month/day/year. Press “Tab” to move to the next field. If
you press "Enter" accidentally after filling in this field, you are prompted, "no
subject", then the focus moves to the "Subject" field.
Note: The default "Start date" varies in the following 2 ways:
1. If you have not searched for an appointment, the default start date is
today's date.
2. If you have searched for an appointment on a specific date, the default
start date is the last date you searched. If you search appointments by
subject, the default start date is today's date.
8.2.4.2 Start time
"Start time" is the second field in the "Add Schedule" dialog. By default, this
field shows the current time. If you set the time format as "12 hour" in this
option, the time is displayed in "am/pm" format. Otherwise, the time is
299
displayed in 24 hour format. If you have set the time format to "12 hour"
press "Fn-x" to change between am and pm. After you have entered the time,
press “Tab” to move to the next field. If you press "Enter" accidentally after
entering this field, you are prompted, "no subject", then the focus moves to
the "Subject" field.
8.2.4.3 End date
The "End date" is the third field in the "Add Schedule" dialog. By default, the
date is the same date as you set in the "Start date" field. To use this date,
press “Tab” to move to the next field. To enter a new date, type
month/day/year. Press “Tab” to move to the next field.
8.2.4.4 End time
"End time" is the fourth field in the "Add Schedule" dialog. By default, the end
time is the same time as you set in the "Start time" field. To change the time,
type the time as hhmm. Press “Tab” to move to the next field.
8.2.4.5 Subject
"Subject" is the fifth field. Type the subject of an appointment. If you do not
enter anything in this field, you cannot save the record. If you press "Enter"
after typing in the subject, the record is saved, leaving the "Location" and
"Memo" field empty, and the "Alarm time" field set to its default value ("Time
of appointment"). To move to the next field press “Tab”.
8.2.4.6 Location
In the "Location" field, type location of your appointment. If you press "Enter"
after typing in the location, the record is saved, leaving the "Memo" field
empty, and the "Alarm time" field set to its default value ("Time of
appointment"). To move to the next field, press “Tab”.
300
8.2.4.7 Memo
In the "Memo" field, you can enter detailed information about an appointment.
This is a multi-line edit box, meaning you can type more than one line of text.
You can use most of the editing commands that are used in the "Word
processor". Press "Enter" to create a new line. You can leave this field blank
if you wish. Press “Tab” to move to the next field.
8.2.4.8 Alarm Time
The "Alarm time" function allows you to set the time when you are notified
about an appointment. The alarm is set relative to the appointment time. For
example, you may want the alarm to sound 30 minutes before your
appointment, so that you are not late. The default value for this field is set to
"Time of appointment". This means that the alarm sounds at the same time
as your appointment. You can set the time as when you set the appointment
time. The time can be set anywhere from one minute to forty-seven hours
before the appointment. To set the time with shortcut keys, use the following
commands.
1. Time setting keys
Move to 1 hour after: Down arrow
Move to 1 hour before: Up arrow
Move to 10 minutes after: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to 10 minutes before: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to 1 minute after: Right arrow
Move to 1 minute before: Left arrow
If you attempt to set the time to 0, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays the
message, "Time of appointment". If you do not want to set an alarm when
"Alarm time" is set to "Time of appointment", press “up arrow”. "Alarm off" is
displayed, and the alarm for this appointment is turned off. After setting the
"Alarm time", save this appointment by pressing "Enter", or by pressing “Tab”
to move to the "Confirm" button, and press "Enter". If you have set the
301
"Alarm time", it sounds at the specified time even if the Voice Sense
QWERTY is turned off. To stop the alarm, press "Ctrl".
8.2.4.9 Setting a recurring Schedule
You can set this option when the schedule you are creating recurs
periodically. If you clear this check box, the schedule is set to occur once.
You can check or uncheck this option by pressing "Space". If you have
unchecked this box, press "Enter", or press “Tab” repeatedly to move to the
"Confirm" button and press "Enter" to save the schedule. To set a recurring
schedule, press "Space" then press “Tab” or "Enter" to move to the combo
box where you can set the recurrence pattern. In this combo box, you can
select from "Daily", "Weekly", "Monthly" and "Yearly". We will discuss these
options in more detail in the next section.
8.2.4.9.1 Daily
If you select "Daily", and press “Tab”, the focus moves to "Recurring interval
of day" edit box. Here, you can enter the number of days after which the
appointment recurs. You can type a number between 1 and 999. If you enter
1, the appointment recurs every day, and if you enter 2, it recurs every other
day. When you use this option, be sure the difference between the start and
end date is shorter than the recurring interval value. For example, suppose
that the appointment starts at 09:00, Feb. 1, 2006, and ends at 12:00, Feb. 2,
2006. If you set the recurring interval to 1, you receive an error message,
"The appointment duration should be shorter than the recurring interval".
This is because it is logically impossible that the appointment duration is 27
hours, and the appointment recurs every 24 hours. This rule is applied in the
same way when you set weekly, monthly, or yearly recurring appointments.
If you press “Tab” after setting the recurring interval, the "Set recurrence end
date" check box appears. By default, it's unchecked, which indicates that the
appointment recurs indefinitely. If you check this box by pressing "Space",
and press “Tab”, the focus moves to the edit combo box for entering the end
date. Enter the date on which you want the recurrence to end.
302
8.2.4.9.2 Weekly
Press “Tab” to move to the "Recurring interval" edit box, after you set the
"Recurrence" to weekly. Choose the number of weeks between each
recurrence. You can type a number between 1 and 999. If you set it to 1, the
appointment recurs every week, and if you set it to 2, it recurs every other
week. The restriction on the recurring interval as in "Daily" is applied to
"Weekly". If the recurring interval is one week, the appointment duration
should be shorter than one week. Or you receive the error message, "The
appointment duration should be shorter than the recurring interval". Press
“Tab” and the focus moves to a list box where you can select the day of the
week on which the appointment recurs. You can move between the items in
the list box, by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. To select or unselect the
current item, press "Space". You can make more than one selection, thus
the appointment recurs on more than one day during the week. If you don't
select a day, it is set to the today's week day. Press “Tab”, and the focus
moves to the "Set recurrence end date" check box.
8.2.4.9.3 Monthly
If you press “Tab” after setting the "Recurrence to monthly", the focus moves
to the "Recurring type" combo box. You can set the recurring type as "Date"
or "Day of the week". To move between the two options, use “up arrow” or
“down arrow”. "Date" is used when you want to set an appointment recurring
on the same day of a month, for example, on the 17th of every month, or
every other month. On the other hand, "Day of the week" is used when you
want to set an appointment recurring on the same week and day of the week
of a month, for example, on Wednesday of the second week of every month.
After selecting the "Recurring type", press “Tab” to move to the "Recurring
interval".
In this field, you set after how many months the appointment will recur. You
can type a number between 1 and 999. Press “Tab” and different fields are
shown depending on what you have selected in "Recurring type". If you set
303
the "Recurring type" to "Date", an edit box is shown, where you can type the
day of the month when the appointment recurs. By default the date set in the
"Start date" is shown. You can type a number between 1 and 31. If you press
“Tab” after setting this option, the focus moves to "Set recurrence end date".
8.2.4.9.4 Yearly
If you set the "Recurrence" to "Yearly", press “Tab” to move to the "Recurring
type" combo box. You can select either "date" or "day of the week", and you
can move between them by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. If you set
the "Recurring type" to "Date", you can set the month and the day of the
month when the appointment recurs. If you set it to "Day of the week", you
can set the month, the week, and the day of the week when the appointment
recurs every year. If you press “Tab” after setting "Recurring type", the focus
moves to the "Month for recurrence" combo box. You can select the month
of the year by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. If you press “Tab” here,
the focus moves to different fields, depending on how you have set the
"Recurring type". If you have set the "Recurring type" to "Date", the focus
moves to "Day for recurrence" edit box. You can type a number between 1
and 31. If you press “Tab” the focus moves to the "Set recurrence end date"
check box. If the "Recurring type" is set to "Day of the week", you have to set
"recurring week" and "Day of week for recurrence".
8.2.4.10 Confirm
If you press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button, the appointment is saved, and
the "Add Schedule" dialog is closed.
8.2.4.11 Cancel
If you press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button, the appointment information you
entered is discarded, and you are returned to the "Add Schedule" dialog
where you can create a new appointment. You can also cancel the entry by
pressing "Esc".
304
8.2.5 Search Schedule
"Search schedule" is used for searching Appointments that you have entered
previously. When you start "Schedule Manager", the "Search Schedule"
dialog is opened. You can also open this dialog from the "Add Schedule"
dialog, by pressing “Ctrl-s”. Or you can open the menu by pressing “Alt”, and
press "Enter" on "Search Schedule".
There are two methods for searching an appointment: "searching by subject"
and "searching by date". When "searching by subject", you can find a
schedule using keywords in the subject field. When "searching by date", you
can find schedules according to a specified date. To toggle the search mode,
press “Alt” to open the menu and move to "Toggle Search Mode" and press
"Enter". Or you can execute it by pressing "Ctrl-f" directly. Every time you
press "Ctrl-f", the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Search mode: Date" or
"Search mode: Subject", and the searching mode is toggled.
The last searching mode you used is saved when you exit the Schedule
Manager.
8.2.5.1 Searching by date
This mode searches the schedule using a date you specify. When "Search
Schedule" is executed in this mode, the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Find
date: (current date)".
If you press "Enter" here, the Voice Sense QWERTY searches for
appointments occurring today. To search for another date, you can type the
date in the format "mm/dd/yyyy", or use the "move by date" hotkeys. If you
press "Enter" after entering the date, the appointments occurring on the day
are shown. If there is no appointment on that day, the unit announces,
"There is no schedule registered". If appointments are present, the first
appointment on that day is announced in the form of "date, time, and
subject". If the appointment lasts for more than one day, "continuous
schedule" is announced. If the appointment recurs, "recurring schedule" is
announced. If you scheduled more than one appointment for that day, you
305
can move among the appointments on that day by pressing “up arrow” or
“down arrow”. To move to the first appointment on a day, you can press “FnLeft arrow”, and to move to the last appointment on the day, and if you want
to move to the last appointment on the day, press “Fn-Right arrow”. To move
to the appointments on another day, press “Ctrl-Left arrow” or “Ctrl-Right
arrow”. The previous/next appointment occurring within four months is
displayed. To move to the first appointment stored in the Schedule Manager,
press “Ctrl-Fn-Left arrow”, and to move to the last appointment stored in the
Schedule Manager, press “Ctrl-Fn-Right arrow”. To obtain details
8.2.5.2 Searching by subject
When the Search Schedule" dialog is opened in this mode, the Voice Sense
QWERTY says, "Search subject:" Type in the keywords to search and press
"Enter". All schedules with the keywords are displayed. If you press "Enter"
without typing text in the "Search subject:" edit box, the Voice Sense
QWERTY displays all appointments in your Voice Sense QWERTY.
To move to the next or previous schedule, press “down arrow” or “up arrow”
respectively. Pressing “Fn-Left arrow” moves to the first item in the
appointment list, and pressing “Fn-Right arrow” moves to the last item in the
appointment list.
For recurring appointments and multiple day appointments, the Voice Sense
QWERTY only shows the schedules of the first day if you search the
schedule by subject. For example, if you have an appointment on January 1,
2007 and it recurs the first day of every month, the Voice Sense QWERTY
shows this schedule on January 1, 2007 only when you search by subject.
Press "Enter" on an appointment to read the details. Press "Esc" to return to
the appointment list. TO SEARCH other keywords, press “Tab” to move to
the "Search subject" edit box.
8.2.6 Modify Schedule
You can modify an appointment that you have previously scheduled. Move
to the appointment you want to modify. Open the menu by pressing “Alt” and
306
press "Enter" on "Modify Schedule", or press the shortcut key "m" from the
menu. Or you can press its hot key, "Ctrl-m" from the search results list. If
the appointment is a recurring schedule, a prompt, displaying "Recurrence
appointment. Open type?" appears. Choose whether you want to modify the
recurring schedule or the schedule for a specific day. If you select "This
occurrence", your changes affect the appointment of the day, but the
recurring appointments on other days are not changed. If you select "The
series", your changes affect all the recurrences. If you select "Cancel",
"Modify Schedule" dialog is not opened and you are returned to your last
position. Make your selection by pressing "Space" or "Backspace". Press
"Enter" to open the "Modify Schedule" dialog. This dialog contains the same
controls as in the "Add Schedule" dialog. The only difference is that each
field has the value entered previously. If you have made changes you wish
to save, tab to "Confirm" and press "Enter".
8.2.7 Deleting a Schedule
To delete a schedule, move to the schedule in the search results list. Press
“Alt” to open the menu, and press "Enter" on "Delete Schedule". Or you can
press its hot key, "Del" from the search results list. If the selected schedule is
a recurring schedule, you are prompted, "Recurring appointment. Delete
type?" is displayed. You can choose whether you want to delete the
recurring schedule, or just the appointment for that day. If you select "This
occurrence", only the current appointment is deleted. If you select "The
series", all recurrences of the appointment are deleted. You cannot select
and delete multiple schedules at once. You can delete only the currently
focused appointment.
If you want to completely initialize the Schedule Manager, you can delete all
schedules by opening the menu with “Alt”, move to “Delete All Schedule”,
and press “Enter”. You can also use the hot key “Control-Alt-q” to activate
this option from anywhere in the Schedule Manager. You are prompted,
“Delete all schedules” Yes”. To delete all the appointments in your Schedule
307
Manager, press “Enter”. If you do not want to delete all your appointments,
press “Down arrow” to move to “no” and press “Enter”.
8.2.8 Printing a Schedule
After finding an appointment using the "Search Schedule" dialog, you can
print an appointment using the "Print Schedule" command. Open the menu
by pressing “Alt”, and press "p", or select "Print Schedule" and press "Enter".
Or, from the search results list, press "Ctrl-p". The Voice Sense QWERTY
asks you to specify the beginning date of the appointments to be printed. By
default, the current date is displayed. If you wish, you can specify another
date using the entry and navigation procedures described in 7.3. Press “Tab”
to set the end date of the appointments to be printed. Again, you can enter
or select a different date than what is displayed. Press "Enter" or “Tab”, and
you are asked to select the type of printer to use. "Printer" is the default
setting. Press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to move between "Embosser" and
"Printer". If you have selected the appropriate printer type press "Enter" to
start printing. Please make sure the Voice Sense QWERTY is connected to
the printer and that the printer is ready to receive information. When printing
is complete, the Voice Sense QWERTY returns to the search results list.
8.2.9 Saving Appointments as a File
You can save appointments stored in "Schedule Manager" as a document.
Open the menu by pressing “Alt”, then select "Save Schedule As File", and
press "Enter". Or press "t" from the menu. Or, from the search results list,
press "Alt-s". The Voice Sense QWERTY asks you to specify the beginning
and end dates of the appointments to be saved just as with "Print Schedule".
After setting the beginning and end dates, press "Enter" or “Tab”, and you
are prompted to enter the name and the format of the file to be saved. This
dialog is the same as the "Save As" dialog in the "Word processor".
8.2.10 Backing Up and Restoring Your Appointments
308
8.2.10.1 Backup Schedule
If you perform a hard reset, or your battery dies, all of the data in the
Schedule Manager is lost. Thus, it is very important to create a backup file
each time you change your schedule. To backup your schedule, open the
menu by pressing “Alt”. Then, use the “Up arrow” or “Down arrow”, to locate
"Backup Schedule". Then, press "Enter". You can also press "u" from the
menu. Or, you can press "Ctrl-u" to activate this function directly.
If you already have a backup file, you are prompted, "Backup file already
exists. Backup anyway? Yes". If you have made changes to your schedule,
press "Enter" to create a new backup file. To keep the previous backup file,
press “down arrow”, locate "No", and press "Enter" on it. If you make a
backup file again in the Schedule Manager, a new backup file is created with
the extension DAT, and another file is created with the extension BAK
containing your previous backup file.
8.2.10.2 Restore Schedule
To restore your schedule after a hard reset, press “Alt” to open the menu,
and use the up and down scroll buttons to locate "Restore Schedule". Then,
press "Enter". Or, you can press "r". You can also press "Ctrl-r" to activate
this function directly.
If you activate the "Restore Schedule" function, and you already have an
existing schedule, you are prompted, "Schedule file already exists. Which do
you prefer? Append" or, press “down arrow” to move to "Overwrite". You can
choose to add to or overwrite the current schedule with the backup file. If you
choose to append, and the backup file contains appointments that also exist
in your current file, you will have redundant appointments. If you choose to
overwrite and your current schedule contains appointments the backup file
does not, these appointments are lost. If you don't want to "Append" or
"Overwrite", press “down arrow” once more, locate "Cancel", and press
"Enter" on it.
309
8.2.10.3 Setting Backup Options
You can backup your schedule manually by activating the "Backup
Schedule" function. You can also backup the schedule automatically by
activating the "Set Backup Options" function. To activate the "Set Backup
Options" function, press “Alt” to open the menu. Next press “down arrow” or
“up arrow” repeatedly to locate "Set Backup Options". Then, press "Enter".
Or, from the menu, you can press "e" to jump directly to "Set Backup
Options". You can also activate the "Set Backup Options" function directly by
pressing "Ctrl-e".
The "backup Options" dialog has three controls, "Backup mode" radio button,
a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move among the controls
by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". To move between the radio buttons, you can
press “up arrow”, "Backspace", “down arrow”, or "Space".
The "Backup mode" has three radio buttons: "Always backup changes when
exiting", "Manual backup", and "Prompt backup changes when exiting".
1. If you select the "Always backup changes when exiting", a new backup file
is created automatically if you have modified or added to your schedule.
2. If you select the "Manual backup", a new backup file is not created, even if
there are changes to your schedule. If you select this option, you can only
create a new backup file by using the "Backup Schedule" function.
3. If you select "Prompt backup changes when exiting", you are prompted,
"Backup changes? Yes" if you have modified or added to your schedule. If
you press "Enter" on "Yes", a new backup file is created before exiting the
Schedule Manager. If you press “down arrow” once, and press "Enter" on
"No", you exit the Schedule Manager, without creating a backup file.
You can change the backup mode by pressing "Enter" after focusing on one
of the three radio buttons. Or, press "Tab”, and press "Enter" on "Confirm".
The default backup mode is set to "Prompt backup changes when exiting".
8.2.11 Setting Alarm Options
310
You can open the "Set Alarm Options" dialog by pressing “Ctrl-o”, or by
pressing "Enter" on "Set Alarm Options" in the menu by pressing “Alt” in the
"Schedule Manager". This dialog has a list of alarm option fields, a "Confirm"
button, and a "Cancel" button. Alarm option fields include “Type of echo”,
"Alarm duration", "Alarm repeat interval" and "Repeat". You can move
between these fields by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. You can
access the "Confirm" and "Cancel" buttons by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
8.2.11.1 Alarm Duration
With this option, you can change the duration of the alarm sound. You can
set this option to a value that is between 5 and 600 seconds. The default
value is set to 30 seconds. Press "Enter" to save the changes, and exit from
the dialog. To set the "Alarm repeat interval" in the next field, press “down
arrow”.
8.2.11.2 Alarm Repeat Interval Time
When the alarm goes off, if you do not stop it by pressing "Ctrl", the Voice
Sense QWERTY keeps reminding you of the appointment after a specified
time interval. The "Alarm repeat interval" option allows you to change this
interval. You can set the value anywhere from 1 to 60 minutes, the default
value is set to 5 minutes. To change the value, type a number between 1
and 60. Press "Enter" to save the changes, and exit the dialog. Or, if you
press “Tab”, the Voice Sense QWERTY moves to the "Repeat" edit box.
8.2.11.3 Repetition Times
The alarm sounds for the amount of time for which you set the alarm
duration, then stops. If you have not acknowledged the alarm, after a
specified time interval, the alarm sounds again.
The "Repeat" field allows you to decide how many times the alarm will sound.
You can set the value from 1 time to 10 times; the default value is set to 3.
311
To change the value, type a number between 1 and 10. Press “Tab”, and
press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button to save your settings.
An alarm repeats according to the number of times that you set for this
option and then stops automatically. The Braille display (When connected to
SyncBraille) on the Voice Sense QWERTY also displays the "date" and
"subject" for the alarm.
8.2.11.4 Confirm
By pressing "Enter" on the "Confirm" button, the settings are saved, and the
"Set Alarm Options" dialog is closed.
8.2.11.5 Cancel
If you press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button, or press "Esc" or "Alt-F4", the
default alarm options are restored and the "Set Alarm Options" dialog is
closed.
8.2.12 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook
The "Schedule Manager" can be synchronized with Microsoft Outlook on
your personal computer to help you keep track of your appointments. For a
more detailed explanation of how to connect the Voice Sense QWERTY to
your computer and how to use ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center,
refer to chapter 19.
8.2.13 Hot Keys for the Schedule Manager
1. Add Schedule
Move between fields
Move to the next field: Tab
Move to the previous field: Shift-tab
312
2. Hot keys for the Commands
Search schedule: Ctrl-s
Alarm option: Ctrl-o
Backup schedule: Ctrl-b
Restore schedule: Ctrl-r
Setting backup option: Ctrl-e
Exit: Alt-F4
3. Search schedule
Hot keys for the commands
Add schedule: Ctrl-n
Alarm option: Ctrl-o
Backup schedule: Ctrl-u
Restore schedule: Ctrl-r
Set backup option: Ctrl-e
Toggle search mode: Alt-s
Exit: Alt-F4
4. Move keys in the search result list
1) Move from a appointment to another in the schedule list:
Move to the previous a in the same day: Up arrow
Move to the next appointment in the same day: Down arrow
Move to the first appointment in the same day: Home
Move to the last appointment in the same day: End
2) Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments
registered:
Move to the previous schedule: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next schedule: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the first schedule: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last schedule: Ctrl-End
3) Hot keys for the commands:
Add schedule: Ctrl-n
Modify schedule: Ctrl-m
Delete schedule: Del
Alarm option: Ctrl-o
313
Backup schedule: Ctrl-b
Restore schedule: Ctrl-r
Set backup option: Ctrl-e
Save schedule as file: Alt-s
Print schedule: Ctrl-p
5. Cancel / Exit
1) Cancel: ESC
cancels the current menu or setting like the “esc” key on a personal
computer.
2) Exit: Alt-F4
Exits the schedule manager. cancels any function.
8.3 Database Manager
The "Database Manager" is a program which can be used to create a
database in the form that you specify. You can use the "Database Manager"
to add records and search for data in your records.
To open the “database Manager”, press “Windows” to bring up the “Program”
menu. Navigate to the “Organizer” menu using the UP or DOWN arrow and
press “Enter”, or type “O”. From the “Organizer” menu, navigate to the
“Database Manager” using the UP or DOWN arrow and press “Enter”, or
press “D”. You can launch the “database Manager” from anywhere on the
unit by pressing “Windows-T”.
Database Terminology
A table contains at least one record, and a record consists of at least one
field. You can specify attributes for each of the fields. In other words, a
record is made up of a group of one or more fields, and a table is made up of
one or more records.
When the "Database Manager" is started, it checks whether or not a table
has been created. If no table has been created, a "Table Manager" dialog
appears to take you through the process of creating a new table. If there is at
314
least one table created, the "Search Records" dialog appears and the
"Search" edit box is focused, so that you can search for data. To close the
program while adding or searching a table, press "Alt-F4". Or you can use
the menu. Press “Alt” to open the menu. Move to "Exit" by pressing “up
arrow” or “down arrow” (or up or down scroll button) repeatedly, and press
"Enter". Or you can type "z" from the menu.
The general navigation keys for the ""Database Manager"" are as follows.
1. Moving among controls
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
Move to the next control: Tab
2. Moving in a list box
Move to the previous list item: Up arrow or up scroll button
Move to the next list item: down arrow or down scroll button
3. Changing the selection in a prompt box
Select the next value: down arrow, Space or down scroll button
Select the previous value: Up arrow, Backspace or up scroll button
The menu in the "Database Manager" consists of the following items. You
can open this menu by pressing “Alt”.
1. Table Manager: Create, delete, and modify tables, records, and their fields.
When you start the "Database Manager" for the first time, the "Table
Manager" dialog appears.
2. Add record: Add records to the current table.
3. Search records: Search records in the current table. You can also search
each field in the table.
4. List of records found: Use this menu item to navigate a list of records
found in the table by the previous search. You can delete or modify each
record in the list. If you have not performed a search before you using this
function, the message, "no items", is displayed.
5. Setting backup options: Select the method for backing up the database.
6. Backup database: Backup all database files used in the "Database
Manager".
7. Restore database: Restore the previously backed up database files.
8. Exit: Used to close the "Database Manager".
315
These menu items are explained in detail in the sections below.
8.3.1 Table Manager
Use the "Table Manager" dialog to create, delete, or modify a table. This
dialog contains the following controls.
1. Table name list: Displays the name of created tables, and their order in
the list.
2. Add table button: Use this option, to create a new table.
3. Modify table button: Use this option, to change the name of a table, or
modify the structure of the table, by adding or deleting fields.
4. Delete table button: Use this option, to delete the table that you have
selected in the table name list.
5. Set default table button: Use this option, to set the table that opens by
default when you run the program.
6. Close button: After closing the "Table Manager" dialog, and returns you to
your previous position in the program. When there is no table created, if you
press "Enter" on the "Close" button, the "Database Manager" program is
closed.
Move among these controls by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
8.3.1.1 Add Table
"Add table" is a dialog for creating a new table. This dialog contains "Table
name" edit box, "created fields" list, "Add field" button, "Modify field" button,
"Delete field" button, "Previous field" button, "Next field" button, "Confirm"
button and "Cancel" button. Move among these controls by pressing “Tab” or
"shift-tab".
Suppose you want to create a table called "address book" which contains 4
fields: name, telephone, address, and memo. Create this table as follows.
1) In the "Table Manager" dialog, press “Tab” to move to the "Add table"
button, and press "Enter". Or just press "a" from the dialog.
316
2) The "Add Table" dialog appears, and the "Table name" edit box is focused.
3) Type "address book" and then press “Tab”.
4) The "created fields" list is focused. As you have not yet added fields, "no
items" is displayed in the list. As you add fields to this table, they are added
to this list box.
5) Press “Tab” to move to the "Add field" button, and press "Enter". Or press
the shortcut key, "a".
6) The "Add field" dialog is opened, and the "Field name" edit box is focused.
7) Type "name" and press “Tab”.
8) The "Field type" combo box is focused. Press “down arrow” or “up arrow”
to move to "edit box", and press “Tab”.
9) The "Set primary key" check box is focused. To set the current field as the
primary key, press "Space" to check it.
10) Press “Tab” to move to the "Confirm" button, and press "Enter". Now, the
"name" field has been added to the "address book" table.
To cancel adding the field, press “Tab” once more to move to the "Cancel"
button, and press "Enter". If you have added a new field, you get a message
saying that a new field has been added. The "created fields" list is shown
again. Now, "name" field appears in the list, with the form, "name (edit box,
pri) 1/1". Since only one primary key exists in a table, if you have set a field
as the primary key, the "Set primary key" check box is not shown in the "Add
field" dialog when you add another field.
Add the "telephone", "address", and "memo" fields by repeating steps 5
through 10 above. Note that you may want to set the "Field type" of the
"telephone" field to "number", "address" to "edit box", and "memo" to "multi
line edit box". Once you have added all of the fields you wish to add, press
“Tab” to move to the "Confirm" button, and press "Enter".
To change the name of a created field, move to the field name you want to
change in the "created fields" list. Press "m" or “Tab”, and enter on the
"Modify field" button. "Field name: (selected field name)" is displayed. Type
the new name for the field and press "Enter". Though you can change the
name of a field, it is not possible to change the properties of a field once it is
created.
317
To delete a created field, press “up arrow” or “down arrow” repeatedly in the
"created fields" list to move to the name of the field you want to delete. Press
“Tab” repeatedly to move to "Delete field" button and press enter or press "d",
to activate the shortcut key for the "Delete field" button. You may also press
“Tab” repeatedly to move to the "Delete field" button and press "Enter".
To change the placement of a field in your table, move to the field that you
want to change in the "created fields" list. Press "p" or "n". Or press “Tab”
and enter on the "Previous field" button or "Next field" button to change the
location of the current field.
The "Add Table" dialog is closed, and the "table name" list box is shown
again. The newly created table is added to this list, and "address book 1/1" is
shown in the list. To close the "Table Manager" dialog, press “Tab” to move
to the "Close" button, and press "Enter". Or press "Alt-F4" to close the dialog.
Then, the "Search Records" dialog is opened, and the "name" field, the first
field of the "address book" table, is shown. Here, type the name you want to
search for.
8.3.1.2 Modify Table
"Modify table" is used to modify the name or structure of a created table. It
contains the same controls as in the "Add Table" dialog. To modify a table,
press “Alt” to open the menu, and press "Enter" on "Table Manager". Or
press the hotkey for "Table Manager", "Ctrl-t". When the "Table Manager"
dialog is opened, the "table name" list is focused. Press “up arrow” or “down
arrow” to move to the table that you want to modify, and press "m", the
shortcut key for the "Modify table" button. Or press “Tab” repeatedly to move
to the "Modify table" button, and press "Enter". The "Modify Table" dialog
appears. This table is the same as the "Add Table" dialog. The only
difference is that the "Table name" edit box, and "created fields" list contain
the information already stored in the table. You cannot change the name of a
table.
To add additional fields, press “Tab” to move to "Add field" and press "Enter".
Type the new field name and press "Enter". To delete an already created
field, press “up arrow” or “down arrow” repeatedly in the "created fields" list
318
to move to the name of the field you want to delete. Press “Tab” repeatedly
to move to the "Delete field" button and press enter or press "d", to activate
the shortcut key for the "Delete field" button. You can also press “Tab”
repeatedly to move to the "Delete field" button and press "Enter".
To change the order of a field in your table, move to the field that you want to
change in the "created fields" list. Press "p" or "n". Or press “Tab” and enter
on the "Previous field" button or "Next field" button.
To change the name of a created field, move to the field name you want to
change in the "created fields" list. Press "m" or “Tab”, and enter on the
"Modify field" button. "Field name: (selected filed name)" is displayed. Type
the new name for the field and press "Enter".
Though you can change the name of a field, it is not possible to change the
properties of a created field.
8.3.1.3 Delete table
Use this option to delete a table. To delete a table, Press “Alt” to open the
menu, and press "Enter" on "Table Manager". Or press "Ctrl-t", the hot key
for opening the "Table Manager". When the "Table Manager" dialog is
opened, the "Table name" edit box is focused. In this list box, move to the
name of the table you want to delete by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”
repeatedly, and press "d", the shortcut key for the "Delete table" button. Or
press “Tab” repeatedly to move to the "Delete table" button, and press
"Enter". You are prompted, "Delete table? Yes". To delete press "Enter". To
cancel, press "Space" to select "No", and press "Enter".
8.3.1.4 Set Default Table
When you set a table as the default table, each time the "Database
Manager" is started, this table is displayed and you are placed in the search
dialog. If you have created more than one table and you use one of them
more frequently than the others, it may be convenient for you to set this table
as the default table. If no table is set as the default table, the last table used
is displayed when opening the "Database Manager".
319
To set a table as the default table, press “Alt” to open the menu, and press
"Enter" on table manager. You can also press "Ctrl-t", the hot key for
opening the "Table Manager". The "Table Manager" dialog appears, and the
"table name" list is focused. In this list, press “down arrow” or “up arrow”
repeatedly to move to the name of the table you want to set as the default
table. Then press "s", the shortcut key for the Set default table" option. Or
press “Tab” repeatedly to move to the "Set default table" button and press
"Enter". Or simply press "Enter" on the name of the table in the "table name"
list. The Voice Sense QWERTY announces that the table is set as the
default table, and the "Table Manager" dialog is closed.
8.3.2 Add Record
Use this option to add information to a table that you have created. When
the "Database Manager" is started, the "Search Records" dialog is opened.
To open the "Insert a New Record" dialog, press “Alt” to open the menu, and
press "Enter" on "Insert a New Record". Or press "Ctrl-n" from the dialog.
Think of a record as a collection of information (fields) for an object (record).
Let's consider the "address book" table you created in the previous section.
YOU can add records to this table using the method described below:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu, and press "Enter" on "Insert a New Record".
Or press "Ctrl-n" from the records list.
2) The "name" field, the first field in the "address book" table, is shown. Type
the name of the person for whom you want to create a record, and press
“Tab”.
3) The "telephone" field is focused. Type the person's phone number. Since
this field is a "number" field, a limited set of characters including numbers
and hyphen is available. Enter a number. If you press "Space" instead of “-”
(hyphen), the hyphen is entered.
4) Press “Tab” to move to the "address" field. Type the address.
5) Press “Tab” to move to the "memo" field. Since this field is a "multi edit
box", you can type multiple lines of text. To start a new line, press "Enter".
6) Press “Tab” to move to the "Confirm" button. If you press "Enter", the
record is added to the table. If you do not want to save the record you have
320
created, press “Tab” once more to move to the "Cancel" button, and press
"Enter". Or press "Esc".
If you have added a record, the "name" field is focused again so you can add
another record.
To go back to the "Search Records" dialog, press “Ctrl-s”. To open the
"Table Manager" dialog, press "Ctrl-t". If you open these dialogs while
entering a record, you are asked to save the record. Select "Yes" or "No" by
pressing "Space" or "Backspace", and press "Enter". If you select "Yes", the
record is saved, and if you select "No", it is not saved and the specified
dialog is opened. If you select "Cancel", the dialog is not opened.
8.3.3 Search Records
Once you have added records, you will likely want to access this information
in an efficient manner. To search for information in your records, use the
"Search Records" dialog. To open the "Search Records" dialog, press “Alt”
and press "Enter" on "Search Records". Or press “Ctrl-s”. The "Search
Records" dialog is opened, and the first field of the table is focused. Type the
text that you want to search for.
Using the Address Book example, the focused field is the "name" field. Thus,
type a person's name in the edit box to look up "/her record. If you have
several records under the same name, you may wish to further specify the
record you are looking for. To search for records using content from more
than one field, press “Tab” to move to another field. Type the text to search
for in this field, and press "Enter".
The "List of Records Found", or rather, records that matched your search, is
opened. In the "List of Records Found", each record is shown in the following
form. "(the name of the first field) : (other information in the record) xx/yy".
"yy" is the total number of records found, and "xx" is the order of the current
record in the list. If no record is found, you are informed, "No records found",
and the current field is shown again, so you can type another search queery.
Move through the "List of Records Found" as follows.
1.Move by records
321
Move to the next record: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to the previous record: Up arrow or up scroll button
Move to the last record: Ctrl-End
Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow
Move to next same field different record: Right arrow
Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home
2. Move between the fields in a record
Move to the next field: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the previous field: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the last field: End
Move to the first field: Home
From the "List of Records Found", to search for new text, press “Ctrl-s” to
open the "Search Records" dialog again. Type the new text you want to
search for and press "Enter".
To delete a record, press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to move to the record,
and press "Del" from any of the fields in the record. You are asked if you
really want to delete the record. Select "Yes" or "No" by pressing "Space" or
"Backspace". If you press "Enter" after selecting "Yes", the record is deleted,
and if you select "No", the deletion is canceled.
To search for records in another table, press "Ctrl-t" to open the "Table
Manager" dialog, and press "Enter" on the name of the table you want to
open.
To change the content of a record, select the record by pressing “up arrow”
or “down arrow” repeatedly. And press "Ctrl-m" from any field in the record.
The same dialog as the "Insert a New Record" dialog is opened. To change
the content of a field, move to the field by pressing “Tab”, type the new
content, and press "Enter". To save the modifications, press "Enter" after
typing new content for all the fields you want to change. Or move to the
"Confirm" button by pressing “Tab” repeatedly, and press "Enter". To cancel
modification of the record, press “Tab” once more to move to the "Cancel"
button and press "Enter".
322
8.3.4 List of Records Found
The "List of Records Found" appears when the queery you typed in the
"Search Records" function produces results. While using the "Insert a New
Record" or "Search Records" dialog, to go to the "List of Records Found",
press “Alt” to open the menu, and press "Enter" on "List of Records Found".
Or press "Ctrl-r".
8.3.5 Setting Backup Options
You can backup your database file, manually using the "Backup Database"
function. You may also backup your database file automatically by using the
"Set Backup Options". To activate the "Set Backup Options" function, press
“Alt” to open the menu. Press “down arrow” or “up arrow” repeatedly to move
to "Set Backup Options". Press "Enter". Or, press "e" from the menu to go to
"Set Backup Options". You can also activate the function directly by pressing
"Ctrl-e".
The "Backup Options" dialog has three controls: "Backup mode" radio button,
a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. Move among the controls by
pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". To switch among the radio buttons, press “up
arrow”, "Backspace", “down arrow”, or "Space".
The "Backup mode" has three radio buttons: "Manual backup", "Always
backup changes when exiting", and "prompt to backup changes when
exiting".
1. If you select the "Manual backup", it does not create a new backup file
even if there are changes in the database. In this case, you can only create
a new backup file by using the "Backup Database" menu.
2. If you select the "Always backup changes when exiting", a new backup file
is automatically created on exit if you modify or add to the database.
3. If you select the "Prompt to backup changes when exiting", if you have
modified or added to the database, you are prompted, "Backup changes?
Yes" when you exit the "Database Manager". If you press "Enter" on "Yes", it
automatically creates a new backup file and exits the "Database Manager". If
323
you press “down arrow” once and press "Enter" on "No", it exits without
creating a new backup file.
To change the backup mode, press "Enter" after focusing on one of the three
radio buttons. Or, press "Enter" on "Confirm" after moving to it by pressing
“Tab”. The default backup mode is set to "Prompt to backup changes when
exiting".
8.3.6 Backup Database
If a hard reset is performed, or if your battery dies, all of the data in the
"Database Manager" is lost. Thus, it is very important that you create a
backup file every time you make a change to the Database file. To go to
"Backup Database", open the menu by pressing “Alt”. Use “up arrow” or
“down arrow”, to locate "Backup Database". Press "Enter". You can also
press "u" from the menu to get to "Backup Database". Or, press "Enter-u" to
activate this function directly.
If you already have a backup file, you are prompted, "Backup changes? Yes".
If you have made any changes to your database file, press "Enter" to create
a new backup file. To keep the previous backup file, press "Space", to
navigate to "No", and press "Enter" on it. When you create a backup file in
your "Database Manager", a new backup file with the extension SDF is
saved. The name of the backup file is "UserDatabase.sdf"
8.3.7 Restore Database
To restore the database file after a hard reset, press “Alt” to open the menu,
and use the up and down scroll buttons to locate "Restore Database". Press
"Enter". Or, press "r" from the menu. You can also press “Ctrl-o” to activate
this function directly.
If you activate the "Restore Database" function, and you already have a
database file, you are prompted, "Database file already exists. Restore?
Yes". If you press "Enter", the backup database file is restored to the current
database file. To cancel, press "Space" and press "Enter".
324
8.3.8 Hot Keys for "Database Manager"
Add record: Ctrl-n
Search records: Ctrl-f
Table manager: Ctrl-t
List of records found: Ctrl-r
Set backup options: Ctrl-e
Backup database: Ctrl-u
Restore database: Ctrl-o
1. Movement controls
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
2. Move in a list box
Move to the next list item: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to the previous list item: Up arrow or up scroll button
3. Select answer in the prompt box
Move to the next answer: Space or Down arrow
Move to the previous answer: Backspace or Up arrow
4. Move in the “list of records found”
Move to the next record: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to the previous record: Up arrow or up scroll button
Move to the last record: Ctrl-End
Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home
Move to the next field: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the previous field: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the last field: End
Move to the first field: Home
Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow
Move to next same field different record: Right arrow
325
326
9. Web Tools
The “Web Tools” menu contains programs used for searching for and
downloading content from the World Wide Web. The “Web tools” menu
contains 4 items: “Web Browser”, “Quick Browser”, “Google Search”, and
“RSS Reader”.
To open the “Web Tools” menu, press “Windows” to bring up the main
“Program” menu, navigate to “Web Tools” using the UP or DOWN arrow, and
press “Enter”. Or, you can press “B” from the main menu to quickly jump to
and open the “Web Tools” menu.
The following sections will discuss the programs in the “Web Tools” menu in
detail.
9.1 Web Browser
You can use the "Web Browser" on the Voice Sense QWERTY to read
pages on the web, as well as to read html documents you have saved to disk.
In addition, you can download and read books from places such as Web
Braille, and BookShare. Note: to access these services, you must create an
account with the service provider.
To launch the "Web Browser", open the “Web Tools” menu as described
above, and press "Enter" on the ""Web Browser"" from the "Web Tools"
menu. Or, press "b" from the "Web tools" menu. You can launch the “Web
Browser” from anywhere on the unit by pressing “Windows-B”.
The Voice Sense QWERTY opens the "Web Browser" and connects to the
web page set as the "home page". Note: the "Web Browser" supports SSL
1.0 to 3.0. You can also launch the "Web Browser" by using the global hot
key for opening a web page: Press "Fn-w" from anywhere on the unit. The
Voice Sense QWERTY, opens up a computer edit box into which you can
type in the URL you want to go to. When you have entered the web address:
press "Enter". The "Web Browser" opens, and takes you to the web page
you requested.
9.1.1 File
327
The "File" menu can be accessed by selecting "File" after pressing “Alt”.
"File" appears on the Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille). Press
"Enter" on "File", to open the "File" menu. To move among the menu items,
press the up arrow (“up arrow”) or the down arrow (“down arrow”). The
following is a detailed explanation of the "Web Browser" "File" menu.
9.1.1.1 Open URL
Press “Alt” to open the "Web Browser" menu. Move to "File", and press
"Enter". The first item that is displayed is "Open URL". Press "Enter" to
access the "Open URL" edit box, or press "Ctrl-l" from anywhere in the
Browser. The edit box for entering an address is displayed with the address
of the current page filled in. Type the web address you would like to access
such as "www.google.com", and press "Enter".
When in the edit box, you can view recently accessed web addresses by
pressing the “down arrow”. Move to the address that you want to open using
the up arrow” or the “down arrow”, and press "Enter" on the desired address
to open it.
If the Voice Sense QWERTY cannot connect to the desired web page,
indicated by displaying progress on the Braille display (When connected to
SyncBraille) for an extended period of time, press "Esc" to stop connecting,
and execute "Open URL" again. You can type in the address and try to
connect again, or type a different address to access. You can stop the "Web
Browser" from connecting by pressing "Alt-F4. Sometimes, pages can freeze
due to network or Internet problems.
9.1.1.2 Open
"Open" allows you to open locally stored content in the "Web Browser". To
access "Open", press “Alt” to open the "menu", and press "Enter" on "File".
Go to "Open" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter". Or, you can
press “Ctrl-o” from anywhere in the Browser. The "Open" dialog is displayed.
The "Open dialog" consists of "file list", "File name", "Type", "Confirm" button
and "Cancel" button. You can move among the controls by pressing “Tab” or
328
"shift-tab". When the "Open dialog" is opened, File name" is focused. Type in
a file name, and then press "Enter" or press "Shift-tab" to move to the file list.
Select the desired file name, and press "Enter".
The default folder is "/flashdisk/download". Navigate files and folders as
explained in the "File Manager".
There are three types of files in "Type": "all files", "htm", "html". *** is the
default and means that all types of files are shown in the file list.
At "Type", press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to select the file type.
To check the current path, press "Fn-/(slash)". You can use this command in
the following dialogs: "Save As", "Add To Favorites", and the "Favorites List".
9.1.1.3 Save As
Use "Save As" to save the currently open document or web page as a
different file type or store web content on your Voice Sense QWERTY for
later viewing. This is similar to "Save As" in the word processor.
To execute "Save As", open the "menu" by pressing “Alt”, and press "Enter"
on "File". Move to "Save As" by pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter", or
press "Ctrl-s" while in the Browser. The "Save As" dialog appears. Type in a
new file name, and press "Enter" to save the file using a different name or
format.
In this dialog, you'll find "File name" edit combo box, "Type" combo box,
"Confirm" button, "Cancel" button and "file list". You can move among these
items by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
To edit the file name that is displayed on the Braille display (When
connected to SyncBraille), press the cursor routing key that corresponds with
the text that you want to edit. Please remember that “:” cannot be used in file
names. You have to delete “:” if there is one in your file name.
To select the file name from the existing file name, press "shift-tab" to move
to "file list". The default folder is "/flashdisk/download". To move back a level
in the folder structure, press "Backspace". To enter a selected folder or
select a file, press "Enter" on the folder or file. Press “down arrow” or “up
arrow” To move to the next or previous folder or file.
329
You can move from "File name" to "Type" by pressing “Tab”. The available
file types are htm, html, brl, brf and txt. Use “down arrow” or “up arrow” to
select the file type.
Press “Tab” to move to "Confirm" and press "Enter" to save. Or, press “Tab”
again to move to "Cancel" and press "Enter" to cancel "Save As".
If you do not want to save, you can also press "Esc” or "exit (Alt-F4)".
9.1.1.4 Page Information
"Page Information" displays how many tables, forms, and controls are on the
current page.
To open "Page Information", press “Alt” to open the "menu", and press
"Enter" on "File". Move to "Page Information" by pressing “down arrow” a few
times, and press "Enter". Or, you can press the letter "I".
9.1.1.5 Exit
This command terminates the "Web Browser", and returns the Voice Sense
QWERTY to the "program" menu. You can exit the "Web Browser" by
pressing "Alt-F4", or by selecting "Exit" from the "Web Browser" file menu.
9.1.2 Read
Use the "Read" menu to read the web page by various text elements. To
open the "Read" menu, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "Read" or press r
from the menu.
The "Read" menu contains 3 items:
1. Read From Beginning To Cursor
2. Read From Cursor To End
3. Auto Scroll
You can move among the menus by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”. To
execute an option, press "Enter".
330
9.1.2.1 Read from Beginning to Cursor
This function reads the current page from the beginning to the cursor
location.
To execute this function, press "Enter" on "Read From Beginning To Cursor"
in the "Read" menu. Or, you can press "Alt-g" while in a web page.
To interrupt speech before the Voice Sense QWERTY has finished reading
to the cursor location, press "Ctrl". Your cursor is placed at the location
where you stopped reading.
9.1.2.2 Read from Cursor to End
This function reads the current page from the cursor position to the end of
the page.
To execute it, press "Enter" on "Read From Cursor To End" in the "Read"
menu. Or you can press "FN-Enter" while in a web page.
To interrupt reading before the Voice Sense QWERTY has finished reading
to the end, press "Ctrl". Your cursor is then placed at the position at which
you stopped reading.
9.1.2.3 Auto Scroll
This function scrolls the current page from the cursor to the end of the page
using the Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille).
To execute the "Auto Scroll" function, press "Enter" on "Auto Scroll" in the
"Read" menu. Or, while in a web page, you can turn the auto scroll feature
on and off by pressing the up and down scroll buttons simultaneously. For
faster scrolling, press "Right arrow”. For slower scrolling, press "Left arrow”.
9.1.3 Edit
331
The "Edit" menu is used to select any part of the web page and copy or add
it to the clipboard for use in other applications such as the "Word Processor"
or "E-mail".
To open the "Edit" menu, press “Alt”, and press "Enter" on "Edit" or press "e"
from the menu.
9.1.3.1 Start selection
This command cannot be used on the controls in the web page, but can be
used on the text or in an edit box. This means you cannot set a block when
on links, but you can select text chunks on a web page, or an edit box on a
bulletin board.
To use this command, navigate to the point at which you wish to start
selecting text. Press “Alt” and move to the "Edit" menu by pressing “down
arrow” and press "Enter". Navigate to "Start Selection" and press "Enter".
You can also set the starting point of the block by pressing “Ctrl-b” directly.
9.1.3.2 Copy
Use this command to copy your selection to the clipboard for use in other
applications. To copy the selected section of the web page, press “Alt”, move
to the "Edit" menu by pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter". Move to
"Copy" by pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter". Or you can copy the
selected section by pressing "Ctrl-c" while in a web page.
9.1.3.3 Add to clipboard
Sometimes, you may wish to copy various sections from a web page all at
once, in which case, you will not want your last selection erased each time
you copy a new one. You can use the "Add to clipboard" option to append
each of your selections to the clipboard.
To add a selection to the clipboard, press “Alt”, move to "Edit" menu by
pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter". Press “down arrow” to move to
332
"Add To Clipboard" and press "Enter". Or you can add to the clipboard
directly by pressing "Ctrl-Insert".
9.1.3.4 Copy URL
The "Copy URL" function copies the address of the web page on which you
are currently located to the clipboard.
To copy the address of the web page, press “Alt”, move to the "Edit" menu
by pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter". Press “down arrow” to move to
"Copy URL" and press "Enter". Or you can copy the URL directly by pressing
"Alt-d".
The web address of the page is placed on the clipboard. You can paste it to
a document, or anywhere you can paste text on the Voice Sense QWERTY.
9.1.3.5 Copy Link
The "Copy Link" function allows you to copy a link in the web page on which
you are located. If you tab to a link, and select the "Copy Link" function, the
link is copied to the clipboard.
To copy a link from the web page, press “Alt”, move to the "Edit" menu by
pressing “down arrow” and press "Enter". Press “down arrow” to move to
"Copy Link" and press "Enter". Or you can copy a link directly by pressing
"Alt-l".
9.1.4 Go To
To open the "Go To" menu, press “Alt”, and navigate to "Go To" by pressing
“down arrow”. Press "Enter". The menu items are explained in the following
sections.
9.1.4.1 Go to Home Page
The first page that your "Web Browser" loads when the "Web Browser"
opens is called the "home page". You can set your favorite site as your home
333
page. When your "home page" is set, your "Web Browser" opens the same
"home page" every time you execute it.
The default home page is www.Hims-inc.com. To move to the default home
page from another web page, press “Alt”, and navigate to the "Go To" menu
by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter". The first item in the "Go To"
menu is "Go To Home Page". You can activate "Go To Home Page" by
pressing "Enter", or by pressing "Alt-h" while in the "Web Browser".
9.1.4.2 Go to Previous Page
The previous page is the page shown just before the current page. For
example, when the "Web Browser" is activated, the first page that opens is
the home page. Search for and load the Google web page, www.google.com.
The Voice Sense QWERTY connects to the Google web page. When "Go To
Previous Page" is activated, the Voice Sense QWERTY returns you to the
last position on the previous page (the home page).
To move to the previous page, press “Alt” to open the "menu", and navigate
to the "Go To" menu by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter". Navigate
to "Go To Previous Page" by pressing “down arrow”, and then press "Enter".
Or, you can press "Alt-Left arrow”. This command is not available on the first
page you visit in the "Web Browser", because there is no previous page to
go to.
9.1.4.3 Go to Next Page
When you have opened multiple web pages, you can move back and forth
among the various pages you have visited. For example, when you first open
the "Web Browser", you connect to your home page. Then, you connect to
the Google website, and next, you connect to the Lycos website. In this case,
if you navigate back to Google using the "Go to Previous Page" command,
the next page from the Google website is the Lycos website.
To move to the next page, press “Alt” to open the menu, and navigate to the
"Go To" menu by pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter". Move to "Go To
Next Page" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter", or you can press
334
"Alt" with "Right arrow”. This command is not available on the last page
because there is no page after the last page to move to.
9.1.4.4 Go to Previous Heading
If you activate the "Go To Previous Heading" function, you can go to a
heading that is located above your current location. To execute the "Go To
Previous Heading" function, open the menu by pressing “Alt”, and press
“down arrow” repeatedly to move to the "Go To" menu. Press "Enter" on "Go
To". Then, use “up arrow” or “down arrow” to move to "Go To Previous
Heading", and press "Enter". Or, press "u" from the menu. To activate this
function directly, press "Alt-b or Ctrl-F3" while in a web page.
9.1.4.5 Go to Next Heading
If you activate the "Go To Next Heading" function, you can move forward to
the next heading below your current location. To execute the "Go To Next
Heading" function, open the menu by pressing “Alt”, and press “down arrow”
repeatedly to move to the "Go To" menu. Press "Enter" on "Go To". Then,
use “up arrow” or “down arrow” to move to "Go To Next Heading". Press
"Enter". Or, press "d" from the menu. You can also activate this function
directly, by pressing "Alt-F” or “Ctrl-F4" while in a web page.
9.1.4.6 Go to Previous/Next Text
This item can be used to go to the next or previous chunk of text while
reading a web page.
To execute the "Go To Next Text" function, do the following:
1) Open the menu by pressing “Alt”.
2) Move to "Go To" by pressing “down arrow”.
3) Press "Enter".
4) Press “down arrow” until "Go To Next Text" is displayed. Or, you can
press "a" To move directly to "Go To Next Text".
335
5) Press "Enter".
Or you can activate the "Go To Next Text" function by pressing "Ctrl-F6"
while reading a web page.
To execute "Go To Previous Text", do the following:
1) Open the menu by pressing “Alt”.
2) Move to "Go To" by pressing “down arrow”.
3) Press "Enter".
4) Press “down arrow” until "Go To Previous Text" is displayed. Or, you can
press "b" To move directly to "Go To Previous Text".
5) Press "Enter".
Or, you can activate the "Go To Previous Text" function by pressing "Ctrl-F5"
while reading a web page.
9.1.4.7 Refresh
If a web page opens incorrectly due to a network problem, or you know the
content is updated often, To refresh the current page, press “Alt”, and
navigate to the "Go To" menu by pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter". Go
to "Refresh" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter", or you can press
"Ctrl-r" while in a web page.
9.1.4.8 History
The "History" is the list of the web page addresses (and their titles) that have
been visited either by clicking on a link or by typing in the address directly.
When "History" is executed, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays the titles of
the web pages in the history list.
If you have visited a web page such as www.google.com previously, the
history list on the Voice Sense QWERTY shows you the title of the page as,
"Google".
336
To visit the Google website using the history list, press “Alt” to open the
"menu", and navigate to the "Go To" menu by pressing “down arrow”. Press
"Enter". Go to "History" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter". You
can open the history list directly by pressing "Ctrl-h" while in a web page.
The Voice Sense QWERTY displays the history list. Move to the title of the
website you want to select by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”. If you
want the "History" list to show the web address, instead of the title, you can
press "Fn-i". If you press “down arrow”, the display shows the title again,
rather than the address. After you move to the desired website, press "Enter"
to connect to it.
To delete an item from the history list, select the item and press the "Del".
To delete all the items in the history list, press "Ctrl-a" to select all, and press
"Del".
The maximum number of items in the history list is 300. If the list exceeds
300 items, the oldest item is deleted automatically and the new item is added
to the top of the list.
9.1.4.9 Find
This feature is similar to the "Find" function in the word processor. The "Find
dialog" allows you to find text on the current web page.
To execute the "Find" command, press “Alt” to open the menu, and navigate
to the "Go To" menu by pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter". Go to "Find"
by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter", or you can press "Ctrl-f" while
the "Web Browser" is loaded.
When "Find" is executed, the dialog containing the edit box for entering text
and the search direction appears. As in any other dialog, you can press “Tab”
or "shift-tab" to move from one control to another. Enter the text to search for,
and select the search direction. Then, press "Enter". The Voice Sense
QWERTY finds the text, and moves the cursor position to the location of the
text.
The default search direction is set to "Forward". This means that the Voice
Sense QWERTY searches for the specified text from the current cursor
position to the end of the page. To change the search direction, select
337
"Backward", and press "Enter". The selected search direction remains until
the "Web Browser" is closed, unless you change it.
9.1.4.10 Find Again
The "Find Again" function searches the text again in the direction that you
have selected. To open "Find Again", press “Alt”, and navigate to the "Go
To" menu by pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter". Move to "Find Again" by
pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter". Or, you can press "Ctrl-f", while in a
web page.
"Find Again" finds the text that you have entered in "Find". There is no edit
box in "Find Again". It simply repeats the search you specified in "Find".
9.1.4.11 Links list
This function lists all the links on the current page. To activate it, press “Alt”
and press "Enter" on "Links list" in "Go To" menu. Or execute it directly, by
pressing "Alt-i". The "Links list dialog" appears. In the dialog, find the
following controls: "links list", "Focus link" button, "Activate link" button, and
"Cancel" button. You can move among the controls by pressing “Tab” or
"Shift-Tab". You can navigate the list of links in the "links list", by pressing
“up arrow” or “down arrow”.
To move to the selected page in the "links list", press "Enter" Or move to
"Activate link" button by pressing “Tab” or "Shift-tab" and press "Enter".
To go to the position of the link on the web page from the "links list", move to
"Focus link" button by pressing “Tab”, and press "Enter".
To close the dialog, move to the "Cancel" button, and press "Enter". Or press
"Alt-F4" or press "Esc".
9.1.4.12 Go to Next/Previous Visited Link
This item can be used to go to the next or previous formerly visited link while
reading a web page.
To execute the "Go To Next Visited Link" function, do the following:
338
1) Open the menu by pressing “Alt”.
2) Move to "Go To" by pressing “down arrow”.
3) Press "Enter".
4) Press “down arrow” until "Go To Next Visited Link" is displayed.
5) Press "Enter".
Or you can activate the "Go To Next Visited Link" function by pressing "Alt-v"
while reading a web page.
To execute "Go To Previous Visited Link", do the following:
1) Open the menu by pressing “Alt”.
2) Move to "Go To" by pressing “down arrow”.
3) Press "Enter".
4) Press “down arrow” until "Go To Previous Visited Link" is displayed.
5) Press "Enter".
Or, you can activate the "Go To Previous Visited Link" function by pressing
"Alt-Shift-V" while reading a web page.
9.1.5 Favorites
To open "Favorites", press “Alt”, and move to "Favorites" by pressing “down
arrow”, and press "Enter". If there are websites that you frequently visit, it is
inconvenient to enter the long address each time you want to visit the page.
In such a case, you can add these website addresses to the "Favorites" list.
Then, you can visit the websites by simply selecting the address from the
"Favorites" list.
9.1.5.1 Set Current As Home Page
The "home page" is the website that you connect to automatically when the
"Web Browser" is opened. The user can set any website as the home page.
339
To set the "home page", Navigate to the web page you want to set as the
home page. While the web page is loaded, press “Alt”, and move to
"Favorites" by pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter". "Set Current As Your
Home Page" is displayed, as it is the first item in the "Favorites" menu. Press
"Enter". The current website is saved as your home page automatically, and
the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Saved as home page", and displays the
current web page. You can also press “Ctrl-s” to activate this function while
your desired homepage is loaded.
9.1.5.2 Add to Favorites
You can add the web page you are currently reading to the "Favorites" list.
To add the web page to the "Favorites" list, press “Alt”, and move to
"Favorites" by pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter". Move to "Add To
Favorites" by pressing “down arrow”, and press "Enter". You can activate
"Add To Favorites" by pressing "Alt-a" directly from the page you want to add.
"Add To Favorites" is a dialog that contains the following: the current
favorites list (including the folders and files of your favorites), an edit box for
the web address, confirm, and cancel. You can move among the controls by
pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
When you open "Add To Favorites", the edit box is displayed. In this edit box,
you can type the title of the current web page. The extension name (.URL) is
attached automatically to the title name.
To edit the current title name, press the left-most cursor routing key. The
current title name is displayed on the Braille display (When connected to
SyncBraille). You can press the cursor routing key where you want to edit
the text, and modify it. Make sure that you do not use “:” in the title name.
The favorites list is saved in the "/flashdisk/favorites" folder. This folder is the
default folder. Though you can create sub-folders in the "Favorites" folder,
you cannot change the default folder to another folder at a higher level. To
save your favorite to a different folder, navigate folders and files from the
"Favorites" list using normal navigation keys.
340
9.1.5.3 Favorites List
The user can copy, delete, or rename the title of the sites in the favorites list,
in addition to visiting any web page in the list.
To open the "Favorites" list, press “Alt”, and move to "Favorites" by pressing
“down arrow”. Press "Enter". Move to the "Favorites List" by pressing “down
arrow”, and press "Enter". Or, you can press "Ctrl-l" while in a web page. The
Voice Sense QWERTY displays the Favorites list dialog. This dialog
contains the following: the favorites list, an edit box for the title, a type combo
box, a confirm button, and a cancel button. You can move from one item to
the next by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
When the "Favorites List" is open, an edit box is displayed. The edit box
displays the message, "Name:". You can enter the title of one of your
favorites, and you can open the web page by pressing "Enter"" If there are
no titles that match what you entered, the Voice Sense QWERTY says,
"invalid name" and returns to the edit box. If there is a title in the "Favorites
list", the Voice Sense QWERTY connects to the web page. If you do not
remember the exact title, you can find it from the "Favorites" list, using the
method outlined below.
When the edit box appears, press "shift-tab" To move to the "Favorites list".
The Voice Sense QWERTY displays the "file list". You can move among
folders and files by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
Press "Enter" on the title of the website you want to visit. On this list, folders
are enclosed by quotation marks. Press "Enter" on a folder to open it.
In the favorites list, you can view only the files with the selected file format.
Press “Tab” to move to the "Type" combo box. In the type combo box, there
are two file formats; “*.*” and “url". Press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to select
one. If you select “*.*” then all types of files are shown.
9.1.6 Options
Using the "Options" menu, you can set user agent, and change default
download folder. You can also clear cookies in the "Options" menu.
To execute the "Options" menu,
341
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Move to "Options" by pressing “down arrow”.
3) Press "Enter". Or you can press "Alt-o" while in a web page.
9.1.6.1 Menu Structure and Movement
When you execute the "Options" menu, the following options are available:
1) "User agent" list
2) "Show visited links"
3) "Default download folder"
4) "Clear cookies"
5) "Confirm" button
6) "Cancel" button
By pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”, you can move among the options:
User agent, Show visited links, Default download folder and Clear cookies.
And by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-Tab", you can move among controls.
9.1.6.2 Set User Agent
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Move to "Options", by pressing “down arrow”.
3) Press "Enter". Or you can press "Alt-o" while in a web page.
4) "User agent: Windows CE" is displayed.
5) Using "Space", you can select "Windows XP", "Windows CE" or "Pocket
PC".
6) After selecting your desired value, press "Enter".
When web pages are loaded, the Voice Sense QWERTY uses the version of
the website created for the operating system defined by your user agent.
9.1.6.3 Show visited links
The "Visited link" option allows you to choose whether links you have visited
previously are labeled as such. The default setting is "On”. Toggle this
setting "On" and "Off" by pressing "Space".
342
9.1.6.4 Changing the Default Download Folder
To change the default folder where downloads are saved, follow these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Move to "Options" by pressing “down arrow”.
3) Press "Enter". Or you can press "Alt-o" while in a web page.
4) Pressing “down arrow”, move to "Default download folder"
5) The list of files and folders in the "Flashdisk" is displayed. Navigate among
the drives, files and folders using normal navigation keys. Press "Space" on
the folder in which you wish to save your downloads.
7) Press "Enter".
8) Press "Tab”, to move to the "Confirm" button.
9) Press "Enter".
To cancel the change, press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button. Or press "AltF4".
9.1.6.5 Clear cookies
A cookie contains information which can be read in web applications
whenever the user visits the website. You can clear cookies in the "Options"
menu in Voice Sense QWERTY by following these steps:
1) Press “Alt” to open the menu.
2) Move to "Options", by pressing “down arrow”.
3) Press "Enter". Or you can press "Alt-o" while in a web page.
4) Pressing “down arrow”, move to "Clear cookies"
5) Press "Enter" on "Clear cookies".
6) The unit announces, “Successfully cleared cookies" and cookies are
cleared.
Pressing "Ctrl-d", clears cookies directly from a web page.
To cancel clearing cookies, press "Enter" on the "Cancel" button. Or press
"Alt-F4".
343
9.1.7 Read Page
On the web page, there are links, controls, and other various elements, as
well as text. To read web pages properly, the "Web Browser" should classify
each element, and notify the user with its information.
When reading a web page by moving with “down arrow” or “up arrow”, one
element is displayed on one line. The links and controls are displayed with
their respective symbols so the user can distinguish each element.
9.1.7.1 Moving Among Controls
A control is a link, an edit box, a radio button, or a combo box. These same
controls are found in Windows on a personal computer. Web pages also use
various kinds of controls for user input. Each control has different purposes.
Therefore, the user has to know exactly what type of control is being used.
For example, in an edit box, the user enters a text string. In a combo box
and list box, the user should select one of the items listed in the combo box
or list box. The Voice Sense QWERTY "Web Browser" uses symbols to
identify what type of control is used. To move from one control to another
without reading the text between controls, the Voice Sense QWERTY
provides the following movement commands:
1. Move to the previous control: "Shift-tab".
This command moves to the nearest previous control from the current
position. If there are no more previous controls, the warning sound is heard.
2. Move to the next control: "Tab"
This command moves to the next control from the current position. If there
are no more controls, the warning sound is heard.
When you find controls in web pages, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays
control symbols ahead of the contents of the control. The following is a list of
control symbols.
Control name
Symbol
344
Link
Visited link
Anchor
Edit box
Multi edit box
List Box
Combo box
Radio button select
Radio
button
unselect
Check box check
Check box uncheck
Button
LN
LNV
ANC
EB
MEB
LB
CB
SRB
URB
SCHB
UCHB
BT
1. Link: If you press "Enter" on link, you move to the page that the link is
referencing.
2. Visited link: Alink that you visited previously.
3. Anchor: If you press "Enter" on anchor, you move to the referenced part of
the web page.
4. Edit box: You can start entering the text at the cursor position. After you
finish entering the text, press “down arrow” to move to the next item. If there
is any text in the edit box, it is spoken and displayed on the Braille display
(When connected to SyncBraille).
5. Multi edit box: This is similar to the edit box. It is an edit box that allows
you to enter multiple lines in one edit box. You can start a new line by
pressing "Enter". After you finish entering the text, press “Tab” To move to
the next item.
6. List box, combo box: To change a selection in the combo box, press “AltDown arrow” or “Alt-Up arrow". You can move to the next item by pressing
“down arrow”.
Also it renews a page automatically when you change a selection in a combo
box.
7. Radio button, check box: To select or cancel the selection, press "Enter".
345
8. Button: If you press "Enter" on a button, you move to the referenced page.
9.1.7.2 Moving to a Form Field
A "form" is a page that has all of the controls, except the "link" control. The
edit boxes, buttons, and combo boxes are included in a "form". When you
navigate some web pages, if there are many links, it is very cumbersome to
navigate to a form because you have to push too many “Tab” or "shift-tab"
keys to get to the form fields. In this case, you can use the "move to form
field" function.
1. Move to the previous form field: Ctrl-F1
You can move to the previous form field by pressing this key. If there are no
previous form fields, the Voice Sense QWERTY plays the warning sound.
2. Move to the next form field: Ctrl-F2
You can move to the next form field by pressing this key. If there are no
more form fields, The Voice Sense QWERTY plays the warning sound. If
there are no form fields on a web page, the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "no
control".
9.1.7.3 Table
At the beginning position of the table, the Voice Sense QWERTY shows the
table number, and the number of rows and columns on the table.
For example, there are two large tables (we call these "upper level tables")
on one web page. Each table has 3 sub tables (we call these "lower level
tables") with 3 rows and 2 columns on each. In this case, when the Voice
Sense QWERTY shows the first sub table on the second large table, it
displays "table 2-1 3 rows, 2 columns". At the end of the sub table, the Voice
Sense QWERTY displays "table 2-1".
If the table consists of only 1 row and 1 column, or empty space that has
only border or background, such tables are not considered tables in the
Voice Sense QWERTY.
346
The Voice Sense QWERTY provides a way to move table by table, and cell
by cell, in order for the user to comprehend the structure of the table. To
move cell by cell, the cell position and contents of the cell are displayed.
However, the position information is only announced with speech.
For example, if you have move to a cell that is positioned on the second row
and third column, and the content of the cell is "news", the Voice Sense
QWERTY announces, "row 2 cell 3 news". In this case, "row 2 cell 3" is
announced with speech only, while "news" is displayed in Braille.
If a table is included in the cell, the Voice Sense QWERTY announces "table
cell". If there is not a table in the cell, you hear "empty cell".
In the "table cell", To move to any cell within the lower level table, press
“down arrow” to move to the beginning line of the lower level table.
Moving by cell is only valid in the table. If this command is executed outside
of the table, a warning sound is played.
1. Move to the previous table: Ctrl-F7
Moves to the beginning of the previous table. If there are no previous tables,
the warning sound is played.
2. Move to the next table: Ctrl-F8
Moves to the beginning of the next table. If there are no more tables, the
warning sound is played.
3. Move to the previous cell: Ctrl-Shift-Left arrow
Moves to the previous cell. If the current cell is the first cell, it moves to the
beginning line of the table. If this command is pressed on the beginning line
of the table, the warning sound is played.
4. Move to next cell: Ctrl-Shift-Right arrow
Moves to the next cell. If the current cell is the last cell, it moves to the end
line of the table. If it is pressed on the end line of the table, the warning
sound is played.
5. Move to upper cell: Ctrl-Shift-Up arrow
Moves to the cell in the previous row within the same column. If the current
cell is on the first row, the warning sound is played.
6. Move to lower cell: Ctrl-Shift-Down arrow
Moves to the cell in the next line, within the same column. If the current cell
is on the last row, the warning sound is played.
347
7. Current cell: Ctrl-Shift-C
Announces and displays the content of the current cell again.
8. Move to the previous cell in the upper level table: Ctrl-Left arrow
Moves to the previous cell from the current cell that contains the current
table. If the current table cell is the first cell of the highest level table, it
shows the beginning line of the table. It does not work on the highest level
table.
9. Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Right arrow
Moves to the next cell from the current cell that contains the current table. If
the current table cell is the last cell in the highest level table, it moves to the
end line of the table. It does not work on the highest level table.
10. Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Up arrow
Moves to the previous row, within the same column, to the table cell that
contains current table. If the cell that contains the current table is located on
the first row of the upper level table, the warning sound is played. It does not
work on the highest level table.
11. Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Down arrow
Moves to the next row, within the same column, to the table cell that contains
the current table. If the table cell that contains current table is at the last row
of the upper level table, the warning sound is played. It does not work on the
highest level table.
12. Check the position: Fn-s
Announces the position of the current cell in the table. It shows the position
in both Braille and voice, such as "table 2-3 row 3, cell 4".
9.1.7.4 Move to the Frame
1. Move to the previous frame: Ctrl-F9
Moves to the beginning position of the previous frame. If there are no
previous frames, the warning sound is played.
2. Move to the next frame: Ctrl-F10
Moves to the beginning position of the next frame. If there are no more
frames, the warning sound is played.
348
9.1.7.5 Playback of Streaming Audio Files
While navigating a web page, if you come across a link for a streaming audio
file, you can simply press "Enter" on it. The Media player program is
launched with lists of address inside of the streaming file, and the streaming
audio file on the first address is played. The supported streaming file formats
are "m3u", "pls", "asf", "asx".
For other formats, if you press "Enter" the "Web Browser" program plays the
streaming audio file directly. When you play the streaming audio file in the
"Web Browser", the "Add To Favorites" dialog appears. You can add the
streaming address to the "Favorites list" and the streaming file is saved with
"ASF-WAS at the beginning of the file name. "ASF" denotes that the link is a
streaming audio file.
While you play a streaming audio file in the "Web Browser", if you exit the
"Web Browser" program or you lose the internet connection, the streaming
audio file stops playing.
You can use the following playback commands in the "Web Browser" while
playing a streaming audio file.
1. Play: "play" button on the front panel
2. Stop: "stop" button on the front panel
3. Turn up the volume: Shift-up scroll button
4. Turn down the volume: Shift-down scroll button
Playback of a streaming audio file does not stop if you switch to another
program, unless you press the "stop" button on the front panel after returning
to the "Web Browser".
Note: Real Audio files are not supported in the "Web Browser".
9.1.8 Hot keys in the "Web Browser"
File Menu
349
Open URL: Ctrl-l
Open: Ctrl-o
Save as: Alt-s
Information: Alt-Enter
Exit: Alt-F4
Read Menu
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g
Read from cursor to end: Fn-Enter
Auto scroll: Up scroll button-down scroll button
Edit menu
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Copy: Ctrl-c
Add to clipboard: Ctrl-Insert
Copy URL: Alt-d
Copy link: Alt-l
Go to menu
Go to the home page: Alt-h
Go to the previous page: Alt-Left arrow
Go to the next page: Alt-Right arrow
Go to previous heading: Alt-b or Ctrl-F3
Go to next heading: Alt-f or Ctrl-F4
Go to previous text: Ctrl-F5
Go to next text: Ctrl-F6
Refresh: Ctrl-r
Open the history list: Ctrl-h
Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Fn-i
Find: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Links list: Alt-i
Favorites
Set current as your home page: Ctrl-s
350
Add to favorites: Alt-a
Favorites list: Ctrl-l
Options setting: Alt-o
Clear Cookies: Ctrl-d
Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in the Web Browser
Turn up the volume: Shift-Up arrow
Turn down the volume: Shift-Down arrow
Play: play button of the front panel
Stop: stop button of the front panel
Reading Web Pages
Move between controls
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab
Move to the next control: Tab
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Down arrow
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Up arrow
Moving to the form
Move to the previous form: Ctrl-F1
Move to the next form: Ctrl-F2
Table navigation hot keys
Move to the previous table: Ctrl-F7
Move to the next table: Ctrl-F8
Move to the previous cell: Ctrl-Shift-Left arrow
Move to the next cell: Ctrl-Shift-Right arrow
Move to the upper cell: Ctrl-Shift-Up arrow
Move to the lower cell: Ctrl-Shift-Down arrow
Read current cell: Ctrl-Shift-c
Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Down arrow
351
Check the current position: Fn-s
Move to frame
Move to the previous frame: Ctrl-F9
Move to the next frame: Ctrl-F10
Read the current line: Fn-r
9.1.9 What the "Web Browser" Does Not Support
1. Images are not supported.
2. Any executable files on web sites cannot be executed. It is because the
operating system on the Voice Sense QWERTY is different from the
operating system on a personal computer.
3. A web page using flash can be opened, but the flash content may not be
read.
Some web pages that use JavaScript cannot be opened.
9.2 Quick Browser
The "Quick Browser" is designed to facilitate more efficient loading of basic
websites accessed when doing general web searches, reading RSS feeds,
etc. While it has some limitations in that it cannot stream audio or access
sites with java script, it can load many websites in a fraction of the time of
the original "Web Browser" and thus, is more efficient in many situations. To launch the "Quick Browser", navigate to the "Web Tools" menu using
Up or Down arrow and press "Enter" or just press B from the main menu.
From the "Web Tools" menu, navigate to the "Quick Browser" and press
"Enter" or just type Q. You can launch the "Quick Browser" from anywhere
on the unit by pressing "Windows-Q". 352
9.2.1 File menu
9.2.1.1 Open URL
Press "Alt" to open the "Quick Browser" menu. Move to "File", and press
"Enter". The first item that is displayed is "Open URL". Press "Enter" to
access the "Open URL" edit box, or press "Control-U" from anywhere in the
Browser. The edit box for entering an address is displayed with the address
of the current page filled in. Type the web address you would like to access
such as "www.google.com", and press "Enter". If the Voice Sense QWERTY cannot connect to the desired web page,
indicated by displaying progress on the Braille display for an extended
period of time, press "BackSpace-enter" to stop connecting, and execute
"Open URL" again. You can type in the address and try to connect again,
or type a different address to access. You can stop the "Quick Browser"
from connecting by pressing "Alt F 4" 9.2.1.2 Save As Text
To execute "Save As Text", open the "menu" by pressing "Alt", and press
"Enter" on "File". Move to "Save As Text" by pressing the Down arrow and
press "Enter". The "Save As" dialog appears. You can leave the file name
as is, or type in a new file name, and press "Enter". In this dialog, you'll find "File name" edit combo box, "Confirm" button,
"Cancel" button and "file list". You can move among these items by
pressing "Tab" or "Shift-Tab" To edit the file name that is displayed on the Braille display, press the
cursor routing key that corresponds with the text that you want to edit.
Please remember that the colon cannot be used in file names. You have to
delete a colon if there is one in your file name. To keep the existing file name but change the location, press "Shift-Tab" to
move to "file list". The default folder is "/flashdisk/download". To move back
a level in the folder structure, press "Backspace". To enter a selected folder
353
or select a file, press "Enter" on the folder or file. Press the Up or Down
arrow to move to the next or previous folder or file. Press "Tab" to move to "Confirm" and press "Enter" to save. Or, press "tab"
again to move to "Cancel" and press "Enter" to cancel "Save As". If you do not want to save, you can also press "escape". 9.2.1.3 Save As Web Page
To execute "Save As Web Page", open the "menu" by pressing "Alt", and
press "Enter" on "File". Move to "Save As Web Page" by pressing the
Down arrow and press "Enter". The "Save As" dialog appears. You can
leave the file name as is, or type in a new file name, and press "Enter". This function and dialog are the same as "Save As Text" but this function
allows you to save the web page in its current HTML form to be accessed
locally on your notetaker. 9.2.1.4 Exit
This command terminates the "Quick Browser", and returns the Voice
Sense QWERTY to the "program" menu. You can exit the "Quick Browser"
by pressing "Alt F 4", or by selecting "Exit" from the "Quick Browser" file
menu. 9.2.2 Read menu
The "Read" menu contains 2 items: 1. Read From Beginning To Cursor 2. Read From Cursor To End You can move among the menu items by pressing the Up or Down arrow.
To execute an option, press "Enter". 354
9.2.2.1 Read from Beginning to Cursor
This function reads the current page from the beginning to the cursor
location. To execute this function, press "Enter" on "Read From Beginning To
Cursor" in the "Read" menu. Or, you can press "Alt-G" while in a web page. To interrupt speech before the Voice Sense QWERTY has finished reading
to the cursor location, press "Control". Your cursor is placed at the location
where you stopped reading. 9.2.2.2 Read from Cursor to End
This function reads the current page from the cursor position to the end of
the page. To execute it, press "Enter" on "Read From Cursor To End" in the "Read"
menu. Or you can press "Function-Enter" while in a web page. To interrupt reading before the Voice Sense QWERTY has finished reading
to the end, press "Control". Your cursor is then placed at the position at
which you stopped reading. 9.2.3 Edit
The "Edit" menu is used to select any part of the web page and copy or add
it to the clipboard for use in other applications such as the "Word
Processor" or "E-mail". However, before you can select and copy text, you
must open the web page in a "Select Text Window". To open the "Edit" menu, press "Alt", and press "Enter" on "Edit" or press E
from the menu. If you are looking at the web page in the normal web view, the only option
in this menu is "Open Select Text Window". Press "Enter" on this option to
open the web page in a text view in which you can select and copy text. When the web page appears in text view, the "Edit" menu contains the
following items: "Start Selection", "Copy" and "Add to Clipboard". 355
When you are finished selecting and copying text, press "Escape" to exit
the "Select Text Window" and return to the normal web page view. 9.2.3.1 Start selection
To use this command, when in the "Select Text Window", navigate to the
point at which you wish to start selecting text. Press "Alt" and move to the
"Edit" menu by pressing the Down arrow and press "Enter". Navigate to
"Start Selection" and press "Enter". You can also set the starting point of the block by pressing "Control-B"
directly. 9.2.3.2 Copy
Use this command to copy your selection to the clipboard for use in other
applications. To copy the selected section of the web page, press "Alt",
move to the "Edit" menu by pressing the Down arrow and press "Enter".
Move to "Copy" by pressing the Down arrow and press "Enter". Or you can
copy the selected section by pressing "Control-C while in a web page. 9.2.3.3 Add to clipboard
Sometimes, you may wish to copy various sections from a web page all at
once, in which case, you will not want your last selection erased each time
you copy a new one. You can use the "Add to clipboard" option to append
each of your selections to the clipboard. To add a selection to the clipboard, press "Alt", move to "Edit" menu by
pressing the Down arrow and press "Enter". Press the Down arrow to move
to "Add To Clipboard" and press "Enter". Or you can add to the clipboard
directly by pressing "Control-P" 356
9.2.4 Go To
To open the "Go To" menu, press "Alt", and navigate to "Go To" by
pressing the Down arrow. Press "Enter". The menu items are explained in
the following sections. 9.2.4.1 Go to Home Page
The first page that your "Quick Browser" loads when the "Quick Browser"
opens is called the "home page". You can set your favorite site as your
home page. When your "home page" is set, your "Quick Browser" opens
the same "home page" every time you execute it. The default home page is www.Hims-inc.com. To move to the default home
page from another web page, press "Alt", and navigate to the "Go To"
menu by pressing the Down arrow, and press "Enter". The first item in the
"Go To" menu is "Go To Home Page". You can activate "Go To Home
Page" by pressing "Enter", or by pressing "Alt-H" while in the "Quick
Browser". 9.2.4.2 Go to Previous Page
The previous page is the page shown just before the current page. For
example, when the "Quick Browser" is activated, the first page that opens
is the home page. Search for and load the Google web page,
www.google.com. The Voice Sense QWERTY connects to the Google web
page. When "Go To Previous Page" is activated, the Voice Sense
QWERTY returns you to the last position on the previous page (the home
page). To move to the previous page, press "Alt" to open the "menu", and
navigate to the "Go To" menu by pressing the Down arrow, and press
"Enter". Navigate to "Go To Previous Page" by pressing the Down arrow,
and then press "Enter". Or, you can press "Alt-Left arrow". This command
is not available on the first page you visit in the "Quick Browser", because
there is no previous page to go to. 357
9.2.4.3 Go to Next Page
When you have opened multiple web pages, you can move back and forth
among the various pages you have visited. For example, when you first
open the "Quick Browser", you connect to your home page. Then, you
connect to the Google website, and next, you connect to the Lycos website.
In this case, if you navigate back to Google using the "Go to Previous
Page" command, the next page from the Google website is the Lycos
website. To move to the next page, press "Alt" to open the menu, and navigate to
the "Go To" menu by pressing the Down arrow. Press "Enter". Move to "Go
To Next Page" by pressing the Down arrow, and press "Enter", or you can
press "Alt-Right arrow". This command is not available on the last page
because there is no page after the last page to move to. 9.2.4.4 Go to Previous Heading
If you activate the "Go To Previous Heading" function, you can go to a
heading that is located above your current location. To execute the "Go To
Previous Heading" function, open the menu by pressing "Alt", and press the
Down arrow repeatedly to move to the "Go To" menu. Press "Enter" on "Go
To". Then, use Up or Down arrow to move to "Go To Previous Heading",
and press "Enter". Or, press "U" from the menu. To activate this function
directly, press "Control-F3" while in a web page. 9.2.4.5 Go to Next Heading
If you activate the "Go To Next Heading" function, you can move forward to
the next heading below your current location. To execute the "Go To Next
Heading" function, open the menu by pressing "Alt", and press the Down
arrow repeatedly to move to the "Go To" menu. Press "Enter" on "Go To".
Then, use Up or Down arrow to move to "Go To Next Heading". Press
358
"Enter". Or, press D from the menu. You can also activate this function
directly, by pressing "Control-F 4" while in a web page. 9.2.4.6 Go to Previous/Next Text
This item can be used to go to the next or previous chunk of text while
reading a web page. To execute the "Go To Next Text" function, do the following: 1) Open the menu by pressing "Alt". 2) Move to "Go To" by pressing the Down arrow. 3) Press "Enter". 4) Press the Down arrow until "Go To Next Text" is displayed. Or, you can
press "a" To move directly to "Go To Next Text". 5) Press "Enter". Or you can activate the "Go To Next Text" function by pressing "ControlF6" while reading a web page. to Execute "Go To Previous Text", do the following: 1) Open the menu by pressing "Alt." 2) Move to "Go To" by pressing the Down arrow. 3) Press "Enter". 4) Press the Down arrow until "Go To Previous Text" is displayed. Or, you
can press "B" to move directly to "Go To Previous Text". 5) Press "Enter". Or, you can activate the "Go To Previous Text" function by pressing
"Control-F5" while reading a web page. 359
9.2.4.7 Refresh
If a web page opens incorrectly due to a network problem, or you know the
content is updated often, To refresh the current page, press "Alt", and
navigate to the "Go To" menu by pressing the Down arrow. Press "Enter".
Go to "Refresh" by pressing the Down arrow, and press "Enter", or you can
press "Control-R" while in a web page. 9.2.4.8 History
The "History" is the list of the web page addresses (and their titles) that
have been visited either by clicking on a link or by typing in the address
directly. When "History" is executed, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays
the titles of the web pages in the history list. If you have visited a web page such as www.google.com previously, the
history list on the Voice Sense QWERTY shows you the title of the page as,
"Google". To visit the Google website using the history list, press "Alt" to open the
"menu", and navigate to the "Go To" menu by pressing the Down arrow.
Press "Enter". Go to "History" by pressing the Down arrow, and press
"Enter". You can open the history list directly by pressing "Control-H" while
in a web page. The Voice Sense QWERTY displays the history list. Move to the title of the
website you want to select by pressing the Up or Down arrow. After you
move to the desired website, press "Enter" to connect to it. To delete an item from the history list, select the item and press "Delete". To delete all the items in the history list, press "Control-A" to select all, and
press "Delete". The maximum number of items in the history list is 300. If the list exceeds
300 items, the oldest item is deleted automatically and the new item is
added to the top of the list. 360
9.2.4.9 Find
This feature is similar to the "Find" function in the word processor. The
"Find dialog" allows you to find text on the current web page. To execute the "Find" command, press "Alt" to open the menu, and
navigate to the "Go To" menu by pressing the Down arrow. Press "Enter".
Go to "Find" by pressing the Down arrow, and press "Enter", or you can
press "Control-F" while the "Quick Browser" is loaded. When "Find" is executed, the dialog containing the edit box for entering text
and the search direction appears. As in any other dialog, you can press
"Tab" or "Shift-Tab" to move from one control to another. Enter the text to
search for, and select the search direction. Then, press "Enter". The Voice
Sense QWERTY finds the text, and moves the cursor position to the
location of the text. The default search direction is set to "Forward". This means that the Voice
Sense QWERTY searches for the specified text from the current cursor
position to the end of the page. To change the search direction, select
"Backward", and press "Enter". The selected search direction remains until
the "Quick Browser" is closed, unless you change it. 9.2.4.10 Find Again
The "Find Again" function searches the text again in the direction that you
have selected. To open "Find Again", press "Alt", and navigate to the "Go
To" menu by pressing the Down arrow. Press "Enter". Move to "Find Again"
by pressing the Down arrow. Press "Enter". Or, you can press "F3" while in
a web page. "Find Again" finds the text that you have entered in "Find". There is no edit
box in "Find Again". It simply repeats the search you specified in "Find". 9.2.4.11 RSS Feed List
You can use the "RSS Feed List" command to access the RSS feeds
available on your current web page and add them to your RSS reader. 361
To execute the "RSS Feed List" command press "Alt" to open the menu,
navigate to "Go To" menu using the Down arrow and press "Enter".
Navigate to "RSS Feed List" using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Or,
you can activate the "RSS Feed List" command directly from a web page
using "Control-J". The available RSS feeds appear in a list. Navigate among them using the
Up or Down arrow. If you wish to add an RSS feed to the RSS Reader,
navigate to it and press "Enter". You are prompted, "You are not currently
subscribed to this feed. Would you like to add it to your RSS reader?" The
default is "Yes". To add the feed to your RSS reader, just press "Enter". If
you do not wish to add the feed, press the Down arrow to navigate to "No",
and press "Enter". If you are already subscribed to the feed, you are prompted, "You are
already currently subscribed to this feed", and you are returned to the RSS
Feed List. When you are finished using the RSS feed list, press "Escape" to return to
the web page you were previously viewing. 9.2.5 Favorites
To open "Favorites", press "Alt", and move to "Favorites" by pressing the
Down arrow, and press "Enter". If there are websites that you frequently
visit, it is inconvenient to enter the long address each time you want to visit
the page. In such a case, you can add these website addresses to the
"Favorites" list. Then, you can visit the websites by simply selecting the
address from the "Favorites" list. 9.2.5.1 Set Current As Home Page
The "home page" is the website that you connect to automatically when the
"Quick Browser" is opened. The user can set any website as the home
page. To set the "home page", Navigate to the web page you want to set as the
home page. While the web page is loaded, press "Alt", and move to
362
"Favorites" by pressing the Down arrow. Press "Enter". "Set Current As
Your Home Page" is displayed, as it is the first item in the "Favorites" menu.
Press "Enter". The current website is saved as your home page
automatically, and the Voice Sense QWERTY says, "Saved as home page",
and displays the current web page. You can also press "Alt-s" to activate
this function while your desired home page is loaded. 9.2.5.2 Add to Favorites
You can add the web page you are currently reading to the "Favorites" list.
To add the web page to the "Favorites" list, press "Alt", and move to
"Favorites" by pressing the Down arrow. Press "Enter". Move to "Add To
Favorites" by pressing the Down arrow, and press "Enter". You can activate
"Add To Favorites" by pressing "Alt-A" directly from the page you want to
add. "Add To Favorites" is a dialog that contains the following: the current
favorites list (including the folders and files of your favorites), an edit box for
the web address, confirm, and cancel. You can move among the controls
by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". When you open "Add To Favorites", the edit box is displayed. In this edit
box, you can type the title of the current web page. The extension name
(.URL) is attached automatically to the title name. To edit the current title name, press the left-most cursor routing key. The
current title name is displayed on the Braille display. You can press the
cursor routing key where you want to edit the text, and modify it. Make sure
that you do not use ?: in the title name. The favorites list is saved in the "/flashdisk/favorites" folder. This folder is
the default folder. Though you can create sub-folders in the "Favorites"
folder, you cannot change the default folder to another folder at a higher
level. To save your favorite to a different folder, navigate folders and files
from the "Favorites" list using normal "File" list navigation keys. 363
9.2.5.3 Favorites List
The user can copy, delete, or rename the title of the sites in the favorites
list, in addition to visiting any web page in the list. To open the "Favorites" list, press "Alt", and move to "Favorites" by
pressing the Down arrow. Press "Enter". Move to the "Favorites List" by
pressing the Down arrow, and press "Enter". Or, you can press "Control-T"
while in a web page. The Voice Sense QWERTY displays the Favorites list
dialog. This dialog contains the following: the favorites list, an edit box for
the title, a type combo box, a confirm button, and a cancel button. You can
move from one item to the next by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". When the "Favorites List" is open, an edit box is displayed. The edit box
displays the message, "Name:". You can enter the title of one of your
favorites, and you can open the web page by pressing "Enter"" If there are
no titles that match what you entered, the Voice Sense QWERTY says,
"invalid name" and returns to the edit box. If there is a title in the "Favorites
list", the Voice Sense QWERTY connects to the web page. If you do not
remember the exact title, you can find it from the "Favorites" list, using the
method outlined below. When the edit box appears, press "Shift-Tab" to move to the "Favorites list".
The Voice Sense QWERTY displays the "file list". You can move among
folders and files by pressing Up or Down arrow. Press "Enter" on the title of the website you want to visit. On this list,
folders are enclosed by quotation marks. Press "Enter" on a folder to open
it. In the favorites list, you can view only the files with the selected file format.
Press "Tab" to move to the "Type" combo box. In the type combo box,
there are two file formats; *** and "url". Press Up or Down arrow to select
one. If you select *** then all types of files are shown. 364
9.2.6 Page Navigation
On the web page, there are links, controls, and other various elements, as
well as text. To read web pages properly, the "Web Browser" should
classify each element, and notify the user with its information. When reading a web page by moving with the Up or Down arrow, one
element is displayed on one line. The links and controls are displayed with
their respective symbols so the user can distinguish each element. 9.2.6.1 Moving Among Controls
A control is a link, an edit box, a radio button, or a combo box. These same
controls are found in Windows on a personal computer. Web pages also
use various kinds of controls for user input. Each control has different
purposes. Therefore, the user has to know exactly what type of control is
being used. For example, in an edit box, the user enters a text string. In a
combo box and list box, the user should select one of the items listed in the
combo box or list box. The Voice Sense QWERTY "Web Browser" uses
symbols to identify what type of control is used. To move from one control
to another without reading the text between controls, the Voice Sense
QWERTY provides the following movement commands: 1. Move to the previous control: "Control-Left arrow" This command moves to the nearest previous control from the current
position. If there are no more previous controls, the warning sound is heard. 2. Move to the next control: "Control-Right arrow" This command moves to the next control from the current position. If there
are no more controls, the warning sound is heard. When you find controls in web pages, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays
control symbols ahead of the contents of the control. The following is a list
of control symbols. Control name 365
Symbol Link LN Visited link LNV Anchor ANC Edit box EB Multi edit box MEB List Box LB Combo box CB Radio button select SRB Radio button unselect URB Check box check SCHB Check box uncheck UCHB 366
Button BT 1. Link: If you press "Enter" on link, you move to the page that the link is
referencing. 2. Visited link: Alink that you visited previously. 3. Anchor: If you press "Enter" on anchor, you move to the referenced part
of the web page. 4. Edit box: You can start entering the text at the cursor position. After you
finish entering the text, press the Down arrow to move to the next item. If
there is any text in the edit box, it is spoken and displayed on the Braille
display. 5. Multi edit box: This is similar to the edit box. It is an edit box that allows
you to enter multiple lines in one edit box. You can start a new line by
pressing "Enter". After you finish entering the text, press "Tab" To move to
the next item. 6. List box, combo box: To change a selection in the combo box, press "AltUp arrow" or "Alt-Down arrow". You can move to the next item by pressing
the Down arrow. Also it renews a page automatically when you change a selection in a
combo box. 7. Radio button, check box: To select or cancel the selection, press "Enter". 8. Button: If you press "Enter" on a button, you move to the referenced
page. 9.2.6.2 Moving to a Form Field
A "form" is a page that has all of the controls, except the "link" control. The
edit boxes, buttons, and combo boxes are included in a "form". When you
367
navigate some web pages, if there are many links, it is very cumbersome to
navigate to a form because you have to push too many "tab" or "shift-tab"
keys to get to the form fields. In this case, you can use the "move to form
field" function. 1. Move to the previous form field: Control-F1 You can move to the previous form field by pressing this key. If there are
no previous form fields, the Voice Sense QWERTY plays the warning
sound. 2. Move to the next form field: Control-F2 You can move to the next form field by pressing this key. If there are no
more form fields, The Voice Sense QWERTY plays the warning sound. If
there are no form fields on a web page, the Voice Sense QWERTY says,
"no control". 9.2.7 Hot keys in the "Quick Browser"
File Menu Commands: Open URL: Control-u 1-3-6) Exit: Alt-F 4 Read Menu Commands: Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-G Read from cursor to end: FN-Enter Edit Menu Commands: Open Select Text Window: Control-S Start selection: Control-B Copy: Contol-C 368
Add to clipboard: Control-P Go To Menu Commands: Go to home page: Alt-H Go to the previous page: Alt-Left arrow Go to the next page: Alt-Right arrow Go to previous heading: Control-F3 Go to next heading: Control-F 4 Go to previous text: Control-"F5 Go to next text: Control-F6 Refresh: Control-R Open the history list: Control-H Find: Control-F Find again: F3 Favorites Menu Commands: Set current as your home page: Alt-S Add to favorites: Alt-A Favorites list: Control-T Page Navigation Commands: Move between controls Move to the previous control: Control-Left arrow 369
Move to the next control: Control-Right arrow Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Down arrow Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Up arrow Moving to form fields Move to the previous form field: Control-F1 Move to the next form field: Control-F2 9.2.8 What the "Quick Browser" Does Not Support
1. Images are not supported. 2. Any executable files on websites cannot be executed. This is because
the operating system on the Voice Sense QWERTY is different from the
operating system on a personal computer. 3. A web page using flash can be opened, but the flash content may not be
read. 4. Java script is not supported. Some web pages that use JavaScript
cannot be opened. Others will allow you to open them, but many controls
will not be accessible. 5. You cannot stream audio using the Quick Browser. You must download
files and play them in the Media Player, or use the original Web Browser to
stream the files. 9.3 Google Search
The Google Search program allows you to easily perform a search using
Google’s Internet search service. To Open Google Search, navigate to “Web
Tools” from the Main Menu, or press “B”. From the “Web Tools” menu, move
to “Google Search” and press “Enter”, or press “G” to launch the Google
370
Search program. You can launch “Google Search” from anywhere on the
unit by pressing “Windows-U”.
9.3.1 The Search Dialog
The “Search” dialog contains 4 items: a “Category” combo box, a “Search
Term” edit box, a “Search” button, and a “Close” button. To move through
the items in the dialog, press “Tab” or “Shift-Tab”.
When the Google Search application is launched, you are placed in the
“Search Term” edit box. Type the term you wish to search for, and press
“Enter” to launch the search; or Tab to the “Search” button and press “Enter”.
If you wish to change the category of items being searched for, you can
press “Shift-Tab” to access the “category” combo box.
The “Category” combo box contains 3 items: “All”, “News”, and “Blogger”.
Use the Up and Down arrows to move among the items in the combo box.
When you have chosen your desired category, Tab to the “Search Term” edit
box and follow the steps above to perform your search.
If you wish to exit the program without performing s earch, Tab to the “Close”
button and press “Enter”, or press “Alt-F4”.
9.3.2 The Results Dialog
After a search is performed, you are placed in the “Results” dialog. The
“Results” dialog contains 6 items: the “Category” combo box, the “Search
Term” edit box, the “Title” list, the “Contents” text box, a “Search” button, and
a “close” button. When the Voice Sense has finished searching the term you
entered, you are placed in the “Title” list.
The “Title” is the name of the web result that matches your search term. Use
the Up and Down arrows to navigate the items in the “Title” list. The “Title”
list can contain up to 64 items. To go to the current search result on the web,
simply press “Enter” and the webpage for the current title is opened in the
Web Browser. When you have finished viewing the webpage, press “Alt-F4”
371
to close the Web Browser, and you are returned to your results list in the
Google Search program.
The “Contents” text box contains information about the current title, just as
you would receive if you were performing a search on the Google website.
This information usually includes a quick preview of the content on the web
page, and the URL of the web result.
Use the “Category” combo box, “Search term” edit box, and “Search” button
to launch a new search as described in the previous section.
To exit the Google Search program, Tab to the “Close” button and press
“Enter” or press “Alt-F4”.
9.4 RSS Reader
Really Simple Syndication (RSS" is a method for providing updates to web
based content through what are called "feeds". The Voice Sense "RSS
Reader" allows you to subscribe to RSS feeds and receive updates
whenever the website for the feed you're subscribed to updates its content.
RSS updates may include news articles, blog posts, podcasts, or just
updated content for a website such as promotions or announcements. The
Voice Sense QWERTY's RSS Reader is preloaded with 9 Google news
feeds to get you started. To launch the "Rss Reader", navigate to the "Web Tools" menu using Up or
Down arrow and press"Enter" or just press "B" from the main menu. From
the "Web Tools" menu, navigate to the "RSS Reader" and press "Enter" or
just type "R" You can also launch the "RSS Reader" from anywhere on the
unit by pressing "Windows-N". 9.4.1 RSS Main Window
When the "RSS Reader" is opened, you are placed in the main window of
the application on the "Category" list. The main window consists of the
372
following: "Category" list, "Feeds" list, "Items" list, "Item Description" static
box, "Read Whole Description" button, and, if the item is a podcast, a
"Download" button. You can move among the controls using "Tab" or
"Shift-Tab". As you Tab forward in this window, you move forward a level in the content
structure, and as you ShiftTab, you move back a level in the content
structure. This means that, as you Tab, the content becomes more specific,
and as you Shift-Tab, the content becomes more general. To illustrate this, do the following: 1. Use the Down arrow to navigate to "Google RSS" in the "category" list. 2. Tab once. You are placed on the first feed in the "Google RSS" category,
"Top Stories". 3. Tab again: you are placed on the first item in the "Top Stories" feed. 4. Tab once more, and you are placed on a short description of this item. 5. If you Shift-Tab, you will return first to the Item, then to the Feed, and
finally, back to the "Google RSS" category. Use the Up or Down arrow to navigate the "Category", "Feed" and "Item"
lists. Press "Tab" to access content specific to your chosen category, feed,
or item. Press "Shift-Tab" to move back a level and use Up or Down arrow
to choose a different item, feed, or category. 9.4.2 The File Menu
The "RSS Reader" "File" menu contains 4 items: "Receive New Headlines",
"Import OPML", "Export OPML", and "Exit". 9.4.2.1 Receive New Headlines
The "Receive New Headlines" option updates the selected categories or
feeds. If your cursor is placed on a category and you execute this function,
all feeds in the category are updated. If you are placed on a feed, or are in
the list of items for a given feed, executing this function updates only the
current feed. If you select multiple items in the category or feed list, all of
373
the selected items are updated when you execute "Receive New
Headlines". To activate this function, press "Alt" to open the menu, and press"Enter" on
"File". Then, press "Enter" on "Receive New Headlines". Or, you can
activate this function directly by pressing "Control-R". Voice Sense prompts "Xx/yy processing", where x represents the number
of the feed being processed, and y represents the total number of feeds to
process. Voice Sense continues to update you as each new feed is
processed. When the update is complete, Voice Sense announces,
"Successfully updated y feeds". 9.4.2.2 Import OPML
If you have an RSS reader on another device such as a smartphone or
computer, you may wish to access the same feeds on your Voice Sense
QWERTY. Most RSS readers allow you to export your feed information as
a file with an OPML extension. This file is a directory of the feeds to which
you are subscribed. You can import this directory into the Voice Sense
QWERTY's RSS reader using the "Import OPML" function. The Voice
Sense QWERTY can import OPML 1.0, 1.1, and 2.0 files. To execute the "Import OPML" function, press "Alt" to open the menu, and
press "Enter" on "File". Use the Down arrow to navigate to "Import OPML"
and press "enTer". Or, you can activate this function directly by pressing
"Control-O". When you activate the "Import OPML" function, you are placed in the
"Downloads" folder of the Voice Sense QWERTY in an "Open File" dialog,
similar to the one in the Word Processor. Navigate the files and folders of
your Voice Sense until you locate the file you wish to import and press
"Enter". When you have chosen the OPML file you wish to import, you are placed in
the "Import" dialog. the "Import" dialog contains 4 items: "Category" list,
"Feeds" list, "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move among
the controls using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". 374
The "Category" list contains all the categories available in the OPML you
are importing. The "Feeds" list contains all of the feeds in a chosen
category. You can select as many or as few of the feeds in the OPML for
importing. You may select just one feed in one category, or you may select
all the categories and import everything. Press "Space" on individual
categories or feeds you wish to select. If you want to import everything in
the OPML, you can press "Control-A" in the "Category" list and all feeds in
all categories will be imported. When you have selected all of the items you wish to import, press "Enter"
or Tab to the "Confirm" button and press "Enter". To cancel importing the
OPML, Tab to the "Cancel" button and press "Enter" or press "Escape" or
"Alt F 4". When the import is complete, the new categories will appear in the
"Category" list of the main window, and the feeds you chose to import will
appear in the respective "feed" lists for those categories. 9.4.2.3 Export OPML
You may wish to save the directory of RSS feeds you are subscribed to on
your Voice Sense QWERTY, either for use on another device, or as a
backup in case you should need to restore your subscription information.
You can save your directory of RSS categories and feeds using the "Export
OPML" function. To execute the "Export OPML" function, press "Alt" to open the menu, and
press "Enter" on "File". Use the Down arrow to navigate to "Export OPML"
and press "enTer". Or, you can activate this function directly by pressing
"Control-S". The Export OPML" dialog contains 4 items: "File" list, "File name" edit box,
"Confirm" button, and "Cancel" button. You can move among the controls
using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". You are placed in the "File name" edit box. You can enter your desired file
name and press "Enter" to export the OPML, or Tab to "Confirm" and press
375
"Enter". If you wish to change the location where the file is saved, Shift-Tab
to the "File" list and use normal file management navigation commands to
choose a new location. If you wish to cancel exporting the OPML, Tab to
"Cancel" and press "Enter" or press "Escape" or "Alt F 4". 9.4.2.4 Exit
This command terminates the "RSS Reader" program and returns the
Voice Sense QWERTY to the "program" menu. You can exit "RSS Reader"
by pressing "Alt F 4", or by selecting "Exit" from the "RSS Reader" File
menu. 9.4.3 The Category Menu
The "Category menu only appears when your cursor is placed in the
"Category" list. The "Category" menu contains 3 items: "Insert Category",
"Delete Category", and "Modify Category". These items are discussed in
detail in the following sections. 9.4.3.1 Insert Category
The "Insert Category function allows you to create and name a new
category in the list. by Default, the RSS Reader contains 2 categories:
"Google RSS" and "My Feeds". As stated previously, the "Google RSS"
category contains 9 Google news feeds to get you started using RSS. The
"My Feeds" category is where all new feeds you subscribe to are placed.
Once you have subscribed to a few feeds, you may wish to create
categories of your own choosing, and move feeds into these categories
using the "Feed" menu discussed later in this section. To execute the "Insert Category" function, press "Alt" to open the menu,
and navigate to "Category" and press "Enter". Then, press "Enter" on
"Insert Category". Or, you can press "Control-I" to execute this function
directly from within the "Category" list. The "Insert Category" dialog contains 3 items: "Category Name" edit box,
"Confirm" button, and "Cancel" button. You can move among the controls
using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". 376
To create a new category, type the name in the edit box and press "Enter",
or Tab to the "Confirm" button and press "Enter". To cancel creation of a
new category, Tab to "Cancel" and press "Enter" or press "Escape" or "Alt
F 4". 9.4.3.2 Delete Category
If you wish to remove a category from your RSS directory, you can do this
using the "Delete Category" function. Note: if you delete a category, all the
feeds in that category are removed. If you wish to keep any of the feeds in
the category, please move them to a different category as described later in
this section. To execute the "Delete Category" function, press "Alt" to open the menu,
and navigate to "Category" and press "Enter". Then, navigate to "Delete
Category" using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Or, you can press
"Delete" to execute this function directly from within the "Category" list. When you execute the "Delete Category" function, you are prompted,
"DELETE XXXX Category?" where XXXX represents the category under
your cursor. The default is "Yes". Press "Enter" to delete the current
category. If you do not wish to delete the current category, press the Down
arrow to navigate to "No" and press "Enter". 9.4.3.3 Modify Category
If you wish to rename a category to more appropriately express the feeds
contained in it, you can do this using the "Modify Category" function. To
execute the "Modify Category" function, press "Alt" to open the menu, and
navigate to "Category" and press "Enter". Then, navigate to "Modify
Category" using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Or, you can press
"Control-M" to execute this function directly from within the "Category" list. The "Modify Category" dialog contains 3 items: "Category Name" edit box,
"Confirm" button, and a "Close" button. You can move among the controls
using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". 377
To rename a category type the new name in the edit box, and press "Enter",
or Tab to "Confirm" and press "Enter". If you wish to cancel modifying the
category, Tab to the "Close" button and press "Enter" or press "Escape"
and you are returned to the "Category" list. 9.4.4 The Feed Menu
When you are in a "Feed" list or a list of items in a feed, the "Feed" menu
appears instead of the "Category" menu. The "Feed" menu contains 5
items: "Search for Feeds", "Insert Feed", "Delete Feed", "Modify feed", and
"Move Feed". These items are discussed in detail in the following sections. 9.4.4.1 Search for Feeds
The "Search for Feeds" item allows you to search a specified website for
RSS feeds and add them to your RSS Reader. To execute the "Search for
Feeds" function, press "Alt" to open the menu, and navigate to "Feed"
using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Then, press "Enter" on "Search
for Feeds" Or, you can press "Control-N" to execute this function" directly
from within the "Feed" list. The Search for Feeds" dialog contains 3 items: "Search feed URL"
computer edit box, "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move
among the controls using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". To search a website for available RSS feeds, type the URL of the website
and press "Enter", or Tab to "Confirm" and press "Enter". The Voice Sense
QWERTY displays a list of available feeds for the website you entered. Use
Up or Down arrow to move among the feeds in the list. Press "Enter" on the
feed you wish to add. When you press "Enter" on your desired feed, you are placed in the "Insert
Feed" dialog. the "Insert Feed" dialog contains 5 items: "Feed URL"
computer edit box, "Category" list, "Insert Category" button, "Confirm"
button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move among the controls using
"Tab" or "Shift-Tab". The "Feed URL" edit box displays the URL of the chosen RSS feed. The
"Category" list allows you to choose which category into which to insert the
378
feed. Use the Up or Down arrow to move among the feeds in the list. The
"Insert Category" button lets you create a new category in which to place
the feed. Selecting this button opens the same dialog as described in
section 9.4.3.1. When you have completed setting your preferences for the feed, Tab to the
"Confirm" button and press "Enter". If you wish to cancel the insertion of the
feed, Tab to "Cancel" and press "Enter" or press "Escape" or "Alt F 4". 9.4.4.2 Insert Feed
You can use the "Insert Feed" option if you know the exact URL of the feed
you want to insert. To execute the "Insert Feed" function, press "Alt" to
open the menu, and navigate to "Feed" using the Down arrow and press
"Enter". Then, navigate to "Insert Feed" using the Down arrow and press
"Enter". Or, you can press "Control-I" to execute this function directly from
within the "Feed" list. When you execute the "Insert Feed" function, you are placed in the same
"Insert Feed" dialog as described in the above section. Type the exact URL
of the RSS feed into the computer edit box, choose your category
preferences, and press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button to insert the feed. 9.4.4.3 Delete Feed
If you wish to remove a feed from your RSS Reader, you can do this using
the "Delete Feed" function. To execute the "Delete Feed" function, press
"Alt" to open the menu, and navigate to "Feed" using the Down arrow and
press "Enter". Then, navigate to "Delete Feed" using the Down arrow and
press "Enter". Or, you can press "Delete" to execute this function directly
from within the "Feed" list. When you execute "Delete Feed", you are prompted, "Delete XXXX feed?"
where XXXX is the feed under your cursor. The default is "Yes". Delete the
feed, press "Enter". If you do not wish to delete the feed, press the Down
arrow to navigate to "No" and press "Enter". 379
9.4.4.4 Modify Feed
If you wish to rename a feed to more appropriately express the content for
your reference, or the URL has changed and you need to modify it, you can
do this using the "Modify Feed" function. To execute the "Modify Feed"
function, press "Alt" to open the menu, and navigate to "Feed" and press
"Enter". Then, navigate to "Modify Feed" using the Down arrow and press
"Enter". Or, you can press "Control-M" to execute this function directly from
within the "Feed" list. The "Modify Feed" dialog contains 5 items: "Feed Name" edit box, "Feed
URL" computer edit box, "Category" list, "Confirm" button, and a "Close"
button. You can move among the controls using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". To rename a feed type the new name in the edit box, and press "Enter", or
Tab to "Confirm" and press "Enter". If you need to modify the URL, Tab to
the "Feed URL" computer edit box, and type the new URL. If you want to
change the category in which the feed is located, Tab to the "Category" list
and use Up or Down arrow to choose a different category. When you have
finished setting your preferences, Tab to "Confirm" and press "Enter". If you
wish to cancel modifying the feed, Tab to the "Close" button and press
"Enter" or press "Escape" and you are returned to the "Feed" list. 9.4.4.5 Move Feed
If you wish to change the category in which a feed is located, but do not
need to modify other information for the feed, you can use the "Move Feed"
function. To execute the "Move Feed" function, press "Alt" to open the
menu, and navigate to "Feed" and press "Enter". Then, navigate to "Move
Feed" using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Or, you can press "Alt-V" to
execute this function directly from within the "Feed" list. The "Move Feed" dialog contains 3 items: "Category" list, "Confirm" button,
and a "Cancel" button. You can move among the controls using "Tab" or
"Shift-Tab". 380
If you want to change the category in which the feed is located, Tab to the
"Category" list and use Up or Down arrow to choose a different category.
When you have finished setting your preferences, Tab to "Confirm" and
press "Enter". If you wish to cancel modifying the feed, Tab to the "Cancel"
button and press "Enter" or press "Escape" and you are returned to the
"Feed" list. 9.4.5 Options
The "Options" dialog allows you to set options related to receiving and
displaying feed content. To open the "Options" dialog, press "Alt" to open
the menu. Navigate to "Options" using Up or Down arrow and press "Enter".
Or, you can press Backspace-O to open the "Options" dialog from
anywhere in the RSS Reader. The "Options" dialog contains 4 items: "View Mode" combo box, "Output
Term" combo box, "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button". You can move
among the controls using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". The "View Mode" lets you set how you want items in a feed to be displayed.
The options are "Title" and "Title/Date". Use Up or Down arrow to navigate
among the options. The "Output Term" setting determines the length of time for which the RSS
Reader will update feeds. The options are "none", "2 days", "3 days", "4
days", "5 days", "6 days", and "7 days". If you set the output term to 5 days,
this means when you update your RSS feeds, the RSS Reader will load all
of the items posted in the last 5 days. If you choose "None", the RSS
reader will load all available items when updating feeds regardless of how
long ago they were posted. Use Up or Down arrow to choose the output
term. When you have finished setting your preferences, Tab to "Confirm" and
press "Enter". If you do not wish to save your settings, Tab to "Cancel" and
press "Enter" or press "Escape" or "Alt F 4". 381
9.4.6 Hot Keys in RSS
Receive new Headlines: Control-R Import OPML: Control-O Export OPML: Control-S Download Podcast: Control-D Read whole Description: Control-L Options: Alt-O From Category List: Insert Category: Control-I Delete Category: Delete Modify Category: Control-M From Feed List: Search for Feeds: Control-N Insert Feed: Control-i Delete Feed: Delete Modify Feed: Control-M Move Feed: Alt-V 382
10. Social Networking
A social networking service is an online service, platform, or site that focuses
on building and reflecting of social networks or social relationships among
people who share interests and/or activities.
To access the Social networking services on the Voice Sense QWERTY,
follow these steps:
(1) Make sure The Voice Sense QWERTY has an active Internet connection,
as all of the services in this menu require online access. If you do not
currently have an active Internet connection, you can set 1 up using the
"Setup internet" dialog in the "Utilities" menu. Note: To set up an Internet
connection, you must have Internet access available via a Wi-Fi network or
LAN connection.
(2) Press the short cut key, "c" from the "program" menu. Or use the
navigation keys to move to "social networking" and press "Enter".
10.1 Available Social Networking services
The Social networking menu on the Voice Sense QWERTY provides access
to the following services:
1) Twitter (t)
2) Google talk (g)
3) Msn messenger (n)
4) Sense Chat ©
Accounts for each of the first 3 services should be created via the websites
for each service before attempting to use the service on the Voice Sense
QWERTY.
For Twitter: please visit www.twitter.com.
For Google Talk: go to www.google.com.
For MSN Messenger: visit www.msn.com.
The Sense Chat program allows 2 sense notetaker users to connect their
notetakers via Bluetooth and chat with each other. (see section 10.5)
383
In the "Social Networking" menu, you can navigate among the programs by
pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. To open a program, press "Enter" on
the program or type the shortcut key associated with the program.
10.2 Twitter
"Twitter" is a micro-blogging service that allows you to post messages in real
time to those who follow you and read the posts of friends and family as well
as news sites and other organizations that wish to post information for public
reading.
You can also send and receive replies to your posts, repost tweets from
others, send direct messages to those who follow your tweets, and easily
search and retrieve tweets by adding them to your favorites.
To launch "Twitter", follow these steps:
1) From the main menu, press "c" or navigate to "Social Networking" using
“down arrow” and press "Enter".
2) Press "t" or move to "Twitter" and press "Enter".
You can also launch “Twitter” from anywhere on the unit using “Windows-I”.
10.2.1 Twitter Terminology
1) Tweet: A message posted in "Twitter". It is similar to posting on a
message board. The difference is, there is no space to write a title.
2) Tweets allow you to post 140 characters regardless of language. A tweet
can also contain a URL.
3) Mention: When you repost someone's tweet, reply to someone's tweet, or
mention them in a tweet of your own.
4) Reply: to answer a tweet, by a specific user.
5) Follow: to follow other users. You can subscribe to other user's tweets
thus, you are following them.
6) Followers: other users who follow you, or rather, who subscribe to your
tweets.
7) Unfollow: to stop following another user.
384
8) Retweet: to deliver another user's tweet to your followers by reposting it.
Abbreviated using "RT".
9) Friend: users who follow each other.
10) DM: Direct Message to or from a specific user. You can only send a
"Direct Message" to someone who follows you. "Note: direct messages are
private, thus can only be seen by those who exchange them.
11) Timeline: a list of tweets in the order they were posted.
10.2.2 Accessing "Twitter"
To use the "Twitter" program, you must create a "Twitter" account. Visit the
"Twitter" web site at www.twitter.com to create an account. If you already
have a "Twitter" account, you can use the "Twitter" program after logging in
To use "Twitter", the Voice Sense QWERTY needs to be connected to the
Internet. Please be sure you have an active Internet connection before
starting Twitter.
10.2.2.1 Sign In
When you launch "Twitter", the "Sign In" dialog appears. Move to the next
control by pressing "Tab" or to the previous control by pressing "Shift-Tab".
The "Sign In" dialog consists of the following:
1) ID: a computer edit box, for typing a "Twitter" account Id.
2) Password: a computer edit box, for typing your "Twitter" password.
3) Automatically set the time from the Internet: a check box, to set whether
the Voice Sense QWERTY Time is synchronized to an Internet Time Server.
The default is "checked".
4) Remember me: a check box, to choose whether you save your "Id". The
default is "Uncheck".
5) Save password: a check box, to choose whether you save your
"password". The default is "Unchecked".
385
6) Auto Sign In: a check box, to choose whether you automatically sign in to
"Twitter" when the program is launched. The default is "Unchecked". Note: to
use the Auto Sign In function, "Remember me" and "Save Password" check
boxes must be checked.
7) Sign In: button, to log in to Twitter
8) Cancel: button, to cancel log in and exit the "Twitter" program.
To sign into Twitter:
1) When the "Sign In" dialog appears you are placed in the "ID" computer
edit box. Type your Twitter "Id".
2) Press "Tab" to move to the "Password" computer edit box. Type your
Twitter password. Again, you must use computer Braille.
3) To save "Id" and "password", press "Space" to check both the "Remember
me" check box and "Save password" check box.
4) To automatically sign in to "Twitter", when the program opens, press
"Space" to "check" the "Auto Sign In" check box.
5) Press "Enter". Or move to the "Sign In" button using "Tab", and press
"Enter"
6) Voice Sense QWERTY displays, "Connecting" and tries to sign in to
"Twitter". If sign-in is successful, "Refreshing Home Timeline" is displayed. In
a couple of seconds, the list of tweets in your home timeline is displayed. If
the Voice Sense QWERTY is not connected to the Internet, you are
prompted, "Please check your internet connection" and you are placed back
in the "Id" computer edit box.
10.2.2.2 Sign out and Exit
"Sign Out" allows you to sign out of the current Twitter account without
closing the program. After you sign out, you are returned to the "Sign in"
dialog. Press the hot key, "Ctrl-g" to sign out of the current Twitter account,
or press "Enter" on the "Sign out" option located under the "File" menu.
To exit the "Twitter" program, press "Alt-F4" or press "Enter" on the "Exit"
option located under the "File" menu.
386
10.2.3 Main "Twitter" dialog
If sign-in is successful, you are placed in the main "Twitter" dialog. The main
"Twitter" dialog consists of 10 controls. Move among the controls using "Tab"
or "Shift-tab".
The main "Twitter" dialog contains the following items:
1) Timeline: or list of tweets by those you follow in the order they were
posted.
The Timeline displays "User: Tweet" as follows.
himsintl: Holiday greetings from HIMS International.
In the case of a Mention, the tweet is displayed as "Sender ID: @ receiver Id,
Tweet" as follows.
Kimjk:@himsintl Greetings from HIMS International”.
A "Retweet", is displayed as "Retweeter Id: RT @ original writer Id: Tweet"
as follows.
Bill:RT:@robin: Happy birthday!!.
Use the following navigation keys in the Timeline.
Move to the next tweet: down arrow
Move to the previous tweet: up arrow
Move to the first tweet in the current list: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last tweet in the current list: Ctrl-End
Move up 32 tweets: Page up
Move down 32 tweets: Page down
2) Time: Displays the date and time of the focused tweet.
For example, "Friday, January 1, 2011, 3:00 pm"
3) Next list: Pressing "Enter" on this button loads the next group of 32 tweets.
You can also press the hot key, "Ctrl-n" to load the next list.
387
4) Refresh button: Press "Enter" on this button to refresh the Timeline to
reflect any new tweets posted since you opened "Twitter", or performed your
last refresh. You can also refresh your timeline by pressing "Ctrl-r".
5) Tweet button: This button opens the "Tweet" dialog, and places you in the
edit box where you can write a tweet. You can also open the "Tweet" dialog
by pressing "Ctrl-t".
6) Reply button: Use this button to reply to the focused tweet. You can open
the "Reply" dialog by pressing "Ctrl-y".
7) Remove button: Press "Enter" on this button when focused on one of your
own tweets to delete a tweet that you posted. You can also remove the tweet
by pressing "Del". This button appears, only when one of your own tweets is
focused. When another user's tweet is focused, this button does not appear.
8) Retweet button: Use this button to repost another user's tweet. You can
retweet another tweet by pressing "Ctrl-e". The "Retweet" button does not
appear when one of your own tweets is focused.
9) Add to Favorite button: Add the focused tweet to your "Favorites" list. You
can also add the tweet to your favorites by pressing "Ctrl-v".
10) Tweet Information: Use this button to view detailed information for the
focused tweet. You can also view tweet information by pressing "Alt-i".
10.2.4 Timeline
The Twitter program on the Sense notetakers allows you to access a
Variety of Timelines. In the main "Twitter" dialog, the Timeline displays
tweets according to the Timeline you have chosen. You can use hot keys to
quickly bring up the Timeline you desire, whether it is your home timeline,
all tweets that mention you, or the timeline for a specific user. 10.2.4.1 Available Timelines
1) Home Timeline: Your "Home Timeline" is displayed when you sign in to
"Twitter". All tweets by those you follow are posted here. The hot key to access your
"Home Timeline" is "Control-H" from anywhere in "Twitter". 388
2) User Time line: This displays only the tweets posted by a specified user. Use the hot key "Control-U" to access the user timeline. After pressing the
hot key, "Control-U", an edit box appears in which to type the name of the
user whose timeline you want to access. Press "Enter" to refresh that
user's timeline. 3) Current User Timeline: Displays timeline for the user of the currently
focused tweet. The hot key is "Alt-U". 4) Mention Timeline: Displays Tweets that mention you, either in reply,
retweet, or because another user simply mentioned you in his or her tweet.
The hot key is "Control-M". 5) Retweet Of Me: Displays tweets you have posted which have been
reposted by your followers. The hot key is "Alt-O". 6) List Timeline: Use this function to view tweets from a list you have
created or a list you follow. When you execute this function, you are
presented with a list of available lists from which you can choose. The hot
key is "Alt-P". 7) Favorite Timeline: displays the tweets you have saved as favorites. The
hot key is "Control-L". You can also access the various timelines from the "Timeline" menu in the
"Twitter" program menu. 10.2.4.2. Refresh
Refresh is a function to renew the list of tweets in the current timeline. When
you activate this command, Voice Sense QWERTY loads any new tweets
posted since you opened Twitter or last refreshed the timeline. The tweets
are arranged in chronological order from newest to oldest.
You can refresh a timeline by pressing the hot key "Ctrl-r". Or Press "Tab"
from the main "Twitter" dialog to move to the "Refresh" button and press
"Enter".
10.2.4.3 Load Next list
389
Use this function to load the next list of 32 tweets. Each time you activate the
"Next List" command, the next 32 tweets are added to the current list. The
list continues to accumulate until you perform a refresh.
To load the "Next List", use the hot key, "Ctrl-n", or tab to the "Next List"
button and press "Enter".
10.2.5. Managing "Tweets"
10.2.5.1 Tweet
This command allows you to post a message to the "Twitter" server so that
your followers can access it next time they log in. To open the "Tweet" dialog, press the hot key, "Control-T" from the main
"Twitter" dialog, or move to the "Tweet" button using "Tab" and press
"Enter". Or, you can open the menu and select "Tweet" from the "Tweets"
menu. The "Tweet" dialog consists of 5 controls. Move among the controls by
pressing "Tab (F3 or Space-4-5)" or "Shift-tab (Space-F3 or Space-1-2)". 1) Tweet? : An edit box in which to write a tweet. 2) Characters: A status bar displaying the current number of characters
used and maximum characters. For example, "Characters: 0/140T". 3) Add ID: A dialog with a list of those you follow from which you can
choose an ID to mention in your tweet. 4) Tweet: A button used to post the tweet. 5) Cancel: button used to cancel the posting of a tweet. To post a tweet, when the "Tweet" dialog is opened, type the message you
want to post, and press "Enter", or tab to the "Tweet" button and press
"Enter". Your time line is then refreshed, and you are returned to the list of
tweets in your home timeline.
10.2.5.2 Remove Tweet
390
If you post a tweet that contains mistakes, or about which you change your
mind on posting, you can remove it. To do this, navigate to the tweet you
wish to remove and press "Del" or tab to the "Remove" button and press
"Enter". You are asked if you are sure you want to remove the tweet. Press
"Enter" to continue with the removal. To cancel removing the tweet, press
"Space" to change the button to "No" and press "Enter".
10.2.5.3 Retweet
"Retweet" is used to repost a tweet you have received so that those who
follow you can see it. You may wish to repost a tweet containing an
important notification, or something fun you wish to share with others. To retweet a post, locate the post you want to retweet, and press "ControlE". You are presented with a list of 3 choices: "Retweet", "Quote Tweet",
and "Cancel". If you simply want to repost another's tweet, press "Enter" on
"Retweet". If you want to quote another's tweet in your own post, press
"Enter" on "Quote Tweet". If you want to cancel retweeting, press "Enter"
on "Cancel". If the retweet is successful, the unit announces Tweet completed" and you
are returned to your timeline. 10.2.5.4 Mention
"Mention" is a tweet in which another user is mentioned, either because you
are retweeting one of his or her posts, replying to him or her, or because
you've simply chosen to mention the user in a tweet you are posting. To
mention a specific user in one of your tweets, use an at-sign in front of the
user ID when typing it in your tweet.
The below examples show tweets containing mentions.
Example 1: @Robin Hello, teacher, good to see you on Twitter.
Example 2: @Bill and @Robin will be featured on the technology show this
evening".
391
Example addresses a specific user. Example 2 mentions 2 specific users
and identifies their inclusion on an upcoming technology show.
10.2.5.5 Reply
A "Reply" is simply a reply to a posted tweet. To reply to a tweet, navigate to
the tweet to which you want to reply, and press "Control -y" or tab to the
"Reply" button and press "Enter".
Or, from the menu, select "Reply" in the "Tweets" menu.
The "Reply" dialog contains the same 4 controls as does the "Tweet" dialog.
Move among the controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
When the "Reply" dialog opens, you are placed in an edit box in which to
enter the reply post. The user ID of the person you are replying to is already
filled in with an at-sign preceding it. When you finish typing your reply, press
"Enter", or tab to the "Tweet" button and press "Enter". If the reply is
successful, "Tweet completed" is announced and displayed.
10.2.5.6 Tweet Information
The "Tweet Information" dialog provides information about the current
tweet. If the tweet contains a link, you can open the link in the "Web
Browser". You can also follow the user of the tweet, and view ID's and
hashtags included in the tweet. You can also use the "Tweet Information"
dialog to copy the content of a tweet. To open the "Tweet Information" dialog, press "Enter" on the desired tweet. The "Tweet Information" dialog consists of 6 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab". 1) Content: contains the content of the posted message. 2) URL: A list containing the various URL's included in a tweet. Using
"Space-4" or "Space-1", select the URL you want to open and press "Enter".
The "Web Browser" is automatically launched and you are taken to the web
address of the URL. 392
3) A list of hashtags included in the tweet. 4) A list of user ID's mentioned in the tweet. 5) User Timeline button for viewing the timeline of the ID on which your
cursor is placed in the ID tab. 6) Close: A button to close the "Tweet Information" dialog and return to the
Timeline. You can also use "F 4" or "Space-e" To close the dialog. Use the following hot keys in the "Content" box.
1) Start selection: Ctrl-b
2) Select all: Ctrl-a
3) Copy: Ctrl-c
10.2.5.7 Add to Favorites
"Add to Favorites" is a function to add a specific tweet to your "Favorite List".
You can later access your favorite tweets quickly by bringing up the "Favorite
list".
To add a tweet to your favorites, navigate to the tweet you want to add, and
press “Control-v", or tab to "Add Favorite" and press "Enter". You can also
execute this command from the "Tweets" menu. If the addition is successful,
the unit displays, "Completed" and you are returned to your timeline.
10.2.5.8 Favorite List
You can view your favorite tweets by opening the "Favorite list" dialog. To
open the "Favorite List" dialog, press "Ctrl-l" or, from the menu, select
"Favorite List" from the "Tweets" menu. The "Favorite List" dialog contains 4
controls. Move among the controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) Favorite list: list of tweets you have added to the "Favorite List" from
newest to oldest.
393
2) Next list: Used to access the next 32 favorites in the list. Press "Ctrl-n" or
"Enter" on the "Next List" button.
3) Remove: A button to delete the focused favorite. You can also press "Del"
to delete the favorite.
4) Close: Closes the "Favorite List" dialog and returns you to your previous
position. You can also use "Esc" to close the "Favorite List..
10.2.6. Managing Followers and following
10.2.6.1 Follow User
This command is used to start following the tweets of another user. To open
the "Follow User" dialog, press "Alt-a". Or you can activate "Follow User"
from the "Follow" menu.
The "Follow User" dialog consists of 3 controls. Move among the controls by
pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) Follow User id?: An edit box in which to enter the username of the person
or organization you wish to follow.
2) Confirm: A button to confirm or execute following the user.
3) Cancel: A button to cancel following the user.
When the "Follow User" dialog is opened, type the Twitter ID of the user you
want to follow in the edit box and press "Enter". If the Voice Sense QWERTY
is able to locate the user and follow them, the unit displays, "Follow
complete" and returns you to your previous position.
10.2.6.2 Following
"Following" displays a list of those users you follow on Twitter. To open the "Following" dialog, press "Alt-L" or choose "Following" from the
"Follow" menu. "Following" consists of 7 controls. Move among the controls by pressing
"Tab" or "Shift-tab". 394
1) Following: A list of those you follow on Twitter. 2) Next list: Loads the next 32 users you follow. You can also load the
"Next List" by pressing Control-N". 3) Remove Follow: A button to remove the user from the list of those you
follow, or rather, a button to stop following a user. You can also press
"Delete" to delete the focused user from your "Following" list. 4) User Timeline: displays the posts by the current user. 5) User Information: displays information about the current user including
Name, ID, About Me, Homepage and Following, follower, and Tweet counts. 6) Add User to List: opens a dialog allowing you to add the current user to
one of your created lists. 7) Close: A button to close the "Following" dialog. You can also use
"Escape" or "Alt-F 4" to close the dialog and return to your previous
position. 10.2.6.3 Followers
"Followers" is a list of Users who follow your tweets. To open the "Followers" dialog, press the hot key, "Alt-E" or select
"Followers" from the "Follow" Menu. The "Followers" dialog consists of 7 controls. Move among the controls by
pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab". 1) Followers: A list of those who follow your tweets. 2) Next list: a button to load the next 32 followers in the list. You can also
load the "Next List" by pressing "Control-N". 3) Follow User: A button to start following the focused user. 4) User Timeline: displays the posts by the current user. 5) User Information: displays information about the current user including
Name, ID, About Me, Homepage and Following, follower, and Tweet counts. 6) Add User to List: opens a dialog allowing you to add the current user to
one of your created lists. 7) Close: A button to close the "Followers" dialog. You can also close the
dialog by pressing "Escape". 395
10.2.7. Using Direct Messages
THE direct Message function allows you to send and receive Direct
Messages to and from a specific user. Direct messages can only be seen by
those who exchange them. You can only exchange direct messages with
those who follow you.
10.2.7.1 Send Direct Message
Use the "Send Direct Message" dialog to send a "Direct Message" (DM) to
one of your "followers". To open the "Send Direct Message" dialog, press
“Ctrl-s”, or select "Send Direct Message" from the "Tweets" menu. The
"Send Direct Message" dialog consists of 6 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) Followers: The list of those who follow you. Select a user from this list to
send a direct message to that person.
2) Next list: loads the next 32 followers in your list. Press "Ctrl-n" or "Enter"
on this button to load the next list.
3) Message: An edit box in which to type the message you wish to send.
When done, you may press "Enter" to send the message and return to the
"followers" list.
4) Characters: A status bar displaying current characters and maximum
characters: for example, "Characters: 0/140T".
5) Send: A button used to send the direct message. Press “Ctrl-s” or "Enter"
on this button to send your message and return to the "followers" list.
6) Close: use this button to close the dialog without sending a message. You
can also use "Esc" to close the dialog.
10.2.7.2 Accessing Received Direct Messages
This function allows you to view Direct Messages you have received from
those you follow. 396
To open the "received messages" dialog, press "Alt-R" or select the
"Received Direct messages" item located in the "Tweets" menu. The "Received Direct Messages" dialog consists of 6 controls. Move
among the controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab". 1) Received Direct Messages: A list of the messages you have received,
shown from newest to oldest. Messages are displayed as "ID: message" 2) The date the message was filed. 3) Next list: Loads the next 20 messages in the list. Press "Control-N" or
press "Enter" on the button to load the next list. 4) Reply: Use this button to compose a reply to the focused message. You
can also open the "Reply" dialog by pressing "control-Y". 5) Remove direct message: Use this button to delete the message from the
list. 6) Close: A button to close the "Received Direct Messages" dialog and
return to your previous position. You can also use "Escape" to close the
dialog. 10.2.7.3 Sent Direct Messages
"Sent Direct Messages" is a dialog displaying the "Direct Messages" you
have sent to users who follow you. To open the "Sent Direct Messages" dialog, press "Alt-S" or select the
"Sent Direct Messages" item located in the "Tweets" menu. The "Sent Direct Messages" dialog contains 5 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab". 1) Sent Direct Messages: A list of messages you have sent to users who
follow you, displayed from newest to oldest. "Direct Messages" are
displayed as "Sender Id: Message". 2) Date the message was filed. 3) Next list: Loads the next 20 messages in the list. Press "Control-N" or
"Enter" on this button to load the next list. 4) Remove Direct Message: Use this button to remove the message from
the list. 397
5) Close: Use this button to close the "Sent Direct Messages" dialog and
return to your previous position. You can also use "Escape" to close the
dialog. 10.2.8. Using Search functions
The "Search" function in the "Twitter" program allows you to search
registered users as well as words contained in tweets posted to the public
timeline.
It also offers a "Save Search" function to save words used frequently.
10.2.8.1 Global Search
The "Global Search" launches a search for entered text among all "Twitter"
timelines. You can also follow the user of a tweet in the results of your
"Global Search".
To open the "Global Search" dialog, press "Ctrl-f" or select the "Global
Search" item from the "Search" menu.
The "Global" search dialog contains 6 controls. Move among the controls by
pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) Search word?: An edit box into which you can enter the word for which
you want to search.
2) Next list: Loads the next 20 results in the list. You can load the "Next list"
by pressing "Ctrl-n" or press "Enter" on the button.
3) Search results: A list containing the results of your search, such as "User
Id: Self-introduction". The "Search result" button appears only when there
are results to display.
4) Follow User: Select this button to follow the focused user. The "Follow
User" button appears only when there are search results displayed.
5) Confirm: Use this button to execute a search.
6) Cancel: This button closes the "Global Search" dialog and returns you to
your previous position. You can also cancel by pressing "Esc".
398
Use the following steps to search for and follow a user.
(1) Open the "Global search" dialog and you are placed in the "Search word"
edit box. Type your desired search term.
(2) Press "Enter", and "Searching" is displayed.
(3) If the search is successful, search results appear. If no results match your
search, "No search results" is displayed and you are returned to the "Search
word" edit box.
(4) In the search results list, navigate to user whom you want to follow, by
pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”.
(5) Press "Alt-a" to follow the focused user.
10.2.8.2 User search
"User search" lets you specifically search for text among users' profiles, id's,
and names registered on Twitter. This is useful if you're trying to find a
specific person , or a specific company or informational site. To open the "User Search" dialog menu, press "Alt-F" or select the "User
Search" item located in the "Search" menu. It is similar to the "Global
search" dialog. The "User Search" dialog consists of 8 controls. Move among the controls
by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab". 1) Search word?: An edit box into which you can enter the term for which
you want to search. 2) Next List: Loads the next 20 results in the list. You can load the "Next
list" by pressing "Control-N" or "Enter" on this button. 3) Search results: a list of results matching your search. Results appear as,
"User Id: About me". The "Search results" button appears only when there
are search results to display. 4) Follow User: Use this button to follow the focused user. The "Follow
User" button appears only when there are search results. You can also
press "Alt-A" to follow the focused user. 5) User Timeline: displays the posts of the current user. 6) User Information: displays information about the current user including
Name, ID, About Me, Homepage and Following, follower, and Tweet counts. 399
7) Confirm: Use this button to execute a search. 8) Cancel: This button closes the "User Search" dialog and returns you to
your previous position. You can also use "Escape" to close the dialog. 10.2.8.3 Using the "Search word list" dialog
The "Search word list" saves words frequently searched for and helps you
search tweets and User Id's quickly.
To open the "Search word list" dialog, press "Alt-w" or select the "Search
word list" item from the "Search" menu.
The "Search word list" dialog consists of 6 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) Word list: a list of your saved search words.
2) Global search: Use this button to search tweets for the focused word.
3) User search: Use this button to search user profiles for the focused words.
4) Add search word: Use this button to add a new word to the list.
5) Remove search word: Delete the focused word from the list using this
button.
6) Close: This button closes the "Search word list" dialog and returns you to
your previous position. You can also use " Esc" to close the dialog.
"
Use the following steps to add a word to the "Search word" list:
(1) From the "Search word list" dialog, press "Enter-a"
(2) "Save Search?" edit box appears.
(3) Type the word you wish to add to the list and press "Enter".
(4) When the entered word is saved, "save completed" message is displayed.
Use the following steps to delete a word from the "Search word list":
(1) Navigate to the word you want to delete from the list using “down arrow”
or “up arrow”.
(2) Press "Del". Or tab to the "Remove Search word" button and press
"Enter".
400
(3) "Do you want to delete? Yes" message appears, if you press "Enter", the
word is deleted. To cancel deletion, toggle the option to "No" using "Space"
and press "Enter". Or press "Esc". After canceling, you are returned to the
"Search word list".
10.2.8.4 Find Tweets from the Current Timeline
The "Find Tweets from the Current Timeline" option allows you to search
for text among the tweets of the timeline currently displayed. To open the
"Find Tweets from the Current Timeline" dialog, press "Control-Alt-F" or
select the "Find Tweets from the Current Timeline" item located in the
"Search" menu. The "Find" dialog contains 5 controls: 1) Find: edit box for typing your search term. 2) Search radio buttons: lets you choose to search the "Tweet message",
"ID", "Date" or "All". 3) Direction radio buttons: lets you choose to search backward or forward
in the current timeline. 4) Confirm: Use this button to execute a search. 5) Cancel: This button closes the "Find" dialog and returns you to your
previous position. You can also use "Escape" to close the dialog. 10.2.8.5 Find Again Tweets from the Current Timeline
The "Find Again" option repeats the search you initiated using the "Find
Tweets from the Current Timeline". To activate the "Find Again Tweets
from the Current Timeline", press "Alt-Shift-F" or select the "Find Again
Tweets from the Current Timeline" item located in the "Search" menu.
When you activate this option the search is instantly performed using the
options chosen previously in the "Find Tweets from the Current Timeline"
dialog. 401
10.2.9. Additional Functions
10.2.9.1 Viewing and Editing Personal Information
The "Personal Information" dialog allows you to check and edit your personal
account information.
To open the "Personal Information" dialog, press "Ctrl-I" or move to the
"Personal Information" item in the "File" menu and press "Enter".
The "Personal Information" dialog contains the following items. Move among
the controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) Name
2) ID
3) Homepage
4) About me
5) Follow count
6) Follower count
7) Tweet Count
8) Edit
9) Close
In the "Personal Information" dialog, you can edit name, homepage, and
"about me". Use the following steps to modify your personal information.
(1) When the "Personal Information" dialog is open, move to the "Edit" button
by pressing "Tab".
(2) Press "Enter". You can now modify your personal information using the
edit boxes displayed: Name EB, Homepage CEB, About me EB. This dialog
also contains a Save button, and a Close button.
(3) Type the desired information in the edit boxes.
(4) Press "Enter" on the "Save" button and a "Refreshing user information"
message is displayed.
(5) If the modification is successful, "Save complete" is displayed and you
are returned to your previous position.
402
10.2.9.2 Save Current Timeline
The "Save Current Timeline" allows you to save the current timeline as a text
file. To open the "Save Current Timeline" dialog, press "Alt-s" from the
"Tweet" dialog or press "Enter" on the "Save Current Timeline" menu item
located in the file menu.
The "Save Current Timeline" dialog consists of 4 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) File name: A combo edit box, in which to enter your desired file name.
The default is "Timeline name current date". For example, "Home Timeline
20110310".
2) Confirm: Press this button to save the current timeline.
3) Cancel: Use this button to exit the "Save Current Timeline" dialog and
return to the "Tweet" dialog.
4) File List: A file browser control in which you can change the storage path.
If you do not change the storage path, the file is automatically stored in the
"My Documents" folder in the flashdisk.
10.2.9.3 Set Options
The "Set Options" dialog allows you to set the number of tweets to receive
each time you refresh your timeline or use the "Next List" command. To
open the "Set Options" dialog, press "Alt" to open the "File" menu, and
navigate to "Set Options" using the Down arrow. Or press "Alt-O" directly
from within Twitter. The "Set Options" dialog contains 3 items, "Number of Tweets to Receive"
combo box, a "Confirm" button, and a ""cel" button. You can move among
the items using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". Use the Up and Down arrows to navigate the options in the combo box.
You can choose to receive 32, 64, or 100 tweets at a time. When you have
chosen the number of tweets you want to receive, Tab to the "Confirm"
403
button and press "Enter". If you do not wish to save your settings, Tab to
"Cancel" and press "Enter" or press "Escape" or "Alt-F 4". 10.2.10 Managing Lists
Twitter allows you to group people you follow into lists, and to follow or view
lists created by others. Most of the list-related functions in the "Twitter"
program are located in the "List" menu. The "List" menu contains 4 items:
"List Manager", "Add User to List", "List User View" and "List View in
Current Tweet". These items are discussed in detail in the following
sections. 10.2.10.1 List Manager
The "List Manager" allows you to create, modify, remove, and unfollow lists.
To execute the "List Manager", press "Alt" to open the menu. Navigate to
"List" using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Then, press "Enter" on "List
Manager". You can also open the "List Manager" by pressing "Control-P"
from anywhere in the "Twitter" program. The "List Manager" dialog contains the following items: "List" list, "List
Information" button, "Create List" button, "Modify List" button, "Remove
List" button and "Close" button. If your cursor is placed on a list you follow,
but is not a list of your own creation, the "Unfollow" option appears, and the
"Modify" and "Remove" options do not appear. You can move among the controls using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". To move
through the items in the "List" list use Up or Down arrow. 10.2.10.1.1 List Information
The "List Information" dialog contains the following items: "Information" list
and a "Close" button. The "Information" list contains the "List name", "List
Description", "List Date", "List Member Count" and "List Mode (Private or
Public)". You can move among the items using the Up or Down arrow. To
close the "List Information" dialog, Tab to "Close" and press "Enter" or
press "Escape". 404
10.2.10.1.2 Create List
To create a new list, Tab to "Create List" in the "List Manager" dialog, and
press "Enter", or press "Control-A". The "Create List" dialog contains 3 controls: "Information" list, "Confirm"
button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move among the controls using
"Tab" or "Shift-Tab". The "Information" list contains 3 items: "List Name" edit box, "List
Description" edit box and "List Mode" radio button. Use the Up or Down
arrow to move among the items in the list. Type your desired name and
description in the respective edit boxes. Press "Space" on the "List Mode"
radio button to toggle between "Private" and "Public". Choose "Public" if
you want the list to be available for other user to view and follow. Choose
"Private" if you do not want others to be able to view and follow your list. When you have finished setting your preferences for the list, Tab to
"Confirm" and press "Enter". If you wish to cancel creation of the list, Tab to
"Cancel" and press "Enter" or press "Escape" or "Alt F 4". 10.2.10.1.3 Modify List
To modify information for a list you created, use the Down arrow to
navigate to it in the "List Manager" dialog, Tab to "Modify List", and press
"Enter. Or just press "Control-M" when your cursor is on the list you want to
modify. The "Modify List" dialog is exactly the same as the
except that the information is filled in for the current
finished modifying the information in the list, Tab to
"Enter". To cancel modifying the list, Tab to "Cancel"
press "Escape" or "Alt F 4". "Create List" dialog,
list. When you have
"Confirm" and press
and press "Enter" or
10.2.10.1.4 Removing a List
To remove a list you created, navigate to it using Up or Down arrow in the
"List Manager" dialog, Tab to "Remove List" and press "Enter". Or, you can
press "Delete" when the list is under your cursor. 405
When you execute the "Remove List" function, you are prompted, "Delete
the XXXX List?" where XXXX is the name of the current list. The default is
"Yes". To remove the list, press "Enter". If you do not want to rcoove the list,
press the Down arrow to navigate to "No" and press "Enter". 10.2.10.1.5 Unfollowing a List
If you have chosen to follow someone else's list, you can unfollow the list
using the "List Unfollow" function. To unfollow a list, navigate to it using Up
or Down arrow in the "List Manager" dialog, Tab to "List Unfollow" and
press "Enter". When you execute the "List Unfollow" function, you are prompted,
"Unfollow XXXX List?" where XXXX is the current list. The default is "Yes".
If you wish to unfollow the list, press "Enter". If you do not wish to stop
following the list, use the Down arrow to navigate "No" and press "Enter". When you are finished managing lists, Tab to the "Close" button and press
"Enter", or press "Escape". 10.2.10.2 Add User to List
Once you have created lists, you will want to add users to your lists. You
can do this using the "Add User to List" function. To execute "Add User to List", press "Alt" to open the menu. Navigate to
"List" using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Then, Navigate to "Add
User to List", and press "Enter". You can also execute this function by
pressing "Control-K" from anywhere in the "Twitter" program. The "Add User to List" dialog contains 4 items: "List" list, "User ID" edit box,
"Confirm" and "Cancel". You can move among the controls using "Tab" or
"Shift-Tab". Use Up or Down arrow to choose the list to which you want to add the user.
By default, the "ID" edit box contains the ID of the current user. If you wish
to add the current user to your list simply Tab to "Confirm" and press
406
"Enter". If you wish to add a different user, type the ID of the user you wish
to add and Tab to "Confirm" and press "ENTER". To cancel adding a user
to a list, Tab to "Cancel" and press "Enter" or press "Escape" or "Alt F 4". 10.2.10.3 List User View
The "List User View" function allows you to view and manage list members.
To execute "List User View", press "Alt" to open the menu. Navigate to
"List" using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Then, Navigate to "List User
View" and press "Enter". You can also execute this function by pressing
"Control-J" from anywhere in the "Twitter" program. The "List User View" dialog contains the following items: "List" list, "List
Member" list, "Next List" button, "Member Information" button, "Delete List
Member" button, "Follow User" button, and a "Close" button. If you are
viewing a list you are following, the "Delete List Member" button does not
appear. You can move among the controls using "Tab" or "Shift-Tab". Use
Up or Down arrow to move among items in a list. Use the "Delete List Member" button to remove a member from the list.
Use the "Member Information" button to view the User Information" for the
current list member. The information in the "Member Information" dialog is
the same information available in the "User Information" dialog previously
described. If you are not following a user in a list, and you wish for their
tweets to appear in your timeline, use the "Follow User" button to add this
user to your "Following" list. 10.2.10.4 List View in Current Tweet
The "List View in Current Tweet" function allows you to view the public lists
created by the user of the current tweet, as well as the lists he or she
follows. To execute "List View of Current Tweet", press "Alt" to open the
menu. Navigate to "List" using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Then,
Navigate to "List View of Current Tweet" and press "Enter". You can also
407
execute this function by pressing "F3" from anywhere in the "Twitter"
program. The "List View of Current Tweet" dialog contains the following controls:
"List" list, "List Timeline" button, "List User View" button, "List Follow"
button, and a "Close" button. You can move among the controls using
"Tab" or "Shift-Tab". The "List Timeline" option gives you the Timeline for the current list as
described in the "Timeline" section of this chapter. The "List User View"
opens the "List User View" dialog for the current list as described in the
previous section. The "List Follow" button adds the current list to the lists
you currently follow. You can close the "List View of Current Tweet" dialog
by tabbing to the "Close" button, and pressing "Enter", or by pressing
"Escape". 10.3 Google talk
Google Talk is a messaging service that allows you to text or voice chat in
real time with other Google Talk users as well as easily and quickly send
files to your Google Talk contacts.
To launch Google Talk, do the following:
1) From the main menu, press "c" or move to "Social Networking" using
“down arrow” and press "Enter".
2) Press "g" or move to "Google Talk" and press "Enter".
You can also launch “Google Talk” from anywhere on the unit by pressing
“Windows-G”.
10.3.1 Before you launch Google Talk
To use the Google Talk service, you must have a Gmail account. If you do
not have a Gmail account, visit the Gmail website (http://gmail.google.com)
and create a Gmail account. If you have a Gmail account registered, you can
use your Gmail ID and password to log into Google Talk.
You must also have an active connection to the Internet to use Google Talk,
408
10.3.1.1 Sign In
When you launch Google Talk, the "Login" dialog appears. The "Login"
dialog consists of 7 controls. Move among the controls by pressing "Tab" or
"Shift-tab".
1) E-mail: A computer edit box in which to enter your Gmail address.
2) Password: A computer edit box to input your Gmail password.
3) Remember me: A check box for choosing whether or not to save your
user ID. The default is set to "Uncheck". You can check the box by pressing
"Space".
4) Save password: This is a check box for choosing whether or not to save
your password. The default is set to "Uncheck". You can check the box by
pressing Space".
5) Auto Sign In: This is a check box for choosing whether or not to sign in
automatically.
If you check this box, the program will sign you in automatically when you
open it using the registered e-mail account. Note: to use this function, you
must check the "Remember me" and "Save password" check boxes. If you
do not check these boxes, the auto sign in function will not work.
6) Sign in: A button to initiate log in to Google Talk.
7) Cancel: This button cancels login and closes the Google Talk program.
Once you are logged in to Google Talk, the contact list appears. The contact
list is displayed in Braille as "(Status) ID XX/YY" and "chat name, status,
XX/YY" is announced. "YY" represents the total number of contacts and "xx"
refers to the placement of the current contact in the list. When a contact is
online, the status is displayed as "NLN". When a contact is offline, the status
is displayed as "FLN". If a contact is Idle, the status is displayed as "idle".
Use the following keys to navigate the "contacts list" dialog.
Move to the previous contact: Up arrow
409
Move to the next contact: down arrow
Move up 32 items in the contact list: Page up
Move down 32 items in the contact list: Page down
Move to the first item in the contact list: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last item in the contact list: Ctrl-End
10.3.1.2 Sign Out & Exit
Use the "Sign Out" function to sign out of the current account without closing
the Google Talk program. When you sign out of the current account, you are
returned to the "Sign in" dialog where, if you wish, you may log in with a
different Google account. You can execute "Sign Out" by pressing "Ctrl-l" or
by pressing "Enter" on "Sign Out" from the "File" menu.
To exit the Google Talk program, press "Alt-F4" or press "Enter" on "Exit" in
the "File" menu.
10.3.2 Managing Contacts
When you log in to Google Talk, your contact list appears. When you use
Google Talk for the first time, your contact list is empty. The sections below
describe how to add, delete, and interact with contacts.
10.3.2.1 Add Contact
Use the "Add Contact" function to add a new contact to your contact list.
To open the "Add Contact" dialog, press "Alt-q or open the menu by pressing
F2, navigate to the "Contact" menu, "Contact" and press "Enter" on "Add
Contact".
The "Add Contact" dialog consists of 3 controls. Move among the controls by
pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) E-mail: A computer edit box, into which you can input the e-mail address
of the user you want to add.
410
2) Confirm: A button to save the new contact to your contact list. You can
also press "Enter" after typing the e-mail address to add the contact.
3) Cancel: Use this button to close the "Add contact" dialog and return to
your contact list.
After you add a contact, the contact displays as "off-line" until he or she
accepts your contact invitation.
After the contact accepts your request, the contact's status is reflective of his
or her actual status.
10.3.2.2 Delete Contact
Use the "Delete Contact" function to delete a contact from your contact list.
When you delete a contact, the user can no longer send you messages or
see your status.
To delete a contact, do the following:
1) Navigate to the contact you want to delete in the contact list.
2) Press "Del" or press "Enter" on "Delete Contact" from the "Contact" menu.
3) You are prompted, "Do you want to delete XXX in the contact list? Yes".
"XXX" is the user ID to delete. If you press "Enter", the contact is deleted.
To cancel deletion of the contact, press "Space" to change to "No" and press
"Enter". Or press "Esc" to cancel deletion. After canceling deletion, you are
returned to the contact list.
10.3.2.3 Block Contact
You can block a contact in your "Contact list" from sending messages to you
or seeing your status. Block is different from delete in that after blocking a
contact, the contact ID remains in the Block list. When you delete a contact,
the contact ID disappears from the contact list completely, yet the person
may send you future contact invitations.
411
To block a contact, do the following:
1) Navigate to the contact you want to block in the contact list.
2) Press "Alt-b" or press "Enter" on "Block Contact" from the "Contact" menu.
3) You are prompted, "Block XXX? Yes". "XXX" is the user ID to block. If you
press "Enter", the contact is blocked.
To cancel blocking the contact, press "Space" to change to "No" and press
"Enter". Or press "Esc" to cancel blocking the contact. You are then returned
to the contact list.
10.3.2.4 Manage Block List
The Block list contains the contacts you have blocked. You are able to
unblock contact that you have blocked using this list.
To open the "Manage Block list" dialog, press "Alt-m" or press "Enter" on the
"Manage Block list" item in the "Contact" menu.
The "Manage Block list" dialog consists of 3 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) E-mail: A list displaying the e-mail addresses of your blocked contacts.
2) Unblock: this button unblocks the focused contact.
3) Cancel: A button to close the "Block contact" dialog and return you to
your previous position.
10.3.2.5 Contact Information
Use the "Contact Information" function to display the on-line ID and E-mail of
the selected contact and the contact request status. To open the "Contact
Information" dialog, navigate to the contact in the list you want to view using
“up arrow” or “down arrow” and press "Ctrl-I". Or you can open the menu and
press "Enter" on "Contact Information" from the "Contact" menu.
The "Contact Information" dialog consists of 2 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
412
1) Contact Information: A Status area containing several pieces of
information about the contact. Move to each item using “up arrow” or “down
arrow”.
A. Display name: Displays on-line ID set on the "My Status Options".
B. E-mail: Displays E-mail account.
C. Chat: Displays whether chat is "Enabled" or "Disabled".
D. File sharing: Displays whether it is possible to send/receive files with this
contact.
E. Voice Chat: Displays whether voice chatting is possible.
F. Status contact: Displays current contact request status such as
"acceptance" or "standby".
2) Close: A button to close the "View Contact Information" dialog and return
you to the "Contact" list.
10.3.2.6 Manage Contact List
When you log into “Google Talk”, if you have pending contact requests
dialogs pop up asking whether you accept each invitation. All unanswered
contact requests appear and can be acted on in the "Manage Contact List".
Access the "Manage Contact List" to accept or reject pending contact
requests.
To open the "Manage Contact List" dialog, Press "Ctrl-p" or Press "Enter" on
"Manage Contact List" from the "Contact" menu.
The "Manage Contact List" dialog consists of 4 controls.
1) E-mail: A list displaying user ID's of those requesting you to add them as a
contact.
2) Accept: A button to accept the focused user ID as a contact.
3) Reject: A button to reject the focused user ID as a contact.
4) Close: A button to close the dialog and return to the ""contact" list.
413
10.3.3 Start Chat
Use the "Start Chat" function to open a conversation window through which
you can send and receive text messages with the focused contact in your
"Contact" list.
To send a message to the focused contact, press “Ctrl-s” or navigate to the
desired user ID, using “up arrow” or “down arrow” and press "Enter". Or open
the "Actions" menu, and press "Enter" on the "Start Chat" option.
The "Chat" dialog consists of 2 controls. Move among the controls using
"Tab" and "Shift-tab"
1) Input: An edit box into which to type your message.
2) History: A read only edit combo box to view messages sent and received
in chronological order. Messages are displayed as "Writer ID: message
content".
Use the following navigation keys in the "History" list.
Move to the previous message: “up arrow”
Move to the next message: “down arrow”
Move to the first message: “Ctrl-Fn-Left arrow”
Move to the last message: “Ctrl-Fn-Right arrow”
To move to the "Contact list" while in a "Chat", press "Ctrl-t". Or choose
"Contact list" from the "Actions" menu. If you select another contact from the
"Contact list" and press "Enter", a new "Chat" window is opened.
When multiple chat windows are opened, you can move among them using
the following hot keys:
Move to previous "Chat" window: "Ctrl-Shift-Tab key"
Move to next "Chat" window: "Ctrl-Tab key"
You can also move among chat windows by choosing the "Move to Next
Chat" or "Move to Previous Chat" options from the "Actions" menu.
414
While in your "Contact list", you can press "Ctrl-t", to return to the most
recently used "Chat" window. Or press "Enter" on the "Move to Recent Chat"
option in the "Actions" menu.
To exit "Chat" windows, press "Alt-F4” or "Esc"
10.3.4 Start Voice Chat
Use the "Start voice chat" function to start a real time voice conversation with
a contact in your contact list. Unlike text chat, it is only possible to converse
with one contact at a time using voice chat. However, you can send and
receive text messages while having a voice conversation.
Use the following steps to request a voice chat with one of your contacts:
(1) Navigate to the contact in your list with whom you wish to have a voice
chat, and press "Ctrl-h". Or press "Enter" on the "Start Voice Chat" item in
the "Actions" menu.
(2) The "Chat" window is opened, and "Calling" is displayed and a ringing
sound is heard as the contact is alerted to the incoming chat request. The
voice chat starts immediately, after the contact accepts your chat request.
You can request a voice chat from the text "Chat" window as well as from the
contact list.
If you press "Enter" on "Cancel" (Esc while the "calling" message is
displayed, you are returned to your previous position, and the voice chat
request is canceled.
When you receive a voice chat request, you can accept or reject as follows.
(1) When you receive a request to start a voice chat, you are prompted,
"calling from XXX? Accept question button". "XX" refers to the user
requesting the voice chat.
(2) Press "Enter" to accept the request and start the voice conversation. To
reject the request, press "Space" to change the button to "Reject" and press
"Enter". After rejecting, you are returned to your contact list.
415
10.3.5 Sending/Receiveing a file
The Google Talk program on the Voice Sense QWERTY supports the ability
to send and receive files. With this function, you can send your files to your
Google Talk contacts and save files from your contacts on your Voice Sense
QWERTY.
10.3.5.1 Sending a file
Use the "Send File" function to send files to your contacts. It allows you to
send multiple files at one time, as well as to exchange messages in the
"Chat" dialog while sending files.
To send a file(s) to one of your contacts, do the following:
(1) Navigate to the contact in your list to whom you want to send a file and
press "Enter". The "Chat" window is opened.
(2) Press the hot key, "Ctrl-f". Or select the "Send File" option in the
"Actions" menu.
(3) You are placed in a file browser area. Use normal File Management
commands to navigate to and select files you wish to send.
(4) Sending File Information appears. It is displayed in the "Received
message" area of the chat-window. The information is displayed as "Send:
Pending acceptance XX File, file name". "XX" represents the number of files
which you have requested to send.
(5) If your contact accepts receipt of the file or files, transfer begins. Once
sending starts, progress rate and file name are displayed on the
"Sending/receiving file information" list.
(6) When file transfer is completed, you are return to the Sending/Receiving
File Information list. It is displayed as "Send: complete XX File, file name".
To cancel sending files, move to the desired file on the "Sending/Receiving
File Information list" and press "Esc". File transmission is canceled and the
"Sending File Information list" displays "Send: Me canceled. XX, file name".
If your contact cancels receiving files during transfer, the "Sending File
Information list" displays "Send: To canceled. XX, file name".
416
10.3.5.2 Receiving a file
In addition to sending files to contacts, you can receive files they wish to
send to you. You can receive multiple files at once, and exchange messages
in the "Chat" dialog while receiving files.
Use the following steps to receive files from one of your contacts:
(1) When a contact requests to send you a file, "XXX send to file" message
is displayed. The "Chat" window is opened and the "Receiving File
Information list" is focused.
(2) The "Receiving File Information list" displays "Receiving: Pending
acceptance XX file name". "XX" refers to the number of files your contact is
requesting you receive.
(3) To accept file transmission, press "Enter". File transfer begins.
Once sending starts, progress rate and file name are displayed on the
"receiving file information" list.
(4) When Receiving File is completed, you are return to the Receiving File
Information list. It is displayed as "Receive: complete XX File, file name".
To cancel receiving a file, move to the file on the "Receiving File Information
list" and press "Esc". File transmission is canceled and the "Receiving File
Information list" displays "Receive: Me canceled. XX, file name". If your
contact cancels sending files while receiving, the "Receiving File Information
list" displays "Receive: To canceled. XX, File name".
10.3.6 Other functions
The Google Talk Program on the Voice Sense QWERTY supports additional
features such as "Save conversation" and "Export/ Import Contact list", etc.
The following is a detailed explanation of these additional features.
10.3.6.1 Save Conversation
417
"Save Conversation" is a function to save messages exchanged with a
contact as a text file.
To execute this function, press "Alt-s" from the "Chat" window or select the
"Save Conversation" item located in the "File" menu.
The "Save Conversation" dialog consists of 4 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) File Name: A combo edit box in which to type in the name you want to
give the conversation file.
2) Confirm: A button to confirm and save the conversation.
3) Cancel: Use this button to cancel saving the conversation and return to
the "Chat" window.
4) File list: A file browser area in which to set the path to save the
conversation. By Default, the conversation is saved to the "My Documents"
folder on the flashdisk. Use normal file and folder navigation to choose a
different location.
10.3.6.2 Manage Chat
"Manage Chat" Allows you to view information about the open chat windows
and to move directly to the selected window. You can also view the status of
file transfers using this dialog. To open "Manage Chat" press "Ctrl-m” from
the contact list or press "Enter" on the "Manage Chat" item in the "Actions"
menu.
"Manage Chat" consists of 5 controls. Move among the controls by pressing
"Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) Chat list: a list of the currently open chat windows. You can navigate to a
specific chat window using “up arrow” or “down arrow” and press "Enter".
2) Status of sending File: A status bar displaying the status of
sending/receiving files. This status bar only appears if you are currently
sending or receiving files.
3) Move to Chat: Use this button to move to the selected chat window.
418
4) Close chat: Use this button, to close the selected chat window.
5) Cancel: Use this button to exit the "Manage Chat Window" dialog and
return to the "Contact list".
10.3.6.3 Find
The "Find" command searches for a word or character string in the "History"
edit box of the chat window. This can be useful in a situation where many
messages are exchanged.
To Execute "Find", press "Ctrl-f” from the chat window or press "Enter" on
the "Find" item in the "Edit" menu.
"Find" consists of 4 controls. Move among the controls by pressing "Tab" or
"Shift-tab".
1) Text to find: An edit box into which to enter the word you want to find.
2) Search direction: A prompt button for choosing your search direction:
"Forward" or "Backward". If you choose "Forward", the search is performed
from the current position to the top of the chat. And if you choose "Backward",
the search is performed from the current position to the end of the chat. You
can change the search direction by pressing "Space" or "Backspace".
3) Confirm: A button to execute "Find".
4) Cancel: Use this button to exit the "Find" dialog and you are returned to
the "Chat" window.
10.3.6.4 Export Contact List
You can use the "Export Contact list" function to save your "Contact list" as a
CSV file.
To open the "Export Contact list" dialog, press "Alt-x" from the "Contact list"
or press "Enter" on the "Export Contact list" item in the "File" menu.
The "Export Contact list" dialog consists of 4 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
419
1) File name: A combo edit box into which you can type the name for the
contact list file.
2) Confirm: Use this button to execute the "Export Contact list" function.
3) Cancel: Use this button to exit the "Export Contact list" dialog and return
to the "Contact list".
4) File list: A file browser control in which you can set the path to save the
"Contact list". Use normal file and folder navigation commands to navigate
this list.
10.3.6.5 Import Contact List
You can use the "Import Contact List" function to import a CSV formatted
contact list.
To open the "Import Contact List" dialog, press "Alt-I" from the "Contact list"
or press "Enter" on the "Import Contact list" item in the "File" menu.
The "Import Contact List" dialog consists of 4 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) File name: A combo edit box into which you can type the name of the file
you want to import.
2) Confirm: Use this button to execute the "Import Contact list" function.
3) Cancel: Use this button to exit the "Import Contact list" dialog and return to
the "Contact list".
4) File list: A file browser control from which you can select the desired
contact list file (CSV). Use normal file and folder navigation commands to
navigate the file list. When you locate the file you want to import, press
"Enter".
10.3.7 Setup Options
The Google Talk Program on the Voice Sense QWERTY contains several
option settings, including "My status options", "on-line ID", "auto-reply"
420
"notification and sound". Below is a detailed explanation of each of these
option settings.
10.3.7.1 My status Options
This menu allows you to set how your status and on-line ID is displayed to
your contacts.
To open the "My status options" dialog, press "Alt-u" from the contact list or
press "Enter" on "My Status Options" from the "Options" menu.
The "My Status Options" dialog consists of 3 controls. Move among the
controls by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) My Status: A list from which you can select one of 5 status options: Online, Away, Idle, DND, Chat, or Off-line. Navigate among the options using
“up arrow” or “down arrow”.
2) Confirm: Use this button to save the setting.
3) Cancel: Use this button to exit the "My status Options" dialog and return to
your "Contact list".
10.3.7.2 Action Options
The "Action Options" dialog allows you to set auto-reply, idle time Display
Contact List, etc.
To open the "Action Options" dialog, press "Alt-a" from the contact list or
press "Enter" on the "Action Options" item in the "Options" menu.
The "Action Options" dialog consists of 5 controls. Move among the controls
by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) Action setting: A list of various option settings. Move among the settings
using up arrow or down arrow.
A. Display contact list: Choose whether the contact list displays all contacts
or only online contacts. Use "Space" or "Backspace" to change the setting.
421
B. Contact request: Setup how to respond to an incoming contact request.
The options are, "notification", "accept" and "reject". If you choose
"notification", you are notified of the request and prompted to "accept" or
"reject" the request. If you choose "accept", the request is automatically
accepted. If you choose "reject", the contact is rejected automatically. Use
"Space" and "Backspace" to change the value of the setting.
C. Incoming chat request: Choose how to respond to an incoming chat
request. You can choose to move to the chat-window immediately or for your
focus to remain in the contact list. You can choose between "Move to the
chat" and "Don't move". Use "Space" and "Backspace" to change the setting.
D. File transfer request: This option allows you to set how to respond when
one of your contacts requests to send you a file. The options are, "Alerts",
"accept" and "reject". If you choose "Alerts", you are notified of the file
transfer request and prompted to choose "Accept" or "Reject". If you choose
"Accept", the transfer request is accepted automatically. If you choose
"Reject", the request is automatically rejected. You can change the setting
using "Space" or "Backspace".
E. Incoming voice chat request: Choose how to respond when a contact
requests to voice chat with you. Again, the options are, "Alerts", "accept" and
"reject". If you choose "Alerts", you are notified of the voice chat request and
prompted to choose "accept" or "reject". If you choose "accept", the voicechat request is accepted automatically. If you choose "reject", the voice chat
request is rejected automatically. Use "Space" or "Backspace" to change the
value of the setting.
F. Auto reply to incoming chat request: You can set whether you send an
auto-reply message when one of your contacts requests a chat. You can
choose between "Yes" and "No". Use "Space and "Backspace" to change
the setting.
2) Auto-reply message: An edit box into which to type a message for use
with the auto reply function.
3) Show me as "Away" when I’m inactive for: When there is no input for the
specified amount of time, your status is automatically displayed as "Idle".
Enter time in minutes.
4) Confirm: A button to save the settings.
422
5) Cancel: A button to exit the "Action Options" dialog and return to the
"Contact list".
10.3.7.3 Alert Options
The "Alert Options" dialog lets you set whether you use Message Sound
Notifications While in Current Window and whether to play the keyboard
sound when someone is typing. To open the "Alert Options" dialog, press
"Alt-o" from the contact list or press "Enter" on the "Alert Options" item from
the "Options" menu.
The "Alert Options" dialog consists of 3 controls. Move among the controls
by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) Setting list: A list of various option settings. Move among the options using
“up arrow” or “down arrow”.
A. Play keyboard sound: You can select whether the keyboard sound is
heard when you are typing a message. You can choose between "Yes" and
"No" by pressing "Space" or "Backspace".
B. Message Sound Notification While Google Talk is In the Background: You
can set whether notification sounds are heard to alert you of events such as
incoming chats, requests for file transfers, or changes in contact status while
Google Talk is running in the background. You can choose between "Yes" or
"No" by pressing "Space".
C. Message sound Notification: You choose whether you hear notification
sounds to alert you to Google Talk events. You can choose between "Yes"
and "No".
2) Confirm: Use this button to save your settings.
3) Cancel: Use this button to close the dialog without saving your changes
and return to the "Contact list".
10.3.7.4 Path Options
423
The "Path Options" Allows you to set the path for saving conversations, file
transfers, and temporary storage. To open the "path options" dialog, press
"Alt-p" or press "Enter" on the "Path Options" item from the "Options" menu.
The "Path Options" dialog consists of 5 controls. Move among the controls
by pressing "Tab" or "Shift-tab".
1) Set download path: A button to set the path for saving messages. If you
press "Enter" on the button, the "Set path" dialog appears. Navigate to your
desired folder and press "Enter".
2) Set temporary path: A button to set the path for saving temporary files. If
you press "Enter" on this button, the "Set path" dialog appears. Navigate to
your desired folder and press "Enter".
3) Saving download path: A button to set the path for saving received files. If
you press "Enter" on this button, the "Set path" dialog appears. Navigate to
your desired folder and press "Enter".
4) Confirm: Use this button to save your settings.
5) Cancel: Use this button to close the "Path Options" dialog without saving
changes and return to the "Contact list".
10.4 Sense Chat
The Sense Chat program operates in a similar fashion to text chatting with
Google talk or MSN Messenger, except that the connection occurs between
2 Sense notetakers via Bluetooth. This means, rather than sending
messages over the internet, messages are transmitted directly from one
notetaker to the other via the Bluetooth connection. While any 2 people with
any 2 Sense notetakers can use the program, this program is especially
useful for the Deaf-Blind, as 2 Deaf-Blind users can communicate face-toface using 2 Voice Sense notetakers to type messages, and can read
received messages on the Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille)s.
To launch Sense Chat, use the Up or Down arrow to navigate to “Sense
Chat” in the “Social Networking” menu, and press “Enter”. Or, press “c” to
execute Sense Chat directly from the “Social Networking” menu. You can
424
also launch “Sense Chat” from anywhere on the unit by pressing “WindowsC”.
Please ensure that Bluetooth is turned on before attempting to connect with
another notetaker via Sense Chat. If Bluetooth has not been activated and
you try to connect with another notetaker, you are prompted, “Please turn on
Bluetooth”.
10.4.1 Connecting the Notetakers
When “Sense Chat” is launched, you are placed in the conection options
menu. The menu contains 2 options, “Bluetooth Serial Port(Send)” and
“Bluetooth Serial Port(receive)”. For connection to be successful, one Sense
notetaker must choose “Send” and the other must choose “Receive”. Once
you and your partner have agreed which option each of you will take,
navigate to your choice using the Up or Down Arrow and press “Enter”. Or,
press “t” for “Send” or “r” for “Receive”.
When the “Receive” option is chosen, the unit announces and displays
“Waiting….” And waits for the send device to request a pairing code.
When the “Send” option is chosen, the unit announces and displays,
“Searching forVoice Sense notetaker”. Full cells appear on the Braille display
(When connected to SyncBraille) to note progress, and when the search is
finished, a list of available devices is displayed. Use the Up or Down arrow to
navigate the devices in the list, and press “Enter” on the one with which you
wish to connect. You are then prompted to “Enter pin code”. Enter a 4 digit
number of your choosing, and press “Enter”.
The “Receive” device is then prompted to, “Enter pin code”. Please enter the
same 4 digit number in to the “Receive” device and press “Enter”.
If the pin codes match, the “Send” device announces and displays,
“Authentication code accepted.”
Shortly, both devices should announce and display “connected”. Both
devices also play a chime indicating connection success. Immediately after
the “connected” message and connection sound, both devices are placed in
the Chat window.
425
10.4.2 Using the Chat Window
The “Chat” dialog consists of 3 items: the “Sen Message” edit box, the
“Received Message” multi-line edit box, and the “Close” button. Use “Tab”
and “Shift-Tab” to navigate among the items in the dialog.
Once the Sense notetakers are connected and both notetakers display the
“Chat” dialog, both users can send and receive messages. To send a
message, type it in to the “Send MSG” edit box, and press “Enter” to send
the message. By default, when a message is sent, a sound plays to indicate
the message was sent successfully.
By default, when a message is received, it automatically appears, and
remains displayed until you begin typing a new message. The message is
also spoken, and a sound alerts you as well. You can configure how you
wish to have the Voice Sense alert and act when sending and receiving
messages in the “Options” menu described later in this section.
To view the message history, tab to the “received Msg” multi-line edit box.
The messages appear in a list in the order in which they were written.
Messages you have sent are labeled, “Sent msg”, and messages you have
received are labeled, “receive msg”. Use the Up and Down arrows to move
among the items in the list.
To exit Sense Chat, tab to the “Close” button and press “Enter” or press “AltF4”.
10.4.3 The Sense Chat File Menu
The “Sense Chat” program contains 2 menus: “File” and “Options”.
The “File” menu contains 3 items: “Save”, “Save As”, and “Close.
The “Save” option allows you to save a log of your current conversation. To
activate “Save”, press “Alt” to open the menu. Use the Down arrow to
navigate to “Save” and press “Enter”. Or, you can press “Control-s” directly
from the Chat Window.
The “Save” dialog is similar to that which exists in the Word Processor. It
contains a “File name” edit box, a “Confirm” button, a “Cancel” button, and a
“File list” control. By default, the chat log is named “chatting.txt” and is saved
in the “My Documents” folder. You can type a new name in the edit box, and
choose a different location in the file list control. To save the file press “Enter”
426
or tab to the “confirm” button and press “Enter. To cancel saving, tab to the
“Cancel” button and press “Enter”, or press “Alt-f4”.
The “Save As” option operates exactly as does the “Save” option described
above, but can be used to save the currently saved chat log under a different
name or in a different location. To activate “Save As”, press “Alt” to open the
menu. Navigate to “File” and press “Enter”. Navigate to “Save As” and press
“Enter”. Or, you can type “Alt-s” to activate “Save As” directly from the Chat
Window.
Use the “Close” option in the “File” menu to close “Sense Chat” or type “AltF4”.
10.4.4 Sense Chat Options
The “Options” menu allows you to set the way you want sense Chat to
behave in regards to alerts and messages. To Bring up the “Options” dialog,
press “Alt” to open the menu. Use the Down arrow to navigate to “Options”,
and press “Enter”.
The “Options” dialog contains 3 controls: the Settings list, a “confirm” button,
and a “Cancel” button. Move among the controls using “Tab” and “Shift-Tab”.
The Settings list contains the following items: “Message Alert”, “Received
message alert setting”, “Send message alert setting”, “Use alert when
connected to user”, “Use alert when disconnected from user”, “Use alert
when sending message”, and “Use alert when receiving message”. Use the
Up and Down arrows to navigate among the settings in the list. Use “Space”
to change the value of the setting.
The “Message Alert” setting allows you to choose whether you want Sense
Chat to alert and display messages when they are received, or simply to
alert you that they are there. If you choose “Alert and display”, and you are
either typing a message in Sense Chat or running sense Chat in the
background while you perform another task, you are interrupted, and the
chat message is displayed. In this case, pressing any key returns you to your
previous task. If you set this option to “Alert only”, a sound is played when a
Sense Chat message is received, however, the message is not displayed.
The “Received message alert setting” allows you to define how you wish to
be alerted of incoming messages. You can choose among 2 different sounds
(Sound 1 and Sound 2),. Press “Space” to cycle among the choices.
427
The “Send message alert setting” is similar to the “received message alert
setting” described above, but applies to the alert you receive when you send
a message successfully.
The “Use alert when connected to user” setting allows you to define how the
Voice Sense behaves when you have successfully connected to another
Sense notetaker user. You can set this option to “Sound”, or “Off” in which
case you will receive no alert other than the brief message that is displayed
when connection is successful. Press “Space” to cycle among the choices.
The “Use alert when disconnected from user” setting is similar to the setting
above, but applies to how the Voice Sense behaves when you are
disconnected from the Sense notetaker user you are currently chatting with.
The final two settings allow you to choose whether you want any alert when
sending or receiving messages. The choices are “On”, and “Off”. Press
“Space” to adjust the setting.
When you have finished setting your preferences, press “Enter” to save the
settings, or tab to the “Confirm” button and press “Enter”. If you do not want
to save your changes, tab to the “Cancel” button and press “Enter” or press
“Alt-F4”.
10.5 Hot Keys in Social Networking
10.5.1 Twitter
Sign Out: Ctrl-g
Personal Information: Ctrl-I
Save Current Timeline: Alt-s
Home Timeline: Ctrl-h
User Timeline: Ctrl-u
Current User Timeline: Alt-u
Mention Timeline: Ctrl-m
Retweet Of Me: Alt-o
List Timeline: Alt-P
Favorite Timeline: Control-L
428
Tweet: Ctrl-t
Remove Tweet: Delete
Retweet: Ctrl-e
Reply: Ctrl-y
Add To Favorite: Ctrl-v
Favorite List: Ctrl-l
Send Direct Message: Ctrl-s
Sent Direct Message: Alt-m
Received Direct Message: Alt-r
Follow User: Alt-a
Following: Alt-l
Followers: Alt-e
Global Search: Ctrl-f
User Search: Alt-f
Search Word List: Alt-w
Find Tweets from the Current Timeline: Control-Alt-F
Find Again Tweets from Current Timeline: Alt-Shift-F
List Manager: Control-P
Add User to List: Control-K
List User View: Control-J
List View in Current Tweet: F3
Next List: Ctrl-n
Refresh: Ctrl-r
Exit: Alt-Fbled
Escape: Esc key
Move to the next tweet: Down arrow
Move to the previous tweet: Up arrow
Move to the first tweet on the refreshing list: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last tweet on the refreshing list: Ctrl-End
Move to the previous 32 list: Fn-Un arrow
Move to the next 32 list: Fn-Down arrow
10.5.2 Google talk
429
File Menu Commands
Sign out: Ctrl-l
Export Contact Lists: Alt-x
Import Contact Lists: Alt-i
Exit: Alt-F4
Action Menu Commands
Start Chat: Ctrl-s
Start Voice Chat: Ctrl-h
Send File: Alt-f
Move to Recent Chat: Ctrl-t
Manage Chat: Ctrl-m
Contact Menu Commands
Add Contact: Alt-q
Delete Contact: Delete
Block Contact: Alt-b
Manage Block List: Alt-m
Contact Information: Ctrl-i
Manage Contact List: Ctrl-p
Option Menu Commands
My Status Options: Alt-u
Action Options: Alt-a
Alert Options: Alt-o
Path Options: Alt-p
Chat Window Menus
File Menu Commands
Save Conversation: Alt-s
Close Chat: Alt-F4
Edit Menu Commands
Cut: Ctrl-x
430
Copy: Ctrl-c
Delete: Delete
Paste: Ctrl-v
Start Selection: Ctrl-b
Select All: Ctrl-a
Find: Ctrl-f
Find Again: F3
Action Menu Commands
Start Chat: Ctrl-s
Start Voice Chat: Ctrl-h
Stop Voice Chat: Esc key
Send File: Alt-f
View Contact List: Ctrl-t
Manage Chat: Ctrl-m
Move to Previous Chat: Ctrl-Shift-Tab
Move to Next Chat: Ctrl-Tab
Navigation keys in Google Talk.
Move to the previous item: Up arrow
Move to the next item: Down arrow
Move to the previous 32-items: Fn-Up arrow
Move to the next 32-items: Fn-Down arrow
Move to the first item: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last item: Ctrl-End
10.5.3 Sense Chat
Chat Window Commands:
Move among the controls: Tab and Shift-Tab
Send message: type message and press Enter
Move among messages in history: Up and Down arrows
Move to top of list: Control-Home
Move to bottom of message list: Control-end
Save conversation: Control-s
Save conversation under different name: Alt-s
431
Start selection: Control-b
Select all: Control-a
Copy: Control-c
Paste: Control-v
Exit Sense Chat: Alt-F4
Sense Chat Options commands:
Move among the Controls: Tab and shift-Tab
Move among items in the settings list: Up and down arrows
Change the value of a setting: Space
Save settings: Enter
Cancel saving settings: Escape or Alt-F4
432
11. EXTRAS
11.1 Sense Dictionary
The Sense Dictionary is an add-on piece of software for the Sense
notetakers available for purchase from HIMS. The basic package
includes the New Oxford American Dictionary, and the Concise Oxford
American Thesaurus. You can also purchase the following additional
bilingual dictionaries: the Concise Oxford Paravia Italian Dictionary, the
Concise Oxford Hachette French Dictionary, the Concise Oxford Spanish
Dictionary, and the Oxford Essential Arabic Dictionary.
Note: If you have not purchased the dictionary package containing the
dictionary data and license key, pressing "Enter" on the Sense Dictionary
option in the "Extras" menu results in the message, "Authentication
failed". For pricing and purchasing information, please contact HIMS, Inc.
Call us by phone at 888-520-4467, or e-mail [email protected]
11.2 BookShare Download
The “BookShare Download” program provides direct search and
download access to the repository of books and periodicals available
from www.bookshare.org.
11.2.1 What is BookShare?
BookShare is a repository of books and periodicals in accessible formats
containing over 150,000 titles at the time of this writing. The collection is
increased through the work of volunteers who scan and proofread books,
federal grants funding the purchasing and digitizing of various types of
433
material, and contributions from book publishers of electronic versions of
their published texts.
BookShare titles are available in various formats including DAISY, BRF,
NIMAC, and audio. The Voice Sense QWERTY supports access to the
DAISY and BRF formats via “BookShare Download”.
To become a BookShare member, you must complete BookShare’s
application process, including providing proof of reading disability, and
pay the associated yearly membership fees. Payment can be monitary, or
users can earn credit toward their membership fees by scanning material
for the collection and/or proofreading material scanned by others. While
the majority of the BookShare titles require you to have a membership to
access them, several thousand titles in the collection are public domain
works, and thus, can be accessed by anyone, regardless of whether you
have a bookShare membership.
For more information about BookShare, the application process, or the
collection, please visit www.bookshare.org.
11.2.2 Executing BookShare Download
To open the “BookShare Download” program, from the Main Menu, use
“Down arrow” to navigate to “extras” and press “Enter” or press “x” to
jump to and open the “extras” menu. In the “Extras” menu, use “Down
arrow” to navigate to “BookShare Download” and press “Enter”, or press
“b” to jump to and open “BookShare Download” directly from the “Extras”
menu.
You can launch “BookShare Download” from anywhere on the unit by
pressing “Windows-K”.
When you first open “BookShare Download”, you are placed in the “login
Settings” dialog in which you can enter your BookShare account
434
information. Press “Tab” and “Shift-Tab” to move among the items in the
“Login Settings” dialog.
The “login Settings’ dialog contains the following items: “Login ID”
computer edit box, “Login password” computer edit box, “anonymous
Mode” checkbox, “Save” button, and “Cancel” button.
Enter your BookShare user account ID and password in to the computer
edit boxes. To save the information, press “Enter” or Tab to the “Save”
button and press “Enter”. If you do not have a BookShare account, you
can still access the public domain material in “anonymous Mode”. To
connect to “BookShare Download” using “Anonymous Mode”, leave the
computer edit boxes for ID and password blank, and press “Space” on
the “Anonymous Mode” check box. Press “Enter” to save the setting, or
Tab to the “Save” button and press “Enter”.
If you choose to log in using “Anonymous Mode” you are warned that
there will be download restrictions when using Anonymous Mode. When
you have saved your login information, you are placed in the main
“BookShare Download” dialog on the “Select Search Mode” combo box.
11.2.3 The main BookShare download Dialog
The “BookShare Download” dialog contains 7 items:
1. “Select Search Mode” combo box: you can choose to search “Books”,
“periodicals”, or your download “History”. Use “Space” to change the
value of the setting.
2. “Select Search Method” combo box: (only appears when “Books” is
chosen from the “Select search Mode” combo box. You can choose
to search BookShare’s book collection by word (Title, Author, or
ISBN), by category or to search the full text of the materials in the
collection. Use “Space” to change the value of the setting.
435
3. Search term Edit box: If you have chosen to search by periodical, you
are asked to enter the “periodical ID”. If you have chosen to search
the book collection for a title, author, or ISBN, the edit box asks for
“title, Author, or ISBN”. If you have chosen to do a full text search,
you are asked to “Enter text”.
4. “Search” button: Press “Enter” on this button to initiate a search.
5. “Login Settings” dialog” Opens the same dialog as described above,
allows you to change your BookShare account information or switch
to “Anonymous mode”. You can open this dialog using “”control-s”.
6. “Options” button” Opens the “Options” dialog where you can set
default download type, download location, and whether the Voice
Sense QWERTY automatically unpacks BookShare books. You can
also open this dialog using “Control--o”.
7. “Exit” button: Exits the “BookShare Download” program. You can also
press “Alt-F4”.
Press “Tab” and “Shift-Tab” to move among the items in the dialog.
11.2.4 Searching for Books
When you choose “Books” from the “Select Search Mode” combo box
described above, the next item in the dialog is “Select Search Method”.
Press “Space” to choose between “Search word”, “Category search” and
“Search full text”.
When you choose to “Search word”, the next item in the dialog is an edit
box in to which you should enter a keyword for which you want title,
author, or ISBN results. When you have entered the word you want to
search, press “Enter” or Tab to the “Search” button, and press “Enter”.
If you choose “Category Search” the next item in the dialog is a list box
containing the 36 available categories. Press “Up arrow” and “Down
arrow” to navigate the category list. Press “Enter” to initiate the search, or
Tab to the “Search” button and press “Enter”.
436
When you choose “Search full text”, you are presented with an edit box
just like when choosing “Search Word”, but, instead of entering author,
title, or ISBN information, you should enter a term by which you want to
search the full text of the books in the collection.
The Voice Sense QWERTY announces, “searching…” and progress
beeps are heard as the unit searches the BookShare library for items that
match your search terms or chosen category. When the search is
complete, you are placed in a list of results that match your search.
Navigate the list using “Up arrow” and “Down arrow”.
The “BookShare Download” dialog now contains 3 additional items: the
“Search Results” listbox you are now in, a “Detail information” button”,
and a “Download” button. If the results list contains more than 250 items,
an additional button, “Next list”, appears after the results list in the tab
order, also accessed by pressing “Control-n”.
Use “Up arrow” and “Down arrow” to navigate the list of items in the
“Search Results” list. If you press “Enter on the “Detail information”
button, or press its shortcut key, “Control-I”, you are placed in a dialog
providing more information about the book.
The “Detail Information” dialog contains the following items:
A list box containing, “title”, “Author”, “ISBN”, “Brief Synopsis”, “Complete
Synopsis”, “Category”, “Language”, “Publisher”, “publish date”, “Quality”,
and “Free”.
“close” button: closes the “Detail information” dialog, and returns you to
the main dialog.
The “Detail information” listbox contains the following information:
“Title” shows the complete title of the book.
“author” lists the author or authors of the work.
“ISBN” lists the International Standard Book Number.
“Brief Synopsis” gives a short or partial synopsis of the book.
“Complete synopsis” provides a more detailed overview of the work.
437
“Category” lists the category the book is logged under in the BookShare
library.
“Language” lists the language in which the book is printed.
“Publisher” lists the publisher of the book.
“publish date” lists the copyright date of the work.
“Quality” refers to the quality of the scanned material.
“free” shows whether the book is part of the free, public domain
collection, or requires a membership to download (indicated by “not
free”).
You can download a book in the “search Results” list either by pressing
“Enter” on the book title in the list, or by navigating to the “Download”
button and pressing “Enter”. If you are logged in in “anonymous Mode”
and pres “Enter” if the book is not part of the public domain collection, the
Voice Sense announces and displays, “This content is not free” and
returns you to the “Search Results” list.
11.2.5 Searching for periodicals
If you select “periodicals” from the “select search Mode” combo box, the
next item in the dialog is an edit box in to which you can enter a
“periodical ID”. Each periodical in the BookShare collection contains a
numerical ID you can use to quickly access it. Enter the ID in the edit box,
and press “Enter” to initiate the periodical search, or tab to the “Search”
button and press “enter”. When the search is complete, a list of available
issues of that periodical is displayed.
If you do not know the ID of the periodical you wish to find, simply leave
the edit box blank and press “Enter”. If you have typed nothing in to the
edit box, the entire list of available periodicals is displayed in alphabetical
order. Use “Up arrow” and “Down arrow” to navigate the list. Press
“Enter” on your desired periodical, and the list of available issues for that
periodical is displayed.
438
The issues list also contains a “detail Information” button for each item.
The “Detail information” for periodical issues contains the following
information:
“Title”: the title of the periodical issue.
“Edition”: The edition date of the periodical issue.
“Revision”: the number of the revision of the online version of the
periodical posted to Bookshare.
“Revision time”: the time the most current revision was posted to
BookShare. (Useful if a revision contains errors in DAISY structure or
text, as you can determine whether you have downloaded the most
recent version)
“Category”: the type of periodical (newspaper, magazine, etc).
As with a book, to download an issue of a periodical in the list, simply
press “Enter” on it, or Tab to the “Download” button, and press “Enter”.
11.2.6 Searching History
To search your download history, choose “History” from the “Search Mode”
combo box, Tab to the “Search” button, and press “Enter”. You are
presented with a book list just like the one that appears when you receive
results in the “Books” search mode. The book list contains the list of books
you’ve downloaded in the last month from any device you have connected
to BookShare. As with the results from the “Books” search, you can get
detailed information for a book and download it.
11.2.7 Option Settings
The “Options” dialog allows you to set items such as download location,
default download type, and whether the Voice Sense QWERTY
automatically unpacks the BookShare book or periodical.
To open the “Options” dialog, Tab to the “Options” button and press
“Enter” or press “Control-o” to open the “Options” dialog directly from
439
anywhere in “BookShare Download”. The “Options” dialog contains the
following items:
Option settings list: contains “Default download type” and “Auto unzip”
on/off.
“default download folder” button: opens a dialog for selecting default
download location.
“Save” button: Press “Enter” on this button to save your settings.
“Cancel” button: Press Enter on this button to exit the “Options” dialog
without saving your changes.
The option Settings list contains 2 items: “Default Download Type” and
“Auto unzip” on/off. Use “Up arrow” and “Down arrow” to move among the
settings in the list. Press “Space” to change the value of each setting.
There are 3 options for the default download type: “DAISY”, “BRF”, and
“Prompt”. If this option is set to “DAISY”, whenever you initiate the
downloading of a book or periodical, the DAISY version is automatically
downloaded. In the same way, if you choose “BRF”, the BRF version is
automatically downloaded. If you set this option to “Prompt”, each time
you initiate a download, you are prompted for the download type.
The “Auto unzip” on/off option lets you choose whether you want the
Voice Sense QWERTY to automatically unpack books or periodicals
when they are downloaded. If this is set to “on”, when the download
completes, the Voice Sense QWERTY announces, “unzipping
bookname….” And automatically unpacks the contents and places it in a
folder with the same name as the zip file. If you set this to “Off”, you are
returned to the main dialog immediately after downloading, and you must
extract the zip file manually from the “File Manager”.
The “Default Download folder” button opens a File Manager dialog in
which you can choose the default download location for your BookShare
material. For example, you may wish to create a “DAISY” folder and have
all your BookShare material automatically download to that location. Use
normal file/folder navigation commands to select the folder in which you
440
want BookShare material to be stored, and press “Space” to select your
desired folder. Press “Enter” to save the location and return to the
“Options” dialog. By default, the “Default Download Folder” is set to
“flashdisk/downloads”.
When you have chosen your desired settings, press “Enter” to save them,
or Tab to the “Save” button, and press “Enter”. If you want to exit the
“Options” dialog without saving your settings, press “Enter” on the
“Cancel” button, or press “Alt-F4”.
11.3 Google Maps
11.3.1. What is “Google Maps”?
Google Maps is web-based route planning software, used to provide you
text directions for navigating from one place to another, using a
combination of Internet-based maps and GPS location information. You
can use Google Maps to plan a walk to a store 2 blocks away, or a drive
to a relative’s house in another state.
11.3.1.1 Terms used in Google Maps
The following terms are used in the Google Maps application and also in
the subsequent documentation:
POI: Point of Interest, a business or location falling under 1 of many
categories such as “restaurant” or “medical clinic”.
Category: Type of business or location being searched, for example,
florist, movie rental, contractor, beauty, etc.
Start position: The position at which the route begins.
Destination: The position at which you intend to arrive at the end of the
route.
Waypoint: a point between the start position and destination at which you
intend to stop for any reason.
Route: the travel directions from the start position to the destination.
441
11.3.2. Pairing a GPS Receiver
The Voice Sense QWERTY contains an internal GPS receiver. However,
sometimes you may wish to use an external Bluetooth receiver as it may
provide a stronger signal in areas where satellite reception is weak. To
pair your Voice Sense with a Bluetooth receiver, follow these steps:
1. Make sure your Bluetooth receiver is powered on and is discoverable.
2. On the Voice Sense, from the Main menu, press “l” to launch the
Bluetooth Manager.
3. The Bluetooth Manager automatically begins searching for devices.
While the search is performed, progress beeps are heard and
progress is displayed on the Braille display (When connected to
SyncBraille) in the form of full cells.
4. When the search is complete, the names of the available Bluetooth
devices are announced, and you are placed in the Bluetooth devices
list.
5. Navigate to your Bluetooth receiver using “Up arrow” and “Down
arrow” and press “Enter” on your receiver’s Bluetooth name.
6. The Voice Sense QWERTY announces “Scanning for services”.
7. When the scan is complete, the services list is shown.
8. Navigate to “Serial” and press “Enter”.
9. If your Bluetooth receiver requires a pin code, you are asked for this.
Enter it and press “Enter”.
10. The Voice Sense QWERTY should connect to your receiver, and
announce, “Connected”.
11.3.3. Executing “Google Maps”
The “Google Maps” application is located in the “Extras” menu of the
Voice Sense QWERTY. To open “Google Maps”, press “x” from the Main
Menu, or navigate to the “extra’s” menu, and press “Enter”. From the
“Extras” menu, use “Up arrow” or “Down arrow” to navigate to “Google
442
Maps” and press “Enter”, or press “g” to jump to and open “Google
Maps”.
You can launch “Google Maps” from anywhere on the unit by pressing
“Windows-P”.
When “Google Maps” is launched, the Voice Sense QWERTY
immediately attempts to connect to the GPS receiver. If GPS connection
is successful, the unit announces, “Successfully connected GPS,
searching for location”. When your position is acquired, the unit says,
“Current position information:” and announces your current position. If the
GPS signal is too low to acquire a position, the unit says, “GPS signal
strength is low”, and no position information is given.
The position information displayed
information”, “Latitude”, and “Longitude”.
includes,
“current
position
11.3.3.1 Google Maps main window.
The main “Google Maps” dialog consists of 4 areas: “current position
information”, “Start position”, “Destination information”, and “Near POI’s”.
Move among the 4 areas of the dialog by pressing “Tab” and “Shift-tab.
Use the following keystrokes to navigate the Google Maps main window:
1) Move to next information element: Down arrow
2) Move to previous information element: Up arrow
3) Move to first information element: Home
4) Move to last information element: End
5) Move between
“Current position information” to “start
position/Destination Information”: Tab/Shift-Tab
6) Open program menu: Alt
The Google Maps Menu consists of 5 submenus: “Search”, Position
Setting”, “User POI’s”, “Route”, and “Options”.
443
11.3.3.2 Search
The “Search” menu allows you to search for locations by address (Search
for Address) or points of interest (Advanced POI Search).
11.3.3.2.1 Search address
You can search for a location using a specific address using the “Search
for Address” item in the “Search” menu. To open the “Search for Address”
dialog, press “Alt”to open the “Google Maps” menu. Navigate to “Search”
and press “Enter” or press “s” to open the “Search” menu. Press “Enter
on “Search for Address” or press “a” to open the “Search for Address”
dialog. You can also open the “Search for “Address” dialog by pressing
“Control-f” from the “Google Maps” main window.
The “Search for Address” dialog consists of 9 controls and you can move
among them with “tab” and “Shift-tab” .
1) Area selection: dialog for choosing the State and city you wish to
search.
2) Street address: An edit box for typing the exact street address of the
location you want to search.
3) Search button: Press “Enter on this button to initiate the search.
4) Address information: (appears after a search has been performed)
shows the address of the point of interest that is closest to the location
you typed.
5) Set as Start Position button: Press “Enter” on this button to set the
address in “Address Information” as your route’s start position. You can
also activate this button by pressing “Alt-s”.
6) Set as destination button: Press “Enter” on this button to set the address
in “Address information” as the destination, or end point of your route.
You can also activate this button by pressing “Alt-d”.
444
7) Set as Waypoint button: Pres “Enter” on this button to set the address in
“Address information” as a “Waypoint” or stop in the middle of your
route. You can also activate this button by pressing “Alt-w”.
8) Add to User POI button: Press “Enter” on this button to add the address
in “Address information” to your personal points of interest. You can also
activate this button by pressing “Alt-u”.
9) Close button: Press “Enter” on this button to close the “Search for
Address” dialog. You can also exit the dialog by pressing “Escape”or
“Alt-F4”.
Note) If there are no search results, “Address information”, “Set as Start
position”, “Set as destination”, “Set as Waypoint”, and “Add to User POI”
controls do not appear.
To search for an address, please follow these steps:
1. Open the “Search for Address” dialog as described above.
2. If the Area Selection is as you desire, Tab to the Address field. if you
need to change the area selection, press “Enter” to open the “Area
selection” dialog.
3. In the “Area Selection” dialog, Use “Up arrow” and “Down arrow” to
move among the items in the “State” and “City” combo boxes.
4. Tab to the “Confirm” button and press “Enter” to return to the “Search
for Address” dialog.
5. Tab to the “address” edit box, and type the street address of the
location you want to search.
6. Tab to the “Search” button and press “Enter” to initiate the search.
Once the results are displayed, move among them using “Up arrow” and
“Down arrow”. Use the buttons described above to set your desired
location as “Start position”, “Waypoint”, “Destination”, or “User POI”.
445
11.3.3.2.2 Search by category
You can use the “Advanced POI Search” option in the “Search” menu to
search for a location according to a specific type of business or
establishment by specifying a category by which to search.
To open the “Advanced POI Search” dialog, press “Alt”to open the
“Google Maps” menu. Navigate to “Search” and press “Enter” or press “s”
to open the “Search” menu. Press “Enter on “Advanced POI Search” or
press “f ” to open the “Search for Address” dialog. You can also open the
“Advanced Poi Search” dialog by pressing “Alt-f ” from the “Google Maps”
main window.
The “Advanced POI Search” dialog contains the following controls:
1) Area Selection: a dialog for choosing the city and state in which you
want to search.
2) Category Selection combo box: A combo box from which to choose the
type/category of POI for which you want to search. Navigate the items in
the combo box using “Up arrow” and “Down arrow”.
3) POI range edit box: enter the range (radius) in number of feet to define
the size of the area you want to search.
4) POI Name edit box: If you know all or part of the name of the
establishment for which you want to search, type it in this edit box.
5) Search button: Press “Enter” on this button to initiate the search.
6) POIs list box: (appears after the search is completed) list of points of
interest matching the search. Navigate the list using “Up arrow” and
“Down arrow”.
7) POI Information list box: Lists the POI name, type, phone number, and
address. Use “Up arrow” and “Down arrow”to navigate among the
information elements.
8) Set as Start Position button: Press “Enter on this button to set the
currently focused POI as the start position of your route. You can also
activate this button by pressing “Alt-s”.
446
9) Set as destination button: Press “Enter on this button to set the currently
focused POI as the endpoint (destination) of your route. You can also
activate this button by pressing “Alt-d”.
10) Set as Waypoint button: press “Enter” on this button to set the currently
focused POI as a Waypoint, or stop in the middle of your route. You can
also activate this button using “Alt-w”.
11) Add to User POI button: Press “Enter” on this button to add the
currently focused POI to your user points of interest. You can also
activate this button by pressing “Alt-u”.
12) Close button: Press “enter” on this button to close the “Advanced POI
Search” dialog and return to the “Google Maps” main window. You can
also exit the dialog by pressing “Escape” or “Alt-F4”.
Note) If there are no search results, “POI list”, “POI Information”, “Set as
start position”, “Set as destination”, “Set as Waypoint”, and “Add to User
POI” controls do not appear.
11.3.3.3 Setting Position
The “Position Setting” menu contains the following items: “Add New User
POI”, “Synchronize GPS and start Position”, and “Location information”,
11.3.3.3.1 Add new User POI.
The “Add New User POI” option in the “Position Setting” menu allows you
to save your current position as a point of interest.
To open the “New User POI” dialog, press “Alt” to open the menu, and use
“Down arrow” to navigate to “Position Setting” and press “Enter”: then press
“Enter” on “New User Poi”.
The “Add New User POI” dialog contains 9 controls. you can move among
them with “tab” and “Shift-tab” .
447
1) POI name edit box: An edit box in to which you can type a name for the
point of interest if it is not already filled in.
2) Latitude static box: shows the latitude of the POI.
3) Longitude static box: lists the longitude of the POI.
4) Phone edit box: an edit box for entering the phone number of the
location.
5) Address edit box: An edit box for entering the street address for the POI.
6) POI explanation edit box: An edit box in to which you can type
information you wish to remember or associate with this point of interest.
7) Select Media file button: Press “Enter” on this button to open the “Select
Media File” dialog. You are placed in a File Manager control in which
you can use normal file/folder navigation commands to access any
media file you wish to associate with the POI. Press “Space” on the
desired file to select it, and press “Enter”.
8) Add button: Press “Enter” on this button to add the point of interest to
your saved POI’s.
9) Close button: Press “Enter” on this button to exit the “New User POI”
dialog.
11.3.3.3.2 Synchronize GPS and Start Position
This menu item option does just what its name suggests, it synchronizes
the current GPS location to the start position of the current route.
To synchronize your GPS location with the start position, press “Alt” to
open the menu, and use “Down arrow” to navigate to “Position Setting”
and press “Enter”: then press “Enter” on “Synchronize GPS with Start
Position”. You can also press “s” to synchronize the GPS location with the
Start Position directly from the “Google Maps” main window.
11.3.3.3.3 location Information.
448
The “Location Information” dialog provides you information about your
current position, and allows you to set the current position as the Start
Position, destination, Waypoint, or view near POI’s.
To open the “Location Information” dialog, press “Alt” to open the menu,
and use “Down arrow” to navigate to “Position Setting” and press “Enter”:
then press “Enter” on “Location Information”. You can also open the
“Location information” dialog directly from the “Google Maps” main
window by pressing “Control-i“
The “Location information” dialog contains 5 controls. Move among the
controls using “Tab”, and “Shift-Tab”.
1) Current Position Information static box: contains the address of your
current position.
2) Near POI list box: Contains the list of POI’s near your current location.
Use “Up arrow” and “Down arrow” to navigate among the POI’s in the
list.
3) Set as Destination button: Press “Enter” on this button to set your
current position as the endpoint (destination) of your route. You can
also activate this button by pressing ““Alt-d”.
4) Add to Waypoint button: Press “Enter on this button to set the current
position as a Waypoint or stop in the middle of your current route. You
can also activate this button by pressing “Alt-w”
5) Close button: Press “Enter” on this button to close the “Location
Information” dialog. You can also press “Escape” or “Alt-F4”to exit the
dialog and return to the main window.
11.3.3.4 User POI
The “User POI’s” menu contains 3 items: “User POI’s Manager”, “Save
User POI’s,” and “Load User POI’s.
11.3.3.4.1 User POI’s Manager
449
The “User POI’s Manager” allows you to view previously created POI’s as
well as add, modify, and delete POI’s.
To open the “User POI’s Manager”, press “Alt” to open the “Google Maps”
menu. Navigate to “User POI’s” using “Up arrow” or “Down arrow” and
press “Enter” or press “u ” to quickly jump to and open the “User POI’s”
menu. Navigate to “User POI’s Manager” and press “Enter”. You can also
open the “User POI’s Manager” directly from the “Google Maps” main
window by pressing “Control-u”.
The “User POI’s Manager” dialog contains 9 controls. You can move
among the controls using “Tab” or “Shift-Tab”.
1. POI list box: the list of currently saved user POI’s. Navigate among the
POI’s using “Up arrow” and “Down arrow”.
2. POI Information list box: Contains POI name, Latitude, Longitude,
Phone, Address, POI Explanation, and Media File. Move among the
various information elements using “Up arrow” and “Down arrow”.
3. Set as Start Position button: Press “Enter on this button to set the
currently focused POI as the start position of your route. You can also
activate this button by pressing “Alt-s”.
4. Set as destination button: Press “Enter on this button to set the
currently focused POI as the endpoint (destination) of your route. You
can also activate this button by pressing “Alt-d”.
5. Set as Waypoint button: press “Enter” on this button to set the currently
focused POI as a Waypoint, or stop in the middle of your route. You
can also activate this button using “Alt-w”.
6. Add button: Press “Enter” on this button to open the “Add New User
POI” dialog” as described above. You can also activate this button by
pressing “Alt-I”.
7. Modify button: Opens the “Modify User POI” dialog. This dialog
consists of the same controls as does the “Add User POI” dialog with
the information of the currently focused POI already filled in. You can
also activate this button by pressing “Alt-m”.
450
8. Delete button: Press “Enter” on this button to delete the currently
focused POI. You can also activate this button by pressing “Del” from
the POI’s list.
9. Close button: Press “Enter” on this button to close the “User POI’s
Manager”. You can also exit the dialog by pressing “Escape” or “AltF4”.
11.3.3.4.2 Adding a User POI
You can add POI’s in two ways:
1) You can add POI’s from “Google Maps” search results as described
above.
2) You can add a POI manually using the “User POI’s Manager” as
described in the previous section.
No matter which way you access the “New User POI” dialog, it contains
the same controls:
1) POI name edit box: An edit box in to which you can type a name for
the point of interest if it is not already filled in.
2) Latitude static box: shows the latitude of the POI.
3) Longitude static box: lists the longitude of the POI.
4) Phone edit box: an edit box for entering the phone number of the
location.
5) Address edit box: An edit box for entering the street address for the
POI.
6) POI explanation edit box: An edit box in to which you can type
information you wish to remember or associate with this point of
interest.
7) Select Media file button: Press “Enter” on this button to open the
“Select Media File” dialog. You are placed in a File Manager control in
which you can use normal file/folder navigation commands to access
any media file you wish to associate with the POI. Press “Space” on
the desired file to select it, and press “Enter”.
451
8) Add button: Press “Enter” on this button to add the point of interest to
your saved POI’s.
9) Close button: Press “Enter” on this button to exit the “New User POI”
dialog.
11.3.3.4.3 Managing User POI’s
In addition to the “User POI Manager”, the “User POI’s” menu also
contains “Save User POI’s”, and “Load User POI’s”. These 2 options
allow you to import and export POI information to and from CSV (comma
separated value) files.
To export your saved User POI’s as a CSV file, choose “Save User POI’s
from the “User POI’s” menu, or press “Alt-s” from the main “Google Maps”
window. You are placed in an edit box and prompted for the name of your
file.
The “Save User POI’s” dialog contains 4 items:
1) File list control: A normal File Manager control in which you can
navigate to choose the location in which you wish to save your POI
file.
2) File Name edit box: Type your desired name in computer Braille.
3) Confirm button: Press “Enter” on this button to save the file.
4) Cancel button: Press “Enter” on this button to cancel saving of the
file.
To load a User POI file, navigate to “Load User POI’s” in the User POI’s”
submenu of the “Google Maps” menu. When you press “Enter” on “Load
User POI’s”, a standard Open File dialog opens from which you can
choose the file. Use Normal file/folder navigation commands to locate the
file containing your Poi information, and press “Enter” to load the file. If
the loading is successful, the unit announces, “successfully loaded user
POI”.
452
11.3.3.5 Route Menu
The “Route” menu in “Google Maps” allows you to create, view, and
initialize routes, as well as to queery information about your current route
and the distance and direction to your final destination. The “Route” menu
contains the following items: “Create Route”, “View Traveled Route”,
“Initialize Route”, “Route Information”, and “Direction and Distance to
Destination”.
11.3.3.5.1 Create route
To access the “Create Route” dialog, press “Alt” to open the menu, and
navigate to “Route” using “Up arrow” or “Down arrow”. Press “Enter” on
“Route” and navigate to “Creat Route”. Press “Enter” to open the “Create
Route” dialog. You can also open the “Create Route” dialog by pressing
“Control-r” directly from the “Google Maps” main window.
Note: before you can create a route, you must have set a start position
and destination as described previously in this chapter.
The “Create Route” dialog contains a single combo box with 2 options:
“Walking” and “Vehicle”. Navigate among the 2 options by pressing “Up
arrow” or “Down arrow”. When you are placed on the desired route type,
press “Enter”. You are placed in the “Route” dialog on the “Route
Information” tab.
The “Route” dialog contains 6 controls. You can move among the controls
using “Tab” or “Shift-Tab”.
1. Route Information list box: Contains Start, Destination, Estimated time
of arrival, and Estimated distance. Use “Up arrow” and “Down arrow” to
navigate among the items in the information list.
2. Step Route Information list box: Contains numbered step by step
directions for traveling from your start position to your destination, each
453
3.
4.
5.
6.
with an estimated travel time. Navigate among the steps using “Up
arrow” and “Down arrow”.
Start notice button: Press “Enter” on this button when you depart from
your Start Position. You can also activate this button by pressing “Altm”.
Save Route button: Press “Enter” on this button to save the current
route for later use. You can also activate this button by pressing “Alt-s”.
Activating this button opens a dialog with a “File Name” edit box, a
“confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. You can simply type a file
name for the route, and press “Enter”.
Load Route list box: A list of all your previously-saved routes. Navigate
the list using “Up arrow” and “Space”4. Press “Enter” on a route to load
it.
Close button: Press “enter” on this button to close the “Route” dialog
and return to the “Google Maps” main window. You can also activate
this button by pressing “Escape” or “Alt-F4”.
11.3.3.5.2 View traveled route
You can view previously traveled routes using the “View Traveled Route”
option in the “Route” menu. Press “Alt” to open the “Google Maps” menu
and use “Down arrow” to navigate to “Route” and press “Enter”. From the
“Route” menu, use “Down arrow” to navigate to “View Traveled Route”
and press “Enter”. You can also bring up the “View Traveled Route”
dialog by pressing “Control-h” from the “Google Maps” main window.
The “View Traveled Route” dialog contains 3 items:
1. View Traveled Routes list box: a list of the previously traveled routes.
Navigate the list using “Up arrow” and “Down arrow”. Press “Enter” on
a route to load it.
2. Initialize Route button: Deletes all the previously-traveled routes.
3. Close button: Closes the “View Traveled Route” dialog. You can also
press “”Escape” or “Alt-F4”to close the dialog.
454
11.3.3.5.3 Route Information Initialization
At times, you may wish to clear the current route information and begin
creating a route from scratch. You can do this using the “Initialize Route”
option in the “Route Menu.
Press “Alt” to open the “Google Maps” menu and use “Down arrow” to
navigate to “Route” and press “Enter”. From the “Route” menu, use
“Down arrow” to navigate to “Initialize Route” and press “Enter”. You can
also initialize the route directly by pressing “Alt-I”. When you activate this
command, the route information is cleared, and you may create a new
route using the same information, or set other start, destination, or
waypoint locations.
11.3.3.5.4 Route Information
Choosing the “Route information” option in the “Route” menu brings up
the same “Route” dialog as is shown when you initially create a route. To
bring up “Route information”, Press “Alt” to open the “Google Maps”
menu and use “Down arrow” to navigate to “Route” and press “Enter”.
From the “Route” menu, use “Down arrow” to navigate to “Route
Information” and press “Enter”. You can also access route information
directly by pressing “Control-c”.
11.3.3.5.5 Distance and Direction to Destination
Use the “Direction and Distance to Destination” menu item to queery the
remaining distance to your destination while traveling as well as the
direction of travel.
To activate the “Direction and Distance to Destination” command, Press
“Alt” to open the “Google Maps” menu and use “Down arrow” to navigate
to “Route” and press “Enter”. From the “Route” menu, use “Down arrow”
455
to navigate to “Direction and Distance to Destination” and press “Enter”.
You can also queery the “Direction and Distance to Destination” directly
by pressing “Control-d”.
11.3.3.6 Options
The “Options” menu contains 2 items: “Notice and Distance Setting”, and
“Select GPS receiver”.
11.3.3.6.1 Notice and Distance Setting
The “Notice and Distance Setting” dialog contains 6 controls. Move
among the controls using “Tab”, and “Shift-Tab”.
1. Display and notice settings: a list box in which you can set 4 options.
o Latitude/longitude Display Mode: short or detailed.
o Notice User POI: Yes or no.
o Notice sound play: Yes or no.
o Notice POI Information on the Status: Yes or no.
o Press Space to change the value of the settings.
2. Turn Range Setting (feet): an edit box in to which you can type the
number of feet before which you wish to be notified of a turn. The
default is 66.
3. POI Range (feet): An edit box in to which you can type the number of
feet before a POI you wish to be alerted. The default is 656.
4. Save Options button: Press “Enter” on this button to save the changes
you’ve made to the settings.
5. Reset to Factory Defaults button: Press “Enter” on this button to reset
all settings to the factory defaults.
6. Close button: Press “Enter” on this button to close the dialog without
saving your chages. You can also exit the dialog by pressing “Escape”
or “Alt-F4”.
456
11.3.3.6.2 GPS Settings
1) Select GPS Receiver settings: Settings list containing 3 options.
(1) GPS connection way: Press “Space to choose between “Internal
GPS”, Bluetooth ActiveSync”, and “Bluetooth Serial”.
(2) Notice that GPS Receiver Signal Strength is Low: Press “Space” to
choose between “yes”, and “no”.
(3) Interval Reconnecting to GPS Receiver: Press “Space” to choose
among the available values: No reconnection, 10 seconds, 30
seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, and 5 minutes.
2) Save Options button: Press “Enter” on this button to save your changes.
3) Reset to Factory Defaults button: Press “Enter” on this button to restore
these settings to the factory defaults.
4) Close button: press “Enter” on this button to exit the “Select GPS
receiver” dialog without saving your changes. You can also exit the
dialog using “Escape” or “Alt-F4”.
11.4 Dropbox
Dropbox is an Internet file sharing service that allows you to store files on
the Dropbox server and access them with a computer or smartphone
containing a Dropbox program as well as the Voice Sense QWERTY. For
more information about Dropbox or to sign up for a Dropbox account,
please visit www.dropbox.com. 457
To open the "Dropbox" program, from the Main menu, press "X" to open
the "Extras" menu, then press "R" to launch "Dropbox". You can launch
"Dropbox" from anywhere on the unit by pressing "Windows-O". When "Dropbox" is launched for the first time, you are placed in the "Sign
In" dialog. The "Sign In" dialog contains the following items: "e-mail"
computer edit box, "Password" computer edit box, "Remember Me" check
box, "Save Password" check box, "Auto Sign In" check box, "Sign In"
button and a "Cancel" button. You can move among the controls using
"Tab" or "Shift-Tab". to Sign into Dropbox, enter the e-mail address and password associated
with your Dropbox account in the respective computer edit boxes. Use
Space" to check or uncheck the boxes concerning the saving of your
information and automatic sign in. When you have entered your information,
and chosen your preferences, Tab to Sign In" and press "Enter". Voice Sense prompts, "Signing in, please wait". After a few seconds, if sign
in is successful, the Voice Sense announces, "Successfully signed in" soon
followed by "Building file list". In another few seconds, the files and folders
in your Dropbox account are displayed. You can navigate your files and
folders on "Dropbox" in the same manner as those in the "File Manager". 11.4.1 The File Menu
The "Dropbox" "File" menu contains the following items: "User Information",
"Sign Out", and "Exit". 11.4.1.1 User Information
To open the "User Information" dialog, press "Alt", and press "Enter" on
"File". Press "Enter" on "User Information". You can activate this command
directly using "Control-I". The "User Information" dialog contains 2 items: the "Information" list, and
the "Close" button. The "Information" list contains 4 items: "Nickname", "e458
mail", "Country" and "Size". Use the Up and Down arrows to move among
the items in the "Information" list. The first 3 items provide information you
entered when creating your account. The "Size" item shows how much total
space you have available on Dropbox and how much is being used. 11.4.1.2 Sign Out
If you wish to sign out of your current Dropbox account, you can do this
using the "Sign Out" command in the "File" menu. To execute the "Sign
Out" command, press "Alt", and press "Enter" on "File". Navigate to "Sign
Out" using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Voice Sense prompts,
"Successfully signed out", and places you in the "Sign In" dialog described
previously. 11.4.1.3 Exit
This command terminates the "Dropbox" program and returns the Voice
Sense QWERTY to the "program" menu. You can exit "Dropbox" by
pressing "Alt F 4", or by selecting "Exit" from the "Dropbox" File menu. 11.4.2 The Edit Menu
The "Edit" menu contains the following items: "Search", "File Download",
"File Upload", "Copy", "Cut to clipboard", "Paste", "Delete", "File Link" and
"New Folder". These items are discussed in detail in the following sections. 11.4.2.1 Search for File
Use the "Search for File" function to locate a file or folder on Dropbox for
which you know all or part of the name, but not the location. You can press
"Alt" to open the menu and move to "Edit" using the Down arrow and Press
"Enter". Press "Enter" on "Search for File". You can press "Control-F" to
activate this function directly from the file list. The Voice Sense QWERTY
displays the "file for find" dialog box. 459
The dialog box consists of the "edit box for entering the text of the name to
search", a "search button", a "cancel button" and the results list. You can
use "Tab" or "Shift-Tab" to move through the controls. When you activate the file search, the unit prompts "File for find:" you are
placed on the edit box for entering the file name to search". Type all or part
of the file name and press "Enter". Voice Sense QWERTY searches for all
files containing the text you entered. When the file search is complete, you
are placed in the results list. You can navigate among the items in the results list with the up and down
arrows. If you press "Enter" on a file, you are placed on the path where the
file is stored and the file search dialog box is closed. You can move to the
file location by pressing "Enter" on the file name again. 11.4.2.2 File Download
Use this option to download the selected file to your Voice Sense QWERTY. To execute the "File Download" command, press "Alt", navigate to "Edit"
using the Down arrow, and press "Enter". Navigate to "File Download"
using the Down arrow and press "Enter". You can activate this command
directly from the "File" list by pressing "Control-T". When you activate the "File Download" command, The Voice Sense
prompts, "Files will be saved to Flashdisk/Downloads, do you want to
change this location?". The Default is "No". If you want to change where
the selected file is saved, press the Down arrow to navigate to "Yes", and
press "Enter". Navigate to the folder into which you want the files to be
saved, press "Space" to select it, and press "Enter" to start the download. The Voice Sense announces "Ready for download", and displays download
progress while the file is downloaded. When the download is complete,
Voice Sense announces, "File successfully downloaded". 460
11.4.2.3 File Upload
Use this command to upload a file from your Voice Sense QWERTY to
Dropbox so that you may access it on other devices you have connected to
Dropbox. To execute the "File Upload" command, press "Alt", navigate to "Edit" using
the Down arrow, and press "Enter". Navigate to "File Upload" using the
Down arrow and press "Enter". You can activate this command directly
from the "File" list by pressing "Control-U". When you execute "File Upload", Voice Sense promts, "Select file to
upload" and places you in the file/folder list of your flashdisk. Use normal
file/folder navigation to locate the file you want to upload, and press"Enter"
to begin the upload process. You may select multiple files by pressing
"Space" on each of the files you wish to upload. When you press "Enter", the Voice Sense announces, "Start uploading
XX/YY where X is the number of the current file being uploaded, and Y is
the total number of files to upload. AS the files are uploaded, the number of
the file being uploaded is displayed along with the progress of the total
upload in the form of a percentage. When the upload is finished, Voice
Sense announces, "Y files uploaded" where Y is the number of files
uploaded to Dropbox. 11.4.2.4 Copy, Cut and Paste
Note: When using "Copy", "Cut", or "Paste" in Dropbox, you are able to
manipulate only the files and folders in your Dropbox file/folder list. You
cannot copy or paste files from Dropbox to storage locations on your Voice
Sense. To move files to and from your Voice Sense and Dropbox, please
you the "File Download" and "File Upload" commands described previously. "Copy" leaves the selected files and folders in their original locations, and
creates copies of them in your chosen destinations. "Cut" removes the
selected files and folders from their original locations. You can use the
"Paste" command to place them in new locations you have chosen. 461
Use the Copy/Cut function as follows: 1. Select the files and folders you wish to copy. If you wish to select only
one file or folder, simply place your cursor on it. If you wish to select
multiple files and folders, press "Space" on each item you wish to select. 2. Open the menu with "Alt" and navigate to "Edit" using the Down arrow
and press "Enter"" Navigate to "Copy" and press "Enter" to copy the
selected files and folders. You can execute the "Copy" command directly
from the file list by pressing "Control-c". If you want To cut the selected files
and folders, choose "Cut" from the "Edit" menu. Use "Control-x" to execute
the "Cut" command directly from the file list. When the "Copy" or "Cut"
command is executed, the Voice Sense QWERTY returns to the file list. 3. Navigate to the destination folder using normal file/folder navigation. 4. Open the "Edit" menu as described in step 2, and choose "Paste". Press
"Enter" on "Paste," and your selected files and folders are copied or moved.
You can press "Control-v" to execute the "paste" command directly from
the file list. If your destination folder has the same name as the file you are copying,
the Voice Sense QWERTY prompts "File xxx already exists. Overwrite?
Yes". Press "Enter" if you want to replace the file. If you do not want to
overwrite the file, select "No," and press "Enter". When "No" is selected, the
"Paste" function is canceled. 11.4.2.5 Delete Files or Folders
To delete files or folders from Dropbox, navigate to the folders or files you
want to delete, and select them using "Space". If you wish to delete only 1
file or folder you need not select it, rather, you can simlly place your cursor
on it. Open the menu by pressing "Alt", navigate to "Edit" using the Down arrow
and press "Enter". Use Up or Down arrow to navigate to "Delete" and press
"Enter". You can also delete selected files or folders by using "Delete". 462
11.4.2.6 File Link
Dropbox allows you to create links to the files stored in your Dropbox
account. This is a useful way of sharing files with others while protecting
the rest of the files on your account. You can use the "File Link" option to
create a link to a file which another person can use to download that file
from your Dropbox account. To execute the "File Link" command, press "Alt", navigate to "Edit" using
the Down arrow, and press "Enter". Navigate to "File Link" using the Down
arrow and press "Enter". You can activate this command directly from the
"File" list by pressing "Control-L". The "File Link" dialog contains 3 controls: "File Link" edit box, "Copy" button,
and a "Close" button. You can move among the controls using "Tab" or
"Shift-Tab". The "File Link" edit box contains the download link for the selected file. The
"Copy" button copies this link to the clipboard for pasting into a document
or into an e-mail to someone to whom you wish to send the link. To close
the "File Link" dialog, Tab to Close" and press "Enter" or press "Escape"
and you are returned to the Dropbox file/folder list. 11.4.2.7 New Folder
Use this option to create a new folder on your Dropbox account. To
execute the "New Folder" command, press "Alt", navigate to "Edit" using
the Down arrow, and press "Enter". Navigate to "New Folder" using the
Down arrow and press "Enter". "Control-N" is the hot key for accessing this
feature directly from the file list. The Voice Sense QWERTY prompts, "New folder name:,". Enter your
preferred new folder name and press "Enter". Your new folder is created. When creating a new folder name, you cannot use the following characters:
"|, <, >, ?, :, * 463
11.4.3 Options
The "Options" menu contains 1 item: "Set Login Information". To open the
"Set Login Information" dialog, press "Alt" to open the menu, and use the
Down arrow to navigate to "Options" and press "Enter". Then, press "Enter"
on "Set Login Information". The "Set Login Information" dialog contains all of the same as are present
in the "Sign In" dialog except the username and password. This allows you
to modify your options for saving login information and automatic sign in.
When you have set your preferences for the "Remember Me", "Save
Password", and "Auto Sign In" check boxes, Tab to "confirm", and press
"Enter". If you do not wish to save your settings, Tab to "Cancel" and press
"Enter" or press "Escape" or "Alt F 4". 11.4.4 Hot Keys in Dropbox
Open User Information dialog box: Control-I Search for File: Control-F File Download: Control-T File Upload: Control-U File Link: Control-L Copy: Control-C Cut to Clipboard: Control-X Paste: Control-V Delete: Delete New Folder: Control-N Set Login Information: Alt-I 464
11.5 Online DAISY
The Online DAISY program allows patrons of the Canadian National
Institute for the Blind library to access and download DAISY books
available through their online bookshelf. Note: you cannot search for books
using this program as this capability is only available when accessing the
library via its website. However, this program will allow you to access and
interact with your electronic bookshelf, download and return books.
To execute the Online DAISY program, press “X” from the Main Menu to
open the Extras menu, then navigate to “Online DAISY” and press “Enter”,
or press “o” to directly jump to and open it.
When you execute the Online DAISY program for the first time, you are
asked for your login information. Please type “CNIB_” followed by your user
number in the ID field. Tab to the “Password” field and type it in computer
Braille. Press “Space” to toggle the check boxes for “Remember Me”, and
“Save password”. When you have chosen your login settings, Tab to
“Login” and press “Enter”.
You are presented with a combo box with 3 items: “Expired”, “New”, and
“Issued”. Press the Up and Down arrows to navigate among the options.
Press “Tab” to access the list in your desired category. You can navigate
the book list using “Space-1” and “Space-4”.
You may download books that are issued to you. To download a book in
the “Issued” list, navigate to it and press “Enter”. The unit announces
“Download start” and shows progress indicators to let you know the
progress of the download process. When the book is finished downloading,
you may play it using the DAISY Player. Books downloaded using the
Online DAISY program are available in the “Online DAISY” folder from the
“Open DAISY” dialog of the DAISY Player. For reasons of copy protection,
these books are only visible from the DAISY Player and cannot be
accessed from the File Manager.
If you wish to return a book, navigate to it in the “Issued” list, and press
“Control-R”. This will return the book to the CNIB’s virtual library so that
others can be issued to you.
465
466
12. Games
12.1 Sense Dice game
Ever been at a party and wanted to play "Quarters", but had no dice? You
don't need to worry about such things anymore. With Voice Sense
QWERTY you always have virtual dice with you anywhere, any time!
12.1.1 Executing the Dice Game
1) The Dice Game is located in the "Games" menu under the main menu.
Press enter on "Games" or press "G" from the main menu.
2) Press "D" or move to "Sense Dice Game" by pressing “Down arrow”
and press "Enter" to start the game.
You can launch the “Sense Dice Game” from anywhere on the unit by pressing “Caps Lock-­‐D”. 12.1.2 How it works
When the game starts, a cute little tune is played followed by the
announcement, "Select the number of dice". You can select 1, 2, or 3
dice using “Up arrow” and “Down arrow” and press "Enter".
The number of dice selected is announced, and a popping sound is heard
for each die you selected.
Press "Enter" to roll the dice, or gently shake your Voice Sense
QWERTY, and the accelerometer recognizes your motions and activates
the dice roll.
A sound is heard to indicate the rolling of the dice, and after a couple of
seconds, the result is displayed.
467
After the result is displayed, the Voice Sense QWERTY announces,
"Press Space to go on". If you press "Space", you will hear the dice
selection announcement and sound once again, and you can repeat the
dice roll.
You can also press “Escape" to return to the "Dice Selection" list and
choose a different number of dice to roll.
Press “Alt-F4” to exit the game.
12.2 Sense Brain Game
The Sense Brain Game contains 4 different games. You can play
anywhere, any time and train your brain to be sharper and quicker. Have
fun and be smarter.
12.2.1 Executing the Sense Brain Game
1) The Sense brain game is located in the "Games" menu under the main
"program" menu. To enter the "Games" menu, press enter on "Games" or
press "G" from the "program" menu.
2) To start the Sense Brain Game, press "Enter" on "Sense Brain Game"
or press "B".
You can launch the “Sense Brain game” from anywhere on the unit by pressing “Caps Lock-­‐B”. 12.2.2 Game menu
There are 5 items in the Sense Brain Game menu: 4 games (Memory
game, Reverse game, Chase a criminal, and Multiplication table) and
"View ranking". To start playing a game, press enter on a game you want
to play. If you want to view your past scores, you can access them under
"View ranking".
468
12.2.3 Playing a Game
When you start each game, an opening song is played followed by
instructions for playing. Press "Enter" to start the game or press space to
repeat the instructions.
12.2.4 Memory game
When the game starts, a group of numbers and letters is announced. For
example, at level 1, groups of 3 letter-number combinations are spoken.
Make sure to memorize these letters and numbers in the order they are
spoken.
You are then prompted, "Type the answer", at which time you must write
the numbers in the order they were given to you and press enter. If the
answer is correct, The Voice Sense QWERTY applauds you, and you are
allowed to proceed to the next set of letters and numbers. If the answer is
incorrect or you take too long to enter the answer, the buzz of failure
sounds and the game is over. You must type the answer within 10
seconds to avoid the despicable buzz and a constructive warning that you
may be losing your mind.
When the game is over, your score is announced. If your score ranks
between 1 and 5, you are asked to "Type your ID". Write your name and
press enter to record your score. (You can view your recorded scores
under "View Ranking" in the Sense Brain Game menu. Or press “Escape”
or “Alt-F4" to ignore this dialog.
Finally, you are asked, "Do you want to play again?" Press enter on "Yes"
to play the game again. Or press enter on "No" to return to the game
menu.
12.2.5 Reverse game
469
This game is similar to the memory game, but as its name denotes, in
"reverse". When you are prompted to "Type the answer", write the
numbers and letters in reverse order and press "Enter". If the answer is
correct, you are applauded and honored with a new challenge. If the
answer is incorrect or you're too slow, the buzz of shame sounds and the
game is over.
12.2.6 Chase a criminal
When the game starts, you hear the sound of footsteps. A thief is hidden
in a 10-story building. A policeman says on which floor the thief is hiding.
But, any smart thief won't stay in one place too long, and your job is to
catch him. As the criminal runs up and down the stairs, the policeman
says, "Up" and "down" repeatedly to let you know how many floors the
criminal is traversing. Listen carefully and type the floor on which the thief
has chosen to hide again. When you are asked to type the answer, type
the number of the floor on which the thief stowed himself within 10
seconds. Be sure to think fast, or that droning buzz reminds you that your
brain is failing and the patronizing policeman complains that you are
interrupting his inspection.
12.2.7 Multiplication table
When the game starts, you are given a set of numbers. Level 1 starts you
off with two. Multiply these numbers.
When you are prompted to, "Type the answer", type the result and press
"Enter". If the answer is correct, your math genius continues to be
challenged. If the answer is incorrect, or you take too long to enter it, the
pretentious buzz is heard, and the Voice Sense QWERTY helpfully
suggests you may wish to master the simplicity of addition before
attempting the complexity of multiplication.
470
12.2.8 View ranking
Enter the "View Ranking" menu to view your scores for any of the brain
games described above. Press “Up arrow” or “Down arrow” to navigate
among the games, and press enter on the name of the game on which
you want information.
The ranking list is displayed. It shows rank, name and score. Press space
to view the next record. To return to the "View ranking" menu, press
enter.
471
472
13. Utilities
The "Utilities" menu provides several special functions and settings for the
Voice Sense QWERTY. The "Utilities" menu contains the following items:
1) Calculator (for doing simple math equations as well as scientific
calculations)
2) Display Compass heading (for displaying your current cardinal direction
3) Display Time and Date (for viewing the date and time)
4) Wake up alarm (for setting an alarm)
5) Calendar (for checking dates according to the lunar and solar calendar)
6) Stopwatch (for timing events)
7) Terminal for screen reader (for connecting your Voice Sense QWERTY to
your PC for use as a Braille display, external speaker, etc)
8) Display Network Status (for displaying the status of your Internet
connectivity)
9) Display power status (for discovering the amount of battery charge on the
unit)
10) Format (for formatting the flashdisk as well as external storage devices)
11) Set Sleep Timer (for defining the time before the unit automatically goes
to sleep)
12) Upgrade Voice Sense Firmware (for upgrading the Firmware)
To access the menu items,
1) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow” in the "program" menu.
2) Press "Enter" on the "Utilities" menu. Or, press "u" from the "program"
menu to open the Utilities menu.
3) The "Utilities" menu contains many small applications.
The following sections discuss each of these menu options and their
functions in greater detail.
13.1 Calculator
473
Using the calculator on the Voice Sense QWERTY you can do simple math
equations as well as complex scientific calculations. The results and
expressions are displayed in Braille, and spoken by the Voice Sense
QWERTY. While using the calculator, you can access the "help" menu by
pressing "F1" for hot key information on the various calculator functions.
To use the calculator, press "c" from within the "Utilities" menu. You can also
launch the “Calculator” from anywhere on the unit by pressing “Caps Lock-C”.
When using the calculator on the Voice Sense QWERTY, expressions can
be displayed in either Computer Braille or Nemeth Braille. You can change
the Braille code using “Fn-g”. You can clear the calculator by pressing "Alt-c".
If you insert numbers or a function into a result, the result disappears; and if
you enter operators, you move to the next step. In addition, you can keep
your result in the calculator's memory, and recall it later. You can activate the
functions and operators via the calculator menu or you can use the hot keys
associated with the various functions.
The calculator functions are explained in greater detail below.
13.1.1 General Functions
"General functions" is a dialog box that contains the "general function list", a
"Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. In the dialog box, you can navigate
among the controls using “Tab” and "shift-tab". In the general function list,
you can navigate the operators using “up arrow” or “down arrow”. Or, in the
list, you can press the first letter of the operator you want to access. In the
"Calculator", you can open the menu by pressing “Alt”, and press "Enter" on
"General Functions". Or, you can press "g" from the menu to access
"General Functions". When the calculator is opened, 0 is displayed in
computer Braille. From the calculation line, you can access the "General
Functions" using the hot key, "Ctrl-g".
When the dialog opens, you are placed on the general function list. Once
there, you can select your desired operation and press "Enter" to run it. You
474
can cancel the operator selection by pressing "Enter" on "Cancel", "Alt-F4",
or "Esc". You can also use hot keys to quickly execute operations.
Use the following hot keys to perform basic calculations:
Plus: +
Minus: Divided by: /
Multiply by: *
Percent: %
Power: ^
Square Root: Ctrl-q
Decimal point: .
Left parenthesis: (
Right parenthesis: )
PI: Ctrl-p
Exponent: Ctrl-e
To enter negative numbers type minus and the number in parentheses. For
example, type in minus 2 in the following manner: (-2).
For the percent operation, type the numbers first followed by the percent
sign. Immediately after you type the percent sign (%), the number you have
typed in is converted into a percent value. For example, 90 + 20% equals 90
+ 18. The number 18 is displayed immediately on entering the % sign. The
result of this expression is 108.
13.1.2 Fractional arithmetic The Voice Sense QWERTY can perform fractional operations such as
simplifying and multiplying fractions as well as converting fractions to
decimals.
When entering fractions, use “Alt-/” for over. To enter one over two, type “1,
Alt-/, 2”. When entering a mixed number, such as one and one-half, press
space between the whole number and fraction. To enter one and one-half,
type “1, Space, 1, Alt-/, 2”.
475
To multiply two-thirds by three-eighths, type, “2, Alt-/, 3, *, 3, Alt-/, 8”. Press
Enter to perform the calculation. The result, 6/24, is automatically simplified
to ¼.
You can also convert fractions to decimals, decimals to fractions, improper
fractions to mixed numbers, or mixed numbers to improper fractions. When
your result is fractional, you can bring up the “fraction options” by pressing
“Control-/”. Press “Up arrow” or “Down arrow” to move among the available
options. If the fraction is a simple fraction, your options are “”fraction to
decimal” and “return original fraction”. If the fraction is an improper fraction,
you also have an option to return “improper fraction to mixed number”. If
your fraction is a mixed number, the “mixed number to improper fraction”
appears. Finally, if your result is a decimal and you press “Control-/”, the
decimal is converted to a fraction.
13.1.3 Memory Functions
The "Memory Functions" store your resulting answers and calculations in
memory for later use. The "Memory Functions" menu has four items: "Recall
Item", "Delete All Saved Items", "Save Item", and "Statistics Functions". You
can move among these items by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”
repeatedly, and press "Enter" on the desired feature. To access these menu
items, press “Alt” to open the menu, and press "Enter" on "Memory
Functions". Or, you can press "v" from the menu.
13.1.3.1 Recall Items
"Recall Items" is a dialog, containing the following: "Variable list", "Delete",
"Display detail", "Confirm", and "Cancel". You can navigate among these
items by pressing tab or shift-tab. You can access "Recall Items" by pressing
"r" from the "Memory Functions" menu. Or, you can access the dialog by
pressing "Alt-r" in the calculation line.
476
The "Variable list" displays "item name: the result value". You can move
through the "Variable list" by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. You can
insert the result value into your calculation by pressing "Enter" on the item
name. You can also copy items in the "Variable list". Press "Space" to select
an item in the "Variable list". Then, press "Ctrl-Insert" to copy the selected
items to the clipboard.
The "Display detail" shows the item name and its result with the default set to
"No". To review the detailed information, press "Space" to switch to "Yes".
Then, it displays "item name: the expression = its result value" in Braille.
"Delete" is used to remove a variable item. To delete an item, select the item
you want to be deleted, and press "Enter" on "Delete". You can also select
any number of individual items by pressing "Space" on each of them.
13.1.3.2 Delete All Saved Items
You can delete all of the saved items stored in the "Recall Items". To do this,
open the menu by pressing “Alt”. Then, use “up arrow” or “down arrow” to
move to the "Memory Functions" menu, and press "Enter". Next, use “up
arrow” or “down arrow” to move to "Delete All Saved Items", and press
"Enter". You can also press "Ctrl-d" while in the calculation line.
13.1.3.3 Save Items
"Save Items" is a dialog that allows you to define variables according to the
current expression or result in the calculator and save them for future use.
The dialog contains an edit box for typing in the variable name, a "Confirm"
button and a "Cancel" button. You can move among the controls by pressing
“Tab” or "shift-tab". From the "Memory Functions" menu, you can access
"Save Items" by pressing "s". From the calculation line, use the hot key, "Alts" to open the save items dialog.
When the dialog is opened, the "item name" edit box is focused. Type a
name for the variable, and press "Enter" or move to "confirm", and press
477
"Enter". The current expression or result is then saved under the variable
name you just specified.
If you type names under variables which have already been created, you are
prompted, "Replace variable xx with current value? Yes". To change the
value, press "Enter" on "Yes". If you do not want to change the value, press
"Enter" on "No". Press "Space" to toggle between "Yes" and "No".
If you type function names like "sin", "coos", or "pi" as a variable name, you
are warned, "Invalid item name", as you cannot use these functions in
variable names.
When you are on the calculation line, you can also define variables directly
by typing "variable=expression" and press "Enter" to save the variable. For
example: "a=2+sin(30)" or "a=591",
13.1.3.4 Statistics Functions
If you select this menu item, a dialog opens, which consists of a list box
containing all the stored variables, a list box displaying the results of several
functions, and a "Close" button. You can move among these elements by
pressing “Tab”, or "shift-tab". You can open this dialog by pressing "Alt-t"
from the calculation line, or by pressing "t" in the "Memory Functions" menu.
In the variable list, the variable names and their current values are displayed.
You can move among these variables by pressing “down arrow” or “up
arrow”. In order to select a variable to be used in the calculation, press
"Space" on it. This list is the same as the one in the "Recall Items" dialog.
The only difference is that this dialog always displays variable names and
values, regardless of the value of "Detail display" option. After you select all
of the variables to be used in the calculation, you can press “Tab” to move to
the "result" list. The "result" list displays the sum, average, variance, and
standard deviation of the selected variables. You can move among these
items by pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”. To copy results from the list to
the clipboard, press "Space" on the items you wish to select
478
13.1.4 Sine Functions
The "Sine Functions" menu is activated when you press "Enter" on "Sine
Functions", or press "s" from the menu. You can open the menu by pressing
“Alt”. Or, you can activate the "Sine Functions" menu by pressing “Ctrl-s” in
the calculation line. The "sine function" list consists of "Sine", "Arc sine", and
"Hyperbolic sine". If you press "Enter" on one of the three functions while
moving with “up arrow” or “down arrow”, or if you press "Enter" on "Confirm"
while one of the functions is focused, you can insert it into your calculation
line after selecting one of the sine functions. Or, you can insert one of the
three sine functions by pressing the first letter of each from the list.
13.1.5 Cosine Functions
You can activate the "Cosine Functions" by pressing "Enter" on "Cosine
Functions" or by pressing "i" from the menu. Or, in your calculation line, you
can open the "Cosine Functions" by pressing "Ctrl-i". The "cosine function"
list consists of "Cosine", "Arc cosine", and "Hyperbolic cosine". If you press
"Enter" on one of the three functions while moving with “up arrow” or “down
arrow”, or press "Enter" on "Confirm" while one of the functions is focused,
the calculation is performed. Or, you can activate one of the three cosine
functions by pressing the first letter of each from the list.
13.1.6 Tangent Functions
You can activate the "Tangent Functions" when you press "Enter" on
"Tangent Functions", or if you press "t" from the menu. You can also open
the menu by pressing “Alt”. Or, in your calculation line, you can open the
"Tangent Functions" by pressing "Ctrl-t". The "tangent functions" list consists
of "Tangent", "Arc tangent", and "Hyperbolic tangent". If you press "Enter" on
one of the three functions while moving with “up arrow” or “down arrow”, or
press "Enter" on "Confirm" while one of the functions is focused, you can
insert this function into your calculation. Or you can insert one of the three
tangent functions by pressing the first letter of each from the list.
479
13.1.7 Logarithm Functions
The "Logarithm Functions" is a dialog, which contains the following: "function
list", a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move among the
three items by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab". The function list consists of
"Common logarithm" and "Natural logarithm", in which you can move by
pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
You can activate the "Logarithm Functions" menu by pressing "Enter" on
"Logarithm Functions", or by pressing "l" from the menu. Or, in your
calculation line, you can open the "Logarithm Functions" by pressing "Ctrl-l".
If you press "Enter" on one of the logarithm functions, or "Tab" to "confirm"
while one of the functions is focused, you can insert this function into your
calculation. Or, you can run a "Natural logarithm" by pressing "n" from the list.
You can run a "Common logarithm" by pressing "c".
13.1.8 Convert Unit
The "Convert Unit" dialog allows you to convert measurements of mass,
area, volume, distance, and temperature from metric measure to imperial
measure as well as other standards of measurement and units of
measurement within the same system.
To open the "Convert Unit" dialog, press "Alt" to open the menu, navigate
to "Convert Unit" using the Down arrow and press "Enter". Open the
"Convert Unit" dialog from anywhere in the calculator by pressing "ControlU".
The "Convert Unit" dialog contains the following items: "Unit Category"
combo box, "Current Unit" combo box, "Change Unit" combo box, "Input
Number" edit box, "Convert" button, "Cancel" button and the "Result" static
box. You can move among the controls in the dialog using "Tab" or "ShiftTab". Use the Up or Down arrow to move among the items in the combo
boxes.
480
The available unit categories are Distance, Area, Mass, Volume and
Temperature. When you have chosen your measurement category, the
"Current Unit" and "Change Unit" combo boxes will contain measurement
units according to your chosen category. The available distance units are:
Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, Kilometers, Inches, Feet, Yards, and
Miles. The available units of area are: Square Meters, Are, Square feet,
Square Yards, Acres, and Hectares. The available units of mass are:
Grams, Kilograms, Tones, Grains, Ounces, and Pounds. The available
units of volume are: Deciliter, Milliliter, Liter, Cubic Centimeter, Cubic Meter,
Cubic Inch, Cubic Foot, Cubic Yard, Gallon, Fluid oz, Cups and Quarts.
The available units of temperature are: Celsius, Fahrenheit and Kelvin.
Choose your unit to convert from in the first combo box. Choose your unit
to convert to in the "Change" combo box. Type the number of the
measurement you want to convert in the "Input Number" edit box. Finally,
to convert the measurement, Tab to the "Convert" button and press "Enter".
If you wish to cancel the conversion, Tab to the "Cancel" button and press
"Enter". When you activate the "Convert" button, the conversion result is
displayed in the "Result" static box.
13.1.9 Nemeth Braille code In addition to viewing expressions in the Calculator in computer Braille, The
Voice Sense QWERTY allows you to view mathematical expressions and
symbols using the Nemeth Braille code. The Nemeth code is a 6-dot Braille
code developed by Abraham Nemeth used to encode mathematic and
scientific symbols in Braille. Most students learn to read and write
mathematical expressions using the Nemeth code, thus, it is useful to be
able to view expressions in the calculator in the same manner they are
learning to read and write them in hard copy Braille. You can toggle between
computer Braille and Nemeth Braille using “FN-g”.
481
The following dot combinations represent the associated operators when
viewing mathematical expressions in Nemeth Braille:
Plus: +
Minus: Divided by: /
Multiply by: *
Percent: %
Power: ^
Square Root: Ctrl-q
Decimal point:.
Left parenthesis: (
Right parenthesis: )
PI: Ctrl-p
Exponent: Ctrl-e
Fraction begin: [
Fraction end: ]
Over: FN-/
Equals: =
For example: if you entered an expression to calculate the square root of 2
times 8, it would appear as below:
“square root begin, (Ctrl-q)”, “multiply by, (*)”, “8”, “square root end (Alt-q)”.
13.1.10 Copy to Clipboard
The "Copy to Clipboard" function is used to copy your expression or result to
the clipboard for pasting your expression or result in a document. You can
activate it by pressing "Enter" on the "Copy to Clipboard" option, or by
pressing "c" from the menu. Or, in the calculation line, you can press "Ctrl-c"
to quickly copy your calculation to the clipboard. After copying, you can
paste the calculation in a document.
When you activate "Copy to Clipboard", you hear "Copy completed", and the
Voice Sense QWERTY returns to your calculation line.
482
13.1.11 Return formula There may be times, after viewing a result, that you wish to be reminded
what expression you used to obtain that result. The “return formula” function
allows you to return the expression you just entered
When your result is displayed, you can activate the “return Formula” function
by pressing “Control-r”. You can also activate this function by pressing “Alt”
to enter the menu, navigating to “return Formula” and pressing “Enter”.
When you activate “Return Formula”, the expression you entered to obtain
your current result is displayed.
13.1.12 Option Settings
You can access the "Option Settings" by pressing "Enter" on the menu
option or press "o" from the menu. Or, in your calculation line, you can
activate the "Option Settings" by pressing “Ctrl-o”.
When the "Option Settings" are open, if you press "Enter" on the option you
want, or press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button associated with it, the option
is set according to your preference.
"Option Settings" is a dialog, which contains the following: "setting list", a
"Confirm" button, and a "Cancel" button. You can move among the three
items by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
The "setting list" consists of "Angle unit" and "Calculator Braille code", which
you can navigate by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
When setting the Angle Unit, if you select "Radian", you can get the PI value
while using the trigonometric function. If you select "Degree" and activate PI,
you will get a wrong answer as this is not a valid calculation.
You can set the Braille code as Computer Braille or Nemeth Braille as
described previously. Use “Fn-g” to change the Braille code from anywhere
in the Calculator.
483
13.1.13 Exit
This is used to exit the calculator. You can close the calculator by pressing
"Enter" on "Exit Calculator" or press z in the menu. Or, in your calculation
line, you can exit by pressing "Alt-F4".
13.1.14 Sample Math Calculations
The following are examples of expressions for some of the math functions
you can perform when using the calculator on the Voice Sense QWERTY.
1. Addition Plus
For Plus press “+”
For example, to add the numbers 10 and 20, you would enter: 10+20.
The result is displayed as 30.
2. Subtraction Minus
For Minus, press “-”
For example, to add the numbers 10 and 20, and then subtract 5, you
would enter: 10+20-5. The result is displayed as 25.
3. Multiplication
For multiplication, press “*”
For example, to multiply 10 by 20, you would enter: 10*20.
The result is displayed as 200.
4. Division
For Division, press “/”
For example, to divide 20 by 10, you would enter: 20/10. The result is
displayed as 2.
5. Percent
For Percent, press “%”
484
If you want to calculate, what a 10 percent mark-up of 20 would be,
enter the following, 20+10% which gives you the result 22. You get this
answer because, 2 is 10percent of 20.
To calculate a 10 percent mark-down on 20, press: 20-10% which gives
the result 18.
You get this answer because, 2 is 10 percent of 20.
To calculate what percentage 20 is of 10, press: 20/10% which gives
you the result 200.
To calculate 10 percent of 20, press: 20*10% which gives the result 2.
That is, 10 percent is 0.1. 20*0.1 = 2.
6. Power
For Power, press “^”
For example, to calculate 2 to the power of 10, you would press: 2^10.
The answer will be given as 1024.
7. Calculating Square Root
To perform the Square root function, you can press “Ctrl” with “q”
For example, to calculate the square root of 16, you press: “Ctrl” with q,
16 “)”. Then, press enter.
Your answer will be given as 4.
8. Exponent
For Exponent you can press “Ctrl” with “e”
For example, to calculate the Exponent of 2, you would press: Ctrl with e
then 2, followed by the “)” and “Enter”. That is, exp (2) which gives the
result 7.3890561.
1. Trigonometric Functions
Sine Functions:
485
For Sine, press “Ctrl” with “s,” and then “s”. This is shown on the Braille
display (When connected to SyncBraille) as, sin(.
For Arc Sine, press “Ctrl” with “s,” then “a”. This is displayed as asin(.
For Hyperbolic sine, press “Ctrl” with “s,” then “h”. This is displayed as
sinh(.
In order to calculate the sine of a 30 degree angle you would type the
following: Ctrl with s, then “s,” 30 and then” )”. Press “Enter” and your
answer is displayed as 0.5.
Cosine Functions:
For Cosine, you would press “Ctrl” with “i” and then you would press “i” This
is displayed as cos(.
For Arc cosine, press “Ctrl,” with “i” then, “a”. This is displayed as acos(.
For Hyperbolic cosine, press “Ctrl” with “i” then, “h”. This is displayed as
cosh(.
For example, to calculate the cosine of the 30 degree angles, you press:
Ctrl with i, I, 30 and then “)”. Then, press “Enter”. Your answer will be given
as 0.8660254.
Tangent Functions:
For Tangent, press “Ctrl” with “t” and then “t”. This is displayed as tan(.
For Arc tangent, press “Ctrl” with “t” then “a”. This is displayed as atan(.
For Hyperbolic tangent, press “Ctrl,” with “t,” then, “h”. This is displayed as
tanh(.
For example, to calculate the tangent of the 30 degree angles, you press:
Ctrl with t, T, 30 and then “)”. That is, tan(30) which gives you the result of
0.57735027.
Logarithm Functions:
486
Common logarithm
For Common logarithm, press “Ctrl” with “l,” and then “n”. This is displayed
as log(.
For example, to calculate the common logarithm of the 100, you press: Ctrl
with l, N, 100 and then “)”. That is, log(100) which gives the result 2.
Natural Logarithm
For Natural logarithm, press “Ctrl” with “l,” and then, “e”. This is displayed
as ln(.
For example, to calculate the natural logarithm of the 100, you press: Ctrl
with l, E, 100 and then “)”. That is, ln(100) which gives the result
4.60517019.
13.2 Display Compass Heading
Use this option to display the direction of the compass on the Voice Sense
QWERTY. You can display the compass heading from anywhere on the unit.
To display the compass heading, do the following:
Press "FN-Space" from anywhere on the Voice Sense QWERTY.
The current status of the compass is displayed.
You can also access compass status in the "Utilities" menu. Move to
"Display Compass Heading" by pressing “down arrow”. Press "Enter" on the
"Display Compass Heading" or simply press "h".
As you change direction, to check the current compass status, press
"Space". The current direction is announced.
To exit this function, press "Esc" or Alt-F4.
Note: It will take about 15 minutes to initialize the unit should the following
situations occur:
1. The unit discharges a great distance from the location where the compass
was last used.
487
2. The unit remains discharged for more than a month.
13.2.1 Options of gyrocompass
There are 2 option settings available when viewing compass status:
"Refreshing time" and "Compass display type".
Refreshing time:
You can set the interval of the automatic announcement of the compass
status. To set this option, follow these steps:
1) Execute "Display Compass Heading".
2) The Voice Sense QWERTY displays the current compass status.
3) Press "Tab".
4) You are placed in the "Refreshing time" edit box.
5) Type the number of seconds between compass status announcements.
By default, it is set to 0. You may type a number between 0 and 120.
Compass display type:
You can set the type of the compass display. To set, follow these steps:
1) Execute "Display Compass Heading".
2) The current compass status is displayed.
3) Press "Tab" to move to "Compass display type".
4) The setting values are "cardinal and degrees", "cardinal only" and
"degrees only". By pressing "Space", you can change the value of the setting.
By default, it is set to "cardinal and degrees".
13.3 Display Time and Date
Use this function to check the current date and time. To activate this function,
press "up arrow” or “down arrow” to navigate to "Display Time and Date" in
the "Utilities" menu, and press "Enter". Or, you can activate this function by
pressing d from the menu. You can also query the time and date from
anywhere on the Voice Sense QWERTY. Press "Fn-t " to check the time.
Press “Tab”, and today's date is displayed.
488
13.4 Wake up alarm
You can set a "Wake up alarm" so that an alarm sounds on the Voice Sense
QWERTY at a specified time every day. To open "Wake up alarm", from the
"Utilities" menu, use “up arrow” or “down arrow” to navigate to "Wake up
alarm", and press "Enter". You can launch the “Wake Up alarm” application
from anywhere on the unit by pressing “Caps Lock-A”.
If this is the first time you have opened "Wake up alarm", and you have not
yet set the time or date in the Voice Sense QWERTY, the unit prompts, "Set
time:" After you set the time, the Voice Sense QWERTY displays the "Wake
up alarm" dialog. You are then prompted, "Set time:" The "Wake up alarm"
dialog contains the following: "Set time", "Bell", "Term", "Alarm duration",
"Repeat interval", "Wake up call times", a "Confirm" button, and a "Cancel"
button. You can move among the controls by pressing “Tab” and "shift-tab".
When the alarm sounds, the Braille display (When connected to SyncBraille)
also displays the message "Wake up call. Press “Ctrl” to stop the alarm". As
the message indicates, to stop the alarm, press "Ctrl".
13.4.1 Set Time
When you open the "Wake up alarm" dialog, the Voice Sense QWERTY
displays the "Set time" field. The value is set to the current time or the time
specified previously. Here you can directly type the time, or set the time
using the shortcut keys, as explained in section 6.3. After you set the time
press “Tab” to move to the next field.
13.4.2 Alarm Sound
You can select from 1 of 3 alarm sounds for the wake up alarm. If you press
“Tab” from "Set time", the current alarm sound plays. Press “up arrow” or
“down arrow” to change the alarm sound. As you move among the sounds,
the different alarm sounds are played.
489
When you have selected your desired alert, press “Tab” to move to the next
field.
13.4.3 Term
In this field, you can set which days of the week the alarm sounds. There are
four options: "Off", "Once", "Week days", and "Every day". Move among
these options by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”. If the "Term" is set to
"Off", the alarm does not go off at the specified time, no matter how the other
options in the dialog are set. If the "Term" is set to "Once", the alarm goes off
only once. If the "Term" is set to "Week day", the alarm goes off at the same
time every weekday, Monday through Friday. If the "Term" is set to
"Everyday", the alarm goes off at the specified time 7 days a week. When
you have selected your preference, press “Tab” to move to the next field.
13.4.4 Ringing Duration
This option sets the amount of time that the alarm sounds. The options are 1
minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. Move among these options by pressing “up
arrow” or “down arrow”. If you set the ringing duration to "1 minute", the
alarm sounds for one minute, then is silent. To stop the alarm before a
minute has passed, press "Ctrl".
13.4.5 Repeat Interval
This option sets the amount of time between the times that the alarm sounds.
For example, if you set the repeat interval to three minutes, after the alarm
has stopped sounding, it rings again in 3 minutes, . The available settings
are 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 20 minutes. Move among these options by pressing
“up arrow” or “down arrow”.
13.4.6 Wake up Call Times
490
This option allows you to decide how many times the alarm sounds. If the
alarm is not turned off by pressing "Ctrl", it repeats according to the number
of times you set for this option. The available settings are 1 to 10. Move
among these options by pressing “up arrow” or “down arrow”.
13.4.7 Confirm/Cancel
If you press "Enter" on the "Confirm" button, the changes are saved, and the
dialog is closed. If you do not want to save the changes, press "Enter" on the
"Cancel" button. The Voice Sense QWERTY keeps the previous alarm
settings, and closes the dialog.
13.5 Calendar
You can open the calendar by pressing "Enter" on "Calendar" in the
"Utilities" menu, or by pressing "l". You can launch the “Calendar” from
anywhere on the unit by pressing “Caps Lock-L”.
The following options are available: "Solar calendar", and "Lunar calendar"".
In the calendar, you can check three kinds of information starting from the
year 1841 to the year 2043. If you type a date that is not in the range and
press "Enter", you get the message, "Invalid date", and return to the "Date"
edit combo box.
13.5.1 Using the Calendar
The "Calendar" is composed of the "Solar calendar", and the "Lunar
calendar". In the "Lunar calendar", a leap month is displayed with "l". The
calendar works according to a date unit. The default is the date set on the
Voice Sense QWERTY.
The following is an explanation of how to check the dates.
1. Moving items
You can switch among "Solar calendar", and "Lunar calendar" by pressing
“Tab” or "shift-tab".
491
2. Typing date
In the calendar, you can type a month, date, and year in the form of
mm/dd/yyyy. Use 2 digits for the day, 2 digits for the month, and 4 gigits for
the year, separating them using a slash or space. If you press "Enter" after
typing a date, the date is announced in one calendar, and you can press
"Tab” to move to the equivalent date in the other calendar.
3. Hotkeys for switching dates
After typing a date, you can check the "Solar calendar", "Lunar calendar",
and "Day of week" by pressing “Tab” or "shift-tab".
Move to the next day: Right arrow
Move to the previous day: Left arrow
Move to the next week: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the previous week: Ctrl-left arrow
Move to the next month: Down arrow
Move to the previous month: Up arrow
Move to the next year: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the previous year: Ctrl-Up arrow
13.6 Stopwatch
Launch the “Stopwatch” by pressing “enter” on “Stopwatch” in the “Utilities”
menu. Or, you can launch the “Stopwatch” from anywhere on the unit by
pressing “Caps Lock-W”.
When you press "Enter" on the "Stopwatch", "00:00:00" is displayed. Press
"Enter", to start the stopwatch running. Press "Enter" again, to pause, and
the Voice Sense QWERTY announces the elapsed time, and displays it in
Braille. Pressing "Enter" again restarts the stopwatch running.
If you press "Backspace" while the stopwatch is paused or running, The
Voice Sense QWERTY announces the elapsed time and clears to "00:00:00".
While the stopwatch is running, pressing "Space" gives you the elapsed time.
As the stopwatch is still running, the Braille display (When connected to
SyncBraille) continues displaying the time second by second as it passes.
492
Press "Fn-Space" to stop displaying the time. If you press "Fn-Space" once
more, the time is displayed again.
If you press “Tab” or "shift-tab" when the stopwatch is idle or while it is
running, you switch to the "Countdown timer". If you activate the "Countdown
timer", you are asked to type hours, minutes, and seconds. When typing the
hours, minutes, and seconds, type a two-digit number for the hour, minute,
and the second. If you press "Enter" without typing any numbers, the
"Countdown timer" starts counting down by the default time, which is set to
one minute. When started, the "Countdown timer" displays "countdown xx
minute", and begins running.
Press "Enter" on the "Countdown timer", and the Voice Sense QWERTY tells
you the remaining time, and pauses countdown. Press "Enter" again to
restart the timer. Pressing "Backspace" clears the "Countdown timer". If the
timer reaches zero, a 10-second alarm sounds, and the "Countdown timer"
clears. If you press "Ctrl" while the alarm is sounding, the alarm stops and
your timer clears, and is ready to accept a new time.
Press “Tab” or "shift-tab", to return to the stopwatch. To exit the "Stopwatch"
or "Countdown timer", press "Alt-F4", and you return to the "Stopwatch" item
in the "Utilities menu.
13.7 Terminal for Screen reader
The "Terminal for screen reader" function allows the Voice Sense QWERTY
to be used as a Braille display when connected to a computer or cell phone
that uses a compatible screen reader such as Window-Eyes, Supernova, or
Apple's VoiceOver. Before using this function, make sure that the Voice
Sense QWERTY is connected to your personal computer or smart phone via
a Bluetooth serial connection, or to the USB client port. To turn on this
function, from the "Utilities" menu, press “down arrow” repeatedly to reach
"Terminal for screen reader". Then press "Enter". Or, you can press “S” from
the “Utilities” menu to quickly jump to and execute the “Terminal for Screen
Reader”.
You can launch the “terminal for Screen reader” from anywhere on the unit
by pressing “Caps Lock-S”.
493
When you activate "terminal for screen reader", the list of connection
options is displayed. The options are "Bluetooth serial port" and "USB port".
Press “up arrow” or “down arrow” to reach your desired connection type.
Press "Enter" and the unit announces, "Terminal mode". If you choose the
Bluetooth Serial connection and Bluetooth is not activated, the Voice Sense
automatically activates Bluetooth before entering Terminal Mode.
When in Terminal Mode, the Voice Sense QWERTY no longer speaks as it
is now simply acting as a Braille display for your computer or smart phone. If
the connection fails, you are returned to the list of connection methods.
To exit the "Terminal for Screen reader" press "Alt-x".
13.7.1 Connecting to a Screen reader
13.7.1.1 Connecting to PC via USB
To connect the Voice Sense to a Windows screen reader such as Jaws,
NVDA, System Access or Window-Eyes via USB, you must install the proper
USB driver on your PC. Below are steps for installing the USB driver.
Note: for JAWS for Windows version 14 or lower, you must download and
install 2 drivers: the generic HIMS USB driver, and the JAWS specific driver.
For all other screen readers, and when using JAWS 15 or higher, you need
only the generic Voice Sense USB driver.
1) Download the USB driver for Voice Sense from the HIMS website:
Generic USB driver:
http://www.himsintl.com/upload/HIMS_USB_Driver_v25.zip
JAWS specific driver for V14 or lower:
http://www.himsintl.com/upload/JAWS/HIMS_Braille_Driver_For_Jaws_V2_1.zip
2) Unzip the compressed file and execute “Braille_SENSE_USB_Driver.exe.
3) When the “Voice Sense USB Driver Setup wizard” appears, select the
“Install” button.
4) When the installation wizard appears, select the “Next” button.
494
5) When the drivers are successfully installed, press the “Finish” button.
6) Connect the Voice Sense to the PC via the USB cable, and make sure it
is in Terminal Mode.
7)
A. if using windows 7/8, Windows will locate and automatically install the
drivers. If running XP, please use step B, and the subsequent numbered
steps.
B. When the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears, select “Install from a
specific location” using the “Down arrow”, and then press the “Next” button.
8) When the “Please choose your search and install option” message
appears, select “Don’t search. I will choose the driver to install”, and press
the “Next” button.
9) You are prompted to “Select the device driver you want to install for this
hardware”, select “HIMS USB DRIVER” and press the “Next” button.
10) “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard” should appear. Select
the “Finish” button.
When you have finished installation of the USB driver on the PC, please
follow the instructions for connecting the display with your screen reader via
USB.
13.7.1.2 Connecting to PC via Bluetooth serial port
The following steps will walk you through setting up the Voice Sense to be
used as a Bluetooth Terminal for Screen Reader. These instructions assume
that you already have Bluetooth installed on your computer. The following
instructions also assume that you are running at least Windows XP, Service
Pack 2.
Before you begin, make sure that your Voice Sense is turned on and be
aware of the unit’s designated Bluetooth name.
1. Instructions for windows XP
495
1) Navigate to the Bluetooth icon in the System Tray. You may open the
system tray by pressing "windows key-b", then press the Right or Left Arrow
Key until you reach the Bluetooth icon. Then, press the "Applications” key".
Note: If the Bluetooth icon does not appear in the System Tray, you may
have to change the settings for the Bluetooth icon to appear. Go to the
Windows Control Panel, Bluetooth Devices, Options, and check the check
box that says "Show the Bluetooth Icon in the Notification Area".
2) Press the "up or down arrow" key until you get to "Open Bluetooth
settings", and press "Enter".
3) Fromt the tabs list, use “Control-Tab” to select the Device tab.
4) Tab to the Add button, and press "Enter".
5) Press "Space" to check the checkbox for "My device is setup and ready
to be found", and then press enter".
6) The XP machine should find the Voice Sense under the name "”Voice
Sense----“where --- represents a numeric value.
7) Press the "down arrow" key to focus the name of your HIMS Braille
device.
8) Tab to the Next button, and press "Enter".
9) The PC should ask for the PIN code. Type a 4 digit code of your choosing,
and press Enter. Voice Sense will then prompt you for the same pin code;
type it in computer Braille and press Enter.
10) The computer should display the message, "Found new hardware" and
the finish dialog should appear.
If the connection is successful, the dialog should display that the
Bluetooth device was successfully set up. Please note the numbers for the
incoming and outgoing com ports. For example, the outgoing COM port may
be
COM 5, and the incoming COM port may be COM 6. Do not be surprised if
your COM ports are not set to COM 5 and COM 6. The COM ports used can
vary from computer to computer.
11) Press "tab" to get to the Finish button, and press "Enter" to activate it.
12) You are returned to the Bluetooth device settings dialog. From the tabs
list, press Ctrl-Tab twice to focus the COM ports tab control.
13) Press "tab" to get to the list of COM ports, and press the Down Arrow to
move through the list of COM ports to verify the com port numbers.
496
14) Tab to the OK button, and press Enter.
2. Connecting via Bluetooth to a Windows 7/Windows 8 computer.
1) Open the Control Panel.
2) Open Devices and Printers
3) Tab to “Add a Device” and press “Enter”.
4) Windows searches for devices and displays them in a list.
5) Use the Up or Down arrow to navigate to the Voice Sense and press
“Enter”.
6) You are asked to enter the pass code for the device. Enter a 4 digit code
of your choosing and press Enter. The Voice Sense will then prompt you for
the same pass code; type it in computer Braille, and press Enter.
7) The computer should display the message, "Found new hardware" and
the final dialog should appear on the computer. The dialog should display
that the Bluetooth device was successfully set up. It is very important to note
the Bluetooth COM port as you will need this when setting up your screen
reader.
13.7.1.3 Using the Voice Sense with Window-Eyes
Use the following steps to connect your HIMS Braille device as a terminal for
Screen Reader with Window-Eyes from GW Micro. 1) Make sure your Voice Sense is powered on, and in Terminal mode. 2) Press Control-Backslash to open the Window-Eyes control Panel. 3) Arrow down to devices and press “Enter”. 4) Arrow down to “Braille displays” and press “Tab” to open the available
displays list. 5) Arrow down to Voice Sense and press “Tab” to get to the ports list. 497
6) If you are using Bluetooth, please choose the Com Port number that
matches your Bluetooth connection. If using USB, choose “USB” from the
ports list. 7) Tab to “Activate” and press “Enter”. 8) If activation is successful, you have 15 seconds to choose whether or not
to “keep settings” or “Revert” the settings to the way they were before you
activated the Voice Sense. 9) Tab to “Keep settings” and press “Enter”. 10) Tab to “Save Settings” and press “Enter”. 11) Tab to “Minimize” and press “Enter” to minimize the Window-Eyes
Control Panel. Note: You may need to restart Window-Eyes for Braille to begin displaying.
13.7.1.4 Using the Voice Sense with JAWS for Windows
Use the following instructions to set up the Voice Sense as a Braille display
with the JAWS screen reader from Freedom Scientific:
1) Make sure Voice Sense is powered on and in Terminal Mode. If you are
using USB, please connect the unit to the computer via the included USB
cable.
2) Navigate to the JAWS Window and press “Alt” to open the menu.
3) Press “Enter” on the “Options” menu.
4) Use the Up or Down arrow to navigate to “Braille” and press “Enter”.
5) Choose HIMS Voice Sense as your Braille device.
6) Tab to “Advanced” and press “Enter”.
7) Choose USB as the port if connecting via USB, or the correct Com Port if
using Bluetooth.
8) Tab to “OK” and press “Enter”.
498
9) You are prompted that you must restart JAWS for the settings to take
effect. Restart JAWS for Windows, and Braille should begin displaying.
13.7.1.5 Using Voice Sense as a Braille display with NVDA
Use the following instructions to set up the Voice Sense for use as a Braille
display with the free NVDA screen reader from NV Access.
1) Make sure Voice Sense is powered on and in Terminal Mode. If you are
using USB, please connect the device to your computer via the included
USB cable.
2) Press “NVDA key-N” to open the NVDA menu.
3) Arrow down to “Preferences” and press “Enter”.
4) Arrow down to “Braille Settings” and press “Enter”.
5) Choose “HIMS Voice Sense” from the Braille Display combo box.
6) Tab to the “Port” combo box and ensure that it is set correctly. (NVDA
employs automatic port detection, so you should not need to change this
setting)
7) Tab among the various combo boxes to choose options such as output
and Input tables, cursor options, etc. Use the Up and Down arrows to
navigate among the choices in each combo box.
8) When you have finished selecting your settings, Tab to “OK” and press
“Enter”.
Note: Make sure the “Save configuration on Exit” box is checked in the
NVDA menu in order to ensure your settings for the Voice Sense are saved,
thus the HIMS Braille device will automatically connect each time you use
NVDA in the future.
13.7.1.6 Using the Voice Sense with System Access.
Currently, The Voice Sense works with System Access using only a
Bluetooth connection. To use your Voice Sense as a Braille display with
System Access, ensure it is powered on, Bluetooth is activated, it is in
Terminal Mode, and that it has been paired with your PC. When System
499
Access is started, the device is automatically detected, and Braille begins
displaying.
13.7.1.7 Using Voice Sense with VoiceOver on the Mac.
To use a Voice Sense as a USB braille display with a Mac running
VoiceOver, you can simply power on the device, make sure it is in Terminal
Mode and connect it to the Mac via USB. The unit is immediately recognized
and VoiceOver output is shown on the Braille display.
Use the following steps to connect the Voice Sense as a Bluetooth Braille
display with a Mac running VoiceOver:
1. Ensure that the unit is powered on, Bluetooth is activated, and it is in
Terminal Mode.
2. Press Vo-F8 to open the voiceOver Utility.
3. Navigate to “Categories” and press Vo-Shift-Down to begin interacting
with it.
4. Press B for Braille.
5. Press Vo-Shift-Up to stop interacting with the Categories group.
6. Press Vo-Right to “Display”, and press Vo-Space to activate it.
7. Navigate to “Add”, and press VoSpace to activate.
8. VoiceOver announces “Searching for Bluetooth devices”.
9. Navigate to the “Bluetooth devices” list and press Vo-Shift-Down to
interact with the table.
10. Navigate to “Voice Sense ” and press Vo-Shift-Up to stop interacting with
the table.
11. Navigate to “Remember this device” and press Vo-Space to check the
box.
12. Navigate to “select” and press Vo-Space” to activate it.
13. VoiceOver asks for the pairing code and places you in the edit box.
14. Enter the pairing code, type a 4 digit code of your choosing and press
Enter. Voice Sense prompts you for the same pin code; type it in computer
Braille and press Enter.
You should hear a chime indicating VoiceOver has connected to your Braille
device and you should begin seeing VoiceOver output on the Braille display.
500
13.7.1.8 Using the Voice Sense with IOS devices
Use the following instructions to connect your Voice Sense as a Bluetooth
Braille display with your iPhone, iPad, or iPod.
Note: You must be running IOS 4.2 or higher on your i-device in order to use
HIMS Braille devices as Bluetooth Braille displays with VoiceOver. These
instructions refer to the iPhone, however, they apply to all compatible idevices: iPhone 3Gs and higher, iPad, and iPod Touch 3G and later.
1) Make sure your Voice Sense is powered on, Bluetooth is activated, and it
is in Terminal Mode.
2) On your iPhone, Navigate to
Settings/General/Accessibility/VoiceOver/Braille.
3) If Bluetooth is not activated on the I-Phone, it will prompt you to do this.
WHEN Bluetooth is activated, the I-Phone searches for devices.
4) The Voice Sense should appear in the list of available Braille devices.
5) Double tap the Voice Sense in the Braille devices list.
6) You are asked for a pin code. Enter a 4 digit code of your choosing and
double tap the Pair button.
7) the notetaker prompts you for the pin code; type the same pin code you
entered in to the iPhone, and press Enter.
You should hear a chime on the iPhone, and the text displayed on the
iPhone should appear on the Braille display of your Voice Sense.
13.7.1.9 Using the Voice Sense with BrailleBack for Android.
In order to gain Braille access to Android via BrailleBack, you must first
download and install the application to your Android device from the Google
Play store.
Use the following steps to use your Voice Sense as a Braille display with
BrailleBack.
1. Make sure your Voice Sense is powered on, Bluetooth is activated, and in
Terminal Mode.
501
2. On your Android device: go to “Settings”.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select “Search for devices”.
5. Select the Voice Sense from the device list.
6. When requested, enter a 4 digit pairing code of your choosing and select
the OK button:
After activating the OK button on the tablet, Voice Sense prompts you for the
same pin code; type it in computer braille and press Enter.
7. When the Voice Sense is successfully paired, return to “Settings” on your
Android device and select “Accessibility”.
8. Select BrailleBack and enable the checkbox to turn it on. The paired
Braille display should be recognized and should begin displaying Braille.
13.7.2 Terminal Clipboard
Terminal Clipboard allows you to create and edit text on the notetaker
before sending it via the Terminal for Screen Reader to the connected
device. This can be useful in instances like when using VoiceOver on an idevice, in which characters are translated as they are sent to the IPhone or
iPad. In this case, if you do not type quickly, characters may be
mistranslated. For example: if you type “t e l l” and do not type quickly
enough, VoiceOver could potentially translate this as “thateverylikelike” as,
if there are pauses in typing, each Braille character can potentially be
translated to its whole word equivalent. In the same way, editing text is also
difficult as, any letter or single character Braille contraction, when typed by
itself is translated as that contraction. So, if you are attempting to type the
word “talk”, and accidentally type “tall”, when you delete the “l” and type the
“k” the “k” is translated as “knowledge”. Thus, the text you get is
“talknowledge”. To truly fix the word, you must erase the entire word and
type it again.
Thus, creating/editing text when using your notetaker as a Braille display is
sometimes a very exact and tedious business. As explained above, the
Terminal Clipboard allows you to create and edit text on the notetaker, and
502
send the completed text to the connected computer or SmartPhone via the
Terminal for Screen reader.
To enter “Terminal Clipboard”, press “Control-FN-I”. The Voice Sense
announces, “Terminal Clipboard”. Type and edit your text using normal text
entry and edit commands. In “Terminal Clipboard”, the Braille display and
keyboard are temporarily disabled from sending/receiving information
to/from your connected computer or i-device, so that you may use them for
creating/editing your text. For more information on text entry and editing,
please see section 5 of this manual on the Word Processor. When you are
finished typing the text you wish to send to your computer or PDA, press
“Control-S” and the text is quickly inputted to the device via the Terminal for
Screen reader, and your Voice Sense returns to sending/receiving
information to and from the connected device.
“Terminal Clipboard” can also be useful for transferring text from a
document or e-mail in your notetaker, to a document or e-mail you are
creating on your connected computer or SmartPhone. As the “Terminal
Clipboard” is a standard edit box on the notetaker, you can paste text in to
it from the notetaker’s clipboard. (see the sections of this manual regarding
selecting text as it applies to supported programs such as the Word
Processor, E-mail, Web Browser, etc.)
To send text on the notetaker’s clipboard to your connected device via the
Terminal for screen reader, do the following:
1) While in Terminal Mode, press “Control-FN-I” to activate “Terminal
Clipboard”.
2) Press “Control-v” to paste the text from the notetaker’s clipboard to the
edit box.
3) Press “Control-S” to send the text to the computer or i-device via the
Terminal for Screen Reader.
503
13.8 Display Network Status
Using this utility, you can check whether the Voice Sense QWERTY is
currently connected to the Internet. This utility provides information about the
current connection type, the current IP of the unit, subnet mask, gateway,
and MAC address. To check network status, press "Enter" on "Display
Network Status", or press "n" from the "Utilities" menu. You can also queery
network status from the "program" menu by pressing "Fn-n".
When you launch "Display network status", the information about the current
connection is displayed. If you press “Tab”, the Voice Sense QWERTY
displays a "Renew" button. If you press “Tab” again, "close" is displayed. If
you press "shift-tab", the Voice Sense QWERTY moves among these
elements in the opposite direction.
The first item in the information list (status) indicates whether the Voice
Sense QWERTY is currently connected to the Internet (online/offline), and if
so, the current connection type (LAN, Modem, ADSL, or Wireless LAN). The
next item is the "current IP address", followed by "Subnet mask", and
"Gateway", and finally "MAC address". You can move among these items by
pressing “down arrow” or “up arrow”. If the Voice Sense QWERTY is not
currently connected to the Internet, the status information shows "offline",
and the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway display 0's.
13.9 Display Power Status
You can activate the "Display power status" function by pressing b or press
"Enter" on "Display power status" from the "Utilities" menu. You can queery
power status from anywhere on the Voice Sense QWERTY by pressing "Fnb". When you execute this command, 2 pieces of information are displayed:
the percentage of charge remaining in the battery, and whether the Voice
Sense QWERTY is using the AC adapter or the battery to receive power.
After checking power status, you can exit by pressing "Alt-F4", and you are
returned to your previous location on the unit.
504
13.10 Format
At times, it may become necessary to reformat the flashdisk in the Voice
Sense QWERTY. You can access the "format" function by pressing f from
the "Utilities" menu. You can launch the “Format” option from anywhere on
the unit by pressing “Caps Lock-F”.
When you format the flashdisk, or any disk on the Voice Sense QWERTY, all
information is erased. Therefore, before you format, you are advised to
backup any important data if possible.
13.10.1 Formatting the disk
You can format the flashdisk using 2 methods:
1. Formatting the disk from the "Utilities" menu.
1) Go to "Format" in the "Utilities" menu.
2) Press "Enter", and "flashdisk" is focused.
3) Press "Enter"
4) You are prompted, "Format flashdisk?" Yes".
5) Press "Enter"
6) You are prompted, "All data will be lost. Continue? Yes".
7) Press "Enter".
8) The unit announces, "Now formatting flashdisk" and the format is started.
9) When the format is complete, you are returned to the "Disk" list.
To cancel the format, press "Space", or press "Enter" on "No" in step 4 or 6.
You can also use this utility to format external storage devices such as SD
cards or USB drives by choosing them from the disk list and following the
procedure as described above.
2. Formatting the flashdisk using "Reset".
1) Press and hold "Fn-f".
2) While holding down "Fn-f", quickly press and release the reset button.
505
3) Continue holding "Fn-f" until the unit announces, "Format start".
4) When the format completes, the unit reboots and you are placed in the
"program" menu.
13.11 Set Sleep Timer
YOU can set the sleep timer to turn the Voice Sense QWERTY off after a
specified amount of time regardless of what you are doing.
To set the sleep timer, follow these steps:
1) Open the "Utilities" menu.
2) Press “up arrow” or “down arrow”, to move to "Sleep timer".
3) Press "Enter".
4) Or press "Fn-j" from anywhere on the unit.
5) You are prompted, "Sleep timer: 0".
6) Enter the number of minutes for the sleep timer in the edit box. The
available settings range from 0 to 180.
7) Press "Enter".
When the sleep timer is set, even if the device is active, it powers off after
the specified amount of time. If you set the sleep timer for "5" minutes and
press "Fn-j" after 2 minutes, "3" is displayed in the edit box, indicating the
time remaining before the sleep timer powers the unit off.
13.12 Upgrade Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware
Using this utility, you can update the Voice Sense QWERTY either via an
Internet connection or from external media containing the upgrade files. If
you choose the "Online" method, be sure you have an active Internet
connection before attempting the upgrade.
You can launch the “Upgrade firmware” utility by pressing “enter” on
“Upgrade Voice Sense Firmware” in the “Utilities Menu. Or, you can launch
the “Upgrade” utility from anywhere on the unit by pressing “caps Lock-U”.
When you update the Voice Sense QWERTY, all of the settings are returned
to their default status. Data in the flashdisk should not be affected. However,
506
we recommend you backup your files before updating the Voice Sense
QWERTY Firmware as unexpected problems can occur.
Note: You cannot cancel the update once it has started. You must not reset
the unit during an upgrade. You must keep the unit connected to AC power
throughout the upgrade process. We recommend you do not touch the Voice
Sense QWERTY while it is updating. It may take up to 30 minutes to update
the Voice Sense QWERTY, depending on the speed of your Internet
connection. On completing the installation, the Voice Sense QWERTY
reboots again to finish the update and places you in the "program" menu.
Also note: the upgrade files are temporarily stored on the flashdisk for
installation. If you do not have enough memory available on the flashdisk,
the Voice Sense QWERTY is unable to update until you make room for the
upgrade files.
13.12.1 Upgrading the Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware Using
the Internet
To upgrade the Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware via the Internet, follow
these steps:
1) Make sure you are connected to the Internet and plugged into AC power.
Press "Enter" on "Upgrade Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware" in the
"Utilities" menu.
2) Press "Enter" on "Upgrade: Online". The Voice Sense QWERTY connects
to the HIMS server, and your current software version is compared to the
HIMS server version. You are prompted to continue with the upgrade.
3) If you press "Enter" on "No", the upgrade is cancelled. Press "Space" to
toggle between "Yes" and "No". If you press "Enter" on "Yes", the Voice
Sense QWERTY begins downloading the upgrade files. If the upgrade fails,
you may receive the message, "Internet connection is not available. Check
your cable and try again". To try the upgrade again, press "Alt-F4" to cancel,
507
and activate "Upgrade Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware" again. If the
connection is successful, the upgrade files are downloaded.
4) After downloading the upgrade files, Voice Sense QWERTY automatically
starts the upgrade process. Please remember you must not touch the Voice
Sense QWERTY until the upgrade is complete as pressing keys, resetting,
or unplugging the unit can interrupt the upgrade process, thus resulting in an
incomplete installation. When the upgrade is complete, you are returned to
the "program" menu, and the unit announces, "File manager".
5) After the upgrade is complete, check the software version by pressing
"Fn-v” while in the "program" menu.
13.12.2 Upgrading the Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware from
a Disk
To upgrade the Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware from a disk, follow these
steps:
1) Download the upgrade files from the HIMS, Inc. website. Extract the zip
file and copy the 2 files contained in it to the root of an external storage
device such as an SD card or USB thumb drive.
2) Connect the SD card or USB drive to the Voice Sense QWERTY, and be
sure the Voice Sense QWERTY is connected to AC power. Then, press
"Enter" on "Upgrade Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware" from the "Utilities"
menu.
3) "Upgrade: Online" is displayed. Press “down arrow” to go to the "Upgrade:
Offline" option. Press "Enter".
4) If you are already running the latest version of the software, you are asked
to continue with the upgrade. If you press "Enter" on "No", the upgrade is
cancelled. Press "Space" to toggle between "Yes" and "No".
508
5) If you press "Enter" on "Yes", the Voice Sense QWERTY warns you that
all settings will be set to factory defaults, and again, asks if you would like to
continue. Press "Enter" on "Yes".
6) The Voice Sense QWERTY starts the upgrade process. Please remember
you must not touch the Voice Sense QWERTY until the upgrade is complete.
When the upgrade is complete, you are returned to the "program" menu, and
"File manager" is displayed.
7) When the upgrade is complete, check the software version by pressing
"Fn-v" while in the "program" menu.
13.13 Hot keys for Utilities
Calculator: c
Calculator Clear:Alt-c
Delete numbers or operators: Backspace
General functions: Ctrl-g
Plus: +
Minus: Division: /
Multiplication: *
Percent: %
Power: ^
Over: FN-/
Square Root: Ctrl-q
Decimal Point: .
Left Parenthesis: (
Right Parenthesis: )
PI: Ctrl-p
Exp: Ctrl-e
509
Memory Functions:
Recall Items: Alt-r
Delete all saved items: Ctrl-d
Save Items: Alt-s
Trigonometric Functions: Ctrl-s
Sine: Ctrl-s, s
Arc Sine: Ctrl-s, a
Hyperbolic Sine: Ctrl-s, h
Cosine: Ctrl-i, i
Arc Cosine: Ctrl-c, a
Hyperbolic Cosine: Ctrl-c, h
Tangent: Ctrl-t, t
Arc Tangent: Ctrl-t, a
Hyperbolic Tangent: Ctrl-t, h
Logarithm Functions: Ctrl-l
Natural Logarithm: Ctrl-l, e
Common Logarithm: Ctrl-l, n
Miscellaneous:
Copy to Clipboard: Ctrl-c
Option Settings: Ctrl-o
Fraction options: Control-/
Return formula: Control-r
Check date and time: Fn-t
Calendar: l
Move items
Move to the previous item: Tab
Move to the next item: Shift-tab
Navigation keys for date in calendar
510
Move to the next day: Right arrow
Move to the previous day: Left arrow
Move to the next week: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the previous week: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next month: Down arrow
Move to the previous month: Up arrow
Move to the next year: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the previous year: Ctrl-Up arrow
Stopwatch: w
Stopwatch start, pause, restart: enter
Check the elapsed time: Backspace
Stop Braille display: Fn-Space
Restart Braille display: Fn-Space
Switch between stopwatch and count down timer: “Tab” or “shift-tab”
Count down timer pause or restart: enter
Count down timer Clear: Backspace
Exit stopwatch or count down timer: Alt-F4
Display power status: Fn-b
Display network status: Fn-n
Format: Hold Fn-f and press and release "Reset"
Set Sleep Timer: Fn-j
Upgrade Voice Sense QWERTY Firmware: u
Check download information: Space
Cancel download and exit: Alt-F4
511
14. Using the help menu
The help section consists of various text files that allow you to read about the
many functions of the Voice Sense QWERTY. The "Help" menu contains the
following sections:
1. Help Overview
2. Basic Functions Help
3. SettingsHelp
4. File Manager Help
5. Word Processor Help
6. Email Help
7. Media Help
8. Organizer Help
9. web Tools Help
10. Social Networking Help.
11. Extras Help
12. Games Help
13. Utilities Help
14. Using the Help menu
15. Using ActiveSync
16. Command Summary
17. Command Summary for USB Keyboard
18. Troubleshooting Guide
19. Accessories
20. Information about the Voice Sense QWERTY
The section, "Help overview," gives a physical orientation to the Voice Sense
QWERTY and an overview of its functionality. To access the help file, press
“Windows” key to go to the "program" menu, and use “down arrow”
repeatedly until you locate "Help”. Press "Enter". The first item is "Help
Overview". Press "Enter" on "Help Overview" to open it. Keys for navigating
are the same as those in the Word Processor. For a list of navigation keys,
please see section 16.3.2.
512
As you read the manual on the Voice Sense QWERTY, you can search for
text in the various sections by pressing "Ctrl-f". Type the text you wish to find,
and press "Enter". You can find the next occurrence of the particular text you
searched for by pressing "F3".
The section, "Basic Functions Help", gives a basic overview of the
programming and operation of the Voice Sense QWERTY.
The section, "Settings Help" provides an explanation of how to establish
Internet and Bluetooth connections, how to set the time and date, and an
explanation of the "Global Options" and how to use them to configure your
Voice Sense QWERTY according to your preferences.
Most of the remaining sections cover each of the functions of the Voice
Sense QWERTY in detail. To access these help files, press “Windows” key
to go to the "program" menu, and use “down arrow” repeatedly until you
locate "Help". Or press the letter h to quickly jump to and open "Help". You
can open Help from anywhere on the unit by pressing “Windows-H”.
Use "down arrow” to navigate to the section you wish to read. Press "Enter"
on your desired section to open it.
The "Commands Summary" section is a quick reference of hot keys for all
the programs on the Voice Sense QWERTY: useful when you simply want to
know the keystroke for performing an action without reading the entirety of
the instructions on a given program.
The "Information about the Voice Sense QWERTY" section provides the
copyright and version of the Voice Sense QWERTY, as well as the version
of Windows CE that the Voice Sense QWERTY is using, the version of the
Voice Sense QWERTY firmware, and other useful items such as Mac
address and Key number. When the "information" section is open, you can
save the information about the Voice Sense QWERTY by pressing "Tab", to
navigate to the "Save" button and press "Enter". The unit displays
"Successfully saved", and returns you to the "Save" button.
The saved file is named "bs-information.txt", and is stored in "flashdisk" for
easy access.
513
15. Using ActiveSync
15.1 What is ActiveSync?
ActiveSync, or Windows Mobile Device Center as it is called in later versions
of Windows, is a program that allows mobile devices to connect to a
personal computer. This program enables file transfer from a personal
computer to a mobile device and vice versa. This program also facilitates
synchronization of the calendar and contacts on Voice Sense QWERTY with
those on Microsoft Outlook. ActiveSync/Windows Mobile Device Center is
not shipped with the Voice Sense QWERTY. It is available free of charge
from Microsoft for anyone using a Windows PC. If you would like to use
ActiveSync, you must download it from the Internet and install it on your
personal computer. If you are using Windows 7, Windows Mobile Device
Center is automatically downloaded and installed when a Windows Mobile
device is connected to the PC.
15.2 Connecting the Voice Sense QWERTY to a PC
To use ActiveSync/Windows Mobile Device Center with the Voice Sense
QWERTY, you must disable Mass Storage Device Mode before connecting
to the PC. To do this, press "F10" to open "Global Options". Press "Ctrl-right
arrow” to jump to the end of the "Global Options" dialog, as Mass Storage
Device Mode is the last item. If Mass Storage Device Mode is turned on,
press "Space" to turn it off. Press "Enter" to save the option settings.
Before connecting the Voice Sense QWERTY to your personal computer for
the first time, make sure that the Voice Sense QWERTY is powered off.
Once you have ActiveSync installed, connect a USB cable to the USB OTG
port on the left panel of the Voice Sense QWERTY. Then, connect the other
end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer. Now, turn
on the Voice Sense QWERTY. You will hear several sounds. First, on the
Voice Sense QWERTY, you will hear chimes. Then, on your computer, you
will hear a "ding-dong" sound indicating the Voice Sense QWERTY is
514
connected to the PC. You will again hear chimes on the Voice Sense
QWERTY, and then on your computer indicating that each recognizes the
other as a device for synchronization.
15.3 Setting up the Voice Sense QWERTY in the
ActiveSync Program
When the PC detects the Voice Sense QWERTY as a Windows Mobile
device, a screen pops up on your computer prompting you to "Set up a
Partnership". You can choose "Yes" or "No". If you select "Yes" on this
screen, the next time you connect the Voice Sense QWERTY to your
computer, synchronization with Microsoft Outlook will occur automatically. If
you select "No," the "Set up a Partnership" screen will pop up each time you
connect the Voice Sense QWERTY to your computer.
If you want to synchronize the Voice Sense QWERTY with Microsoft Outlook,
select "Yes," and press the "next" button. Then, you are asked to select a
name for the mobile device. You can use only _, A-Z, and 0-9 in your device
name. You cannot use spaces. Once you have entered an appropriate name,
press "Enter" on the "next" button.
A list of functions appears on your computer. Each function has a check box
located next to it. Make sure no check boxes other than the "Contacts" and
"Calendar" check boxes are checked, as synchronization of Calendar and
Contacts is all that is currently supported on the Voice Sense QWERTY. You
may choose to check "Contacts", "Calendar", or both, depending on your
preference. After setting your preferences, press "next". A dialog box
appears displaying, "setup complete”. Tab to the "finish" button and press
"Enter".
ActiveSync then looks for changes, and synchronizes with Microsoft Outlook.
For more information on how to use ActiveSync/Windows Mobile Device
Center or Microsoft Outlook, please visit www.microsoft.com.
515
15.4 Transferring Files to the Voice Sense QWERTY
Via ActiveSync
To transfer files to the Voice Sense QWERTY from your computer, locate the
file(s) you want to transfer from your PC using Windows Explorer. Select the
file(s), and press "ctrl-c" on your PC to copy the file(s) to the clipboard. Go to
the desktop on your computer by pressing "Windows-key-d". Press the letter
m repeatedly until you reach "My computer". Press "Enter". Again, press the
letter m repeatedly until you reach "mobile device", and press "Enter". The
"mobile device" is the Voice Sense QWERTY. When the "mobile device" is
opened, you are placed in the file list on the Voice Sense QWERTY. One of
the items in the list is another "my computer" icon. Press the letter m
repeatedly until you reach "my computer", and press "Enter". Another file list
opens. In this list, is located a folder called "flashdisk”. This is the same
"flashdisk" that appears under "File Manager" on your Voice Sense
QWERTY, and is the internal drive on your notetaker. Press f until you reach
"flashdisk," and then press "Enter”. You can paste the file(s) here directly by
pressing "ctrl-v," or you can paste the file(s) in to one of the folders on the
flashdisk.
If you want to copy folders from the Voice Sense QWERTY to your PC via
ActiveSync, follow the same steps; but copy files from the Voice Sense
QWERTY, and paste the file(s) into your preferred directory on the PC.
516
16. Command Summary
16.1 Common Combination Keys
Open the program menu: Win key
Key help mode: Ctrl-ESC
Run specific program: Win key-”shortcut key” (varies for each program)
Open the Task Name list: Fn-F10
Switch to previous program: Alt-Shift-tab
Switch to next program: Alt-Tab
Open program specific menu: Alt
Exit: Alt-F4
Escape: Esc
Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab
Move to the previous control in a dialog box: Shift-tab
Move to the previous character: Left arrow
Move to the next character: Right arrow
Move to the previous line/item: Up arrow
Move to the next line/item: Down arrow
Move to the beginning of line/item: Home
Move to the end of line/item: End
Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-Home
Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-End
Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 32-item group:
Page up (Fn-Up arrow)
Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 32-item group: Page
down (Fn-Down arrow)
Scroll left: Up scroll button
Scroll right: Down scroll button
Move the cursor to specific cell or move to an item: The corresponding
cursor routing key
Capital sign: Caps lock
Read the current item again: Fn-r
Say current time: Fn-t
517
Display power status: Fn-b
Open the “global options”: F10
Online help: F1
Check software version: Fn-v only in the Voice Sense “program” menu.
Display network status: fn-n in the Voice Sense “program” menu
Braille display on/off: F4
Voice on/off: F5
Increase the voice volume: F6
Decrease the voice volume: Shift-F6
Increase the voice rate: F7
Decrease the voice rate: Shift-F7
Increase the voice pitch: F8
Decrease the voice pitch: Shift-F8
Increase the Main Volume: Windows-F6
Decrease the Main Volume: Shift-Windows-F6
Increase the Sub Voice rate: Windows-F7
Decrease the Sub Voice Rate: Shift-Windows-F7
One-handed mode on/off: Fn-h
Bluetooth on/off: F9
Wireless LAN on/off: F11
Ethernet port on/off: Fn-F11
Scroll voice on/off: Fn-F5
Select language: Windows-Alt-v
Select Braille code: Windows-Alt-b
Select Braille cursor type: Fn-F3
Select announcement of control information: Fn-F1
Eight dot mode on/off: Fn-F4
Open txt help: Win key-F1 while running program
Edit language attribute: Windows-Alt-I
518
16.2 Quick Launch Commands
Use the following commands to launch their associated applications from
anywhere on the Voice Sense.
Use the Windows key in combination with each letter to launch the
following applications:
Address Manager: A.
Web Browser: B.
sense Chat: C.
DAISY Player: D.
Email: E.
File Manager: F.
Google Talk: G.
Help: H.
Twitter: I.
BookShare Download: K.
Media Player: M.
RSS reader : N.
DropBox: O.
google Maps: P.
Quick Browser: Q.
FM Radio: R.
Schedule Manager: S.
Database Manager: T.
Google search: U.
Sense Navigation: V.
Word Processor: W.
Use Caps Lock in combination with each letter to launch the applications
below:
Wake up alarm: A.
Bluetooth Manager: B.
Calculator: C.
519
Sense Dice game: D.
Format: F.
Sense Brain Game: G.
Setup Internet: I.
Backup/Restore Personalized Settings: K.
Calendar: L.
Menu manager: M.
Pronunciation Dictionary: P.
Terminal for Screen Reader: S.
Set Time & Date: T.
Upgrade BrailleSense: U.
Stopwatch: W.
Other Quick Commands:
Display Time and Date: Fn-T.
Display Network Status: Fn-N.
Display Power Status: FN-B.
Display Compass heading: Fn-Space.
Change device Name: Control-Win-E.
Open sleep Timer: Fn-J.
Open Global options: F10.
Open Sense Dictionary: Control-Windows-D.
16.3 File Manager
16.3.1 Navigation keys for the file list and menu list
Move to previous item: Up arrow or up scroll button
Move to next item: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to the beginning of the list: Ctrl-Home
Move to the end of the list: Ctrl-End
16.3.2 Navigation Keys for the File List
520
Jump to folder list or file list: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move between file list and address window: Tab / shift-tab
Enter selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Jump to the top level of the disk: Shift-Backspace
16.3.3 Keys for Selecting Files and Folders
Select individual item: Space
Continuous selection: Ctrl-b
Select all Ctrl-a
16.3.4 Hot Keys for Menu Commands
Open: Ctrl-o
Open with: Ctrl-h
Zip: Ctrl-z
Unzip: Ctrl-u
Send: Ctrl-s
Copy: Ctrl-c
Cut: Ctrl-x
Paste: Ctrl-v
Delete: DEL
Rename: F2
New document: Ctrl-n
New folder: Alt-f
File conversion: Ctrl-t
Select all: Ctrl-a
Sort files by: Ctrl-g
Set file info: Ctrl-l
Display only files of type: Ctrl-w
Search for file: Ctrl-f
Information: Alt-Enter
Share Folder on Network: Alt-S
Unshare Folder on Network: Alt-U
521
Local Security Setting: Alt-P
Setup Network connection: Alt-e
Cancel setting of Network connection: Alt-F4
Share a folder on network: Alt-s
Remove remote folder on network: Alt-u
Setup sharing security: Alt-p
16.3.5 EML Viewer
Open e-mail message: Enter
Forward: Control-f
Reply: Control-r
Close and return to file list: Alt-F4
16.4 Word Processor
16.4.1 Hot Keys for Menu Commands
File Menu Commands:
New document: Ctrl-n
Open: Ctrl-o
Save: Ctrl-s
Save as: Alt-s
Close current document: Ctrl-F4
Print: Ctrl-p
Document Settings: Ctrl-e
Exit: Alt-F4
Word Display View Commands:
Toggle Word View Display On/off: Control-alt-M
Read current line on Visual Screen: Alt-Function-S
Move to First line on Visual Screen: Alt-Home
Move to Last line on Visual Screen: Alt-End
Move to Previous line on Visual Screen: Alt-Up arrow
Move to Next line on Visual Screen: Alt-Down arrow
522
Move cursor to First line of Visual Screen: Alt-Page Up Alt-FN-Up arrow
Set Highlight color of Current line on Visual Screen: Alt-U
Commands for reading Powerpoint files:
Move back one slide: Backspace.
Move forward one slide: Space.
Bring up slide list: Alt-Shift-S.
Edit Menu Commands:
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Copy: Ctrl-c
Cut: Ctrl-x
Paste: Ctrl-v
Delete: Del
Delete blank lines: Alt-e
Add to clipboard: Ctrl-Insert
Clear clipboard: Ctrl-Del or Ctrl-d
Select All: Ctrl-a
Insert from file: Ctrl-i
Insert date: Ctrl-w
Insert Time: Alt-w
Toggle insert/overwrite mode: Insert
Check spelling: Ctrl-k
Check spelling of the current word: Alt-k
Edit language attribute: Alt-Windows-i
Set Font: Alt-M
Toggle Nemeth code on/off: Alt-N.
Go To Commands:
Find: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Replace: Ctrl-r
Go to location: Ctrl-g
523
Go to previous page: Page up (Fn-Up arrow)
Go to next page: Page down (Fn-Down arrow)
Set mark: Ctrl-m
Go to mark: Ctrl-j
Go to previous document: Shift-tab
Go to next document: Tab
Read Commands:
Read selected text: Alt-b
Read beginning of selected text: Ctrl-u
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g
Read from cursor to end: Fn-Enter
Auto scroll: up-down scroll buttons
Read status: Fn-/
Read selected text in current language: Alt-Windows-r
Layout Commands
Braille document layout: Alt-F5
Print document layout: Alt-F6
Braille paragraph layout: Alt-F7
Print paragraph layout: Alt-F8
16.4.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Move to previous character: Left arrow
Move to next character: Right arrow
Move to previous word: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to next word: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the beginning of the line: Home
Move to the end of the line: End
Move to previous line: Up arrow
Move to next line: Down arrow
Move to previous paragraph: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to next paragraph: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-Home
524
Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-End
Read current paragraph: Fn-v
Read current line: Fn-c
Read current word: Fn-x
Read current character: Fn-z
Delete current paragraph: Alt-Del
Delete current line: Ctrl-Backspace
Delete current word: Alt-Backspace
Delete current character: Del
Confirm current cursor position: Fn-s
Set view format character: Ctrl-5
Set reading unit: Ctrl-3
Set read only: Ctrl-2
Set reading mode: Ctrl-4
16.5 E-mail
16.5.1 Hot keys that are used in the inbox
Open “Accounts manager”: Ctrl-m
Switch from offline to online mode (IMAP: alt-l
Check for new mail: Alt-m
Check for previous mail (IMAP): Alt-e
Move ot previous account category: Alt-FN-Up arrow
Move to next account category: Alt-FN-Down arrow
Move ot previous mailbox: Control-FN-Up arrow
Move to next mailbox: Control-FN-Down arrow
Write new message: Ctrl-n
Reply: Ctrl-r
Reply all: Alt-r
Forward: Ctrl-f
Open “set path”: Ctrl-p
Open “set option”: Ctrl-o
Open “set spam”: Ctrl-e
Find: Ctrl-f
525
Find again: F3
Move to unread message: Ctrl-u
Move to mailbox: Alt-x
Copy to mailbox: Alt-c
Add a sender to the address list: Ctrl-i (This is valid only at the “from” item
of the “inbox”).
Delete received e-mail: Del (It is valid only at the “Subject” and “date” item
in the “inbox”).
Save the received e-mail as text file: Alt-s
Print the received e-mail: Alt-p
Cancel: ESC
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Alt-F4
16.5.2 Hot keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward, and
Save in the Mail Outbox
Search address list: Ctrl-l
Attach file: Ctrl-f
Send e-mail: Ctrl-s
Save in mail storage box: Fn-s
Cancel: ESC
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Alt-F4
16.5.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mails or Writing an E-Mail Message
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Select all: Ctrl-a
Copy to the clipboard: Ctrl-c
Cut to the clipboard: Ctrl-x (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail in the
“inbox”).
Paste from the clipboard: Ctrl-v (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail
in the “inbox”).
Delete: Del (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail in the “inbox”).
Cancel block: ESC
526
16.6 Media
16.6.1 Media Player
16.6.1.1 Hot keys for commands
Open file: Ctrl-o
Open folder: Ctrl-f
Add file: Alt-o
Add folder: Alt-f
Save play list: Ctrl-s
Save as play list: Alt-s
Delete item: Del
Open URL: Ctrl-l
Get Tag information: Control-T
Play: Enter, Play button
Previous track: Alt-Left arrow, Previous button
Next track: Alt-Right arrow, Next button
Previous section while playing Audible: Ctrl-Page up (Ctrl-Fn-Up arrow)
Next section while playing Audible: Ctrl-Page down (Ctrl-Fn-Down arrow)
Back 5 track: Alt-Up arrow
Forward 5 track: Alt-Down arrow
First track: Ctrl-Home
Last track: Ctrl-End
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow
Speed up: Shift-Right arrow
Slow down: Shift-Left arrow
Pause/continue: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow or Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to next position by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to previous position by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow
527
Delete play list during stop: Del
Open the record dialog box: Ctrl-r, Record button
Record: Record button
Pause/continue recording: Space, Record button
Play: Play button
Pause/continue play: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
Set bookmark: Ctrl-m
Delete bookmark: Ctrl-d
Jump to bookmark: Ctrl-j
Go to position: Ctrl-g
Set mark: Alt-m
Move to mark: Alt-j
Move to previous mark: V
Move to next mark: N
Delete mark: Alt-d
Mark manager: Alt-k
Configuration dialog box: Alt-c
Playback setting dialog box: Ctrl-p
Record setting dialog box: Alt-r
16.6.1.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab
Move to the next information: Down arrow
Move to the previous information: Up arrow
“Pause” when it is play state and “play” when it is pause state: Space
Start playing: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Play the next file: Alt-right arrow
Play the previous file: Alt-Left arrow
Play the last file: Ctrl-Home
Play the first file: Ctrl-End
528
Play the fifth file after the current file: Alt-Down arrow
Play the fifth file before the current file: Alt-Up arrow
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow
Volume down: Shift-Right arrow
Speed up: Shift-Left arrow
Slow down: Shift-Right arrow
Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow or Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to next position by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to previous position by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow
Open menu: Alt
Open help: F1
Move to “play list” tab: Tab/Shift-tab
Exit “media player”: Alt-F4
16.6.1.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab
Move to the next file: Down arrow
Move to the previous file: Up arrow
Move to the last file: End
Move to the first file: Home
Select/resume current file (while playing, it is used as play/pause): Space
Start selecting files: Ctrl-b
Start playing the selected files: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Delete the selected files in the play list: Del
Play the next file: Alt-Right arrow
Play the previous file: Alt-Left arrow
Play the last file: Ctrl-End
Play the first file: Ctrl-Home
Play the fifth file after the current file: Ctrl-Down arrow
Play the fifth file before the current file: Ctrl-Up arrow
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow
Speed up: Shift-Left arrow
529
Slow down: Shift-Right arrow
Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to next position by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to previous position by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow
Open menu: Alt
Open help: F1
Move to “playback information” tab: Tab/Shift-tab
Exit “media player”: Alt-F4
16.6.2 FM radio
Open the sets dialog box: Ctrl-e
Open the menu: Alt
Internal speakers on/off: X or Fn-x
Move to next frequency: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to previous frequency: Ctrl-Down arrow
Auto previous frequency: Ctrl-Left arrow or short press previous button
Auto next frequency: Ctrl-Right arrow or short press next button
Go to frequency: Ctrl-f
Move to previous preset: Alt-Left arrow or long press previous button
Move to next preset: Alt-Right arrow or long press next button
Registry preset: Ctrl-s or long press record button
Delete the preset: Delete or long press stop button
Open the record dialog box: Ctrl-r
Record start/pause: short press record button
Record stop: short press stop button
Mute on: short press stop button or Space
Muto off: short press play button or Space
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow
16.6.3 Daisy Player
Move to the title list: Shift-Backspace
Open DAISY file: Ctrl-o
530
Voice setting: Ctrl-s
Check the book-info: Alt-Enter
Exit: Alt-F4
Play/Pause: Space
Move to the beginning of document: Home
Move to the last phrase: End
Increase the speed: Shift-Right arrow
Decrease the speed: Shift-Left arrow
Increase the volume: Shift-Up arrow
Decrease the volume: Shift-Down arrow
Move to the next phrase: Ctrl-Right arrow or short press “next” button
Move to the previous phrase:Ctrl-Left arrow or short press “previous” button
Move to the next fifth phrase: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the previous fifth phrase: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to the next page: Page down (Fn-Up arrow)
Move to the previous page: Page up (Fn-Down arrow)
Go to the page: Ctrl-g
Move up: Alt-Left arrow
Move down: Alt-Right arrow
Set to prior level: Alt-Up arrow
Set to next level: Alt-Down arrow
Move to the next heading: Ctrl-F6 or long press “next” button
Move to the previous heading: Ctrl-F5 or long press “previous” button
Move to the last heading: Ctrl-F8
Move to the first heading: Ctrl-F7
Check the currently-reading level and heading: Ctrl-w
Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Ctrl-n
Find heading: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Scan heading: Ctrl-n
Read heading: Ctrl-w
Set mark at current position: Ctrl-m
Move to the next mark: N
Move to the previous mark: V
Delete mark: Del
531
16.7 Organizer
16.7.1 Address Manager
16.7.1.1 Move keys for adding an address or in the menu
Move to the previous field or menu item: Left arrow
Move to the next field or menu item: Right arrow
Move to the first field or menu item: Home
Move to the last field or menu item: End
16.7.1.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List
Move to the previous field: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next field: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the first field: Home
Move to the last field: End ey
Move to the previous record: Up arrow
Move to the next record: Down arrow
Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last record: Ctrl-End
Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow
Move to next same field different record: Right arrow
16.7.1.3 Hot keys for the Commands
Add address: Ctrl-n
Find address: Ctrl-f
Modify address: Ctrl-m
Delete address: Del
Select all: Ctrl-a
Save as a file: Alt-s
532
Print address: Ctrl-p
Backup address list: Ctrl-u
Restore address list: Ctrl-r
Setting backup option: Ctrl-e
Setting add/searching address fields: Ctrl-o
16.7.1.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Cancel: ESC
Exit: Alt-F4
16.7.2 Schedule Manager
16.7.2.1 Hot keys for the commands
Move to the next field: Tab
Move to the previous field: Shift-tab
Add schedule: Ctrl-n
Modify schedule: Ctrl-m
Delete schedule: Del
Delete all Schedule: Control-Alt-q
Alarm option: Ctrl-o
Backup schedule: Ctrl-u
Restore schedule: Ctrl-r
Set backup option: Ctrl-e
Save schedule as file: Alt-s
Print schedule: Ctrl-p
16.7.2.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List
1. Move from an appointment to another in the schedule list
Move to the previous a in the same day: Up arrow
Move to the next appointment in the same day: Down arrow
Move to the first appointment in the same day: Home
533
Move to the last appointment in the same day: End
2. Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments
registered
Move to the previous schedule: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next schedule: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the first schedule: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last schedule: Ctrl-End
16.7.3 Database Manager
Add record: Ctrl-n
Search records: Ctrl-f
Table manager: Ctrl-t
List of records found: Ctrl-r
Setting backup option: Ctrl-e
Backup database: Ctrl-u
Restore database: Ctrl-o
1. Move by controls
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
2. Move in a list box
Move to the next list item: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to the previous list item: Up arrow or up scroll button
3. Select your answer in the prompt box
Move to the next answer: Space or Down arrow
Move to the previous answer: Backspace or Up arrow
4. Move in the “list of records found”
Move to the next record: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to the previous record: Up arrow or up scroll button
Move to the last record: Ctrl-End
Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home
Move to the next field: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the previous field: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the last field: End
534
Move to the first field: Home
Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow
Move to next same field different record: Right arrow
16.8 Web tools
16.8.1 Web Browser
16.8.1.1 Hot keys for Menu command
Open URL: Ctrl-l
Open: Ctrl-o
Save as: Alt-s
Information: Alt-Enter
Exit: Alt-F4
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g
Read from cursor to end: Fn-Enter
Auto scroll: Up scroll button-down scroll button
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Copy: Ctrl-c
Add to clipboard: Ctrl-Insert
Copy URL: Alt-d
Copy link: Alt-l
Go to the home page: Alt-h
Go to the previous page: Alt-Left arrow
Go to the next page: Alt-Right arrow
Go to previous heading: Alt-b or Ctrl-F3
Go to next heading: Alt-f or Ctrl-F4
Go to previous text: Ctrl-F5
Go to next text: Ctrl-F6
535
Go to previous visited link: Alt-Shift-v
Go to next visited link: Alt-v
Refresh: Ctrl-r
Open the history list: Ctrl-h
Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Fn-i
Find: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Links list: Alt-i
RSS Feed List: Control-J
Set current as your home page: Ctrl-s
Add to favorites: Alt-a
Favorites list: Ctrl-l
Options setting: Alt-o
16.8.1.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser
Turn up the volume: Shift-Up arrow
Turn down the volume: Shift-Down arrow
Play: play button of the front panel
Stop: stop button of the front panel
16.8.1.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages
Move between controls
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab
Move to the next control: Tab
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Down arrow
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Up arrow
Moving to the form
Move to the previous form: Ctrl-F1
Move to the next form: Ctrl-F2
536
Table navigation hot keys
Move to the previous table: Ctrl-F7
Move to the next table: Ctrl-F8
Move to the previous cell: Ctrl-Shift-Left arrow
Move to the next cell: Ctrl-Shift-Right arrow
Move to the upper cell: Ctrl-Shift-Up arrow
Move to the lower cell: Ctrl-Shift-Down arrow
Read current cell: Ctrl-Shift-c
Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Down arrow
Check the current position: Fn-s
Move to frame
Move to the previous frame: Ctrl-F9
Move to the next frame: Ctrl-F10
Read the current line: Fn-r
16.8.2 Quick browser
File Menu Commands:
Open URL: Control-u 1-3-6)
Exit: Alt-F 4
Read Menu Commands:
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-G
Read from cursor to end: FN-Enter
Edit Menu Commands:
Open Select Text Window: Control-S
Start selection: Control-B
Copy: Contol-C
Add to clipboard: Control-P
Go To Menu Commands:
537
Go to home page: Alt-H
Go to the previous page: Alt-Left arrow
Go to the next page: Alt-Right arrow
Go to previous heading: Control-F3
Go to next heading: Control-F 4
Go to previous text: Control-"F5
Go to next text: Control-F6
Refresh: Control-R
Open the history list: Control-H
Find: Control-F
Find again: F3
Favorites Menu Commands:
Set current as your home page: Alt-S
Add to favorites: Alt-A
Favorites list: Control-T
Page Navigation Commands:
Move between controls
Move to the previous control: Control-Left arrow
Move to the next control: Control-Right arrow
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Down arrow
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Up arrow
Moving to form fields
Move to the previous form field: Control-F1
Move to the next form field: Control-F2
16.8.3 Google Search
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to previous control: Shift-Tab
Choose category or search result: Up or Down Arrow
Open search result in Browser: Enter
Exit Google Search: Alt-F4
538
16.8.4 RSS reader
Receive new Headlines: Control-R
Import OPML: Control-O
Export OPML: Control-S
Download Podcast: Control-D
Read whole Description: Control-L
Options: Alt-O
From Category List:
Insert Category: Control-I
Delete Category: Delete
Modify Category: Control-M
From Feed List:
Search for Feeds: Control-N
Insert Feed: Control-i
Delete Feed: Delete
Modify Feed: Control-M
Move Feed: Alt-V
16.9 Social Networking
16.9.1 Twitter
Sign Out: Ctrl-g
Personal Information: Ctrl-I
Save Current Timeline: Alt-s
Home Timeline: Ctrl-h
User Timeline: Ctrl-u
Current User Timeline: Alt-u
Mention Timeline: Ctrl-m
Retweet Of Me: Alt-o
539
List Timeline: Alt-P
Favorite Timeline: Control-L
Tweet: Ctrl-t
Remove Tweet: Delete
Retweet: Ctrl-e
Reply: Ctrl-y
Add To Favorite: Ctrl-v
Favorite List: Ctrl-l
Send Direct Message: Ctrl-s
Sent Direct Message: Alt-m
Received Direct Message: Alt-r
Follow User: Alt-a
Following: Alt-l
Followers: Alt-e
Global Search: Ctrl-f
User Search: Alt-f
Search Word List: Alt-w
Find Tweets from the Current Timeline: Control-Alt-F
Find Again Tweets from Current Timeline: Alt-Shift-F
List Manager: Control-P
Add User to List: Control-K
List User View: Control-J
List View in Current Tweet: F3
Next List: Ctrl-n
Refresh: Ctrl-r
Exit: Alt-F4
Escape: Esc key
Move to the next tweet: Down arrow
Move to the previous tweet: Up arrow
Move to the first tweet on the refreshing list: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last tweet on the refreshing list: Ctrl-End
Move to the previous 32 list: Fn-Un arrow
Move to the next 32 list: Fn-Down arrow
540
Move to the previous list: Up arrow
Move to the next list: Down arrow
Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-Home/Home
Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-End/End
Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
16.9.2 Google talk
File Menu Commands
Sign out: Ctrl-l
Export Contact Lists: Alt-x
Import Contact Lists: Alt-i
Exit: Alt-F4
Action Menu Commands
Start Chat: Ctrl-s
Start Voice Chat: Ctrl-h
Send File: Alt-f
Move to Recently Chat: Ctrl-t
Manage Chat: Ctrl-m
Contact Menu Commands
Add Contact: Alt-q
Delete Contact: Delete
Block Contact: Alt-b
Manage Block List: Alt-m
Contact Information: Ctrl-i
Manage Contact List: Ctrl-p
Option Menu Commands
My Status Options: Alt-u
Action Options: Alt-a
Alert Options: Alt-o
Path Options: Alt-p
541
Chat Window Menus
File Menu Commands
Save Conversation: Alt-s
Close Chat: Alt-F4
Edit Menu Commands
Cut: Ctrl-x
Copy: Ctrl-c
Delete: Delete
Paste: Ctrl-v
Start Selection: Ctrl-b
Select All: Ctrl-a
Find: Ctrl-f
Find Again: F3
Action Menu Commands
Start Chat: Ctrl-s
Start Voice Chat: Ctrl-h
Stop Voice Chat: Esc key
Send File: Alt-f
View Contact List: Ctrl-t
Manage Chat: Ctrl-m
Move to Previous Chat: Ctrl-Shift-Tab
Move to Next Chat: Ctrl-Tab
The move keys in Google Talk.
Move to the previous Contents: Up arrow
Move to the next Contents: Down arrow
Move to the previous 32-items of the Contents: Fn-Up arrow
Move to the next 32-item of the Contents: Fn-Down arrow
Move to the first item of the Contents: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last item of the Contents: Ctrl-End
542
16.9.3 Sense Chat
Chat Window Commands:
Move among the controls: Tab and Shift-Tab
Send message: type message and press Enter
Move among messages in history: Up and Down arrows
Move to top of list: Control-Home
Move to bottom of message list: Control-end
Save conversation: Control-s
Save conversation under different name: Alt-s
Start selection: Control-b
Select all: Control-a
Copy: Control-c
Paste: Control-v
Exit Sense Chat: Alt-F4
Sense Chat Options commands:
Move among the Controls: Tab and shift-Tab
Move among items in the settings list: Up and down arrows
Change the value of a setting: Space
Save settings: Enter
Cancel saving settings: Escape or Alt-F4
16.10 Extras
16.10.1 BookShare Download
Move to next control: Tab
Move to previous control: Shift-Tab
Move to Search box: Control-e
Move to search results: Control-l
Open download dialog: Control-d
Open Options dialog: Control-o
Exit: Alt-F4
543
16.10.2 Google Maps
Search commands:
Search for address: Control-f
Advanced POI Search: Alt-f
Set as Start Position: Alt-s
Set as Destination: Alt-d
Set as Waypoint: Alt-w
Add to user POI: Alt-u
Area selection: Alt-z
Set Position Commands:
Add current position to user POI: Enter
Set GPS position as Start position: s
Current position information: Control-i
User POI Commands:
Manage user POI’s: Control-u
Save user POI’s: Alt-s
Load user POI’s: Control-l
Route Commands:
Create route: Control-r
View traveled route: Control-h
Initialize route: Alt-i
Route information: Control-c
Direction and distance to destination: Control-d
Options Commands:
Notice and distance to destination: Control-o
GPS settings: Control-g
16.10.3 Drop box
Open User Information dialog box: Control-I
Search for File: Control-F
544
File Download: Control-T
File Upload: Control-U
File Link: Control-L
Copy: Control-C
Cut to Clipboard: Control-X
Paste: Control-V
Delete: Delete
New Folder: Control-N
Set Login Information: Alt-I
16.11 Games
16.11.1 Sense Dice Game
Execute Dice Game: I
Move to next item: Down arrow
Move to previous item: Up arrow
Move to the first item: Control-Home
Move to the last item: Control-End
Roll dice: Enter
Exit: Alt-F4
16.11.2 Sense Brain Game
Execute Sense Brain game: A
Move to next item: Down Arrow
Move to previous item: Up arrow
Move to the first item: Control-Home
Move to the last item: Control-End
Execute game: Enter
Exit: Alt-F4
16.12 Utilities
16.12.1 Calculator
545
Calculator initialize: Alt-c
Delete numbers or operators: Backspace
General functions: Ctrl-g
Plus: +
Minus: Division: /
Multiplication: *
Percent: %
Power: ^
Over : FN-/
Square Root: Ctrl-q
Decimal Point: .
Left Parenthesis: (
Right Parenthesis: )
PI: Ctrl-p
Exp: Ctrl-e
Recall Items: Alt-r
Delete all saved items: Ctrl-d
Save Items: Alt-s
Trigonometric Function: Ctrl-s
Sine: Ctrl-s, s
Arc Sine: Ctrl-s, a
Hyperbolic Sine: Ctrl-s, h
Cosine: Ctrl-c, c
Arc Cosine: Ctrl-c, a
Hyperbolic Cosine: Ctrl-c, h
Tangent: Ctrl-t, t
Arc Tangent: Ctrl-t, a
Hyperbolic Tangent: Ctrl-t, h
Logarithm Function: Ctrl-l
Natural Logarithm: Ctrl-l, e
546
Common Logarithm: Ctrl-l, n
Miscellaneous:
Convert Unit: Control-U
Copy to Clipboard: Ctrl-Insert
Return formula: Control-r
Fraction options: Control-/
Option Settings: Ctrl-o
Change Braille code: Fn-g
16.12.2 Checking Date and Time
Checking date and time: Fn-t
16.12.3 Calendar
Move to the previous item: Tab
Move to the next item: Shift-tab
Move to the next day: Right arrow
Move to the previous day: Left arrow
Move to the next week: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the previous week: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next month: Down arrow
Move to the previous month: Up arrow
Move to the next year: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the previous year: Ctrl-Up arrow
16.12.4 Stopwatch
Stopwatch start, pause, restart: enter
Check the elapsed time: Backspace
Stop Braille display: Fn-Space
Restart Braille display: Fn-Space
547
Switch between stopwatch and Countdown timer: “Tab” or “shift-tab”
Count down timer pause or restart: enter
Count down timer Clear: Backspace
Exit stopwatch or count down timer: Alt-F4
16.12.5 Display network status
Display network status: Fn-n
16.12.6 Terminal for Screen reader
Enter terminal Clipboard: Control-Function-I.
Send Terminal Clipboard content: Control-S.
Exit terminal for Screen reader: Alt-X.
16.12.7 Display power status
Display power status: Fn-b
16.12.8 Format
Disk format: Fn-f
16.12.9 Sleep Timer
Set Sleep Timer: Fn-j
16.12.10 Upgrading the Voice Sense Firmware
Check download information: Space
Cancel download and exit: Alt-F4
16.13 Settings
548
16.13.1 Setting time and date
Move to the next day: Right arrow
Move to the previous day: Left arrow
Move to the next week: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the previous week: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next month: Down arrow
Move to the previous month: Left arrow
Move to the next year: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the previous year: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to 1 hour after: Down arrow
Move to 1 hour before: Up arrow
Move to 10 minutes after: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to 10 minutes before: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to 1 minute after: Right arrow
Move to 1 minute before: Left arrow
Switch Between a.m. and p.m.: Fn-x
16.13.2 Bluetooth Manager
Scanning Bluetooth device: Ctrl-r
Connecting device: Enter on the device name
Connecting service: Enter on the service name
Disconnect service in Bluetooth service list: Ctrl-d
Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace
Remove device setting in Bluetooth device list: Del
1) FTP service
Open local folder/move remote folder: Ctrl-o
Copy: Ctrl-c
Paste: Ctrl-v
Send to: Ctrl-s
Retrieve file: Ctrl-r
New folder: Ctrl-f
549
Delete file/folder: Del
Information: Ctrl-i
16.13.3 Pronunciation dictionary
Move to the previous control: Tab
Move to the next control: Shift-tab
Move to the previous item in entry: Up arrow
Move to the next item in entry: Down arrow
Add word: Alt-i
Modify word: Alt-m
Delete word: Del
16.13.4 Backup/Restore personalized settings
Move to previous item: Up arrow or up scroll button
Move to next item: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to previous control: Shift-tab
Move to next control: Tab
Select/unselect check box: Space
550
17. Command Summary for USB Keyboards
17.1 Common Combination Keys
Open the program menu: Win key
Key help mode: Ctrl-ESC
Run specific program: Win key-”shortcut key” (varies for each program)
Open the Task Name list: Fn-F10
Switch to previous program: Alt-Shift-tab
Switch to next program: Alt-Tab
Open program specific menu: Alt
Exit: Alt-F4
Escape: Esc
Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab
Move to the previous control in a dialog box: Shift-tab
Move to the previous character: Left arrow
Move to the next character: Right arrow
Move to the previous line/item: Up arrow
Move to the next line/item: Down arrow
Move to the beginning of line/item: Home
Move to the end of line/item: End
Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-Home
Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-End
Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 32-item group:
Page up (Fn-Up arrow)
Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 32-item group: Page
down (Fn-Down arrow)
Scroll left: Up scroll button
Scroll right: Down scroll button
Move the cursor to specific cell or move to an item: The corresponding
cursor routing key
Capital sign: Caps lock
Read the current item again: Fn-r
551
Say current time: Fn-t
Display power status: Fn-b
Open the “global options”: F10
Online help: F1
Check software version: Fn-v only in the Voice Sense “program” menu.
Display network status: fn-n in the Voice Sense “program” menu
Braille display on/off: F4
Voice on/off: F5
Increase the voice volume: F6
Decrease the voice volume: Shift-F6
Increase the voice rate: F7
Decrease the voice rate: Shift-F7
Increase the voice pitch: F8
Decrease the voice pitch: Shift-F8
Increase the Main Volume: Windows-F6
Decrease the Main Volume: Shift-Windows-F6
Increase the Sub Voice rate: Windows-F7
Decrease the Sub Voice Rate: Shift-Windows-F7
One-handed mode on/off: Fn-h
Bluetooth on/off: F9
Wireless LAN on/off: F11
Ethernet port on/off: Fn-F11
Scroll voice on/off: Fn-F5
Select language: Windows-Alt-v
Select Braille code: Windows-Alt-b
Select Braille cursor type: Fn-F3
Select announcement of control information: Fn-F1
Eight dot mode on/off: Fn-F4
Open txt help: Win key-F1 while running program
Edit language attribute: Windows-Alt-I
552
17.2 Quick Launch Commands
Use the following commands to launch their associated applications from
anywhere on the Voice Sense.
Use the Windows key in combination with each letter to launch the
following applications:
Address Manager: A.
Web Browser: B.
sense Chat: C.
DAISY Player: D.
Email: E.
File Manager: F.
Google Talk: G.
Help: H.
Twitter: I.
BookShare Download: K.
Media Player: M.
RSS reader : N.
DropBox: O.
google Maps: P.
Quick Browser: Q.
FM Radio: R.
Schedule Manager: S.
Database Manager: T.
Google search: U.
Sense Navigation: V.
Word Processor: W.
Use Caps Lock in combination with each letter to launch the applications
below:
Wake up alarm: A.
Bluetooth Manager: B.
Calculator: C.
553
Sense Dice game: D.
Format: F.
Sense Brain Game: G.
Setup Internet: I.
Backup/Restore Personalized Settings: K.
Calendar: L.
Menu manager: M.
Pronunciation Dictionary: P.
Terminal for Screen Reader: S.
Set Time & Date: T.
Upgrade BrailleSense: U.
Stopwatch: W.
Other Quick Commands:
Display Time and Date: Fn-T.
Display Network Status: Fn-N.
Display Power Status: FN-B.
Display Compass heading: Fn-Space.
Change device Name: Control-Win-E.
Open sleep Timer: Fn-J.
Open Global options: F10.
Open Sense Dictionary: Control-Windows-D.
17.3 File Manager
17.3.1 Navigation keys for the file list and menu list
Move to previous item: Up arrow or up scroll button
Move to next item: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to the beginning of the list: Ctrl-Home
Move to the end of the list: Ctrl-End
17.3.2 Navigation Keys for the File List
554
Jump to folder list or file list: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move between file list and address window: Tab / shift-tab
Enter selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Jump to the top level of the disk: Shift-Backspace
17.3.3 Keys for Selecting Files and Folders
Select individual item: Space
Continuous selection: Ctrl-b
Select all Ctrl-a
17.3.4 Hot Keys for Menu Commands
Open: Ctrl-o
Open with: Ctrl-h
Zip: Ctrl-z
Unzip: Ctrl-u
Send: Ctrl-s
Copy: Ctrl-c
Cut: Ctrl-x
Paste: Ctrl-v
Delete: DEL
Rename: F2
New document: Ctrl-n
New folder: Alt-f
File conversion: Ctrl-t
Select all: Ctrl-a
Sort files by: Ctrl-g
Set file info: Ctrl-l
Display only files of type: Ctrl-w
Search for file: Ctrl-f
Information: Alt-Enter
Share Folder on Network: Alt-S
Unshare Folder on Network: Alt-U
555
Local Security Setting: Alt-P
Setup Network connection: Alt-e
Cancel setting of Network connection: Alt-F4
Share a folder on network: Alt-s
Remove remote folder on network: Alt-u
Setup sharing security: Alt-p
17.3.5 EML Viewer
Open e-mail message: Enter
Forward: Control-f
Reply: Control-r
Close and return to file list: Alt-F4
17.4 Word Processor
17.4.1 Hot Keys for Menu Commands
File Menu Commands:
New document: Ctrl-n
Open: Ctrl-o
Save: Ctrl-s
Save as: Alt-s
Close current document: Ctrl-F4
Print: Ctrl-p
Document Settings: Ctrl-e
Exit: Alt-F4
Word Display View Commands:
Toggle Word View Display On/off: Control-alt-M
Read current line on Visual Screen: Alt-Function-S
Move to First line on Visual Screen: Alt-Home
Move to Last line on Visual Screen: Alt-End
Move to Previous line on Visual Screen: Alt-Up arrow
Move to Next line on Visual Screen: Alt-Down arrow
556
Move cursor to First line of Visual Screen: Alt-Page Up Alt-FN-Up arrow
Set Highlight color of Current line on Visual Screen: Alt-U
Commands for reading Powerpoint files:
Move back one slide: Backspace.
Move forward one slide: Space.
Bring up slide list: Alt-Shift-S.
Edit Menu Commands:
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Copy: Ctrl-c
Cut: Ctrl-x
Paste: Ctrl-v
Delete: Del
Delete blank lines: Alt-e
Add to clipboard: Ctrl-Insert
Clear clipboard: Ctrl-Del or Ctrl-d
Select All: Ctrl-a
Insert from file: Ctrl-i
Insert date: Ctrl-w
Insert Time: Alt-w
Toggle insert/overwrite mode: Insert
Check spelling: Ctrl-k
Check spelling of the current word: Alt-k
Edit language attribute: Alt-Windows-i
Set Font: Alt-M
Toggle Nemeth code on/off: Alt-N.
Go To Commands:
Find: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Replace: Ctrl-r
Go to location: Ctrl-g
557
Go to previous page: Page up (Fn-Up arrow)
Go to next page: Page down (Fn-Down arrow)
Set mark: Ctrl-m
Go to mark: Ctrl-j
Go to previous document: Shift-tab
Go to next document: Tab
Read Commands:
Read selected text: Alt-b
Read beginning of selected text: Ctrl-u
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g
Read from cursor to end: Fn-Enter
Auto scroll: up-down scroll buttons
Read status: Fn-/
Read selected text in current language: Alt-Windows-r
Layout Commands
Braille document layout: Alt-F5
Print document layout: Alt-F6
Braille paragraph layout: Alt-F7
Print paragraph layout: Alt-F8
17.4.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Move to previous character: Left arrow
Move to next character: Right arrow
Move to previous word: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to next word: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the beginning of the line: Home
Move to the end of the line: End
Move to previous line: Up arrow
Move to next line: Down arrow
Move to previous paragraph: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to next paragraph: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-Home
558
Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-End
Read current paragraph: Fn-v
Read current line: Fn-c
Read current word: Fn-x
Read current character: Fn-z
Delete current paragraph: Alt-Del
Delete current line: Ctrl-Backspace
Delete current word: Alt-Backspace
Delete current character: Del
Confirm current cursor position: Fn-s
Set view format character: Ctrl-5
Set reading unit: Ctrl-3
Set read only: Ctrl-2
Set reading mode: Ctrl-4
17.5 E-mail
17.5.1 Hot keys that are used in the inbox
Open “Accounts manager”: Ctrl-m
Switch from offline to online mode (IMAP: alt-l
Check for new mail: Alt-m
Check for previous mail (IMAP): Alt-e
Move ot previous account category: Alt-FN-Up arrow
Move to next account category: Alt-FN-Down arrow
Move ot previous mailbox: Control-FN-Up arrow
Move to next mailbox: Control-FN-Down arrow
Write new message: Ctrl-n
Reply: Ctrl-r
Reply all: Alt-r
Forward: Ctrl-f
Open “set path”: Ctrl-p
Open “set option”: Ctrl-o
Open “set spam”: Ctrl-e
Find: Ctrl-f
559
Find again: F3
Move to unread message: Ctrl-u
Move to mailbox: Alt-x
Copy to mailbox: Alt-c
Add a sender to the address list: Ctrl-i (This is valid only at the “from” item
of the “inbox”).
Delete received e-mail: Del (It is valid only at the “Subject” and “date” item
in the “inbox”).
Save the received e-mail as text file: Alt-s
Print the received e-mail: Alt-p
Cancel: ESC
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Alt-F4
17.5.2 Hot keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward, and
Save in the Mail Outbox
Search address list: Ctrl-l
Attach file: Ctrl-f
Send e-mail: Ctrl-s
Save in mail storage box: Fn-s
Cancel: ESC
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Alt-F4
17.5.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mails or Writing an E-Mail Message
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Select all: Ctrl-a
Copy to the clipboard: Ctrl-c
Cut to the clipboard: Ctrl-x (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail in the
“inbox”).
Paste from the clipboard: Ctrl-v (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail
in the “inbox”).
Delete: Del (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail in the “inbox”).
Cancel block: ESC
560
17.6 Media
17.6.1 Media Player
17.6.1.1 Hot keys for commands
Open file: Ctrl-o
Open folder: Ctrl-f
Add file: Alt-o
Add folder: Alt-f
Save play list: Ctrl-s
Save as play list: Alt-s
Delete item: Del
Open URL: Ctrl-l
Get Tag information: Control-T
Play: Enter, Play button
Previous track: Alt-Left arrow, Previous button
Next track: Alt-Right arrow, Next button
Previous section while playing Audible: Ctrl-Page up (Ctrl-Fn-Up arrow)
Next section while playing Audible: Ctrl-Page down (Ctrl-Fn-Down arrow)
Back 5 track: Alt-Up arrow
Forward 5 track: Alt-Down arrow
First track: Ctrl-Home
Last track: Ctrl-End
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow
Speed up: Shift-Right arrow
Slow down: Shift-Left arrow
Pause/continue: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow or Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to next position by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to previous position by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow
561
Delete play list during stop: Del
Open the record dialog box: Ctrl-r, Record button
Record: Record button
Pause/continue recording: Space, Record button
Play: Play button
Pause/continue play: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
Set bookmark: Ctrl-m
Delete bookmark: Ctrl-d
Jump to bookmark: Ctrl-j
Go to position: Ctrl-g
Set mark: Alt-m
Move to mark: Alt-j
Move to previous mark: V
Move to next mark: N
Delete mark: Alt-d
Mark manager: Alt-k
Configuration dialog box: Alt-c
Playback setting dialog box: Ctrl-p
Record setting dialog box: Alt-r
17.6.1.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab
Move to the next information: Down arrow
Move to the previous information: Up arrow
“Pause” when it is play state and “play” when it is pause state: Space
Start playing: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Play the next file: Alt-right arrow
Play the previous file: Alt-Left arrow
Play the last file: Ctrl-Home
Play the first file: Ctrl-End
562
Play the fifth file after the current file: Alt-Down arrow
Play the fifth file before the current file: Alt-Up arrow
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow
Volume down: Shift-Right arrow
Speed up: Shift-Left arrow
Slow down: Shift-Right arrow
Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow or Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to next position by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to previous position by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow
Open menu: Alt
Open help: F1
Move to “play list” tab: Tab/Shift-tab
Exit “media player”: Alt-F4
17.6.1.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab
Move to the next file: Down arrow
Move to the previous file: Up arrow
Move to the last file: End
Move to the first file: Home
Select/resume current file (while playing, it is used as play/pause): Space
Start selecting files: Ctrl-b
Start playing the selected files: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Delete the selected files in the play list: Del
Play the next file: Alt-Right arrow
Play the previous file: Alt-Left arrow
Play the last file: Ctrl-End
Play the first file: Ctrl-Home
Play the fifth file after the current file: Ctrl-Down arrow
Play the fifth file before the current file: Ctrl-Up arrow
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow
Speed up: Shift-Left arrow
563
Slow down: Shift-Right arrow
Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to next position by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to previous position by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow
Open menu: Alt
Open help: F1
Move to “playback information” tab: Tab/Shift-tab
Exit “media player”: Alt-F4
17.6.2 FM radio
Open the sets dialog box: Ctrl-e
Open the menu: Alt
Internal speakers on/off: X or Fn-x
Move to next frequency: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to previous frequency: Ctrl-Down arrow
Auto previous frequency: Ctrl-Left arrow or short press previous button
Auto next frequency: Ctrl-Right arrow or short press next button
Go to frequency: Ctrl-f
Move to previous preset: Alt-Left arrow or long press previous button
Move to next preset: Alt-Right arrow or long press next button
Registry preset: Ctrl-s or long press record button
Delete the preset: Delete or long press stop button
Open the record dialog box: Ctrl-r
Record start/pause: short press record button
Record stop: short press stop button
Mute on: short press stop button or Space
Muto off: short press play button or Space
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow
17.6.3 Daisy Player
Move to the title list: Shift-Backspace
Open DAISY file: Ctrl-o
564
Voice setting: Ctrl-s
Check the book-info: Alt-Enter
Exit: Alt-F4
Play/Pause: Space
Move to the beginning of document: Home
Move to the last phrase: End
Increase the speed: Shift-Right arrow
Decrease the speed: Shift-Left arrow
Increase the volume: Shift-Up arrow
Decrease the volume: Shift-Down arrow
Move to the next phrase: Ctrl-Right arrow or short press “next” button
Move to the previous phrase:Ctrl-Left arrow or short press “previous” button
Move to the next fifth phrase: Ctrl-Down arrow
Move to the previous fifth phrase: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to the next page: Page down (Fn-Up arrow)
Move to the previous page: Page up (Fn-Down arrow)
Go to the page: Ctrl-g
Move up: Alt-Left arrow
Move down: Alt-Right arrow
Set to prior level: Alt-Up arrow
Set to next level: Alt-Down arrow
Move to the next heading: Ctrl-F6 or long press “next” button
Move to the previous heading: Ctrl-F5 or long press “previous” button
Move to the last heading: Ctrl-F8
Move to the first heading: Ctrl-F7
Check the currently-reading level and heading: Ctrl-w
Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Ctrl-n
Find heading: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Scan heading: Ctrl-n
Read heading: Ctrl-w
Set mark at current position: Ctrl-m
Move to the next mark: N
Move to the previous mark: V
Delete mark: Del
565
17.7 Organizer
17.7.1 Address Manager
17.7.1.1 Move keys for adding an address or in the menu
Move to the previous field or menu item: Left arrow
Move to the next field or menu item: Right arrow
Move to the first field or menu item: Home
Move to the last field or menu item: End
17.7.1.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List
Move to the previous field: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next field: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the first field: Home
Move to the last field: End ey
Move to the previous record: Up arrow
Move to the next record: Down arrow
Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last record: Ctrl-End
Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow
Move to next same field different record: Right arrow
17.7.1.3 Hot keys for the Commands
Add address: Ctrl-n
Find address: Ctrl-f
Modify address: Ctrl-m
Delete address: Del
Select all: Ctrl-a
Save as a file: Alt-s
566
Print address: Ctrl-p
Backup address list: Ctrl-u
Restore address list: Ctrl-r
Setting backup option: Ctrl-e
Setting add/searching address fields: Ctrl-o
17.7.1.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Cancel: ESC
Exit: Alt-F4
17.7.2 Schedule Manager
17.7.2.1 Hot keys for the commands
Move to the next field: Tab
Move to the previous field: Shift-tab
Add schedule: Ctrl-n
Modify schedule: Ctrl-m
Delete schedule: Del
Delete all Schedule: Control-Alt-q
Alarm option: Ctrl-o
Backup schedule: Ctrl-u
Restore schedule: Ctrl-r
Set backup option: Ctrl-e
Save schedule as file: Alt-s
Print schedule: Ctrl-p
17.7.2.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List
3. Move from an appointment to another in the schedule list
Move to the previous a in the same day: Up arrow
Move to the next appointment in the same day: Down arrow
Move to the first appointment in the same day: Home
567
Move to the last appointment in the same day: End
4. Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments
registered
Move to the previous schedule: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next schedule: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the first schedule: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last schedule: Ctrl-End
17.7.3 Database Manager
Add record: Ctrl-n
Search records: Ctrl-f
Table manager: Ctrl-t
List of records found: Ctrl-r
Setting backup option: Ctrl-e
Backup database: Ctrl-u
Restore database: Ctrl-o
5. Move by controls
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
6. Move in a list box
Move to the next list item: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to the previous list item: Up arrow or up scroll button
7. Select your answer in the prompt box
Move to the next answer: Space or Down arrow
Move to the previous answer: Backspace or Up arrow
8. Move in the “list of records found”
Move to the next record: Down arrow or down scroll button
Move to the previous record: Up arrow or up scroll button
Move to the last record: Ctrl-End
Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home
Move to the next field: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the previous field: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the last field: End
568
Move to the first field: Home
Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow
Move to next same field different record: Right arrow
17.8 Web tools
17.8.1 Web Browser
17.8.1.1 Hot keys for Menu command
Open URL: Ctrl-l
Open: Ctrl-o
Save as: Alt-s
Information: Alt-Enter
Exit: Alt-F4
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g
Read from cursor to end: Fn-Enter
Auto scroll: Up scroll button-down scroll button
Start selection: Ctrl-b
Copy: Ctrl-c
Add to clipboard: Ctrl-Insert
Copy URL: Alt-d
Copy link: Alt-l
Go to the home page: Alt-h
Go to the previous page: Alt-Left arrow
Go to the next page: Alt-Right arrow
Go to previous heading: Alt-b or Ctrl-F3
Go to next heading: Alt-f or Ctrl-F4
Go to previous text: Ctrl-F5
Go to next text: Ctrl-F6
569
Go to previous visited link: Alt-Shift-v
Go to next visited link: Alt-v
Refresh: Ctrl-r
Open the history list: Ctrl-h
Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Fn-i
Find: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Links list: Alt-i
RSS Feed List: Control-J
Set current as your home page: Ctrl-s
Add to favorites: Alt-a
Favorites list: Ctrl-l
Options setting: Alt-o
17.8.1.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser
Turn up the volume: Shift-Up arrow
Turn down the volume: Shift-Down arrow
Play: play button of the front panel
Stop: stop button of the front panel
17.8.1.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages
Move between controls
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab
Move to the next control: Tab
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Down arrow
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Up arrow
Moving to the form
Move to the previous form: Ctrl-F1
Move to the next form: Ctrl-F2
570
Table navigation hot keys
Move to the previous table: Ctrl-F7
Move to the next table: Ctrl-F8
Move to the previous cell: Ctrl-Shift-Left arrow
Move to the next cell: Ctrl-Shift-Right arrow
Move to the upper cell: Ctrl-Shift-Up arrow
Move to the lower cell: Ctrl-Shift-Down arrow
Read current cell: Ctrl-Shift-c
Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Up arrow
Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Down arrow
Check the current position: Fn-s
Move to frame
Move to the previous frame: Ctrl-F9
Move to the next frame: Ctrl-F10
Read the current line: Fn-r
17.8.2 Quick browser
File Menu Commands:
Open URL: Control-u 1-3-6)
Exit: Alt-F 4
Read Menu Commands:
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-G
Read from cursor to end: FN-Enter
Edit Menu Commands:
Open Select Text Window: Control-S
Start selection: Control-B
Copy: Contol-C
Add to clipboard: Control-P
Go To Menu Commands:
571
Go to home page: Alt-H
Go to the previous page: Alt-Left arrow
Go to the next page: Alt-Right arrow
Go to previous heading: Control-F3
Go to next heading: Control-F 4
Go to previous text: Control-"F5
Go to next text: Control-F6
Refresh: Control-R
Open the history list: Control-H
Find: Control-F
Find again: F3
Favorites Menu Commands:
Set current as your home page: Alt-S
Add to favorites: Alt-A
Favorites list: Control-T
Page Navigation Commands:
Move between controls
Move to the previous control: Control-Left arrow
Move to the next control: Control-Right arrow
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Down arrow
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Up arrow
Moving to form fields
Move to the previous form field: Control-F1
Move to the next form field: Control-F2
17.8.3 Google Search
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to previous control: Shift-Tab
Choose category or search result: Up or Down Arrow
Open search result in Browser: Enter
Exit Google Search: Alt-F4
572
17.8.4 RSS reader
Receive new Headlines: Control-R
Import OPML: Control-O
Export OPML: Control-S
Download Podcast: Control-D
Read whole Description: Control-L
Options: Alt-O
From Category List:
Insert Category: Control-I
Delete Category: Delete
Modify Category: Control-M
From Feed List:
Search for Feeds: Control-N
Insert Feed: Control-i
Delete Feed: Delete
Modify Feed: Control-M
Move Feed: Alt-V
17.9 Social Networking
17.9.1 Twitter
Sign Out: Ctrl-g
Personal Information: Ctrl-I
Save Current Timeline: Alt-s
Home Timeline: Ctrl-h
User Timeline: Ctrl-u
Current User Timeline: Alt-u
Mention Timeline: Ctrl-m
Retweet Of Me: Alt-o
573
List Timeline: Alt-P
Favorite Timeline: Control-L
Tweet: Ctrl-t
Remove Tweet: Delete
Retweet: Ctrl-e
Reply: Ctrl-y
Add To Favorite: Ctrl-v
Favorite List: Ctrl-l
Send Direct Message: Ctrl-s
Sent Direct Message: Alt-m
Received Direct Message: Alt-r
Follow User: Alt-a
Following: Alt-l
Followers: Alt-e
Global Search: Ctrl-f
User Search: Alt-f
Search Word List: Alt-w
Find Tweets from the Current Timeline: Control-Alt-F
Find Again Tweets from Current Timeline: Alt-Shift-F
List Manager: Control-P
Add User to List: Control-K
List User View: Control-J
List View in Current Tweet: F3
Next List: Ctrl-n
Refresh: Ctrl-r
Exit: Alt-F4
Escape: Esc key
Move to the next tweet: Down arrow
Move to the previous tweet: Up arrow
Move to the first tweet on the refreshing list: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last tweet on the refreshing list: Ctrl-End
Move to the previous 32 list: Fn-Un arrow
Move to the next 32 list: Fn-Down arrow
574
Move to the previous list: Up arrow
Move to the next list: Down arrow
Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-Home/Home
Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-End/End
Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
17.9.2 Google talk
File Menu Commands
Sign out: Ctrl-l
Export Contact Lists: Alt-x
Import Contact Lists: Alt-i
Exit: Alt-F4
Action Menu Commands
Start Chat: Ctrl-s
Start Voice Chat: Ctrl-h
Send File: Alt-f
Move to Recently Chat: Ctrl-t
Manage Chat: Ctrl-m
Contact Menu Commands
Add Contact: Alt-q
Delete Contact: Delete
Block Contact: Alt-b
Manage Block List: Alt-m
Contact Information: Ctrl-i
Manage Contact List: Ctrl-p
Option Menu Commands
My Status Options: Alt-u
Action Options: Alt-a
Alert Options: Alt-o
Path Options: Alt-p
575
Chat Window Menus
File Menu Commands
Save Conversation: Alt-s
Close Chat: Alt-F4
Edit Menu Commands
Cut: Ctrl-x
Copy: Ctrl-c
Delete: Delete
Paste: Ctrl-v
Start Selection: Ctrl-b
Select All: Ctrl-a
Find: Ctrl-f
Find Again: F3
Action Menu Commands
Start Chat: Ctrl-s
Start Voice Chat: Ctrl-h
Stop Voice Chat: Esc key
Send File: Alt-f
View Contact List: Ctrl-t
Manage Chat: Ctrl-m
Move to Previous Chat: Ctrl-Shift-Tab
Move to Next Chat: Ctrl-Tab
The move keys in Google Talk.
Move to the previous Contents: Up arrow
Move to the next Contents: Down arrow
Move to the previous 32-items of the Contents: Fn-Up arrow
Move to the next 32-item of the Contents: Fn-Down arrow
Move to the first item of the Contents: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last item of the Contents: Ctrl-End
576
17.9.3 Sense Chat
Chat Window Commands:
Move among the controls: Tab and Shift-Tab
Send message: type message and press Enter
Move among messages in history: Up and Down arrows
Move to top of list: Control-Home
Move to bottom of message list: Control-end
Save conversation: Control-s
Save conversation under different name: Alt-s
Start selection: Control-b
Select all: Control-a
Copy: Control-c
Paste: Control-v
Exit Sense Chat: Alt-F4
Sense Chat Options commands:
Move among the Controls: Tab and shift-Tab
Move among items in the settings list: Up and down arrows
Change the value of a setting: Space
Save settings: Enter
Cancel saving settings: Escape or Alt-F4
17.10 Extras
17.10.1 BookShare Download
Move to next control: Tab
Move to previous control: Shift-Tab
Move to Search box: Control-e
Move to search results: Control-l
Open download dialog: Control-d
Open Options dialog: Control-o
Exit: Alt-F4
577
17.10.2 Google Maps
Search commands:
Search for address: Control-f
Advanced POI Search: Alt-f
Set as Start Position: Alt-s
Set as Destination: Alt-d
Set as Waypoint: Alt-w
Add to user POI: Alt-u
Area selection: Alt-z
Set Position Commands:
Add current position to user POI: Enter
Set GPS position as Start position: s
Current position information: Control-i
User POI Commands:
Manage user POI’s: Control-u
Save user POI’s: Alt-s
Load user POI’s: Control-l
Route Commands:
Create route: Control-r
View traveled route: Control-h
Initialize route: Alt-i
Route information: Control-c
Direction and distance to destination: Control-d
Options Commands:
Notice and distance to destination: Control-o
GPS settings: Control-g
17.10.3 Drop box
Open User Information dialog box: Control-I
Search for File: Control-F
578
File Download: Control-T
File Upload: Control-U
File Link: Control-L
Copy: Control-C
Cut to Clipboard: Control-X
Paste: Control-V
Delete: Delete
New Folder: Control-N
Set Login Information: Alt-I
17.11 Games
17.11.1 Sense Dice Game
Execute Dice Game: I
Move to next item: Down arrow
Move to previous item: Up arrow
Move to the first item: Control-Home
Move to the last item: Control-End
Roll dice: Enter
Exit: Alt-F4
17.11.2 Sense Brain Game
Execute Sense Brain game: A
Move to next item: Down Arrow
Move to previous item: Up arrow
Move to the first item: Control-Home
Move to the last item: Control-End
Execute game: Enter
Exit: Alt-F4
17.12 Utilities
17.12.1 Calculator
579
Calculator initialize: Alt-c
Delete numbers or operators: Backspace
General functions: Ctrl-g
Plus: +
Minus: Division: /
Multiplication: *
Percent: %
Power: ^
Over : FN-/
Square Root: Ctrl-q
Decimal Point: .
Left Parenthesis: (
Right Parenthesis: )
PI: Ctrl-p
Exp: Ctrl-e
Recall Items: Alt-r
Delete all saved items: Ctrl-d
Save Items: Alt-s
Trigonometric Function: Ctrl-s
Sine: Ctrl-s, s
Arc Sine: Ctrl-s, a
Hyperbolic Sine: Ctrl-s, h
Cosine: Ctrl-c, c
Arc Cosine: Ctrl-c, a
Hyperbolic Cosine: Ctrl-c, h
Tangent: Ctrl-t, t
Arc Tangent: Ctrl-t, a
Hyperbolic Tangent: Ctrl-t, h
Logarithm Function: Ctrl-l
Natural Logarithm: Ctrl-l, e
580
Common Logar